Csi 2018 Mechanical Division 15

SECTION 15050
BASIC PIPING MATERIALS AND METHODS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION:
A. The Work under this Section consists of furnishing and installing all basic
mechanical piping, fittings, specialties and related items as indicated on the
drawings and as specified herein.
B. Materials and methods included in this Section are of a general nature, and apply
to most systems and installations in this Contract. Refer to individual system
Section for materials and methods specifically required for the respective systems.
1.2 REFERENCES:
A. SASO - Saudi Arabian Standards Organization:
SASO 14 Pipes for Potable Water of Unplasticized Plastic

(UPVC).
SASO 15 Method of Testing of Pipes for Potable Water of

Unplasticized Plastic (UPVC)
SASO 39 Mechanical testing of welded joints
SASO 1397 Unplasticized polyvinyl chloride (UPVC) pipe fittings

for buried/drains and sewers.
SASO 1400 Methods of test for unplasticized polyvinyl chloride

(UPVC) pipe fittings for soil waste and vent inside
buildings
SASO 1011 Black and hot-dipped galvanized steel pipes suitable

for screwing
SASO 1012 Test methods of welded plain-end steel tubes and

pipes for general use.
SASO 1013 Welded plain-end steel tubes and pipes for general
use
B. ASTM - American Society for Testing and Materials
ASTM A 53 Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black, and Hot-Dipped,

Zinc-Coated (Galvanized), Welded and Seamless.
ASTM A 181 Carbon Steel Forgings for General Purpose Piping.
ASTM B 32 Specification for Solder Metal.
ASTM D 1784 Rigid Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Compounds and

Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Compounds.
15050-1 Basic Piping Materials

ASTM D 1785 Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe Schedules 40,
80 and 120.
ASTM D 2000 Rubber Products in Automotive Applications.
ASTM D 2564 Solvent Cement for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic

Pipe and Fittings.
ASTM D 2665 Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Drain, Waste and

Vent Pipe and Fittings.
ASTM D 2846 Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Hot-

and Cold-Water Distribution System.
ASTM F 438 Socket-Type Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC)

Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 40.

ASTM F 441 Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Pipe

and Fittings, Schedules 40 and 80.
ASTM F 493 Solvent Cements for Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride)

(CPVC) Plastic Pipe and Fittings.
C. ASME - American Society of Mechanical Engineers
ASME A40.8 National Plumbing Code.
SECTION IX Welded and Brazing and Pressure Vessel qualifications

Code.
1.3 SUBMITTALS:
A. Shop Drawings: Submit for fabricated specialties, indicating details of fabrication,

materials and method of support.
B. Product Data and Samples: Submit manufacturer's technical product data,

including installation instructions, and dimensioned drawings for each type of
manufactured piping specialty. Submit samples as may be required by the
Engineer.
C. Welders' Certificates: Submit for all welders on the Project as per AWS
Standards.
1.4 TRANSPORTATION, HANDLING AND STORAGE:
Refer to individual Section of the Specifications.

1.5 WARRANTY:
Refer to individual Section of the Specifications.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A. All the components and installations shall comply with the applicable seismic
requirements of project location as shown on structural drawings. All equipments
shall be suitable for altitude of the site.
For further requirements, refer to individual Section of the Specifications.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PIPES AND FITTINGS:
A. Refer to the individual piping system Sections of DIVISION 15 for specifications on

piping and fittings relative to that particular system.
2.2 JOINING MATERIALS:
A. Welding Materials: Comply with Section II, Part C, ASME Boiler and Pressure
Vessel Code for welding materials appropriate for the wall thickness and chemical
analysis of the pipe being welded.
B. Brazing Materials: Comply with SFA-5.8, Section II, ASME Boiler and Pressure
Vessel Code for brazing filler metal materials appropriate for the materials being
joined.
C. Soldering Materials: Refer to individual piping system specifications for solder

appropriate for the materials being joined.
D. Gaskets for Flanged Joints: Gasket material shall be full-faced for cast iron
flanges and raised-face for steel flanges. Select materials to suit the service of the
piping system in which installed and which conform to their respective ANSI
Standard (A21.11, B16.20, or B16.21). Provide materials that will not be
detrimentally affected by the chemical and thermal conditions of the fluid being
carried.
2.3 VALVES:
A. Refer to Section 15100 - VALVES.
2.4 PIPING SPECIALTIES:
A. General: Provide factory-fabricated piping specialties recommended by

manufacturer for use in service indicated. Provide piping specialties of types and
pressure ratings indicated for each service, or if not indicated, provide proper
selection as determined by the Contractor to comply with installation requirements.
Provide sizes as indicated, and connections, which properly mate with pipe, tube,
and equipment connections. Where more than one type is indicated, selection is
Contractor's option.

B. Escutcheons: Chrome-plated, stamped steel, hinged, split ring escutcheon, with
set screw. Inside diameter shall closely fit pipe outside diameter or outside of pipe
insulation where pipes insulated. Outside diameter shall completely cover the
opening in floors, walls, or ceilings.
C. Unions:
1. Unions in steel pipe shall be malleable iron and have female pattern, brass
to iron seat and ground joint. Unions shall be rated for minimum of 1.0
MPa water working pressure.
2. Unions in copper piping shall be cast bronze, female pattern, brass to

brass seat and ground joint, threaded end connections for 50 mm and
smaller, and flanged connections for larger than 50 mm. Unions shall be
rated for minimum of 1.0 Mpa water working pressure.
D. Dielectric Unions: Provide dielectric unions with appropriate end connections for
the pipe materials in which installed (screwed, soldered, or flanged), which
effectively isolate dissimilar piping materials, prevent galvanic action and stop
corrosion.
E. Dielectric Waterway Fittings: Electroplated steel or brass nipple, with an inert and
non-corrosive, thermoplastic lining.
F. Strainers: Strainers shall be Y-pattern having ASTM B61 bronze body, full line
size of connecting piping, with ends matching piping system materials. Strainers
shall have Type 304 stainless steel screens and tapped blow-off plug. Strainers
shall be rated for 1.5 Mpa water working pressure.
G. Sleeves:
1. Sheet Metal Sleeves: 10 gage, galvanized sheet metal, round tube closed
with welded longitudinal joint.
2. Steel Pipe Sleeves: Schedule 40 galvanized, welded steel pipe, ASTM A53,
Grade A.
3. Plastic Pipe Sleeves: Schedule 80 PVC plastic pipe.
H. Mechanical Sleeve Seals: Modular mechanical type, consisting of interlocking

synthetic rubber links shaped to continuously fill annular space between pipe and
sleeve, connected with bolts and pressure plates which cause rubber sealing
elements to expand when tightened, providing watertight seal and electrical
insulation.
2.5 MOTORS:
A. Motors of 10 HP and above shall have Star Delta starter and below 10 HP shall be
direct online. This will be applicable to the motors for all mechanical equipment
including Chillers, pumps, air handling units, fan coils units and others.

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL PIPING AND INSTALLATIONS:
A. General: Installation instructions contained in this Section pertain to all systems,

unless specified otherwise. For specific requirements for installation of each
system, refer to individual Specification Sections.
B. Preparation: Ream ends of pipes and tubes, and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends
of steel pipe. Remove scales, slag, dirt, and debris for both inside and outside of
piping and fittings before assembly.
C. General Locations and Arrangements: Drawings indicate the general location and
arrangement of the piping systems. Location and arrangement of piping layout
take into consideration pipe sizing and friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and
other design considerations. So far as practical, install piping as indicated. Refer
to individual system specifications for requirements for coordination drawing
submittals.
D. Piping:
1. Conceal all pipe installations in walls, pipe chases, utility spaces, above
ceilings, below grade or floors, unless indicated otherwise.
2. Install piping free of sags or bends and with ample space between piping to
permit proper insulation applications.
3. Install piping at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal or bent

piping will not be permitted.
4. Install piping tight to slabs, beams, joists, etc. where possible and such that
any removable ceiling panels may be removed for access above ceilings.
Install access panels at locations approved by Engineer.
5. Protect all piping from entrance of dirt or other foreign materials during the
construction period. At the completion of the Project, all dirt and foreign
matter in piping shall be removed, completely.
6. Install pipe sleeve seals at all foundation and wall penetrations. Piping
passing through exterior building walls shall be caulked weather tight. Seal
pipe penetrations of fire barriers (walls and slab) using fire barrier
penetration seals as specified in relevant Section of the Specifications or as
approved by the Engineer.
7. All water piping shall have drain valves at low points in mains, risers, and
branch lines; and same shall be provided with 19 mm drain valve with
threaded hose connection.
8. Water piping shall be securely anchored to insure proper direction of

expansion and contraction.
9. Anchor piping to ensure proper direction of expansion and contraction. Install

expansion loops and joints as indicated or required. For further requirements
refer to Section 15125 - PIPE EXPANSION JOINTS.

10. Verify existing grades, inverts, and topographic conditions prior to any
trenching, excavation, or installations. In the event existing conditions
prevent installation in accordance with contract documents, immediately
notify the Engineer for a decision.
11. Pitch horizontal lines to low points to provide for complete drainage of
system. Minimum pitch, unless otherwise shown, shall be 20 mm in 10 m.
Install drain valves at low points and air vents at high points and at locations
where air may pocket in water lines.
12. Piping shall be cut accurately to measurements established at the site,

worked into place without springing or forcing, and shall clear all windows,
doors and other openings. Cutting or other weakening of building structure
to facilitate piping installation is not permitted. Install to permit free
expansion and contraction without damage.
13. Swing joints at run outs to equipment and risers. Provide expansion joints at
all other points for flexible piping systems.
14. Drain piping from pump glands, relief valves, condensate drain pans, etc.
shall discharge into open sight drains, floor drains, or other acceptable
collection points terminating the drain line with a 50 mm minimum air gap
and plain end (unthreaded) pipe.
15. Provide necessary temporary connections, valves, oversize flushing

connections, pumps, etc. as required to properly clean and test systems.
16. Coordinate piping installations with duct work, structure, lighting, electrical
conduit, and all other materials and equipment.
17. Use flexible pipe connectors for all inlet and discharge connections to pumps
(except in-line pumps) and other vibration producing equipment.
18. Provide flanges on all valves, apparatus and equipment having 60 mm and
larger connections.
19. Reduction in pipe sizes (except in drainage pipe) shall be made using
eccentric reducer couplings installed with the level side up on water piping
and condensate piping and level side down on all stems.
20. Provide unions adjacent to each valve, and at the final connection to each
piece of equipment and/or plumbing fixture having 50 mm and smaller
connections and where otherwise indicated. Unions are not required at
flanged devices.
21. Wherever wells are installed in piping for thermometers, pressure gages,
probes, etc., pipe diameter shall be increased by one pipe size to
accommodate same.
22. Provide water hammer arrestors at the top of all hot and cold domestic water
risers, at the end of each water header in utility spaces, at the end of each
branch line, and at the top of the branches to batteries of two or more
fixtures. Provide shock absorbers at each solenoid valve or piece of
equipment that has a quick closing type valve.

23. Do not run piping over electrical equipment such as transformers, switchgear
and panel boards. Extend the clear space above those equipment to the
structural ceiling above except in high bay areas where the structural ceiling
is more than 7600 mm above the floor. Dropped, suspended and similar
ceilings not indicated to add strength to the building structure are not
considered structural ceilings.
24. Do not run piping or ductwork within 914 mm clear space in front of electrical
equipment panels, starters, etc. as required by NFPA 70.
25. Install packed mechanical equipment that has factory mounted electrical
panels or starters in compliance with clear space required by NFPA 70.
26. Do not install piping and ductwork of any kind in electrical rooms,
telecommunication rooms or elevator equipment rooms.
E. Valves and Specialties:
1. Valves shall be installed where indicated and relief valves shall have a
relieving capacity of not less than the rated output of the equipment. Relief
shall be piped full size, without shutoff devices in line, to the nearest floor
drain.
2. Strainers shall be installed on the supply side of each control valve, pressure
reducing and regulating valves, solenoid valves and else where as indicated.
3. Floor plans and flow diagrams are intended to be complimentary since not all
valves can be shown on the floor plans. In general, flow diagrams and
details show valve arrangement and floor plans show locations when
possible.
4. Use fittings for all changes in direction and all branch connections and
take-offs from mains. Use commercially available fittings for all changes in
direction and branch connections having changes in pipe sizes of one pipe
size.
5. All water valves which regulate flow shall be globe, plug, ball or butterfly
type, and valves that are either "open" or "closed" shall be gate, ball or
butterfly type as indicated.
6. Provide shut-off valves in each supply branch from mains and at each supply
connection to equipment; provide a balance valve at each return branch to
mains and at each return connection from equipment. For shut-off valves 50
mm (2 inch) and smaller, use gate or ball valves; for shut-off valves 63 mm
(2-1/2 inch) and larger, use gate or butterfly valves.
7. Check Valves: Install swing check valves on discharge side of each pump
and elsewhere as indicated on drawings.
8. Connect dissimilar piping materials using dielectric unions or insulating

flanges.
F. Hangers and Supports:
1. Refer to Section 15140 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS.

G. Joints:
1. Any leaking joints shall be completely disassembled and remade with new
materials.
2. Ends of all copper tubing and the interior of the cup of the fitting shall be
thoroughly cleaned and polished prior to the application of the flux and
solder. The flux shall not be used as a substitute for proper joint preparation.
3. All pipes shall be carefully reamed. Threaded pipes shall have full length
clean cut threads.
4. All sockets and pipe ends of PVC shall be cleaned, solvent cement applied
for full circumferential cover.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 15100
VALVES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION:
A. The Work under this Section consists of furnishing and installing all the valves
required for the mechanical systems as shown on the drawings and specified
herein.
1.2 REFERENCES:
A. ANSI - American National Standards Institute
ANSI B2.1 Pipe Threads.
ANSI B16.1 Cast Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings, Class 25, 125,
250, and 800.
ANSI B16.11 Forged Steel Fittings, Socket-Welding and Threaded.
ANSI B16.18 Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings.
ANSI B16.24 Bronze Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings, Class 150 and
300.
ANSI B16.25 Butt Welding Ends.
ANSI/AWWA C606 Grooved and Shouldered Joints.
B. BSI - British Standards Institute
BS 21 Pipe Threads for Tubes and Fittings.
BS 143 Malleable Cast Iron and Cast Copper Alloy threaded Pipe
Fittings.
BS 1560 Steel Pipe Flanges.
BS 4504 Flanges and Bolting for Pipes, Valves and Fittings.
BS 5154 Copper alloy Globe, Globe Stop, and Check, Check and Gate
valves
ASME B31.1 Power Piping - ASME Code for Pressure Piping.
ASME B31.9 Building Services Piping - ASME Code for Pressure Piping.
15100-1 Valves
D. ASTM - American Society for Testing and Materials
ASTM A 126 Specification for Gray Iron Castings for Valves, Flanges, and
Pipe Fittings.
ASTM B 62 Specification for Composition Bronze or Ounce Metal

Castings.
ASTM A 536 Specification for Ductile Iron Castings.
E. DIN - Deutsches Institut fur Normung e. V.
All Relevant Standards
1.3 SUBMITTALS:
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data, including body

material, valve design, pressure and temperature classification, end connection
details, seating materials, trim material and arrangement, dimensions and required
clearances, and installation instructions.
B. Grooved joint couplings and fittings shall be shown on drawings and product
submittals, and shall be specifically identified with the applicable style or series
designation.
A. Deliver materials to job site in manufacturer's original new and unopened

packages bearing manufacturer's name and label. Ensure valves are dry and
internally protected against rust and corrosion. Protect valve ends against damage
to threads, flange faces, and weld-end preps.
B. Protect valves from weather. Store valves indoors. Maintain valve temperature
higher than ambient dew point temperature. Support valve off the ground or
pavement in watertight enclosures.
C. Use a sling to handle valves whose size requires handling by crane or lift. Rig
valves to avoid damage to exposed valve parts. Do not use handwheels or stems
as lifting or rigging points.
A. Comply with the requirements ASME B31.9 and applicable Standards of MSS.
B. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of valves,

of types and sizes required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in
similar service for not less than 5 years, and shall be subject to approval of
Engineer.
C. All grooved joint couplings, fittings, valves, and specialties shall be the products of
a single manufacturer. Grooving tools shall be of the same manufacturer as the
grooved components.
15100-2 Valves
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 VALVE FEATURES:
A. General: Comply with ASME B31.9 for building services piping, and ASME B31.1
for power piping.
B. Valve Design: Valves shall have rising stem, or rising outside screw and yoke
stems; except, non-rising stem valves may be used where headroom prevents full
extension of rising stems.
C. Pressure and Temperature Ratings: As scheduled and required to suit system

pressures and temperatures.
D. Sizes: Unless otherwise indicated, provide valves of same size as upstream pipe
size.
E. Operators: Provide the following special operator features, where required:
1. Handwheels: Fastened to valve stem, for valves other than quarter-turn.
2. Lever Handle: On quarter-turn valves 150 mm and smaller, except for plug
valves. Provide one wrench for every 10 plug valves.
3. Chain-Wheel Operators: For valves 63.5 mm and larger, install 1829 mm or

higher above finished floor elevation. Extend chains to an elevation of 1524
mm above finished floor elevation.
F. Extended Stems: Where insulation is indicated, provide extended stems arranged

to receive insulation.
G. Bypass and Drain Connections: Comply with MSS SP-45 bypass and drain
connections.
H. End Connections: As specified in the individual valve specifications.
1. Threads: Comply with ANSI B2.1.
2. Flanges: Comply with ANSI B16.1 for cast iron, ANSI B16.5 for steel, and
ANSI B16.24 for bronze valves.
3. Solder-Joint: Comply with ANSI B16.18.
4. Grooved Ends: Comply with ANSI/AWWA C606.
I. Valves (for underground installation) with dia. 150 mm and below shall be
telescopic type. Valves (for underground installation) with dia. 200 mm and above
shall be installed in a concrete pit. Valves with dia. 300 mm and above shall be
gear operated. Butterfly valve can be used as a substitute for gate valve if
2.2 GATE VALVES:
A. Gate Valves 50.8 mm and Smaller: MSS SP-80; Class 125, body and bonnet of
ASTM B 62 cast bronze, threaded or solder ends, solid disc, copper-silicon alloy
stem, brass packing gland, Teflon-impregnated packing, and malleable iron
15100-3 Valves
handwheel. Class 150 valves meeting the above shall be used where pressure
requires.
Gate Valves 50.8 mm and smaller: DIN 3352, PN 16 bar pressure rating,
maximum temperature 200 ºC. Body, Bonnet and wedge made of bronze Rg5
according to DIN 1705 standard, Non-rising stem made of brass resistant to
dezincification, Stem seal with Teflon impregnated gland packing, threads
according to DIN 2999 standard.
B. Gate Valves 63.5 mm and Larger: MSS SP-70; Class 125 iron body, bronze
mounted, with body and bonnet conforming to ASTM A 126 Class B, flanged
ends, and Teflon impregnated packing and two-piece backing gland assembly.
Gate Valves 63.5 mm and Up to 300: Shall Be Resilient Seated, Design

According To BS 5163 or DIN 3202 Part-4, Body & Bonnet Made of Ductile Cast
Iron Acc. To DIN EN 1563. Non Rising Stem Made Of St. Steel 1.4021 to
EN10088-1 Or SS304. Disc Made of Ductile Cast Iron acc. to DIN EN 1563
Vulcanized with EPDM rubber, Valves shall have a clear water way equal to the
full nominal diameter of the valve. Valves shall be opened by turning counter
clockwise. Valves shall be suitable for under ground and above ground
applications. Valves shall be suitable for potable water, fire and chilled water
applications. Valves shall be operated with hand wheel, extension spindle and
0
tee key. Flanged ends to BS4504 or DIN2501, PN16, Max Water Temp. 70 C,
double packing, replicable with valve under pressure. External and Internal 200–
300 microns fusion bonded epoxy.
Gate Valves 350 mm and Larger shall be metal seated, design according To BS
5163 / DIN 3352. Body & Bonnet and Disc made of Ductile Cast Iron according
to DIN EN 1563. Body & Disc Seat Rings shall be made of St. Steel 1.4021 to
EN10088-1 or SS304. Non Rising Stem made of St. Steel 1.4021 to EN10088-1
or SS304. Valves shall have a clear water way equal to the full nominal diameter
of the valve. Valves shall be opened by turning counter clockwise. Valves size
350mm up to 500 mm shall be operated with Hand Wheel, Mechanical Gear
Box. Valves size 600mm and larger shall be operated with mechanical gear box
with position indicator or electric actuator and shall be equipped with By Pass
Circuit . Valves shall be suitable for potable water, chilled water applications.
0
Flanged ends to BS4504 or DIN2501, PN16, Max Water Temp. 120 C, External
and internal fusion bonded epoxy powder coated with minimum 200-300 Micron.
2.3 CHECK VALVES:
A. Swing Check Valves 50.8 mm and Smaller: MSS SP-80; Class 125, cast bronze
body and cap conforming to ASTM B62, horizontal swing, Y-pattern, with a bronze
disc, and having threaded or solder ends. Valve shall be capable of being
re-ground while the valve remains in the line. Class 150 valves meeting the above
specifications may be used where pressure requires or Class 125 are not
available.
Swing Check Valve 50.8 mm and Smaller: DIN 2999, PN16 bar pressure rating,
maximum temperature 100 ºC. Horizontal and vertical installation, body and
cover made of bronze Rg5, inner parts made of brass resistant to de-
zincification, threaded ends connection.
B. Swing Check Valves 63.5 mm and Larger: MSS SP-71; Class 125, cast iron body
and bolted cap conforming to ASTM A126, Class B, horizontal swing, with a
bronze disc or cast iron disc with bronze disc ring, and flanged ends. Valve shall
15100-4 Valves
be capable of being refitted while the valve remains in the line.
1. MSS SP-71: Class 125, cast iron body and bolted cap conforming to ASTM
A 126, class B, horizontal swing, with a bronze disc or cast iron disc with
bronze disc ring and flanged ends. Valve shall be capable of being refitted
while the valve remains in the line.
2. 300 psi CWP, ductile iron body and coupled cap conforming to ASTM A536,
Grade 65-45-12, horizontal swing with a stainless steel disc with EPDM seat
and grooved ends.
Resilient Seat Swing Check Valve 63.5 mm and up to 300 mm: BS 5153, PN 16,
Ductile Iron GGG-50 Body and Bolted Cover, Horizontal Swing, Renewable Seat
and Disc made from Ductile Iron GGG-50 vulcanized with NBR rubber. Flanged
Ends, External and Internal FBE coated to the min. 200 – 300 micron thick.
Check Valve 350 mm and Larger: Shall be tilting disc, design according to
DIN3202 F4 / ISO 5752-14. Valves shall be suitable for potable and chilled water
applications with replaceable sealing rubber in the disc. Body and disc made of
Ductile Cast Iron according to DIN EN 1563. Maximum temperature 70 ºC.
Stem, body seat, bolts are made of St. Steel 1.4021 to EN10088-1 Or SS304.
Horizontal and vertical installation. Valve shall be equipped with external lever
with counter weight. Valve shall be equipped with damping device when required
to eliminate hammering phenomena. Flanged ends to BS4504/DIN2501, 16 bar
pressure rating. External and internal 200 – 300 microns fusion bonded epoxy
coated.
C. Spring Actuated Check Valves 63.5 mm and Larger:
1. 63.5 and 75 mm: 300 psi CWP, ductile iron body, aluminum bronze single
disc, with PPS (polyphenylene sulfide) coated body and seat, with disc
mounted seal, stainless steel spring and shaft, and grooved ends.
2. 100 mm to 300 mm: 300 psi CWP, ductile iron body, elastomer coated
ductile iron single disc with welded-in nickel seat, enamel coated body, with
stainless steel spring and shaft and grooved ends.
3. 350mm to 600 mm: 230 psi CWP, ductile iron body, stainless steel dual
disc(s) with EPDM seat and stainless steel spring and shaft, and AGS
grooved ends.
2.4 GLOBE VALVES:
A. Globe Valves 50.8 mm and Smaller: MSS SP-80; Class 125, body and screwed
bonnet of ASTM B 62 cast bronze, threaded or solder ends, brass or replaceable
composition disc, copper-silicon alloy stem, brass packing gland, Teflon
impregnated packing, and malleable iron handwheel. Class 150 valves meeting
the above shall be used where pressure requires.
Globe Valve 50.8 mm and smaller: DIN 3844 series 2. PN16 bar rating at
maximum temperature 150 ºC. Body made of bronze Rg5 according to DIN
1705 standard, brass bonnet, Teflon impregnated gland packing, strong metal
handwheel, disc with PTFE (Teflon) seal.
B. Globe Valves 63.5 mm and Larger: MSS SP-85; Class 125 iron body and bolted
bonnet conforming to ASTM A 126, Class B, outside screw and yoke, bronze
15100-5 Valves
mounted, flanged ends, and Teflon impregnated packing and 2-piece backing
gland assembly.
Globe Valve 63.5 mm and larger: BS 5152, Body and Bonnet Shall be made
from High Grade Ductile Iron GGG-50, Rising Stem, Bolted Bonnet and
renewable seat, External and Internal FBE Coated with min. 200 – 300 micron
thick. Flanged ends to BS 4504 – PN16.
2.5 FOOT VALVES:
A. Manufacturer's standard models, of sizes as shown on the drawings. Operating

range pressure shall be up to 34 bar. Non-sticking, brass spool poppet design.
Heavy red brass body for maximum strength and No.6 perforation. Brass screen
strainer and rubber facing for use with water.
2.6 FLUSH VALVES:
A. Automatic flush (drain) valves shall be installed at the end of each lateral in which
bubblers are installed and where indicated.
2.7 FLOAT VALVES:
A. For water level in water system with working pressure up to 1.5 kp/cm² (1.5 bar)
shall be bronze gate provided with bronze rod and bronze float ball attachment.
The ball shall be made of copper.
2.8 DRAIN VALVES
A. Drain Valves: Bronze body and angle hose end valve with composition discs and
rising stems; working pressure shall be 10.5 kg/cm².
2.9 BUTTERFLY VALVES
A. Butterfly Valves 63.5 mm to 300 mm: Rated for 300 psi CWP working pressure,
one-piece construction, grooved end ductile iron body with extended neck
conforming to ASTM A536, electroless-nickel coated ductile iron, aluminum-
bronze, or stainless steel disc, pressure responsive elastomer seat, and stainless
steel stem. (Stem shall be offset from the disc centerline to provide full 360-degree
circumferential seating.)
B. Butterfly Valves 350 mm to 600 mm: Rated for 300 psi CWP working pressure,
one-piece construction, AGS grooved end ductile iron body with extended neck
conforming to ASTM A536, PPS (polyphenylene sulfide) coated ductile iron disc
with disc mounted elastomer seal, and stainless steel stem. (Stem shall be offset
from the disc centerline to provide full 360-degree circumferential seating.).
2.10 BALL VALVES
A. Ball Valves 25.4 mm and Smaller: Rated for 150 psi saturated steam pressure,
400 psi WOG pressure; 2-piece construction, bronze body conforming to ASTM B
62, standard (or regular) port, chrome-plated brass ball, replaceable Teflon or TFE
seats and seals, blowout proof stem, and vinyl-covered steel handle.
Provide solder ends for condenser water, chilled water, and domestic hot and cold
water service; threaded ends for heating hot water and low pressure steam.
15100-6 Valves
B. Ball Valves 31.75 mm to 50.8 mm: Rated for 150 psi saturated steam pressure,
400 psi WOG pressure; 3-piece construction, bronze body conforming to ASTM B
62, conventional port, chrome-plated brass ball, replaceable Teflon or TFE seats
and seals, blowout proof stem, and vinyl-covered steel handle. Valve ends as
above.
Ball Valve 50 mm and smaller: According to DIN 3357 standard, Two piece
body, unplated bronze, full flow, ball made of chrome plated brass with PTFE
seats, brass stem with double viton O-ring seal, Lever handle made of
Galvanized steel with plastic coating, PN16 rating at maximum 150 ºC.
2.11 PLUG VALVES
A. Plug Valves 50.8 mm and Smaller: 150 psi WOG, bronze body, straightaway
pattern, square head, threaded ends.
B. Plug Valves 63.5 mm and Larger: MSS SP-78; 175 psi, lubricated plug type,
semi-steel body, single gland, wrench operated, flanged ends.
2.12 PRESSURE REDUCING VALVES
A. Pressure reducing valve of the size and type indicated shall be installed as shown
on drawings. The valve shall maintain a constant downstream pressure regardless
of varying pressures. It shall be hydraulically operated, pilot-controlled, diaphragm-
type globe valve. The main valve shall have a single removable seat and resilient
disc. The stem shall be guided at both ends by a bearing in the valve cover and an
integral bearing in the valve seat. No external packing glands are permitted and
there shall be no pistons operating main valve or any pilot controls.
B. The pilot control shall be a direct-acting, adjustable, spring-loaded, normally open

diaphragm valve designed to permit flow when controlled pressure is less than the
spring setting. The control system shall include a fixed orifice.
C. Pressure reducing valve shall have bronze/ ductile cast iron epoxy coated body,
stainless steel inner parts (seating, center guide) bronze v-port and disc valves.
Flange ISO PN16, down stream seating range: 1 is to 10 bar.
D. Two pressure gauges shall be provided, one at inlet and the other at the outlet.
E. A strainer shall be installed at the valve inlet.
2.13 TEMPERATURE CONTROL VALVES (15-20mm):
A. Contractor shall install balancing/temperature valves where indicated in drawings.

B. The valve shall consist of a dynamic, accessible, adjustable flow limiting device.
C. The housing shall be constructed of Forged Brass, rated at no less than 1600 kPa
static pressure at 100°C.
D. Pressure/temperature plugs for verifying accuracy of flow performance shall be
available for all valve sizes.
E. Flow regulation unit assembly shall be manufactured of polyoxymethylene with a
hydrogenared acrylonitrile-butadiene rubber or EPDM diaphragm and stainless
steel 18-8 spring.
F. Flow regulation unit shall be readily accessible, for change-out or maintenance.
G. Flow regulation unit shall be externally adjustable to 1 of 40 different flow rates
and shall be available in 3 different kPaD operational ranges; minimum range shall
be capable of being activated by minimum 17 kPaD; and shall be capable of
15100-7 Valves
controlling the flow within +/- 5% of rated flow or +/- 2% of maximum flow.
H. Identification tags shall be available for all valves; tags shall be indelibly market
with flow rate, color and dial setting.
I. Actuator shall provide a visual indication of the valve position.
J. The valve shall be closing when the actuator is not powered.
K. The valve shall withstand a shut off pressure of at least 400 lPa without internal
leaking.
L. The seat plug shall be manufactured of EPDM rubber.
M. The packaging box for sealing the stem shall be removable with the system in
operation, without allowing external leakage.
2.14 PRESSURE INDEPENDENT DYNAMIC CONTROL VALVES (15-40mm)
A. Contractor shall install pressure independent control valves where indicated in

drawings.
B. Valve shall be an electronic, dynamic, modulating, 2-way, pressure independent
control device.
C. Dynamic control valve shall accurately control flow, independent of system
pressure fluctuation.
D. Maximum flow setting shall be adjustable to 41 different settings within the range
of the valve size.
E. Valve actuator shall be rated to IP 40.
F. Actuator shall be driven by 24V or 230V AC voltage, and shall depending on
actuator choice accept 0-10V DC or 3-Point floating electrical control signal.
G. Actuator shall use full span and provide full authority.
H. Actuator shall have visible indication of stroke position.
I. Manually override to either fully closed or fully open valve position shall be
possible.
J. Valve housing shall consist of forged brass, rated at no less than 2500 kPa static
pressure at 100°C.
K. Valve ball shall consist of chemically nickel plated brass.
L. Pressure/temperature plugs for verifying accuracy of flow performance shall be
M. Flow regulation unit shall consist of glass-reinforced polyphenylenesulfide with a
hydrogenerated acrylonitrile butadiene rubber diagram.
N. Flow regulation unit shall be externally adjustable to 1-41 different flow rates;
minimum range shall be capable of being activated by minimum 30 kPaD
operation ranges; and shall be capable of controlling the flow within +/- 10% of
rated flow.
2.15 PRESSURE INDEPENDENT DYNAMIC CONTROL VALVES (50-150 mm)
A. Contractor shall install pressure independent control valves where indicated in

drawings.
B. Valve shall be an electronic, dynamic, modulating, 2-way, pressure independent
control device.
C. Dynamic control valve shall accurately control flow, independent of system
pressure fluctuation.
D. Maximum flow setting shall be adjustable to 51 different settings within the range
of the valve size.
E. Valve actuator shall be rated to IP 44.
F. Actuator shall be driven by 24V DC motor, and shall accept 2-10V DC, 4-20 mA,
3-point floating or pulse with modulating electric signal and shall include resistor to
facilitate any of these signal.
G. Actuator shall be capable of providing 4-20 mA or 2-10V DC feedback signal to
the control system.
15100-8 Valves
H. Optional fail safe system to power valve to either open or closed position from any
position in case of power failure shall be available.
I. External LED- read-out of current valve position and maximum valve position
setting shall be standard.
J. Valve housing shall be constructed of Ductile Iron ASTM A536-65T, class 60-45-
18 rated at no less than 400 kPa static pressure and 120°C.
K. Dual pressure/temperature test plugs for verifying accuracy of flow performance
shall be standard on for all valve sizes.
L. Identification tags shall be available for all valves; tags shall be indelibly market
with part number, production date and pressure differential range. Tags shall be of
aluminum and in size no less then 50mm * 25mm
M. Flow Regulation unit shall consist of stainless steel and hydrogenated acrylonitrile
butadiene rubber and shall be capable of controlling the flow within +/- 5%
N. Flow regulation unit shall be accessible, for maintenance.
2.16 BALANCING VALVES (200-600mm):
A. Contractor shall install balancing/temperature valves where indicated in drawings.

B. The valve shall consist of a dynamic flow limiting device.
C. Valve housing shall consist of ductile iron ASTM A536-80 Class 60-40-18 or Grey
iron, class 20; shall be rated at 1400 kPa / 135°C.
D. Valve shall be permanently marked to show flow direction; shall have body tag to
indicate model number, flow rate and dP control range.
E. Sizes 400 mm and larger shall be provided with eyelet bolts for lifting.
F. Flow regulation cartridge assembly shall be precision ground, all AISI type 300
series stainless steel; shall be available in four kPaD control ranges; minimum
range shall be capable of being activated by less than 10 kPa; and shall be
capable of controlling the flow within +/- 5% of rated flow.
G. Pressure/temperature plugs for verifying accuracy of flow performance shall be
H. Identification tags shall be available for all valves; tags shall be indelibly marked
with flow rate, model number zone identification: Tags shall be 75mm * 75mm
aluminum. Size 150mm and larger tag shall be provided as standard.
2.17 STRAINERS:
A. Strainers 50.8 mm and Smaller: Pressure rating PN16 bar at maximum

temperature to 150 ºC. Body made of Bronze Rg5 according to DIN 1705
standard, bonnet made of brass, wire basket made of stainless chromium steel,
perforation mesh size as approved, strainers shall be suitable for horizontal or
vertical installation.
B. Strainers 63.5 mm and Larger: Shall be constructed of high grade Ductile Iron
GGG-50 with blow-off connections and self aligning cylindrical screens,
Strainers shall be suitable for Horizontal and vertical installation. Below outlets
are tapped FIPT. Stainless Steel Screen shall be standard sizes with
perforations as approved. Strainers shall be flanged ends to BS 4504, PN16,
External and Internal FBE coated min. 200 – 300 micron thick.
2.18 VALVE BOXES:
A. Shall be precast or of cast-in-place reinforced concrete with cast iron cover as

shown on the drawings. Concrete shall be Class 30 conforming to Section 03300 -
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE, 30 MPa compressive strength at 28 days, with
type V cement.
15100-9 Valves
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 VALVE INSTALLATION:
A. General Application: Use gate, ball and butterfly valves for shut-off duty; globe
and ball for throttling duty. Refer to drawings and piping system specification
sections for specific valve application and arrangement. Locate valves for easy
access and provide separate support where necessary.
B. Install valves and unions for each fixture and item of equipment in a manner to
allow equipment removal without system shut-down. Unions are not required on
flanged devices or in grooved piping systems.
C. Butterfly valves may be used in lieu of gate valves in applicable piping systems.
D. Install 3-valve bypass around each pressure reducing valve using throttling type
valves.
E. Install valves in horizontal piping with stem at or above the center of the pipe.
F. Swing check valves shall be installed in horizontal position with hinge pin level.
G. Solder, threaded, grooved and flanged connections shall be as per the approved
trade practice.
3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL:
A. Testing: After piping systems have been tested and put into service, but before
final adjusting and balancing, inspect each valve for leaks. Adjust or replace
packing to stop leaks; replace valve if leak persists.
END OF SECTION
15100-10 Valves
SECTION 15125
PIPE EXPANSION JOINTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION:
A. The Work shall consist of furnishing and installation of all pipe expansion joints as
required, or as shown on the drawings and specified herein.
1.2 REFERENCES:
A. EJMA - Expansion Joint Manufacturer's Association
EJMA Practical Guide to Expansion Joints.
EJMA Standards of expansion Joints.
1.3 SUBMITTALS:
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data, including installation

instructions for each type of expansion compensation product.
B. Shop Drawings: Submit manufacturer's assembly-type shop drawings for each

type of expansion compensation product, indicating dimensions, weights, required
clearances, and methods of assembly of components.
1.4 WARRANTY:
A. Submit written guarantee signed by the manufacturer and the Contractor,

agreeing to replace defective material or workmanship within 1 year of date of
substantial handing over.
A. EJMA Compliance: Construct expansion compensation products in accordance

with standards of the Expansion Joint Manufacturer's Association (EJMA).
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 EXPANSION CONTROL:
A. General: Absorb expansion in bends, swing joints, expansion joints, and offsets.
All piping mains, branches and run outs shall be installed to allow for free
expansion and contraction without developing leaks or undue stressing of pipe or
equipment.
2.2 BELLOW TYPE JOINTS:
A. General: Provide bellow type joints where indicated for piping systems, with
pressure/temperature ratings to suit intended service. Select joints to provide
200% absorption capacity of piping expansion between anchors. All expansion
joints shall be factory tested to 150% of maximum rated pressure for 12 minutes
15125-1 Pipe Expansion Joints

before shipment.
B. Rubber bellow type joints shall be peroxide cured EPDM throughout with
manufacturer’s standard tire cord reinforcement, single or double bellows as
applicable for the type of expansion joint. Expansion joints for copper pipes, 2” and
smaller shall have brass threaded ends, and 2-1/2” and larger shall have
interlocked ductile iron flanges. Expansion joints for steel pipes, 2” and smaller
shall have ductile iron threaded ends, and 2-1/2” and larger shall have interlocked
ductile iron flanges. Contractor shall provided calculations for the selected
expansion joints for the approval of Engineer before ordering the material.
2.3 PIPE ALIGNMENT GUIDES:
A. General: Provide pipe alignment guides on both sides of Expansion joints, and
elsewhere as indicated. Construct with 4-finger spider traveling inside guiding
sleeve, with provisions for anchoring to building substrate.
B. Guides shall be constructed with steel base and T-bar with teflon or graphite
plates bonded to the steel components to allow minimum static friction and self-
lubrication for unlimited movement. Units shall be factory painted. Guide base
shall be welded to the pipe.
2.4 EXPANSION JOINTS:
A. General: Provide expansion joints where indicated or required for piping system,
with materials as mentioned above for bellow type joints.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION:
A. Examine areas and conditions under which expansion compensation products are
to be installed. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected in manner acceptable for installation.
3.2 EXPANSION JOINTS:
A. General: Install expansion joints where indicated, and elsewhere as determined

by the Contractor for adequate expansion of installed piping system. Install in
accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Provide pipe anchors and pipe
alignment guides as indicated, and in accordance with manufacturer's
recommendations. Align units properly to avoid end loading and torsional stress.
3.3 EXPANSION COMPENSATION FOR RISERS AND TERMINALS:
A. General: Unless otherwise indicated, install connection between piping mains and
risers with at least 5 pipe fittings including tee in main; install connections between
piping risers and terminal units with at least 4 pipe fittings including tee in riser.
END OF SECTION
15125-2 Pipe Expansion Joints

SECTION 15140
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION:
A. The Work shall consist of furnishing and installation of all hangers and supports
for mechanical piping, ductwork and equipment as indicated on the drawings
and as specified herein.
1.2 REFERENCES:
A. ASTM - American Society for Testing and Materials
ASTM A 36 Specification for Structural steel.
ASTM A 780 Practice for Repair of Hot-Dipped Galvanized Coatings.
B. MSS - Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fitting Industry

Inc.
MSS SP-58 Pipe Hangers and support - Materials Design and

Manufacturer.
MSS SP-69 Pipe Hangers and support - Section and Application.
MSS SP-77 Guide Lines for Pipe support contractual relationship.
MSS SP-89 Pipe Hangers and Support - Fabrication and Installation.
MSS SP90 Guide Lines and Terminology for Pipe Hangers and
Supports.
ASME B31 Pressure Piping Code.
ASME B31.9 Building Service Piping.
1.3 SUBMITTALS:
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data, including installation

instructions for each type of support and anchor.
A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of

supports and anchors, of types and sizes required, whose products have been in
satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years.
B. Pipe hangers and supports for fire protection system shall comply with NFPA
requirements.
15140-1 Hangers & Supports

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 VERTICAL PIPING CLAMPS:
A. General: Provide factory-fabricated vertical piping clamps to suit vertical piping

systems and to exactly fit pipe size of bare pipe. Provide copper-plated clamps for
copper piping systems. Extension clamps shall be of carbon steel.
2.2 HORIZONTAL PIPING/DUCT HANGERS AND SUPPORTS:
A. General: Provide factory-fabricated horizontal piping/duct hangers and supports

to suit horizontal piping systems. Use only one type by one manufacturer for each
piping/duct service. Select size of hangers and supports to exactly fit pipe/duct
size, and to exactly fit around piping/duct insulation with saddle or shield for
insulated piping/duct. Provide copper-plated hangers and supports for copper
piping system.
B. Clevis Hangers: Carbon steel with vertical adjustment feature.
C. Swivel Rings: Malleable iron with adjustable hangers.
D. Wrought Rings: Carbon steel with adjustment feature.
E. Concrete Inserts: Inserts shall be of malleable iron body and nut with recessed
sides to accommodate reinforcing rods and lateral adjustments. Inserts shall have
25 mm maximum body with width between reinforcing bars in ribs.
F. Expansion Shields: Expansion shields shall be provided for rod hanger fasteners
with steel shell sand expander plugs and for concrete fasteners.
G. Eye Rods: Eye rods shall have welded eyes with left or right hand thread as
required.
H. Tube Straps: Copper-plated steel for copper tubing for pipe sizes up to and
including 25 mm diameter, with securing holes.
I. Beam Clamps: Malleable iron jaw with steel nut and bolt, steel hook rod with nut
and spring washer.
J. C-Clamps: Malleable iron clamps, with hardened steel cup point set screw
retainer lip and lock nut.
K. Toggle Bolts: Cast iron with rod coupling attachment.
L. Expansion Bolts: 10 mm x 150 mm.
M. Hanger Rods: Galvanized carbon steel, threaded at bottom and top, as follows:
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Pipe Size Rod Size
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------
50 mm and smaller 10 mm
63 mm to 90 mm 13 mm
100 mm and 127 mm 16 mm
150 mm to 150 mm 19 mm
300 mm 25 mm
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------

N. Hanger Rod Schedule
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Maximum Allowable
Pipe Size Spacing
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------
25 mm 2130 mm
32 mm 2440 mm
38 mm 2740 mm
50 mm 3050 mm
62 mm 3350 mm
75 mm 3660 mm
100 mm 4270 mm
125 mm 4880 mm
150 mm 5180 mm
200 mm 5790 mm
250 mm 6710 mm
300 mm 7010 mm
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. For trapeze hangers, take spacing of smallest pipe on trapeze. The spacing
shown on the schedule is maximum spacing pipe will span. The hanger
supports and structural elements of the building shall be checked for load
support. Spacing may have to be reduced to lighten load on certain hanger
supports.
O. Recommended Hanger Sizes for Rectangular Ducts:
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Longest Round Strap Trapeze Maximum
Dimension Hangers Hangers Shelf Spacing
Of Duct Angles
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
up thru 450 ga.8 wire 25mm x 1.6mm 25x25x3mm 3050 mm
475-750 ga.8 wire 25mm x 1.6mm 25x25x3mm 3050 mm
775-1050 6 mm rod 25mm x 1.6mm 38x38x3mm 3050 mm
over 2425 10 mm rod 38mm x 1.6mm 50x50x6mm 2440 mm
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION:
A. General:
1. Hangers and supports shall be installed and spaced in accordance with the
requirements of the Uniform Plumbing Code.
2. All hangers, clamps, etc. shall be painted as required.
3. Dielectric spacers shall be provided between copper and steel hangers. In

lieu of dielectric spacers, coated hangers may be used.

B. Vertical Piping:
1. Vertical stacks, leaders and risers shall be supported at floor with extension
clamps attached to the pipes above floor with the extended arms of the
clamps resting on the floor.
2. Dielectric spacers shall be provided between copper tubing risers and steel
clamps, or plastic-coated riser clamps shall be used.
C. Suspended Piping:
1. Hangers on parallel piping shall be staggered and distributed to avoid

overloading. Threaded pipes, chains and perforated straps shall not be
acceptable. No piping shall be supported from duct work, conduit or other
piping.
2. Pipes shall be individually supported.
3. Trapeze hangers may be used where several pipes can be installed in

parallel and at same elevation. Piping shall be individually bolted to trapeze
with U-bolts.
4. Place hanger within 300 mm of each horizontal elbow.
5. Coordinate location of hangers with light fixtures as shown on electrical

drawings. Only hangers designed specifically for support of piping will be
used.
3.2 HORIZONTAL SPACING OF HANGERS:
A. Spacing of hangers shall conform to the requirements of the Uniform Plumbing

Code for each type of piping to be installed.
3.3 SUPPORT:
A. All piping shall be supported by hangers secured to structure.
B. Additional structural steel members shall be provided where required either to

accommodate hangers or distribute the load. Use C-clamps and beam clamps for
piping as required.
C. Piping runs shall be generally supported from hangers secured to cast-in-place

concrete inserts or expansion bolt shields.
D. Branch piping hanger supports may be field drilled into concrete using self-drilling
type expansion shields. Expansion shields shall not be cut or unduly displace
reinforcement.
E. Powder-driven fasteners shall not be used.
F. Piping at equipment, such as hot water tank, shall be supported independently so

that no weight will be supported by the equipment.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 15190
MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
A. The Work under this Section consists of furnishing and installing mechanical
identification as indicated on the drawings and as specified herein.
A. Codes and Standards: Comply with ANSI-A13.1 for lettering size, length of color
field, colors and viewing angles of identification devices.
1.3 SUBMITTALS:
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data and installation

instructions for each identification material and device required.
B. Samples: Submit samples of each color, lettering style and other graphic
representation required for each identification material or system.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS:
A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard products of categories and types

required for each application as referenced in DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL.
Where more than single type is specified for application, selection is Installer's
option, but provide single selection for each product category.
2.2 PAINTED IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS:
A. Stencils: Standard fiberboard stencils, prepared for required applications with letter
sizes generally complying with recommendations of ANSI A13.1 for piping and
similar applications, but not less than 32 mm high letters for ductwork and not less
than 19 mm high letters for access door signs and similar operational instructions.
B. Stencil Paint: Standard exterior type stenciling enamel; black, except as otherwise
indicated; either brushing grade or pressurized spray-can form and grade.
2.3 PLASTIC PIPE MARKERS:
A. Snap-On Type: Provide manufacturer's standard pre-printed, semi-rigid, snap-on,

color-coded pipe markers, complying with ANSI A13.1.
B. Pressure-Sensitive Type: Provide manufacturer's standard pre-printed vinyl pipe

markers, complying with ANSI A13.1.
15190-1 Mechanical Identification

C. Insulation: Furnish 25 mm thick molded fiberglass insulation with jacket for each
plastic pipe marker to be installed on uninsulated pipes subjected to fluid
o
temperatures of 52 C or greater. Cut length to extend 50 mm beyond each end of
plastic pipe marker.
D. Small Pipes: For external diameters less than 150 mm (including insulation if any),
provide full-band pipe markers, extending 360 degrees around pipe at each
location, fastened by one of the following methods:
1. Snap-on application of pre-tensioned semi-rigid plastic pipe marker.
2. Adhesive lap joint in pipe marker overlap.
3. Laminated or bonded application of pipe marker to pipe (or insulation).
4. Taped to pipe (or insulation) with color-coded plastic adhesive tape, not
less than 19 mm wide; full circle at both ends of pipe marker, tape lapped
38 mm.
E. Large Pipes: For external diameters of 150 mm and larger (including insulation if
any), provide either full-band or strip type pipe markers, but not narrower than 3
times letter height (and of required length), fastened by one of the following
methods:
1. Laminated or bonded application of pipe marker to pipe (or insulation).
2. Taped to pipe (or insulation) with color-coded plastic adhesive tape, not
less than 38 mm wide; full circle at both ends of pipe marker, tape lapped
75 mm.
3. Strapped-to-pipe (or insulation) application of semi-rigid type, with

manufacturer's standard stainless steel bands.
F. Lettering: Manufacturer standard preprinted nomenclature which best describes

piping system in each instance, as selected by Engineer in cases of variance with
name as shown or specified.
G. Arrows: Print each pipe marker with arrows indicating direction of flow, either
integrally with piping system service lettering (to accommodate both directions) or
as separate unit of plastic.
2.4 PLASTIC DUCT MARKERS:
A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard laminated plastic, color coded duct

markers. Conform to the following color code:
Green : Cold air

Yellow : Hot air
Yellow/Green : Supply air
Blue : Exhaust, outside, return, and mixed air
For hazardous exhausts, use color and design recommended by ANSI A13.1.
B. Nomenclature: Include direction of air flow, duct service (supply, return, exhaust,
etc.), duct origin (from), duct destination (to) and design cmh.

2.5 PLASTIC TAPE:
A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard color-coded pressure-sensitive (self-

adhesive) vinyl tape, not less than 3 mils thick.
B. Width: Provide 38 mm wide tape markers on pipes with outside diameters

(including insulation, if any) of less than 150 mm, 63 mm wide tape for larger
pipes.
C. Color: Comply with ANSI A13.1, except where another color selection is indicated.
2.6 UNDERGROUND-TYPE PLASTIC LINE MARKERS:
A. General: Manufacturer's standard permanent, bright-colored, continuous-printed

plastic tape, intended for direct-burial service; not less than 150 mm wide x 4 mils
thick. Provide tape with printing which most accurately indicates type of service of
buried pipe.
2.7 VALVE TAGS:
A. Brass Valve Tags: Provide 19-gage polished brass valve tags with stamp-
engraved piping system abbreviation in 6 mm high letters and sequenced valve
numbers 12 mm high, and with 4 mm hole for fastener. Provide 38 mm diameter
tags, except as otherwise indicated.
B. Plastic Valve Tags: Provide manufacturer's standard solid plastic valve tags with
printed enamel lettering, with piping system abbreviation in approximately 4.7 mm
high letters and sequenced valve numbers approximately 9 mm high, and with 4
mm hole for fastener. Provide size, shape and color combination as required for
each piping system.
C. Valve Tag Fasteners: Provide manufacturer's standard solid brass chain (wire link
or beaded type), or solid brass S-hooks of the sizes required for proper
attachment of tags to valves, and manufactured specifically for that purpose.
D. Access Panel Markers: Provide manufacturer's standard 1.5 mm thick engraved

plastic laminate access panel markers, with abbreviations and numbers
corresponding to concealed valve. Include 3 mm center hole to allow attachment.
2.8 LETTERING AND GRAPHICS:
A. General: Coordinate names, abbreviations and other designations used in

mechanical identification work, with corresponding designations shown. Provide
numbers, lettering and wording as indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, as
recommended by manufacturers or as required for proper identification and
operation/maintenance of mechanical systems and equipment.

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS:
A. Coordination: Where identification is to be applied to surfaces which require

insulation, painting or other covering or finish, including valve tags in finished
mechanical spaces, install identification after completion of covering and painting.
Install identification prior to installation of acoustical ceilings and similar removable
concealment.
3.2 DUCTWORK IDENTIFICATION:
A. General: Identify air supply, return, exhaust, intake and relief ductwork with duct
markers; or provide stenciled signs and arrows, showing ductwork service and
direction of flow, in black or white (whichever provides most contrast with ductwork
color).
B. Location: In each space where ductwork is exposed, or concealed only by

removable ceiling system, locate signs near points where ductwork originates or
continues into concealed enclosures (shaft, underground or similar concealment),
and at 15 m spacings along exposed runs.
C. Access Doors: Provide duct markers or stenciled signs on each access door in
ductwork and housings, indicating purpose of access (to what equipment) and
other maintenance and operating instructions, and appropriate safety and
procedural information.
D. Concealed Doors: Where access doors are concealed above acoustical ceilings or
similar concealment, plasticized tags may be installed for identification in lieu of
specified signs, at Installer's option.
3.3 PIPING SYSTEM IDENTIFICATION:
A. General: Install pipemarkers of one of the following types on each system

indicated to receive identification, and include arrows to show normal direction of
flow:
1. Stenciled markers, including color-coded background band or rectangle,

and contrasting lettering of black or white. Extend color band or rectangle
50 mm beyond ends of lettering.
2. Plastic pipe markers, with application system as indicated. Install on pipe

insulation segment where required for hot non-insulated pipes.
3. Stenciled markers, black or white for best contrast, wherever continuous

color-coded painting of piping is provided.
B. Locate pipe markers and color bands as follows wherever piping is exposed to
view in occupied spaces, machine rooms, accessible maintenance spaces (shafts,
tunnels, plenums) and exterior non-concealed locations:
1. Near each valve and control device.
2. Near each branch, excluding short take-offs for fixtures and terminal units;
mark each pipe at branch, where there could be question of flow pattern.

3. Near locations where pipes pass through walls or floors/ceilings, or enter
non-accessible enclosures.
4. At access doors, manholes and similar access points which permit view of
concealed piping.
5. Near major equipment items and other points of origination and

termination.
6. Spaced intermediately at maximum spacing of 15 m along each piping run,

except reduce spacing to 7.5 m in congested areas of piping and
equipment.
7. On piping above removable acoustical ceilings, except omit intermediately

spaced markers.
3.4 UNDERGROUND PIPING IDENTIFICATION:
A. General: During backfilling of each exterior underground piping systems, install

continuous underground-type plastic line-marker, located directly over buried line
at 150 mm to 200 mm below finished grade. Where multiple small lines re-buried
in common trench and do not exceed overall width of 406 mm, install single line
marker.
3.5 VALVE IDENTIFICATION:
A. General: Provide valve tag on every valve, cock and control device in each piping
system; exclude check valves, valves within factory-fabricated equipment units,
plumbing fixtures faucets, convenience and lawn-watering hose bibs, and shut-off
valves at plumbing fixtures, HVAC terminal devices and similar rough-in
connections of end-use fixtures and units.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 15240
VIBRATION ISOLATION AND NOISE CONTROL
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION:
A. The Work under this Section consists of furnishing and installation of all
mechanical sound and vibration control as indicated on the drawings and as
specified herein.
1.2 REFERENCES:
A. ASHRAE - American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning

Engineers' Inc.
ASHRAE HVAC Applications Handbook, 2011 Chapter of "Sound

and Vibration Control".
B. ASTM - American Society for Testing and Materials.
ASTM E 447 Measuring Acoustic and airflow Performance of Duct liner

and Prefabricated Silencers.
1.3 SUBMITTALS:
A. Vibration Isolator: Submit for review, selection data of each point showing
disturbing frequency, weight distribution and calculated static deflection.
B. Flexible Connections: List of pressure rating of each unit together with line
pressure and all applicable physical data such as type of ends.
C. Silencers: Manufacturer's construction and performance details.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 VIBRATION ISOLATORS:
A. General
1. Mechanical equipment, where required, shall be provided with vibration

isolation devices to isolate the mechanical equipment from the building
structure.
2. The Contractor shall be responsible for sizing all isolators to be installed. All
isolator devices shall be selected for uniform static deflections according to
the distribution of force and weight.
3. Whenever rotational speed is the cause of the disturbing frequency, the

lowest operation speed of the system to be isolated shall be used in
determining the isolator required.
15240-1 Vibration Isolation

4. Isolator selection shall result in uniform loading and deflection, even when
the equipment weight is not evenly distributed.
B. Isolators shall be free standing, with housing, stable springs with leveling facilities.
The spring shall be positioned with weld studs between a drilled and tapped load
top plate and steel bottom load plate. A thick ribbed neoprene pad shall be
bonded to the bottom plate.
C. Moving equipment such as fan coil units, and fans supported on hangers shall be
provided with kinetic spring hangers comprising of welded steel bracket/casing,
free-standing un-housed laterally stable steel spring with neoprene washer or
kinetic neoprene isolator incorporating a cast in tapped steel load plate to permit
bolting to supported equipment and a cast in drilled steel anchor baseplate.
Application shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendation
D. Centrifugal fans and motors shall be mounted on an integral structural steel base
with built-in adjustable motor slide rails with adequate rigidity to resist motor torque
and belt pull. The base shall be mounted on spring isolators.
E. AC equipment shall be mounted on spring isolators and floating concrete pad,

unless otherwise indicated.
F. All other equipment shall be mounted on pads in strict compliance with the
manufacturer’s instructions and recommendations.
2.2 FLEXIBLE PIPE CONNECTIONS:
A. Flexible hose shall be provided at all connections to pumps and any other rotating
equipment and other locations indicated on drawings. The connections shall be
manufactured from materials suitable for the operating temperatures and
pressures of the fluid it is conveying.
B. Flexible hose for rotating equipment shall be installed in a horizontal position and
parallel to the horizontal shafts of equipment side of the shut-off valves. An
anchor shall be installed in the piping system adjacent to the flexible connectors.
Flexible connections shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations.
C. Flexible hose shall be designed for an operating temperature of 232oC and for
working pressure of not less than 0.862 Mpa or 150% of the system operating
pressure whichever is greater.
D. Flexible metal connectors shall be stainless steel with stainless corrugated inner
tubing, outer shield of stainless wire braid with steel fixed flanges.
2.3 PIPE EXPANSION JOINT:
A. Pipe expansion joint shall be EPDM rubber, high duty, with single
corrosion-protected steel wire reinforced convolution with mild steel backing
flanges behind rubber raised face.
2.4 FOUNDATIONS FOR MACHINERY:
A. Unless otherwise indicated on the drawings, concrete sub-bases not less than 150
mm high shall be provided for all floor-mounted mechanical equipment.
Sub-bases shall rest on structural floor and shall be reinforced with steel rods and

interconnected with the floor reinforcing bars by tie bars hooked at both ends. A
minimum clearance of 50 mm shall be provided between sub-bases and all inertia
blocks, steel bases and steel saddles with equipment in operation.
B. Foundations for machines shall be a minimum of 30 MPa concrete with all

exposed surfaces steel trowelled smooth.
2.5 SOUND ATTENUATORS (SILENCERS):
A. The Contractor shall supply and install noise silencers in the supply and return air
ducting to ensure that the sound levels within the occupied area of the building
shall not exceed the required level.
B. All plant and equipment shall not cause these levels to be exceeded. The levels
specification shall be specially considered in the internal finishes and arrangement
of the ductwork, etc. to ensure no regenerated noise is introduced into the system.
C. Duct mounted sound traps shall be of the types and sizes required and shall be
installed as per Manufacturer's recommendations.
D. Purpose made silencers and sound absorbent materials shall be so design and
installed in the ductwork that they offer low resistance to air flow, have adequate
strength and cohesion to resist erosion by air flow and non-hygroscopic, non-
combustible and free from odor, rot, damp and vermin.
E. Silencers shall be constructed from galvanized steel sheet, not less than 1.00 mm
thick. splitters and lining shall be fitted with aerodynamically shaped leading and
trailing edges. Absorbent materials shall be faced with galvanized perforated metal
to prevent material breaking up.
F. The Contractor shall record acoustic rating, including dynamic insertion loss and
self-noise power level, for both forward flow (air and noise in same direction) and
reverse flow (air and noise in opposite direction) with an airflow of at least 10 m/s
face velocity.
G. Test units for airtightness at 200% of associated fan static pressure or 1500 Pa
static pressure, whichever greater.
H. The specified silencer performance shall be related to the stated sound spectrum.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL INSTALLATION
A. All vibration isolator, pads and silencers shall be installed in accordance with
manufacturer's direction.
B. Piping which connect to the equipment mounted on vibration isolator shall be

isolated by double rubber in shear or spring type pipe hangers.
C. Flexible hose shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s

recommendations. Prior to filling the system, the alignment and length shall be
checked. The piping installation shall be corrected if necessary and the flexible
hose replaced if damaged, at no cost to Owner.

3.2 INSTALLATION - MACHINERY
A. Isolation shall be stable during starting and stopping of equipment without any
transverse and eccentric movement of equipment that would damage or adversely
affect the equipment or attachment.
B. The installed vibration isolation system for each floor or ceiling mounted items of
equipment shall have a maximum lateral motion under equipment start-up and
shut down conditions of 6 mm. Motions in excess shall be restrained by approved
spring type mountings.
C. All electrical connections, drain connections, piping connections, etc., made to

equipment which rest on vibration isolators shall be properly isolated.
D. Isolation shall be selected for the lowest operating speed of equipment. Isolators
including springs, exposed to weather shall be hot-dipped, Galvanized after
fabrication. Isolators shall be selected and located to produce uniform loading and
deflection even if the equipment weight is not evenly distributed.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 15250
MECHANICAL INSULATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION:
A. The Work under this Section consists of furnishing and installation of all pipe, duct
and equipment insulation and accessories as indicated on the drawings and as
specified herein.
1.2 REFERENCES:
A. ASTM - American Society for Testing Materials
ASTM B 209 Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate.
ASTM C 547 Mineral Fiber Pipe Insulation.
ASTM C 552 Cellular Glass Thermal Insulation.
ASTM C 553 Mineral Fiber Blanket and Felt Insulation (Industrial Type).
ASTM C 612 Mineral Fiber Block and Board Thermal Insulation.
ASTM E 84 Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
ASTM E 96 Water Vapor Transmission of Materials.
B. FS - Federal Specification
FS HH-B-100B Barrier Material Vapor (Fire Retardant, Reinforced for Pipe

and Duct Insulations, Low Temperature).
FS HH-I-523C Insulation Block and Pipe Covering Thermal (Calcium

Silicate, For Temperatures up to 200oF).
FS HH-I-551E Insulation Block and Boards, Thermal Cellular Glass.
FS HH-I-558B Insulation, Blocks, Blankets, Felts, Sleeving (Pipe and Tube

Covering), and Pipe Fitting Covering, Thermal (Mineral
Fiber,
Industrial Type).
FF HH-I-1751/3A Insulation Sleeving, Thermal, Pipe Covering (Cellular

Glass).
FS SS-C-160A Cements, Insulation Thermal & Int. Am-1
FS WW-H-171D Hangers and Supports, Pipe.
15250-1 Mechanical Insulation

C. NFPA - National Fire Protection Association
NFPA 255 Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
D. UL - Underwriter's Laboratories
UL 723 Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building

Materials.
1.3 SUBMITTALS:

instructions for each type of mechanical insulation. Submit schedule showing
manufacturer's product number, K-value, thickness, and furnished accessories for
each mechanical system requiring insulation.
B. Samples: Submit manufacturer's sample of each piping, duct and equipment

insulation type required. Affix label to sample completely describing product.
C. Certificate of compliance.
A. Protect insulation against, dirt, water, chemicals and mechanical damage before,
during and after installation. Damage prior to final acceptance of work shall be
repaired or replaced at no additional cost.
1.5 WARRANTY:
A. Submit written guarantee signed by the manufacturer, and the contractor,

agreeing to replace defective material or workmanship within 1 year of date of
substantial handing over.
A. Flame/Smoke Ratings: Provide composite mechanical insulation (insulation,

jackets, coverings sealers, mastic and adhesives) with flame spread index of 25 or
less, and smoke developed index of 50 or less, as tested by ASTM E 84 (NFPA
255) method.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL:
A. All insulation systems, including jackets and adhesives, shall be fire rated with a
maximum permanent flame spread rating of 25 and a smoke developed rating of
50 as per ASTM E84. Insulation shall have a thermal conductivity rating (K-value)
of approximately 0.035 W/mK.
2.2 PIPE INSULATION:
A. Glass Fiber Pipe Insulation: Rigid preformed glass fiber insulation for hot water,
chilled water and refrigerant piping shall conform to ASTM C 547, Type I, 64 kg/m³
o o
density, thermal conductivity of 0.032 W/m C max. at 24 C, with factory-applied
and all-service vapor seal jacket, FS HH-B-100B, Type I, laminated aluminum foil

and glass cloth provided with self-sealing lap. Pipe insulation for hot water and
refrigerant piping shall be minimum 25 mm thick for pipe sizes up to and including
50 mm, 50 mm thick for pipe sizes over 50 mm or as shown on drawings.
Insulation thickness for chilled water piping shall be as shown on drawings. All
exposed piping shall have aluminum cladding
B. Condensate Drain Pipe Insulation: Foam rubber insulation, 20 mm thick, with

adhesive as specified by the manufacturer. Insulation shall be installed in strict
accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Circumferential butt joints
must be glued and vapor-sealed. Longitudinal sections shall be overlapped and
glued firmly at the butt edges.
C. Weatherproof Pipe Jackets: For external and exposed pipe work, provide 0.60
mm thick embossed aluminum cladding, with longitudinal seams and butt joint
strips with weatherproof mastic adhesive.
D. Piping Insulation Adhesive: Insulation and piping jacket adhesive, vapor barrier
coating and weatherproof mastic shall be of the type recommended by the
insulation manufacturer.
2.3 DUCT INSULATION:
A. Mineral-Fiber Board Thermal Insulation (Exposed to Weather Duct): Glass fibers

bonded with a thermosetting resin complying with ASTM C 612, Type IB, 48
kg/m³ density, thermal conductivity of 0.037 W/m oC max. at 24 oC, with factory-
applied Foil Reinforced Kraft (FRK) vapor barrier. Block or board type insulation
shall not be less than 50 mm thick. The thickness shall be reduced to 25 mm
where acoustic lining is used. Insulation of external exposed duct work shall be
covered with aluminum cladding.
B. Mineral-Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation (Indoor Duct): Glass fibers bonded with
a thermosetting resin complying with ASTM C 553, Type II, 24 kg/m³ density,
thermal conductivity of 0.036 W/m oC max. at 24 oC, with factory-applied Foil
Reinforced Kraft (FRK) vapor barrier. Flexible glass fiber blanket insulation shall
not be less than 25 mm thick.
C. Insulation for Flexible Vaporseal Duct: Glass fiber blanket, ASTM C 553, Type I,
16 kg/m³ density, minimum 38 mm nominal thickness. Insulation shall be sheathed
with a vapor barrier having a maximum permeability of 0.02 perm as per ASTM E
96.
D. Vapor Barrier: FS HH-B-100, Type I. Material shall be flame resistant and shall
not support mold growth.
E. Aluminum Cladding (Exposed Ductwork): ASTM B209, Temper H14, 0.6 mm,
either corrugated, embossed, smooth or equivalent.
F. Outside air intake ducts shall be insulated as supply air ducts.
G. Duct Liner Acoustical Insulation: Shall be semi-rigid glass fiber boards faced with
black woven glass fiber fabric (WGF) conforming to FS HH-I-545B, Type I, 24
kg/m³ density. Thermal conductivity to be 0.036 W/m oC max. at 24 oC. Lining shall
not be less than 25 mm thick; duct sizes indicated shall be increased to
compensate for the thickness of the lining.

H. Kitchen Exhaust Duct Insulation: Rockwool board insulation with aluminum foil
vapor barrier conforming to ASTM C 612, Type IB, not less than 100 kg/m³
density, minimum 50 mm thick .
2.4 EQUIPMENT INSULATION:
A. Insulation shall be the type and class as recommended by the manufacturer.

Insulation shall be faced or jacketed.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PIPING INSULATION
A. All insulation shall be applied by experienced personnel in accordance with the

manufacturer's instructions and current good practice.
B. All pipes to be insulated shall be inspected and cleaned before applying adhesive
and the insulation. All possible precautions shall be taken to protect work of other
trades including the use of protective covering. All equipment and material shall be
returned to its original new condition and appearance where damage occurs due
to omission of, or improper protection.
C. Non-flammable adhesive shall be applied over entire piping and insulation shall
then be applied over the adhesive. All joints shall be butted and sealed by
minimum 75 mm wide FRK type self adhesive tape. Name plates and stamping
shall not be covered by insulation.
D. All piping shall be tested, inspected and approved prior to application of insulation.
E. All piping whether or not specified to be insulated, in locations subject to

condensation shall be insulated and vapor sealed.
F. Piping or surfaces subject to condensation shall be insulated including vapor seal.
G. Unions, flanges or exposed fixture connections shall be insulated.
H. Insulation on pipes shall be continuous through sleeves.
I. Insulated pipe shall be protected from crushing at supports.
1. Pipe shall rest on a painted, hot rolled steel insulation protection saddle,
centered on the hanger.
2. Vapor barrier shall be continuous through hangers.
3. Pipe shall be covered at hanger with a section of white, rigid, hydrous

calcium silicate insulation or treated hard wood, wired on, of some thickness
as adjacent insulation.
4. Finish on insulation shall be canvas embedded in, coated and joined with
adjacent insulation jacket to form an unbroken vapor barrier.
J. Fastenings: Covering shall be fastened with aluminum bands at midpoint and at

ends of sections. Adhesive shall be applied on exposed risers to prevent slipping
and returning.

K. At butt ends of pipe or insulation, jacket material shall be pasted over exposed
ends and banded to give a neat and finished appearance. Exposed fiberglass
material shall not be permitted.
L. Insulation shall be provided on all circulated piping requiring insulation and "dead
leg" branches buried on masonry.
M. Pipe penetrations shall be designed so that a minimum opening remains after

installation. Such openings shall be effectively sealed to prevent passage of
rodents, vermin, fire, smoke and liquid. Where insulated pipe or duct passes
through such openings, provide for continuous insulation through the opening in
addition to sealing the open space.
N. Insulated piping outside or inside the building exposed to mechanical abuse from
normal maintenance equipment shall be provided with aluminum sealed jacket.
1. All sections and joints shall be lapped at least 25 mm aluminum strapping.
2. Elbows shall be molded on a mitered fibrous glass, aluminum jacketed as

supplied by the same manufacturer, of matching design to the straight run
jacket.
3. Provide easily removable aluminum jackets around valves and flanges.
O. All pipe insulation shall be applied in sectional form where required by the
Engineer. When the use of segmental form is necessary, segments shall be of
such construction as to fit properly the curved surfaces to which they are applied.
P. Provide thermal hanger shields at hanger points of insulated piping as approved.
Q. Where flame-retardant vapor barrier jacket is specified, either field applied

adhesive at laps or self-sealing laps shall be acceptable.
R. Seal piping joints with minimum 75 mm wide self adhesive FRK type tape.
S. All exposed piping shall be provided with aluminum cladding over the insulation
using sealant for joints and seams.
3.2 INSULATION OF PIPE FITTINGS AND ACCESSORIES
A. General: Insulate all sizes of fittings, unions, flanges, strainers, traps and valve
bodies with the same type of insulation as specified for the piping system and as
specified hereafter.
B. Piping Flange Insulation
1. On all pipe lines where flanged joints occur, install a short piece of covering
next or the flange on both sides of the joint, so that pieces may be removed
and the bolts taken out of the joint without disturbing the covering on the
remainder of the pipe line.
2 On pipe lines where the flanges are to be covered flange cover shall, where
possible, be made up of sectional pipe covering in two halves. For flanges
too large for sectional occurring, the covers shall be built in the field with a
wire mesh reinforcement to which the insulating material shall be firmly

fastened. The outside 13 mm of the flange covers shall be composed of
cement. These flange covers shall be composed of cement. These flange
covers shall also be made up in two halves. The thickness of the covering
on the edge and sides of the flange shall be at least equal to the thickness
of the pipe line covering.
3.1 APPLICATION OF DUCT INSULATION
A. General: Insulate all airconditioning supply and fresh air ductwork. The return
ducts shall be insulated where passing through a non-airconditioned area or
ceiling space not used as return air plenum. Only experienced workmen shall
install insulation. Insulation shall be installed as per insulation manufacturer's
instructions and SMACNA standards. All surfaces shall be tested, cleaned,
inspected and approved prior to the application of insulation. Work of other trades
shall be protected during insulation installation. Stick-clip, where utilized, shall be
applied on basis of 1 per square meter for all ducts with minimum dimension 550
mm or greater.
B. Ductwork requiring insulation shall be lagged as follows:
1. Non-flammable adhesive shall be applied over entire duct.
2. Insulation shall then be applied to adhesive.
3. All joints shall be butted and sealed by minimum 75 mm wide FRK type
self adhesive tape.
4. Insulation shall be cut at elbows and shaped to duct. All joints shall be
taped and secured with supplementary 10 gauge copper wire as required.
5. Corner metal angles shall be furnished and installed at all corners.
C. Insulation:
1. Non-flammable adhesive shall be applied over entire duct and flexible duct
insulation shall then be wrapped over adhesive.
2. All edges shall be butted and lapped.

3. Insulation shall be cut at elbow to match shape of duct and shall be secured
with supplementary 16 gauge copper wire or tape as required.
4. All ducting outside and inside the building exposed to mechanical abuse
from normal maintenance equipment shall be provided with aluminum
cladding over the insulation using sealant for joints and seams.
D. Flexible duct insulation shall be installed around all areas of registers, grilles and
diffusers to provide a continuous vapor barrier at all inlets and outlets.
3.2 APPLICATION OF EQUIPMENT INSULATION
A. Unless otherwise specified, insulation thickness of equipment shall be as per

manufacturer's standard.
B. All vapor jackets shall have joints overlapped (minimum 50 mm overlap sealed
with adhesive).

C. Vapor barrier jackets shall be applied with a continuous, unbroken vapor seal.
Hangers, supports, anchors, etc., that are secured directly to cold surfaces shall
be adequately insulated and vapor sealed to prevent condensation. All end
covers, access plates, handholes, etc., shall be removed for service without
disturbing the insulated equipment. Nameplates shall not be covered.
D. Insulation shall be tightly butted, with joints staggered, and secured with minimum
16 gauge wire or 12 mm x 380 mm galvanized steel bands on maximum 300 mm
centers for large areas. Welded studs, clips, or angles shall be provided as
requires for wires and bands.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 15300
FIRE PROTECTION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION:
A. The Work under this section shall include providing all materials, labors and plants
to furnish and install fire protection system as shown on the drawings and
specified herein.
1.2 REFERENCES:
A. SASO – Saudi Arabian Standards Organization
SASO 37 Steel carbon dioxide cartridges for fire extinguishers
SASO 38 Methods of test for steel carbon dioxide cartridges for fire
extinguishers
SASO 63 Fire extinguishers - Part 1: Steel portable carbon dioxide

fire extinguishers
SASO 64 Test methods for portable fire extinguishers
SASO 81 Fire extinguishers - part 2: Portable bromochlarodifluore-

methane fire extinguishers
SASO 125 Fire extinguishers - Part 4: Portable dry powder

extinguishers
SASO 314 Industrial safety and health regulations Part 2: Buildings -

sections 2.7, 2.8 and 2.9 - fire protection
SASO 418 Methods of testing mobile fire extinguishers
SASO 419 Fire extinguisher - Part 5: Mobile carbon dioxide fire

extinguishers
SASO 420 Fire extinguisher - Part 6: Mobile dry-powder

extinguishers.
SASO 594 Methods of testing fire extinguishing dry chemical powder

- Multipurpose phosphate
SASO 647 Fire extinguishing dry chemical powder - Multipurpose

phosphate.
SASO 859 Threaded steel pipes
SASO 986 Electrical installation of buildings - Part 4: Protection for

safety - Section (482): protection against fire.
15300-1 Fire Protection

B. SBC - Saudi Building Code
SBC 801 Fire Protection
C. ANSI - American National Standard Institute:
ANSI B1.20.1 Pipe Threads
ANSI B16.1 Cast Iron Flanges and Flanged Fittings class 25, 125, 250
and 800
ANSI B16.3 Malleable-Iron screwed Fittings 150 and 300 Pound
D. ASTM - American Society for Testing and Materials:
ASTM A 53 Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc Coated

(Galvanized), Welded and Seamless.
E. NFPA - National Fire Protection Association:
NFPA 10 Portable Fire Extinguishers
NFPA 13 Installation of Sprinkler Systems.
NFPA 14 Standpipe and Hose Systems.
NFPA 20 Standard for the Installation of Stationary Pumps for Fire

Protection.
NFPA 101 Life Safety Code.
NFPA 750 Standard on Water Mist Fire Protection Systems
NFPA 1961 Fire Hose.
NFPA 1963 Screw Threads and Gaskets for Fire Hose Connections.
F. UL - Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.
UL 299 Dry-Chemical Fire Extinguishers.
UL 711 Rating and Fire Testing of fire extinguishers.
G. UBC – Uniform Building Code.
Section 905 Smoke Control.
Section 906 Smoke and Heat Venting.
1.3 SUBMITTALS:
A. Material and equipment information: Shall include catalog cuts and technical data
for each component or device used in the system.
B. The contractor shall provide information outlining the operation and maintenance
procedures that will be required by Engineer.

C. Sequence of operation, electrical schematics and connection diagrams shall be
provided.
D. Shop Drawings: Shop drawings shall indicate locations, installation details and
operation details of all equipment associated with the fire protection systems.
E. Certification and Guarantees:
1. Manufacturer's Guarantees for all proprietary equipment in brochure
2. Certificate of Compliance.
3. Test Reports.
F. Operation and Maintenance Instructions:
1. For all proprietary equipment and assemblies
2. Valve Identification Brochure.
1.4 WARRANTY:
A. The Contractor shall furnish a written guarantee covering the satisfactory

operation of the fire protection system in all its parts for a period of one (1) year
after date of acceptance. During this period, the Contractor shall repair or replace
any defective work and pay for any repair or replacement costs.
A. All the work specified in this section shall be installed in accordance with the
applicable provisions of the following codes and standard:
1. Factory Mutual Laboratories (FM)
2. Underwriter's Laboratories (UL)
3. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Piping for fire hose cabinets and sprinkler system shall be black steel pipe,
seamless, conforming to ASTM A 53, Type S, Grade A or B, Schedule 40,
threaded end for 50 mm dia. and smaller pipes and roll grooved ends for 63 mm
and larger pipes.
Fittings for 50 mm dia. and smaller pipes shall be malleable iron threaded type
conforming to ANSI B16.3, Class 150.
Fittings for 63 mm dia. and larger pipes shall be cast ductile iron couplings
conforming to ASTM A-536, Grade 65-45-12. Fittings shall be provided with an
alkyd enamel finish. Gaskets shall be pressure-responsive synthetic rubber,
grade to suit the intended service, conforming to ASTM D-2000. Mechanical

Coupling bolts shall be zinc plated (ASTM B-633) heat treated carbon steel track
head conforming to ASTM A-449 and ASTM A-183, minimum tensile strength
110,000 psi (758450 kPa).
B. Concealed piping in masonry walls shall be protected against corrosion with tape
corrosion resistant wrapping approved by the Engineer. All exposed piping shall
be painted red with alkyd enamel paint complying with the requirements of Section
09900 - PAINTING.
2.2 SURFACE MOUNTED FIRE HOSE REEL CABINETS:
A. Fire hose reel cabinets shall be constructed of 20 gauge steel box, 20 gauge
tubular steel door with 18 gauge steel frame with a continuous steel hinge (brass
pin). Cabinets shall be complete with fire hose reel assembly with 25 mm dia
single 30 m long multiple ply synthetic rubber hose with red exterior mounted on
revolving steel drum, angle valve, cast brass fog nozzle and 10 Lbs. multi-purpose
dry chemical portable fire extinguisher, as mentioned below. Cabinets shall be
surface mounted type as shown on drawings. Exposed steel surfaces and all other
l components shall be powdered coated with electrostatically-applied thermally
fused re-coatable red polyester finish. Cabinet where required shall have break
glass vision panel or clear tempered safety glass door (full glass) as shown on
drawings with identifying. Fire hose reel assembly and all other components inside
cabinet shall be UL listed. Cabinets shall be of size as shown on drawings.
2.3 RECESSED MOUNTED FIRE HOSE REEL CABINETS:
A. Fire hose cabinets shall be constructed of 20 gauge steel box, 20 gauge tubular
steel door with 18 gauge steel frame with a continuous steel hinge (brass pin). Fire
hose cabinets shall be recessed trimless type as shown on drawings. Cabinets
shall be complete with fire hose reel assembly with 25 mm dia single 30 m long
multiple ply synthetic rubber hose with red exterior mounted on revolving steel
drum, angle valve, cast brass fog nozzle and 10 Lbs. multi-purpose dry chemical
portable fire extinguisher, as mentioned below. Cabinets shall be recess mounted
type as shown on drawings. Exposed steel surfaces and all other components
shall be powdered coated with electrostatically-applied thermally fused re-coatable
red polyester finish. Cabinet where required, shall have break glass vision panel or
clear tempered safety glass door (full glass) as shown on drawings with
identifying. Fire hose reel assembly and all other components inside cabinet shall
be UL listed. Cabinets shall be of size as shown on drawings.
2.4 RECESSED MOUNTED STAINLESS STEEL FIRE HOSE CABINETS:
A. Fire hose cabinets shall be constructed of 20 gauge steel box, 20 gauge tubular
stainless steel door with 18 gauge stainless steel frame with a continuous
stainless steel hinge. Fire hose cabinets shall be recessed trimless type as shown
on drawings. Cabinets shall be complete with 38 mm single fire hose rack
assembly with 30 m long linen hose, angle valve, cast brass fog nozzle and 10
Lbs. multi-purpose dry chemical portable fire extinguisher, as mentioned below.
Stainless steel surfaces shall have satin finish. Exposed steel surfaces and all
other all other components shall be powdered coated with electrostatically-applied
thermally fused re-coatable red polyester finish. Cabinet shall have break glass
vision panel or clear tempered safety glass door (full glass) as shown on drawings
with identifying lettering. Fire hose rack assembly and all other components inside
cabinet shall be UL listed. Cabinets shall be of size as shown on drawings.

2.5 MULTI-PURPOSE PORTABLE FIRE EXTINGUISHERS:
A. Multi-purpose portable fire extinguishers shall be of red enamel steel shell, SASO
64 and SASO 647 compliant, UL Listed, FM approved, 4.5 kg / 6 kg capacity,
Class A+B+C, multi-purpose dry chemical (Ammonium phosphate base) complete
with squeeze grip discharge horn, pressure gauge and wall-mounted bracket.
2.6 CARBON DIOXIDE PORTABLE FIRE EXTINGUISHERS:
A. Portable fire extinguishers shall be red glossy polyester-coated aluminum cylinder,

SASO 63 compliant, UL Listed, 4.5 kg / 6 kg capacity, carbon dioxide agent used
to provide protection against Class B and C fires, complete with squeeze grip,
discharge horn and wall-mounted bracket.
2.7 MULTI-PURPOSE MOBILE FIRE EXTINGUISHERS:
A. Multi-purpose wheeled fire extinguishers shall be red glossy polyester-coated steel

cylinder, SASO 418, SASO 419 and SASO 420 compliant, UL Listed, FM
approved, 50 kg capacity, Class A+B+C, multi-purpose dry chemical (Ammonium
phosphate base) complete with carriage and hose hanger assembly. Quick
release, non-kink hose (minimum 7.5 meters) with positive grip nozzle and semi-
pneumatic tires.
2.8 CARBON DIOXIDE MOBILE FIRE EXTINGUISHERS:
A. Carbon dioxide wheeled fire extinguishers shall be red glossy polyester-coated

steel cylinder, SASO 418, SASO 419 and SASO 420 compliant, UL Listed, FM
approved, 50 kg capacity, carbon dioxide agent used to provided protection
against Class B and C fires, complete with carriage and hose hanger assembly.
Quick release, non-kink hose (minimum 4.5 meters), rubber insulated horn and
handle, diffusion tip and safety release disc in discharge valve and semi-
pneumatic tires.
2.9 FLUSH FIRE DEPARTMENT CONNECTION:
A. Fire department connection shall be UL Listed, wall type, cast brass six-way inlet
body with drop clappers. Two polished brass 2-1/2 inch double female snoots with
rigid end N.P.T. x pin lug hose thread swivels, plugs and chains, having NH
standard threads, for the connection size as indicated or as specified in NFPA
1963, and conforming to the local Fire Department requirements. Unit shall have
wall escutcheon of polished cast brass, finish to match connections, with words
both in English and Arabic "AUTO SPRINKLER - FIRE DEPARTMENT
CONNECTION" in raised letters.
2.10 FREE-STANDING FIRE DEPARTMENT CONNECTION:
A. Fire department connection shall be UL Listed, free-standing, six-way inlet cast

brass body with clappers, chrome plated. Two polished brass 2-1/2 inch double
female snoots with rigid end N.P.T. x pin lug hose thread swivels, plugs and
chains, having NH standard threads, for the connection size as indicated or as
specified in NFPA 1963, and conforming to the local Fire Department
requirements. Unit shall have base plate of polished cast brass, finish to match
connections, with words both in English and Arabic "AUTO SPRINKLER - FIRE
DEPARTMENT CONNECTION" in raised letters.

2.11 FIRE HOSE VALVE (FHV):
A. Shall be UL Listed, FM approved suitable to be used as an auxiliary water supply

by the fire service. Shall be single outlet furnished with polished brass round plate
lettered WALL HYDRANT and female N.P.T. x male thread snoot with cap and
chain. Threads conforming to the local Fire Department requirements. Size shall
be 2-1/2 inch diameter.
2.12 FIRE HYDRANT
A. Refer to Section 02668 – WATER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM.
2.13 SPRINKLER SYSTEM:
A. Sprinkler Heads:
1. General: Automatic sprinkler heads shall be UL and ULC Listed and FM

approved, fusible element type. Sprinkler heads shall be with nominal 1/2
inch (12.7 mm) discharge orifice, 5.6 K-Factor, maximum working pressure
of 175 psi, and temperature rating of 93C for kitchen and 68C for other
areas. Sprinkler heads shall be located where shown on the drawings, and
shall be installed in accordance with NFPA 13 Standards.
2. Pendant Sprinkler Heads (Concealed): Shall be flush concealed sprinkler

with brass sprinkler head and 92 mm dia. colored cover plate projecting
maximum 4.76 mm below ceiling. Color of cover plate shall match the color
of ceiling in that area. Sprinkler absorbs heat through ceiling plate which is
secured to supporting ring by fusible alloy. At its rated temperature, the plate
falls away and exposes the sprinkler to the direct heat from fire. Heat melts
the fusible element, releasing water flow.
Concealed type sprinklers shall be used where shown on drawings.
3. Pendant Sprinkler Heads (Recessed): Shall be recessed pendent type

(adjustable), bright chrome, 2-3/8 inch length and 1-1/2 inch width (across
frame arms). Each sprinkler head shall be provided with adjustable chrome
plated recessed metal escutcheon, 3-1/4 inch dia; all nominal sizes. Fusible
alloy element is sealed into bronze center strut by a stainless steel ball.
When the alloy melts at its rated temperature, the ball is forced upward into
center strut, releasing the two ejectors and operating the sprinkler.
4. Upright Sprinkler Heads: Shall be bright chrome plated. Fusible alloy

element is sealed into bronze center strut by a stainless steel ball. When the
alloy melts at its rated temperature, the ball is forced upward into center
strut, releasing the two ejectors and operating the sprinkler.
5. Sidewall Sprinkler Heads: Shall be bright chrome, 2-3/8 inch length and 1-
1/2 inch width (across frame arms). Sprinkler head shall be designed with a
special deflector which causes most of water to be discharged to one side in
manufacturer's standard pattern. Fusible alloy element is sealed into bronze
center strut by a stainless steel ball. When the alloy melts at its rated
temperature, the ball is forced upward into center strut, releasing the two
ejectors and operating the sprinkler.

B. Water Flow Indicators:
1. Water flow indicators shall be of the paddle flow clamp-on type with vane
projecting into pipe through a hole drilled in pipe, instantly recycling retard,
and adjustable time setting of 30 to 60 seconds. Unit shall be for operation
on 230 volt, single phase, 60 hertz service with contacts for connection to
main fire alarm panel.
C. Floor Control Valve Assembly (FCVA):
1. Floor control valve assembly shall be the same as the Water flow indicator
mentioned above and as detailed in Drawings.
D. Valve Supervisory Switches:
1. Provide UL listed valve supervisory switches as required, arranged, to detect

the open or closed position of control valves. Switches shall be attached to
the various control valves being supervised and shall be complete with
tamper switches, required trim, contacts for connection to main fire alarm
panel and electrical characteristics compatible with those of the fire alarm
system.
E. Alarm Check Valve:
1. Shall be single-piece trim-less ductile iron valve body, as shown on the

drawings, UL listed and FM approved. Valve shall be provided with all
required accessories and trims including water pressure gauge and pressure
switch for electric alarm to main fire alarm panel.
F. Valve Identification:
1. Provide UL listed tags on all control drain, test and alarm valves in
accordance with NFPA Standards No's. 13 and 14.
G. Flexible Sprinkler Hose Connection:
1. Flexible sprinkler hose assembly shall consist of 100% Type 304

stainless flexible hose and fully welded non-mechanical fittings, braided,
leak tested with minimum 1 inch true-bore corrugated hose diameter.
Flexible sprinkler hose assembly shall be UL listed and FM approved and
rated for 1205 kPa maximum pressure. Each assembly shall be provided
with galvanized sheet steel mounting bracket having integrated snap-on
clip ends for attaching to the ceiling with tamper resistant screws and a
one-piece leak test sprinkler drop.
2. Flexible sprinkler hose assembly shall be used to connect sprinkler

heads to branch lines, where shown on drawings.
2.14 WATER MIST SYSTEM
A. The water mist system is a fixed fire protection system that uses water to control,
suppress or extinguish a fire. The system comprises automatic nozzles attached to
a piping system containing water and connected to a water supply. At operation,
the water mist system discharges a cone of spray containing small water droplets

that fills the protected zone with water mist. An effective water mist system should
generate, distribute, and maintain a concentration of small droplets sufficient for
the protection of the fire risk for sufficient time to meet the objective of the
protection. Fundamental to achieving this is: · Maintaining the correct
pressure/flow characteristics at the nozzle for sufficient time · Careful placement of
the nozzles to ensure full coverage of the space and minimal water wastage due to
collisions of the spray with solid surfaces (beams, walls, cupboards).
B. The system shall be designed to withstand earthquakes and hurricanes. The

system shall meet requirements for an extra hazard system in accordance with
NFPA 750.
C. All pipes shall be seamless Black Steel pipe, Schedule 80 conforming with ASTM
A 53/A 53 M. All fittings shall be UL and FM approved.
D. Upright and pendent spray sprinklers: Spray sprinklers are used for applications
where all the water needs to be discharged downwards.
E. The installation of the system shall conform to NFPA standards and applicable
local codes.
F. Water supply for the system shall be from the site ring main supplied by
centralized Fire Pump.
2.15 CARBON - DIOXIDE FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEM:
A. Carbon dioxide shall be supplied from high-pressure cylinders and shall be

stored in rechargeable containers designed to hold pressurized carbon dioxide
in liquid form at atmospheric temperatures corresponding to a normal pressure
of 5860 kilopascal at 21 degrees C 850 pounds per square inch (psi) at 70
degrees F.
B. High-pressure cylinders shall be constructed, tested, and marked in accordance

with SASO 37 & 38 for seamless steel cylinders.
C. Each cylinder shall be provided with a safety device to relieve excess pressure
safely, in advance of the rated cylinder test pressure. Devices shall be Interstate
Commerce Commission approved frangible safety disks.
D. Carbon dioxide cylinders shall be supported by suitable racks attached to walls

and floor. Cylinder framing shall be fitted with a weighing bar bracket, weight
bar, and direct-reading scale to weigh cylinders in place without deactivating the
system.
E. Pipe: ASTM A 53 standard weight, Schedule 80, galvanized seamless black steel
pipe.
F. System shall be arranged for fully automatic, manually operated, and remote-
pushbutton electric control operation. Operating controls shall be the enclosed
release type to prevent accidental operation.
G. System shall be designed and constructed to include a fixed supply of carbon

dioxide cylinders connected to properly sized, fixed piping with fittings and
nozzles to direct this agent into an enclosure surrounding the hazard.

2.16 FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEM FOR KITCHEN HOODS:
A. The fire suppression system shall be the wet chemical pre-engineered, piped,
fixed nozzle type. The system shall be suitable for ventilating hoods and cooking
appliances, and shall be specifically UL listed for the hazard and installed in
accordance with NFPA 96. The system shall actuate automatically by heat
sensitive detectors and shall also be provided with manual operation by strike
push button. The system shall be complete with all required equipments and
accessories including detectors, piping, fittings, nozzles, valves and chemical
storage cylinder. The contractor shall also be fully responsible for design and
shop drawings for the system and all shall be subject to approval of the
Engineer; capacity of system shall be as required.
2.17 VALVES:
2.18 PUMPS:
A. Refer to Section 15453 - PUMPS.
2.19 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS:
A. Refer to Section 15140 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION:
A. Installation shall be made in accordance with the applicable National Fire

Protection Association Standards. All equipment and devices used shall be listed
in either the UL Fire Protection List or the Factory Mutual Approval Guide.
B. Installation of the fire protection systems shall be made in strict accordance with
NFPA 12A, 70, 72A, 72E and 2001. The fire protection system shall be installed
by an experienced firm regularly engaged in the installation of fire extinguishing
systems; firm shall be subject to Engineer's approval. Installation shall also comply
with the requirements of Section 15050 - BASIC PIPING MATERIALS AND
METHODS.
C. Seal all pipe penetrations of fire barriers (walls and slabs) using fire barrier
penetration seals as specified in relevant Section of the Specifications or as
D. System Inspection and Checkouts:
1. After installation is complete the system shall be inspected by factory-trained

personnel in accordance with the manufacturer's recommended procedures,
in the presence of Engineer.

3.2 INSPECTION AND TESTING:
A. Tests shall demonstrate that entire system functions as intended. Tests shall be
carried out in accordance with applicable requirements of NFPA. Discharge tests
shall be conducted for each area; each area shall be tested separately. Piping
system shall be capped and subjected to minimum static water pressure of 1.5
times designed working pressure and maintained for two hours with no leaks or
loss of pressure. After performance test, complete the necessary adjustments and
reset the control and equipment.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 15320
CLEAN-AGENT FIRE-EXTINGUISHING SYSTEMS (NOVEC-1230)
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Extinguishing-agent containers.
2. Fire Extinguishing agent (Novec 1230).
3. Valves and pipes
4. Alarm devices.
5. Control and alarm panels.
6. Accessories.
7. Connection devices for and wiring between system components.
8. Connection devices for power and integration into building's fire-alarm
system.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. ASME B31.1 Power Piping
B. NFPA 70 National Electric Code
C. NFPA 2001 Standard on Clean Agent Fire Extinguishing

Systems
D. UL 1058 Clean Agent Extinguishing Agents.
1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Engineered system for total flooding of clean agent fire extinguishing agent to
discharge.
B. Performance requirement: discharge extinguishing agent within 10 seconds and

maintain 4.5 - 7 percent concentrate by volume at 21 degrees Celsius for 10
minutes holding time in hazard areas.
1. Extinguishing agent concentration in hazard areas greater than 7 percent

immediately after discharge or less than 4.5 percent throughout holding
time will not be accepted without written authorization from owner and
authorities’ having jurisdiction.
C. System capabilities: 42.75 bars minimum calculated working pressure and 24.8
bars initial charging pressure.
D. Verified Detection: Include devices located in single zone. Sound alarm upon
activating single detection device, and discharge extinguishing agent upon
actuating second detection device.
Clean-Agent Fire
15320 - 1
Extinguishing Systems
E. System operating sequence as follows:
1. Actuating first detector: Give visual indication on annunciator panel,

energize audible alarm, shut down air-condition and ventilating systems
serving protected area, release and closed doors in protected area and
send signal to fire alarm system.
2. Actuating second detector: Give visual indication on annunciator panel,

energize audible alarm, shut down power to protect equipment, actuate
time delay for extinguishing-agent discharge for 30 seconds, and release
extinguishing agent.
3. Extinguishing-agent discharge will operate audible alarms and strobe

lights.
4. Operating manual-release stations will discharge novec-1230 when

activated.
5. Operating abort switches will delay Novec-1230 discharge while being

activated, and switches must be reset to prevent Novec-1230 discharge.
Release of switch will discharge Novec-1230.
6. Control panel to be installed at the height of 1.5m from finish floor level.
Al tees, elbows and nozzle points should be clamped properly. Design
discharge: Novec 1230/ clean agent are designed to discharge within 10
sec.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Calculation for required weight for Novec 1230 extinguishing agent for each
hazardous area application.
B. Coordination drawings for hazard-area enclosure, reflected ceiling plans drawn

accurately to scale and coordinating penetrations and ceiling mounted items.
C. Wiring diagrams
D. Drawings and calculations specified above, in required number of set required
E. Drawings and calculations
F. Installation report
G. Test and inspection reports
H. Maintenance data for equipment and controls
I. Two copies of NFPA 2001 “Standard on Clean Agent Fire Extinguishing

Systems.” deliver to Owner’s maintenance personnel.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturers qualification
B. Single Source response
Clean-Agent Fire
15320 - 2
C. Provide listing/approval stamp, label or other marking on equipment made to
specified standards.
D. Comply with requirements that pertain to submittals and approvals material and
installation, and inspecting and testing.
E. ASME standards: Provide piping and installation and complying with ASME
B31.1.
F. FM Global Compliance: Provide components that are FM Approved and that are
listed in FM Global's "Approval Guide."
G. NFPA Standards: Provide equipment, components accessories, installation and

testing fomplying with NFPA 2001 and NFPA 70.
H. UL Compliance: Provide equipment listed in UL's "Fire Protection Equipment

Directory" and UL 1058.
I. Listed and Labeling: provide clean agent fire-extinguishing system equipment

specified in this section that is listed and labeled.
1. The term “Listed” and “Labeled”: as defined in National Electric Code,

Article 100.
2. Listing and Labeling agency Qualification: a national Recognized Testing

Laboratory (NTRL) as defined in OSHA regulation 1910.7
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Field measurements: verify dimensions by field measurements.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PIPING MATERIALS - GENERAL
A. Piping, valves and discharge nozzles, conform to types and standards listed in
NFPA 2001.
2.2 PIPES
A. Black Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, Schedule 80, seamless steel pipe.
2.3 PIPE AND TUBE FITTINGS
1. Forged-Steel Socket Welding Fittings: ASME B16.11, Class 1000.
2. Cast Iron fittings are not allowed.
2.4 VALVES
A. Brass suitable for intended operations. All gasket, o-rings, sealants and other
valve components shall be constructed of materials that are compatible with the
agent. Valve shall be protected against mechanical, chemical or other damage.
B. Container Valves: With rupture disc or solenoid and manual-release lever,

capable of immediate and total agent discharge and suitable for intended flow
capacity.
Clean-Agent Fire
15320 - 3
C. Valves in Sections of Closed Piping and Manifolds: Fabricate to prevent
entrapment of liquid, or install valve and separate pressure relief device.
D. Valves in Manifolds: Check valve; installed to prevent loss of extinguishing

agent when container is removed from manifold.
2.5 EXTINGUISHING-AGENT CONTAINERS
A. Description: Steel tanks complying with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel
Code: Section VIII, for unfired pressure vessels. Include minimum working-
pressure rating that matches system charging pressure, valve, pressure switch,
and pressure gage.
1. Finish: Red, enamel or epoxy paint.
2. Manifold: Fabricate with valves, pressure switches, selector switch, and

connections for main- and reserve-supply banks of multiple storage
containers.
3. Storage-Tank Brackets: Factory- or field-fabricated retaining brackets

consisting of steel straps and channels; suitable for container support,
maintenance, and tank refilling or replacement.
2.6 FIRE-EXTINGUISHING CLEAN AGENT
A. Clean Agent
1. NOVEC-1230 complying with NFPA 2001
2.7 DISCHARGE NOZZLES
A. Equipment manufacturer's standard one-piece brass or aluminum alloy of type,

size, discharge pattern, and capacity required for application.
B. Discharge nozzle shall be listed for intended use. Listing criteria shall include
flow characteristics, area coverage, height limits and minimum pressure.
Discharge orifices and discharge orifice plates and inserts shall be materials that
is corrosion resistant to the agent used and the atmosphere in the intended
application
2.8 CONTROL PANELS
A. Description: UL listed or FM Approved, including equipment and features

required for testing, supervising, and operating fire-extinguishing system.
B. Power Requirements: 120/240-V ac; with electrical contacts for connection to

system components and fire-alarm system, and transformer or rectifier as
needed to produce power at voltage required for accessories and alarm devices.
C. Enclosure: NEMA ICS 6, Type 1, enameled-steel cabinet.
1. Mounting: Surface
Clean-Agent Fire
15320 - 4
D. Provide supervised circuits for each independent hazard area.
1. Provide the following applications
a. Manual pull-station circuit.

b. Alarm circuit.
c. Release circuit.
E. Provide the following Control-Panel Features:
1. Electrical contacts for shutting down fans, activating dampers, and

operating system electrical devices.
2. Automatic switchover to standby power at loss of primary power.
3. Storage container, low-pressure indicator.
F. Annunciator Panel: Graphic type showing protected, hazard-area plans, as well

as locations of detectors and manual stations. Include lamps to indicate device-
initiating alarm, electrical contacts for connection to control panel, and stainless-
steel or aluminum enclosure.
G. Standby Power: lead acid or nickel cadmium batteries with capacity to operate
system for 72 hours and alarm for minimum of 15 minutes. Include automatic
battery charger that has a varying charging rate between trickle and high
depending on battery voltage, and that is capable of maintaining batteries fully
charged. Include manual voltage control, dc voltmeter, dc ammeter, electrical
contacts for connection to control panel, automatic transfer switch, and suitable
enclosure.
2.9 MANUAL –RELEASE STATIONS
A. Description: UL listed and FM approved, red-finish, “Pull Station,” 120 VAC or

low voltage compatible with controls. Include contacts for connection to control
panel. Unit can manually discharge clean agent extinguishing agent with
operating device that remains engaged until locked.
2.10 SWITCHES
A. Description: UL listed or FM Approved, where available, with electrical contacts

for connection to control panel, 120 VAC or low voltage compatible with controls.
B. Pressure Switches; Pneumatic Operation.
C. Transfer Switches: Key-operation selector, for transfer of release circuit signal

from main supply to reserve supply.
D. Abort Switches: Countdown timer type, with a digital readout indicating the
number if seconds remaining until system discharge, combined with a system
abort function switch.
E. Door Closers: Magnetic retaining and release device.
2.11 ALARM DEVICES
A. Description: UL listed or FM Approved, low voltage, and surface mounting

except where otherwise indicated.
B. Bells: 6 inches diameter.
Clean-Agent Fire
15320 - 5
C. Horns: 90 to 94 dBA.
D. Strobe Lights: Translucent lens, with "FIRE" or similar caption.
2.12 ELECTRICAL POWER AND WIRING
A. Electrical power, wiring, and devices are specified in Division 16.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
hazard-area leakage requirements that reduce clean agent leakage.include
requirements specified installation tolerances and other conditions affecting
performance of clean agent fire-extinguishing systems..
B. Do not proceed with installation unitl unsatisfactory conditions have been

corrected.
3.2 PIPING APPLICATIONS
A. Provide piping for 1000 psig charging pressure clean agent system, according
to material application below.
B. Black steel pipe, forged steel fitting with welded joints.
3.3 PIPING INSTALLATION GENERAL
A. Install piping adjacent to clean agent storage containers and equipment to allow
replacement, service and maintenance.
B. Basic piping installation and pipe joining methods are specified in Division 15
plumbing sections.
3.4 CLEAN-AGENT SYSTEM INSTALLATION
A. Install system according to the general arrangement indicated for extinguishing-

agent storage containers, accessories and control panels.
B. Comply with manufacturer’s written instructions and references standards.
C. Locate extinguishing agent containers, panels, control and alarm devices where
indicated. Other equipment and devices may be located at designer/s discretion,
except where otherwise indicated.
D. Install extinguishing-agent containers anchored to substrate.
E. Install pipe and fittings, valves, and discharge nozzles according to requirements
listed in NFPA 2001.
1. Install valves designed to prevent entrapment of liquid, or install pressure

relief devices in valved sections of piping systems.
F. Support piping using supports and methods according to NFPA 2001.
G. Install seismic restraints for extinguishing-agent containers and piping systems.
Clean-Agent Fire
15320 - 6
H. Install control panels, detection system components, alarms, and accessories,
complying with requirements of NFPA 2001, Section "Detection, Actuation, and
Control Systems," as required for supervised system application.
3.5 CONNECTIONS
A. Make connections to power supply, system components building fire alarm

system and ground.
1. Electrical connections, grounding requirement and alarm panels

according to NFAP 2001.
3.6 Labeling
A. Install labeling on piping, storage containers equipment and alarm panel

according to NFPA 2001
3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Installation Inspection
B. Comply with operating instructions and procedure of NFPA 2001. Include the
following inspections and tests to demonstrate compliance with requirements.
1. Check mechanical items.

2. Inspect extinguishing agent containers and extinguishing agent and
check mountings for adequate anchoring to substrate.
3. Check electrical systems.
4. Check enclosure integrity. Comply with NFPA 2001
5. Functional (pre-discharge) test.
6. System functional operational test
7. Remote monitoring operations
8. Control panel primary source
9. Perform “puff” test on piping system, using nitrogen.
C. Perform field acceptance tests of each clean agent fire-extinguishing system

when system installation is complete. Perform system testing only after hazard-
area enclosure has been completed and openings are sealed. Comply with
operating instructions and procedures of NFPA 2001. Include the following to
demonstrate compliance with requirements.
1. Functional (pre-discharge) test.

2. System functional operational test
3. Remote monitoring operations
4. Control panel primary source
5. Perform “puff” test on piping system, using nitrogen.
D. Field correct malfunctioning equipment, then retest to demonstrate compliance.

Replace equipment that cannot be satisfactorily corrected or does not perform
as specified and indicated then retest to demonstrate compliance. Repeat
procedure until satisfactorily results are obtained.
1. Report test results promptly and in writing to Engineer and authorities

having jurisdiction.
Clean-Agent Fire
15320 - 7
3.8 COMMISSIONING
A. Startup services: Engage a factory authorized service representative to provide

startup service as specified below.
1. Preparation: Perform the following final checks before start up
a. Test of the piping system is complete

b. Check for piping connection leaks
c. Check for complete enclosure integrity
d. Test operation of safety controls and devices
e. Check operation of ventilation and exhaust system.
f.
B. Starting Procedures: Follow manufacturer’s written procedure. If no procedure

are prescribed by manufacturer, proceed as follows:
1. Fill containers with clean agent extinguishing agent and pressurize with
dry nitrogen to 2500 psig.
2. Install filled extinguishing-agent containers.
3. Energize circuits.
4. Adjust operating controls.
3.9 DEMONSTRATION
A. Services: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's

maintenance personnel as specified below:
1. Train Owner’s maintenance personnel on procedure and schedule

related to startup and shutdown, troubleshooting, servicing and
preventive maintenance.
2. Review data in the operation and maintenance manual
3. Schedule training with owner with at least 7 days advance notice.
END OF SECTION
Clean-Agent Fire
15320 - 8
SECTION 15411
WATER SUPPLY SYSTEM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION:
A. The Work under this Section consists of furnishing and installing a complete water
supply system as indicated on the drawings and as specified herein.
B. This Section specifies the water distribution piping system, including potable cold
and hot water piping, fittings and specialties within the building and up to interface
point of existing utilities.
1.2 REFERENCES:
A. SASO – Saudi Arabian Standards Organization:
SASO-14 Pipes for Potable Water of Unplasticized Plastic (UPVC).
SASO 15 Methods of testing Unplasticized polyvinyl chloride

(UPVC) pipes for potable water.
SASO 1517 Chlorinated polyvinyl chloride pipes (CPVC) for hot and
cold water users. Methods of testing chlorinated polyvinyl
chloride pipes (CPVC) for hot and cold water users.
SASO 1518 Methods of testing chlorinated polyvinyl chloride pipes

(CPVC) for hot and cold water users
B. ASTM - American Society for Testing and Materials:
ASTM D 1784 Rigid Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Compounds and

Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Hot- and
Cold-Water Compounds.
ASTM D 2846 Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Hot- and
Cold-Water Distribution System.
ASTM D 3139 Joints for Plastic Pressure Pipes Using Flexible Elastomeric
Seals.

ASTM F 441 Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Pipe,

Schedules 40 and 80.
ASTM F 493 Solvent Cements for Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chloride)

(CPVC) Plastic Pipe and Fittings.
15411-1 Water Supply System

C. ANSI - American National Standard Institute:
ANSI A112.26.1 Water Hammer Arrestors.
ANSI B2.1 Pipe Threads (Except Dry Seal).
ANSI B31.3 Code for Pressure Piping.
ANSI Z21.22 Relief Valves and Automatic Gas Shutoff Services.
D. ASME - American Society of Mechanical Engineers:
ASME A40.8 National Plumbing Code.
ASME B1.20.1 Pipe Threads, General Purpose (Inch.)
ASME B1.20.7 Hose Coupling Screw Threads.
ASME B31.9 Building Service Piping.
SECTION IX Welded and Brazing and Pressure Vessel qualifications

Code.
E. ASSE - American Society of Sanitary Engineering:
ASSE 1003 Water Pressure Reducing Valves for Domestic Water

Supply System.
ASSE 1011 Hose Connection Vacuum Breakers.
ASSE 1013 Reduced Pressure Principle backflow Preventers.
F. AWWA - American Water Works Association:
AWWA C606 Standard for Grooved and Shouldered Joints.
AWWA C651 Standard for Disinfection of Water Mains.
AWWA C652 Standard for Disinfection of Water Storage Facilities.
G. MSS - Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry:
MSS SP-67 Butterfly Valves.
1.3 SUBMITTALS:
A. Product and Maintenance Data: Submit manufacturer's product and maintenance

data for the items specified herein.
B. Coordination Drawings: Prepare and submit coordination drawings for the water
distribution piping.

1.4 WARRANTY:
A. The Contractor shall furnish Engineer a written guarantee covering the satisfactory
operation of the plumbing installation in all its parts for a period of one (1) year
after date of acceptance. During this period, the Contractor shall repair or replace
any defective work and pay for any repair or replacement costs.
A. Plumbing Code Compliance: Comply with applicable portions of Uniform Plumbing

Code (UPC) - 1994 Edition, BOCA Basic National Plumbing Code and the local
utility authority.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Hot water supply pipes inside building shall be chlorinated polyvinyl chloride
(CPVC) plastic pipe, schedule 80 conforming to ASTM F 441, with solvent
cement joints. Socket type chlorinated polyvinyl chloride (CPVC) plastic pipe
fittings, schedule 80 shall conform to SASO 1517 and 1518, ASTM F 439.
Solvent cement shall conform to ASTM F 439.
B. Cold water supply pipes shall be unplasticized polyvinyl chloride (uPVC) plastic
pipes conforming to ASTM D 1784, Class - 5 conforming to SASO 14 and 15 with
socket-type unplasticized polyvinyl chloride (uPVC) plastic fittings conforming to
ASTM D 2467, Class 5.
C. Pipes and Fittings Outside Building: Refer Section 02668 - WATER

DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM.
2.2 VALVES:
A. Valves shall be as specified in Section 15100 - VALVES.
2.3 PIPING SPECIALTIES:
A. Water Hammer Arresters: Bellows type, with stainless steel casing and bellows,
pressure rated for 250 psi, tested and certified in accordance with PDI WH-201.
B. Flexible Connectors: Stainless steel bellows with a woven flexible bronze wire
o
reinforcing protective jacket; rated for 150 psig water working pressure, 250 F
operating temperature and suitable for up to maximum 19 mm misalignment.
Connectors shall be a minimum of 300 mm long and have threaded or flanged
ends; sweat ends are not acceptable.
C. Hose Bibs: Bronze body with integrated vacuum breaker, renewable composition
disc, tee handle, 19 mm NPT inlet, 19 mm hose outlet.
D. Backflow Preventers: Reduced pressure principle assembly consisting of shut-off

valves on inlet and outlet, and strainer on inlet. Assemblies shall include test
cocks, and pressure-differential relief valve located between two positive seating
check valves, and comply with ASSE 1013.

E. Relief Valves:
1. Provide proper size for relief valve, in accordance with ASME Boiler and
Pressure Vessel Codes, for indicated capacity of the appliance for which
installed.
2. Combined Pressure-Temperature Relief Valves: Bronze body, test lever,

thermostat, complying with ANSI Z21.22 listing requirements for temperature
o
discharge capacity. Provide temperature relief at 210 F and pressure relief at
150 psi.
F. Vacuum Breakers: Atmospheric constant pressure or hose-bibb type.
G. Automatic Air Vent: Automatic air vent with stainless steel check valve or float
shall be of chromed brass body with following features:
• Automatic operation
• Quick venting design and positive shut-off check
• Suitable for cold and hot water
• Easily maintained
• Simple two piece construction
• Sizes shall be as shown on drawings.
2.4 ELECTRICAL WATER HEATERS:
A. Electric water heaters shall be suitable for vertical or horizontal installations (as
required) and provided with lifting lugs and channel skid base. Vessel shall be
constructed to Section IV of the ASME Code, and UL Standards. Vessel shall be
glass-lined with magnesium anode protection, pressure tested to 2 MPa working
pressure. Entire vessel and electrical controls shall be encased in a sheet metal
enclosure with baked enamel finish. Tank shall be insulated with verminproof fiber
glass insulation. Units shall be provided with adjustable setting thermostatic
controls and immersed nichrome heating elements. Water heaters shall prewired
to solderless terminal lugs, factory tested, complete with ASME temperature and
pressure relief valves and bear UL label. Water heaters shall meet or exceed the
requirements of ASHRAE 90A-1980 Standard for energy efficiency. Water heaters
shall also meet requirements of SASO 532.
B. Temperature and pressure relief valves shall comply with the ASME rates and the
vacuum relief valve shall comply with ANSI Z21.22, all valves shall be 3/4 inch in
size and shall be labeled accordingly.
C. Refer to drawings for electric water heater capacities, minimum recovery and
electrical ratings.
2.5 INSTANTANEOUS WATER HEATER
A. The tankless electric water heater shall be installed near the point-of-use. It shall
be equipped with a bare wire nichrome type heating element housed in fiberglass
reinforced high temperature plastic containment. The housing of the unit shall be
made of high impact polycarbonate plastic. The flow switch that operates the
heating element shall be of the mechanical pressure differential type. The unit
shall be equipped with a safety high-limit switch with automatic reset. The water
connections shall be designed for standard 9/16”-24 flexible hose type connectors.
B. Refer to drawings for electric water heater capacities and electrical ratings.

2.6 DOMESTIC WATER FILTERS:
A. Furnish as shown on plans, domestic water filters (one duty/one standby)

complete with all required accessories. Sediment removal filters shall be cartridge
type with no carbon treatment. The filter element in replaceable cartridge shall be
made of 100% spun polypropylene designed for potable water usage. Filters shall
be suitable to remove suspended matter such as rust and scale particles, dirt,
sand and micro organism such as cyct and spores. Water filters shall be of type
and capacity as shown on the drawings.
Housing: Constructed of polished type 304 stainless steel, tested at 200 psi for
125 psi working pressure; all internal parts to be stainless steel.
2.7 DRINKING WATER FOUNTAIN
A. Fountain Water Coolers:
1. Water cooler assembly shall be combination of drinking water fountain

cooler with integrated cup dispenser and disposal unit.
2. Water cooler unit shall have the following features:
a. One piece welded construction without seams, exposed edges or

screws and fabricated of 16 gauge, Type 304 stainless steel polished
in one direction to a No.4 satin finish. Cup dispenser and disposal
unit shall be supplied with removable stainless steel cup holder and
disposal chamber and shall be without cup filler. Fountain unit shall
be provided with matching finish push-back glass filler.
b. Cooling Tank: Shall be fabricated of 16 gauge, Type 316 L stainless

steel tested to 200 psi for 125 psi working pressure with storage
capacity of 1 US gallons. Tank shall be equipped with Type 316 L
stainless steel pipe immersion type cooling coil (shell and tube
evaporator or open tanks with float valve not acceptable). Tank shall
be insulated with closed cell thermo- elastomer, with R Factor of 3.7.
c. Compressor: Shall be lifetime lubricated hermetic with static type

condenser and adjustable thermostat (fan type condensers not
acceptable). Compressor to be minimum 1/2 HP and have cooling
capacity of 5 gph from 80oF to 50oF without any precooler.
d. Water cooler shall have sealed electrical components protected from

moisture and corrosive fumes, maintenance removable access
panel, built-in removable filter.
A. Insulation of hot water pipes shall be as per requirements of Section 15250 -

MECHANICAL INSULATION.
2.9 PUMPS:

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 WATER SERVICE:
A. Water service shall be extended from valved outlets to main at point of tie-in. All
valves, meter, and such other components as shown shall be installed to provide a
complete water supply system.
3.2 INSTALLATION:
A. See Section 15050 - BASIC PIPING MATERIALS AND METHODS for general
piping installation instructions. Refer to the drawings for further details.
B. Install pipe sleeve seals at all foundation and wall penetrations. Piping passing
through exterior building walls shall be caulked weather tight. Seal pipe
penetrations of fire barriers (walls and slab) using fire barrier penetration seals as
specified in relevant Section of the Specifications or as approved by the Engineer.
A. General: Do not enclose, cover, or put into operation water distribution piping
system until it has been inspected, tested and approved by the Engineer. Expose
all such work for testing that has been covered or concealed before it has been
inspected, tested and approved by the Engineer. Notify the Engineer at least 24
hours prior to the time such inspection is to be made. Prepare inspection and test
reports for Engineer's review.
B. Testing: Test water supply and distribution piping, and water tank(s) prior to
covering or concealment. The entire piping system shall be tested at a hydrostatic
pressure of one and a-half (1-1/2) times the expected operating pressure without
exceeding the pressure rating of the piping system materials, and proven tight at
this pressure. Isolate the test source and allow to stand for a period of 4 hours. If
testing is performed in segments, submit a separate report for each test, complete
with diagram of portion of the system tested.
C. Defective Work: Leaks and loss of pressure observed during testing constitute
defects that must be repaired to the satisfaction of the Engineer. Repair all leaks
and defects with new materials and retest system or portion thereof until
satisfactory results are obtained.
Prepare reports for all tests and required corrective action, and submit to the
Engineer for review and approval.
3.4 CLEANING AND DISINFECTION:
Clean and disinfect water supply and distribution piping, and water tank(s) as follows:
A. Purge all new water distribution piping systems and parts of existing systems that
have been altered, extended, or repaired prior to use. Use the purging and
disinfecting procedure described in either AWWA C651, or AWWA C652, or as
described below:

1. Flush the piping system with clean, potable water until dirty water does not
appear at the points of outlet.
2. Fill the system or part thereof with a water/chlorine solution containing at

least 50 parts per million of chlorine. Isolate (valve off) the system or part
thereof and allow to stand for 24 hours.
3. Drain the system or part thereof of the previous solution and refill with a
water/chlorine solution containing at least 200 parts per million of chlorine
and isolate and allow to stand for 3 hours.
4. Following the allowed standing time, flush the system with clean, potable
water until chlorine does not remain in the water coming from the system.
5. Submit water samples in sterile bottles, taken in presence of the Engineer, to

the Independent Testing Laboratory for biological examination. Repeat the
procedure if the biological examination made by the Independent Testing
Laboratory shows evidence of contamination.
6. Prepare reports for all purging and disinfecting activities, and submit to
Engineer for review and approval.
3.5 AS-BUILT DRAWINGS:
A. The Contractor shall prepare and submit as-built drawings in reproducible form to
the Engineer. All revisions, omissions, and/or additions to the various plumbing
installations shall be marked down in red pencil.
B. Accessories and specialties such as flexible pipe connectors, water hammer

arrestors, water pressure regulators, vacuum breakers, hose bibbs, etc. shall be
as approved by the Engineer.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 15420
DRAINAGE AND VENT SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION:
A. The Work under this Section consists of furnishing and installing a complete
drainage system including soil, waste, drainage, and vent system up to the
interface point as indicated on the drawings and as specified herein.
1.2 REFERENCES:
A. ASO – Saudi Arabian Standards Organization
SASO -14 Pipes for Potable Water of Unplasticized Plastic (UPVC)
SASO -15 Method of Testing of Pipes for Potable Water of

Unplasticized Plastic (UPVC).
SASO 1177 Unplasticized polyvinyl chloride (UPVC) pipes -

Specification & measurement of opacity
SASO 1209 Unplasticized polyvinyl chloride (UPVC) pipes for soil,

waste and venting inside buildings.
SASO 1210 Methods of testing unplasticized polyvinyl chloride (UPVC)
pipes for soil, waste and venting inside buildings.
SASO 1395 Unplasticized polyvinyl chloride (UPVC) pipes for

buried/drains and sewers
SASO 1396 Methods of testing unplasticized polyvinyl chloride (UPVC)

pipes for buried/drains and sewers
SASO 1397 Unplasticized polyvinyl chloride (UPVC) pipe fittings for

buried/drains and sewers
SASO 1398 Methods of test for unplasticized polyvinyl chloride

(UPVC) pipe fittings for buried /drains and sewers.
SASO 1399 Unplasticized polyvinyl chloride (UPVC) pipe fittings for

soil, waste and vent inside buildings.
B. ASTM - American Society for Testing and Materials
ASTM D 1784 Rigid Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Compounds and

Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Hot- and
Cold-Water Compounds.
ASTM D 2564 Solvent Cement for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe
and Fittings.
ASTM D 2665 Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Drain, Waste, and Vent
Pipe and Fittings.
15420-1 Drainage & Vent System

ASTM D 2729 Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Sewer Pipe and Fittings.
ASTM D 2855 Making Solvent-Cemented Joints with Poly (Vinyl

Chloride) (PVC) Pipes and Fittings.
ASTM D 3138 Solvent Cements for Transition Joints Between
Acrylonitrile-Butadiene-Styrene (ABS) and Poly(Vinyl
Chloride) (PVC) Non-Pressure Piping Components.
ASTM F 656 Primers for Use in Solvent-Cement Joints of Poly (Vinyl

Chloride) (PVC) Pipes and Fittings.
ASTM D 3311 Drain, Waste, and Vent (DWV) Plastic Fittings Patterns.
C. ANSI - American National Standards Institute
ANSI B2.1 Pipe Threads.
ANSI A112.18.1 Finished and Rough Brass Plumbing Fixture Fittings.
ANSI A112.18.1M Finished and Rough Brass Plumbing Fixture Fittings.
ANSI A112.14.1 Backwater Valves.
ANSI A112.21.1M Floor Drains.
ANSI A112.21.2 Roof Drains.
D. Trade Association Publications
ASPE Data Book, 1983-84 Volume I, Fundamentals of Plumbing Design,

Chapter 1 "Sanitary Drainage System"; Chapter 2 "Storm Drainage
Systems".
ASSE Plumbing Dictionary - Standard 1018 0 Performance Requirements for

Trap Seal Primer Valves.
CDA Copper Brass Bronze Design Handbook "Single-Stack Plumbing

System".
1.3 SUBMITTALS:
A. Product and Maintenance Data: Submit manufacturer's product and maintenance

data for the items specified herein.
B. Coordination Drawings: Prepare and submit coordination drawings for the soil,
waste, drainage and vent piping.
A. Plumbing Code Compliance: Comply with applicable portions of Uniform Plumbing

Code (UPC) , BOCA, National Plumbing Code and the local utility authority.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Pipes and fittings for soil, waste, drainage and vent lines, inside building, shall be
as follows:
1. Pipes above ground: Unplasticized polyvinyl chloride (uPVC) plastic pipes

Class - 4 conforming to SASO 14 & 15.
2. Pipes below ground: Unplasticized polyvinyl chloride (uPVC) plastic pipes

Class - 5 conforming to SASO 14 & 15.
3. Pipe Fittings: Socket-type unplasticized polyvinyl chloride (uPVC) plastic

fittings conforming to ASTM D 2665, Class to match that of pipe and made
ASTM D 3311 drain, waste and vent (DWV) plastic fittings pattern.
4. Jointing System:
a. Welded joints using solvent cement conforming to ASTM D 2564 with

primer conforming to ASTM F 656.
B. Pipes and fittings for Laboratory Waste and Drainage:
1. Polypropylene Plastic (PP) Pressure Pipe and Fittings: Pipe extruded and
fittings molded from Polypropylene (PP) resin complying with
ASTM D 4101. Provide SDR 11 or Schedule 80 with drainage fittings
including socket type with electric-fusion coils and mechanical joints.
2. Pipewok for laboratory wastes and other appliances taking corrosive

discharges shall be Polypropylene (PP) pipe.
3. Jointing of pipe work shall be as per piping manufacturer’s recommended

mechanical jointing system.
4. Installation shall be in strict accordance with the piping system

manufacturer instructions.
C. For piping outside building refer to Section 02730 – SEWERAGE SYSTEM.
2.2 DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALTIES:
A. Cleanout Plugs: Cast iron with tapered body for caulking, raised head rough lead
seal plug.
B. Floor Cleanouts: Cast iron body and frame with round adjustable scoriated
secured nickel-bronze top, closure plug; and spigot outlet.
C. Wall Cleanouts: Cast iron body adaptable to pipe with cast bronze or brass
cleanout plug, stainless steel cover plate with vandal-proof center screw secured
to cleanout plug.
D. Flashing Flanges and Vent Flashing Sleeves: Manufacturer's standard products

as approved by the Engineer.

2.3 DRAINS:
A. Floor Drains: Adjustable, cast iron body and flashing collar, with protector top and
polished bronze strainer head with secured, vandal-proof square hold grate.
B. Roof Drains: Cast iron body, combined flashing collar and gravel stop, cast iron
dome, deep sump body.
C. Floor Drains with Adjustable Tops and Sediment Buckets: Cast iron body and
flashing collar with adjustable 300 mm diameter top and bar grate with sediment
bucket.
D. Trench Drain and Grating: Shall be cast iron with hinged grate and perforated
sediment bucket. Trench drain grating shall be of cast iron, medium duty; size
shall be as shown on the drawings.
E. Parking Drain: Shall be cast iron bodied area drain with flashing collar. Parking
drain shall be of type as shown on drawing.
2.4 GREASE INTERCEPTORS:
A. Grease interceptors shall be manufacturer's standard fabricated of steel with black

duco coating inside and outside, and shall be complete with flow control fittings
and other required accessories to intercept grease and oil-laden waste discharged
from fixtures. Capacity shall be as indicated on the drawings or as approved by
the Engineer. Integral extensions shall permit a greater dimension from centerline
of inlets and outlets to finished floor level to accommodate deeper roughing-in
conditions. Grease interceptors shall be of type as indicated on drawings.
B. Precast concrete underground interceptor comply with ASTM C 913 shall be used
in lieu of the standard fabricated steel interceptors.
2.5 CHEMICAL WASTE NEUTRALIZATION TANKS:
A. Description: Corrosion-resistant, cast-ceramic shell; with removable, reinforced-

plastic, gastight cover; inlet; interior, sidewall, dip-tube outlet; vent; and bell,
sidewall pipe connections.
1. Extension: Steel with protective coating, 600-mm diameter, and cast-iron

manhole frame and cover.
2. Dolomitic Limestone: Chips or lumps, with more than 90 percent

combined magnesium carbonate and calcium carbonate content and 25-
to 75-mm diameter.
2.6 PUMPS:
2.8 AUTOMATIC AIR ADMITTANCE VALVES:

A. Automatic air admittance valves shall be of unplasticized polyvinyl chloride
(UPVC), schedule 40 or equivalent. Sizes shall be as required.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION (GENERAL):
A. See Section 15050 - BASIC PIPING MATERIALS AND METHODS for general
piping installation instructions. Refer to the drawings for further details.
B. All cast iron piping, underground and inside masonry walls, shall be wrapped with
tape.
3.2 INTERIOR DRAINAGE SYSTEM:
A. The entire system shall be carefully inspected for damaged materials.
B. Piping shall run as direct as possible making changes in direction with long
sweeps, 1/8 or 1/16 bends.
C. Connections shall be made to horizontal lines with Y's and 1/8 bends.
D. Horizontal lines shall be graded not less than 1% for piping 101 mm and larger,
and not less than 2% per for piping 76 mm and smaller.
E. Rough fixture connections and open ends of pipe shall be plugged and capped
during construction using approved test plugs.
F. Open ends of pipe shall be plugged when work is stopped.
G. Location of floor drains for equipment furnished are diagrammatic. Equipment size
and final location shall be verified prior to installation of roughing for floor drains.
H. Roof leader expansion joints shall be installed on all roof leaders immediately
below drain.
I. All drip lines or drain tube shall extend to the nearest floor drain or service sink.
This shall include but shall not be limited to the discharge from pressure and
temperature relief valves, automatic air vents and vent connections on backflow
preventers.
3.3 EXTERIOR DRAINAGE SYSTEM:
A. Refer to Section 02730 - SEWRAGE SYSTEM.
3.4 INSTALLATION OF PIPING SPECIALTIES:
A. Cleanouts
1. Cleanouts shall be installed allowing sufficient clearance behind cleanout

plugs to facilitate use of cleaning tools.
2. Cleanouts shall be located on bases of each soil and waste stacks, change
of direction of piping greater than 45o on all horizontal runs, and intervals on

all horizontal runs where required or shown on drawings.
3. Cleanouts shall be full pipe size up to 100 mm diameter.
4. Cleanouts shall be placed in readily accessible locations.
5. Where they occur in floors, cleanouts shall be piped to just below floor level
and shall be provided with plug and floor access plate flush with floor.
6. Where they occur in walls, cleanouts shall be provided with plug and wall
access plate.
B. Flashing Flanges: Install flashing flange and clamping device with each stack and
cleanout passing through waterproof membrane.
C. Vent Flashing Sleeves: Install on stacks passing through roof, secure over stack
flashing in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
3.5 INSTALLATION OF DRAINS:
A. Floor Drains
1. Install floor drains in locations indicated and in accordance with

manufacturer's written instructions.
2. Install floor drains at low points of surface areas to be drained, or as

indicated. Set tops of drains flush with finished floor.
3. Trap all drains connected to the sanitary sewer.
4. Install drain flashing collar or flange so that no leakage occurs between drain
and adjoining flooring. Maintain integrity of waterproof membranes, where
penetrated.
B. Roof Drains
1 Install roof drains at low points of roof areas, in accordance with the roof
membrane manufacturer's installation instructions.
2 Install drain flashing collar or flange so that no leakage occurs between roof
drain and adjoining roofing. Maintain integrity of waterproof membranes,
where penetrated.
A. Inspection: Do not enclose, cover, or put into operation drainage and vent piping
system until it has been inspected, tested and approved by the Engineer or the
authority having jurisdiction. Notify the Engineer, in writing, at least 24 hours prior
to the time such inspection must be made. Perform tests specified below in the
presence of the Engineer.
B. Piping System Test
1. Rough-In Plumbing: Test the piping of plumbing drainage and venting

systems upon completion of the rough piping installation. Tightly close all
openings in the piping system, and fill with water to the point of overflow, but

not less than 3048 mm of head. Water level shall not drop during the period
from 15 minutes before the inspection starts, through completion of the
inspection. Inspect all joints for leaks.
2. Finished Plumbing: After the plumbing fixtures have been set and traps filled
with water, test connections and prove they are gastight and watertight. Plug
the stack openings on the roof and building drains where they leave building.
Introduce air into piping system equal to a pressure of 250 Pa. Use a U-tube
or manometer inserted in the trap of water closet to measure this pressure.
Air pressure must remain constant without the introduction of additional air
throughout the period of inspection. Inspect all plumbing fixture connections
for gas and water leaks.
3. Repair all leaks and defects using new materials and retest system or
portion thereof until satisfactory results are obtained. Prepare reports for all
tests and required corrective action.
3.7 ADJUSTING, CLEANING AND PROTECTION:
A. Clean interior of piping system. Remove dirt debris as work progresses. Clean
drain strainers, domes and traps, and remove dirt and debris.
B. Protect drains during remainder of construction period, to avoid clogging with dirt
and debris, and to prevent from traffic and construction work. Place plugs on
uncompleted piping at end of day or whenever work stops.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 15440
PLUMBING FIXTURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. The Work shall consist of furnishing and installation of all plumbing fixtures and trim
including all the carriers, supports, anchors, and accessories as shown on the
drawings and specified herein.
1.2 REFERENCES
SASO 1024 Ceramic sanitary appliances - Methods of test for general

requirements
SASO 1025 Ceramic sanitary appliances - General requirements
SASO 1257 Sanitary appliances: Flushing water tanks.
SASO 1258 Ceramic sanitary appliances: Eastern water closets and

traps
SASO 1259 Ceramic sanitary appliances: Methods of test for eastern

water closets and traps: Eastern water closets
SASO 1272 Electrical installations of buildings: Part 7: Requirements

for special installations or locations - Section 701:
Locations containing a bath tub or shower basin.
SASO 1473 Ceramic sanitary appliances - Western water closets
SASO 1474 Ceramic sanitary appliances - Methods of test for western

water closets
SASO 1475 Ceramic sanitary appliances bidets
SASO 1476 Ceramic sanitary appliances - Wash basins
SASO 1477 Sanitary appliances - Pressured flushing devices
SASO 1478 Sanitary appliances - Methods of test for pressured

flushing devices
SASO 1479 Sanitary appliances - Methods of test for flushing water

tanks
SASO 1480 Sanitary appliances - Flushing apparatus
SASO 1481 Sanitary appliances - Methods of test for flushing

apparatus
15440 - 1 Plumbing Fixtures

B. ANSI - American National Standards Institute
ANSI A112.1.2 Air Gaps in Plumbing Systems
ANSI A112.6.1M Supports for Off-The-Floor Plumbing Fixtures for Public Use
ANSI A112.18.1M Finished and Rough Brass Plumbing Fixture Fittings
ANSI A112.19.2 Vitreous China Plumbing Fixtures
ANSI Z124.1 Plastic Bathtub Units
ANSI Z124.2 Plastic Shower Receptors and Shower Stalls
C. ASTM - American Society for Testing and Materials
ASTM F 409 Thermoplastic Accessible and Replaceable Plastic Tube

and Tubular Fittings
ASTM F 444 Scald Prevention Devices and Systems in Bathing Areas.
ASTM F 445 Thermal-Shock Preventing Devices and Systems in

Showering Areas
ASTM F 446 Grab Bars and Accessories Installed in the Bathing Area.
ASTM F 462 Slip-Resistant Bathing Facilities
D. ASME - American Society of Mechanical Engineers
ASME A112.6.1M Supports for Off-The-Floor Plumbing Fixtures for Public Use
ASME A112.18.1M Plumbing Fixture Fittings
ASME A112.19.2M Vitreous China Plumbing Fixtures
ASME A112.19.5 Trim for Water-Closet Bowls, Tanks and Urinals.
E. ASSE - American Society of Sanitary Engineering
ASSE 1023 Hot Water Dispensers, Household Storage, Electrical
F. UL - Underwriters Laboratories Inc.
UL 399 Drinking Water Coolers
UL 1261 Electric Water Heaters for Pools and Tubs
G. BOCA - Building Officials and Code Administrators International Inc.
National Plumbing Code
H. ICBO - International Conference of Building Officials
Uniform Plumbing Code

1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit product data and installation instructions for each fixture,
faucet, specialty, accessories and trims specified.
B. Shop Drawings: Submit drawings include Detail dimensions, requirements,

required clearances, and methods of assembly of components and anchorages.
C. Color charts.
A. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in the manufacture of plumbing

equipment and fixtures whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar
service for not less than 10 years.
B. Installer: Firms regularly engaged in the installation of plumbing works of a

similar quality and scope as this project for at least 5 years.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. All plumbing fixtures shall be stored in their original containers in a secure

enclosed store. Vitreous chinaware shall be stored out of direct sunlight. Fittings
(taps, showers etc.) shall be stored in boxes or wrappings to prevent the ingress
of dust to machined surfaces. All storage areas shall have adequate artificial
lighting to allow for inspection of the equipment by the Engineer.
1.6 WARRANTY
A. Submit written guarantee signed by the contractor and manufacturer for the
period of 2 years from the date of substantial completion. The guarantee shall
cover the repair and replacement of defective materials and workmanship as
directed by the Engineer.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURE:
A. All sanitary fixtures shall be from the Saudi Arabia national company “Niagara” or
any approved equal.
2.2 FIXTURE SUPPORTS:
A. Fixtures shall have concealed arms, steel pipe uprights for support from floor and
block bases, secured to floor, and/or walls, and shall be of types herein.
B. Plumbing fixture supports shall conform to ANSI A112.6.1.
2.3 VITREOUS CHINA FIXTURES:
A. Unless specified otherwise, toilet fixtures shall be of the best quality vitreous China,
non-absorbent and burned so that the whole mass is thoroughly fused and vitrified,
producing a material which when fractured will show a homogenous mass, close
grained and free from pores.

B. Colors shall be thoroughly fused, united to body without discoloration, chips or
flaws and shall be free from craze. Color shall be white.
C. Warped or otherwise imperfect fixtures shall not be acceptable.
D. Vitreous China fixtures shall comply with ANSI A112.19.2.
2.4 FIXTURE TRIMS:
A. Exposed fixture trims which include faucets, strainers, escutcheons, water closet
supplies, stops, waste, trap and all trimmings below lavatories, etc. shall be made
of brass and shall be polished chrome-plated. All exposed IPS piping and tubing
shall be of red brass, chrome-plated.
B. Brass for chrome-plating shall conform to ANSI A112.18.1 and shall be thoroughly
cleaned and polished before plating.
C. Plating shall be thoroughly and evenly applied and also guaranteed not to strip or
peel.
D. Fixture trims shall be chromium-plated, electro-deposited.
E. Trims shall comply with ANSI A112.19.5.
2.5 FIXTURES AND FITTINGS:
A. Western Water Closets: Vitreous China, siphon jet elongated closet bowl, with self-
draining jets and large passageway. Seats shall be solid high-glass molded with
cover.
1. Water closets shall be floor mounted type with 1.0 gallon (3.76 liters) flush
tank.
Flush Valve (where applicable): shall be heavy duty exposed flush valve
(3/4"), with integrated stop valve, flow rate adjustment, chrome plated
brass, flow pressure range from 1.2-5 bars for wash-out and wash-down
WC bowls
B. Western Water Closets (Wheelchair Users): Vitreous China, water closet with seat
and cover valve shall be as suitable wheel chair users. Water closet shall be 17-
1/2" high elongated with flush. Flush valve and seat shall comply with requirements
mentioned above.
C. Eastern Water Closet: Eastern toilets shall be made of porcelain-enameled cast

iron. Water closets shall be rectangular shape with 1.0 (3.76 liters) gallons flush
tank/valve water conserving type, bonded integral squatting floor plate with non-
skid foot treads, anti-splash flushing rim, integral 20 mm supply connection, and
flush valve unit. Flush valve shall comply with requirements mentioned above.
D. Wheelchair Users Lavatory: Vitreous China lavatory suitable for wheelchair users
shall be wall-hung type with front overflow complete with faucet with 4 inch arm
lever handles and pop-up drain, polished chrome.
E. Lavatories: Vitreous China counter-set or wall-mounted type as required complete

with front overflow, one-hole center faucet with knobs and pop-up drain, concealed
arm carriers, trap supply connection and stops, polished chrome.

F. Faucets:
1. Faucets shall be polished chrome-plated cast brass, spouts with constant

flow aerator, handles, pop-up waste, as selected by the Engineer.
2. Push-button controlled interchangeable head incorporating entire trap

mechanism. Wall mounted polished chrome-plated cast brass body and
push-button with internal components in corrosion-resistant, anti-liming
materials complete with automatic shut-off with anti-liming, self-cleaning
mechanism flow straightener and vandal-proof flow control. Flow duration of
around 15 seconds.
G. Infrared Electronic Public Lavatories/Ablution Faucet: Infrared controlled faucet

with mixer shall be wall mounted type polished chrome-plated cast brass body with
following characteristics:
 Automatic triggering
 6 volt battery operated
 Self-calibrating infrared control
 Infrared detection with background fade-out
 Activation distance adjustment rage of 50 mm-220 mm
 Temperature can be manually adjusted
 Fully insulated against condensation
 Size as shown on drawings or as approved by Engineer
H. Janitor Sink: shall be of size 600 x 600 mm and shall be of a single piece reinforced
polyester, furnished complete with drain fittings and supply fittings as required and
approved
I. Shower Head: Wall mounted Solid brass, polished chrome plate, 2 handle control
mixing valve for bathtub and for shower. Includes check stops; tub spout; and
shower head, arm, and all necessary fitting. Shower head material shall have
combined metallic and nonmetallic parts with fixed spray pattern.
B. Shower Receptors: Shower receptors shall be approximately 800 mm square by

150 mm high, and shall be of a single piece glass reinforced polyester with non-slip
floor finish, furnished complete with drain fittings and shower mixer fittings as
required.
J. Eye Washers: A complete assembly with eyewash fountain, piping, platform and
railing. The eye washer shall be provided with non-corrosive cleanable soft spray
head with self-closing valve and handle, bronze finish with epoxy coating, or other
approved equal materials.
K. Kitchen Sinks:
1. Kitchen sinks shall be 1.3 mm thick stainless steel type with double or single
bowl as required, 34 liter each, countertop type, self-rimming, flush fitting
deck and made for use with food waste disposers. Sink shall have 4 holes for
use with spray type hose faucet.
2. Faucets: Faucets for kitchen sinks shall be single lever type with minimum
250 mm long swing spout aerator tip, hose and spray attachment and shall
have chrome and stainless steel finish, with a 20 mm centerset spread.
Maximum flow 9 liters/minute.

L. Service Sinks: Acid-resisting enameled inside, cast iron service sink with back
wall hanger and with stainless steel rim guard. Provide complete with service
sink cast iron trap standard to wall, having acid-resisting enamel finish inside,
painted outside, with cleanout plug and strainer, and outlet for iron pipe. Provide
chrome-plated faucet suitable for the function.
M. Waterless Urinals: Wall hung, back outlet, waterless, vitreous china, designed
for liquid-trap-seal operation.
1. Fixture:
a. Standard: ASME A112.19.2/CSA B45.1, except without water supply.
b. Trap-Seal Method: Proprietary cartridge with liquid seal.
c. Outlet Size and Location: (DN 50) flange; back.
d. Trap-Sealing Liquid: Proprietary.
e. Color: White.
2. Waste Fitting:
a. Standard: ASME A112.18.2/CSA B125.2 for transition coupling, trap,

and waste pipe.
b. Size: (DN 50).
3. Support: ASME A112.6.1M, Type I, urinal carrier with fixture support

plates and coupling with seal and fixture bolts and hardware matching
fixture.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION OF FIXTURES
A. All preparation work (provision of holes, pipes etc.) shall be carried out in strict
accordance with the fixture manufacturer‟s requirements and shall be arranged
such that pipe fittings, offsets and connections are kept to a minimum. All
plumbing fixtures shall be securely fixed to the structure or their support system
and shall be plumb and level. The fixtures and their plumbing connections shall
be arranged to ensure that the connections are not subject to any strain or load
from the fixtures.
B. All fixtures shall be sealed to adjacent walls or other surface with white silicone
sealant.
3.2 INSTALLATION OF FITTINGS
A. All fittings shall be installed true and straight or where curved, shall follow
manufacturer„s recommendations to produce a smooth, fair and continuous
radius. Any fittings exhibiting tool working or surface finish damage shall be
replaced. When positioning fixtures and fittings, ensure that all items are central,
or where in a range, consistent and symmetrical about architectural finishes as
shown on the Drawings.

B. Where fittings are concealed, ensure that they are accessible for maintenance
without affecting the structure or finishes.
3.3 PROTECTION
A. Take all measures necessary to protect fixtures and fittings during construction.
New equivalent units shall replace any damaged fixtures and fittings. Repairing
of damaged units shall not be accepted.
B. All fixtures and fittings shall be finally cleaned and put into working order upon
completion of construction. The Contractor shall be fully responsible for
maintaining these items until the facility is finally handed over.
3.4 TOOLS
A. Supply any special wrenches or other devices necessary for servicing and
maintaining the fixtures and fittings. Supply 1 device for each 10 units installed.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 15453
PUMPS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION:
A. The Work under this Section shall include all labor, materials, and equipment
required to furnish and install the pumps and accessories in the location and
quantities shown on the drawings and as specified herein.
1.2 REFERENCES:
SASO 571 Performance tests for centrifugal, mixed flow and axial pumps.
SASO 1240 Submersible vertical turbine pumps - General

requirements
SASO 1241 Submersible vertical turbine pumps - Performance test
SASO 1242 Line shaft vertical turbine pumps - Performance tests
SASO 1243 Line shaft vertical turbine pumps - General requirements
SASO 1305 Water centrifugal pumps - General requirements
B. HI - Hydraulic Institute Standards
Data Book Hydraulic Institute for Engineering
C. ASPE - American Society of Plumbing Engineers
Data Book Fundamentals of Plumbing Design, Volume 1 (1983-84), Chapter

11 "Pumps"
D. ASHRAE - American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning

Engineers, Inc.
Handbook 1983 Equipment Volume, Chapter 31 "Centrifugal Pumps".
E. UL - Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.
UL 778 Motor Operated Water Pumps.
F. ASTM - American Society of Testing and Materials
ASTM A 36 Structural Steel.
ASTM A 48 Gray Iron Castings.
ASTM A 53 Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped,

Zinc-Coated (Galvanized), Welded and Seamless.
15453 -1 Pumps
ASTM A 108 Steel Bars, Carbon, Cold Finished, Standard Quality.
ASTM A 276 Stainless Steel Bars and Shapes.
ASTM A 297 Steel Castings, Iron-Chromium, Iron-Chromium-Nickel,

Heat-Resistant, for General Applications.
ASTM A 536 Ductile Iron Castings.
1.3 SUBMITTALS:
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's pump specifications, installation and start-up

instructions, and current accurate pump characteristic performance curves with
selection points clearly indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: Submit manufacturer's assembly-type shop drawings indicating

dimensions, weight loadings, required clearances, and methods of assembly of
components.
C. Wiring Diagrams: Submit manufacturer's electrical requirements for power supply

wiring to plumbing pumps. Submit manufacturer's ladder-type wiring diagrams for
interlock and control wiring. Clearly differentiate between portions of wiring that are
factory-installed and portions to be field-installed.
D. Certificate of Compliance.
E. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data for each type of pump, control, and
accessory; including "trouble-shooting" maintenance guide.
A. Deliver pumps, hardware and accessories in manufacturers original new,

protective packing.
B. Handle pumps and components carefully to prevent damage, breaking, denting

and scoring. Do not install damaged pumps or components; replace with new.
C. Store pumps and components in clean dry place. Protect from weather, dirt,
fumes, water, construction debris, and physical damage.
D. Comply with manufacturer's written rigging and installation instructions for

unloading plumbing pumps, and moving them to final location.
1.5 WARRANTY:
A. All pumping assemblies and components including pumps, motors, controls, etc.
shall be guaranteed by the system manufacturer in writing for a period of minimum
1 year from date of substantial completion against defective materials and
workmanship, including motor burn-out.
B. Water pressure booster system as a whole shall be also guaranteed in writing by

the manufacturer for a period of 1 year from the date of substantial completion
against any defects in design, materials, construction or workmanship.
15453 -2 Pumps
A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of pumps

with characteristics, sizes, and capacities required, whose products have been in
satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years, and shall be subject to
approval of Engineer.
B. Design, manufacture and install pumps in accordance with HI and UL Standards.
C. Provide electric motors and components which are listed and labeled by UL and
comply with NEMA Standards.
D. Provide pumps whose performance, under indicated operating conditions, are

certified by the pump manufacturer.
E. Single Source Responsibility: All the components and accessories shall be product
of single manufacturer.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 DOMESTIC WATER PUMPS (Potable and Non-Potable Water):
A. Furnish and install constant discharge pressure variable speed controlled by

frequency converter micro-processor automatic water pressure booster system
consisting of diaphragm type pressure tank, centrifugal pumps, power and control
panels and instrumentation. The booster pumping system skid mounted set
assembled, pre-adjusted and tested at factory on common galvanized steel base
frame with anti-vibration pads. Package type booster pumping system shall be of
type capacity as shown on the drawings. The booster pumping system shall
comply with requirements mentioned herein as minimum.
B. Pumps
• Type: Centrifugal multistage in-line/end-suction; capacity and number

as shown on drawings.
C. Pump Material Of Construction
• Pump headcover/pump base : Stainless Steel 316

• Impeller : Stainless Steel 316
• Intermediate Chamber : Stainless Steel 316
• Outer Sleeve : Stainless Steel 316
• Pump Shaft : Stainless Steel AISI 431
• Shaft Seal : Mechanical Shaft Seal
D. Motor:
• Type : Squirrel Cage T.E.F.C.

• Insulation Class : IP55 or Class F
•
o
Ambient Temperature : 50 C
15453 -3 Pumps
E. Pipe Work & Fittings
• Common suction manifold stainless steel AISI 316

• Common delivery manifolds stainless steel AISI 316
• Isolation Valves (gate valves/butterfly valves/check valves as applicable)
shall be as per pump manufacturer’s recommendations.
F. Pressure Tank:
• Material of shell : Carbon steel, cold pressed, epoxy

coated
• Diaphragm : Renewable rubber
• Max. Working Pressure : 10 bar
• Size: Minimum 2.5 minutes run time of the lead pimp:
G. Control Panel:
• Heavy Gauge Steel Control Cubicle finished in gloss enamel with

lockable door enclosure class IP54 consisting of:
• Motor Starter: front control board of the following features:
• Operating Buttons:
- Pump Status (Status display for all pumps connected)
- Zone status (status display for all zones)
- Set (set menus for control parameters).
- Setting of control parameter for zone/pumps
- Survey of fault indications.
- Jump one level backward.
- Jumps one level forward/store setting.
- Move one display up in menu
- Move one display down in menu
- Start/Stop pumps.
- LCD-display 2x24 character
- Indicator lights for operating and fault indications.
• Performance Control
- Stop function when operating at low flow.
- Automatic cascade control of the pump
- Automatic change over of the lead pumps in operation
- Manual operation.
- Free contact point for BMS (where required)
• Pump And System Monitoring Function

- Minimum and maximum limit for the valve
- Pre-pressure measurement
- Motor protection
- Clock program: One main circuit breaker doorlock
• Circuit For Automatic Operation Including:

- PFU control unit
- One AUTO. Circuit breaker for each pump
- One circuit breaker pilot control.
- Three (one) contactor for each pump in star delta (DOL) starter.
15453 -4 Pumps
- One contactor for each pump in star delta starter – switch to VLT
- One contactor with delay timer for each pump
- Over load relay for each pump in star delta starter only
- A set of level switch for dry running protection
- One pressure sensor connected to the delivery manifold
- One VFD for speed control of the lead pump
- Fan and outlet filter for cooling VFD
2.2 IRRIGATION WATER PUMPS (Treated Sewage Effluent and Non-Potable Water):
A. Furnish and install constant speed variable flow automatic water pressure booster
system consisting of diaphragm type pressure tank, centrifugal pumps, power and
control panels and instrumentation. The booster pumping system skid mounted
set assembled, pre-adjusted and tested at factory on common galvanized steel
base frame. Package type booster pumping system shall be of type capacity as
shown on the drawings. The booster pumping system shall comply with
requirements mentioned herein as minimum.
B. Pumps
• Type: Centrifugal multistage in-line/end-suction; capacity and number as

shown on drawings.
C. Pump Material Of Construction
• Pump headcover / pump base: Cast Iron GG25

• Impeller : Stainless Steel 316
• Intermediate Chamber : Stainless Steel 316
• Outer Sleeve : Stainless Steel 316
• Pump Shaft : Stainless Steel AISI 431
• Shaft Seal : Mechanical Shaft Seal
D. Motor:
• Type : Squirrell Cage T.E.F.C.

• Insulation Class : IP55 or Class F
•
o
Ambient Temperature : 50 C
E. Pipe Work & Fittings
• Common suction manifold stainless steel AISI 316

• Common delivery manifolds stainless steel AISI 316
• Isolation Valves (gate valves/butterfly valves/check valves as applicable)
shall be as per pump manufacturer’s recommendations.
F. Pressure Tank:
• Material of shell : Carbon steel, cold pressed, epoxy coated

• Diaphragm : Renewable rubber
• Max. Working Pressure : 10 bar
• Size : Minimum 2.5 minutes run time of the lead
pimp:
15453 -5 Pumps
G. Control Panel:
• Heavy Gauge Steel Control Cubicle finished in gloss enamel with

lockable door enclosure class IP54 consisting of:
• Motor Starter: front control board of the following features:
• Operating Buttons:
- Pump Status (Status display for all pumps connected)
- Zone status (status display for all zones)
- Set (set menus for control parameters).
- Setting of control parameter for zone/pumps
- Survey of fault indications.
- Jump one level backward.
- Jumps one level forward/store setting.
- Move one display up in menu
- Move one display down in menu
- Start/Stop pumps.
- LCD-display 2x24 character
- Indicator lights for operating and fault indications.
• Performance Control
- Stop function when operating at low flow.
- Automatic cascade control of the pump
- Automatic change over of the lead pumps in operation
- Manual operation.
- Free contact point for BMS (where required)
• Pump and System Monitoring Function

- Minimum and maximum limit for the valve
- Pre-pressure measurement
- Motor protection
- Clock program: One main circuit breaker doorlock.
• Circuit For Automatic Operation Including:

- PFU control unit
- One AUTO. Circuit breaker for each pump
- One circuit breaker pilot control.
- Three (one) contactor for each pump in star delta (DOL) starter.
- One contactor for each pup in star delta starter – switch to VLT
- One contactor with delay timer for each pump
- Over load relay for each pump in star delta starter only.
- A set of level switch for dry running protection.
- One pressure sensor connected to the delivery manifold.
2.3 HOT WATER CIRCULATING PUMPS:
A. Provide, quite, in-line, centrifugal, single-stage, direct coupled, hot water

circulating pumps with mechanical seals and rated for 125 psig (860 kPa) working
o o
pressure and 225 F (107 C) continuous water temperature. Provide all required
auxiliary apparatus and controls to complete the installation. Pumps shall be of
type, capacity and number as shown on the drawings.
15453 -6 Pumps
B. Pump shaft shall be of stainless steel with mechanical shaft seals having faces of
tungsten carbide. Pump housing shall be of cast iron with a spiral outlet, and shall
be provided with interchangeable EPDM rubber seal ring. Stainless steel impeller
shall have double-curved blades with smooth surfaces and fitted to shaft by
means of split cone and nut. Motor shall be totally enclosed fan-cooled (TEFC)
type complying with IEC and DIN or equivalent standards, with insulation Class F
o
and maximum ambient temperature 40 C.
2.4 SUBMERSIBLE DRAINAGE PUMPS (SUMP PUMPS):
A. Furnish and install pumps with sealing flanges, guides, mounting plates, supports,
lifting chains and hooks, switches, control boxes, discharge piping, etc. as may be
required for complete and operating systems.
B. Submersible drainage pumps shall be of type, capacity and number as shown on

the drawings.
C. A separate mounting plate shall be furnished with each pump, including guide rack
support and discharge elbow. All parts shall be coated with tar base epoxy paint.
Lifting chain and guide shall be in stainless steel 316.
D. Provide a double door access frame of fabricated cast iron coated inside and
outside with tar base epoxy paint. Frame shall support guide rails and junction
box. Covers shall be provided with lifting handle and hold-open latch. Pump
discharge shall be through the frame.
E. Provide and install control panel with NEMA 3 weatherproof enclosure for final
connection by electrical contractor. A circuit breaker and magnetic starter shall be
provided for each pump along with alternating relay, interlock relay, switches, run
lights, alarm bell, NEMA 4 junction with mounting bracket.
F. Provide and install sealed float type mercury switches. Float switches shall
control: 1. Pump(s) On - 2. Pump(s) Off - 3. High water alarm.
2.5 SUBMERSIBLE SEWAGE PUMPS:
A. Refer to Section 02730 – SEWERAGE SYSTEM.
2.6 FIRE PUMPS:
A. Electric Driven Fire Pump:
1. Furnish as shown on plans, the automatic electric motor driven centrifugal

horizontal split-case fire pumps with auxiliary apparatus to make a
complete fire pump installation in accordance with the codes of the
National Board of Fire Underwriters. Pumps shall meet NFPA 20
requirements and shall be UL Listed, FM approved, type, capacity and
number as shown on the drawings.
2. The pump shall be having design capacity and static head as shown on
the drawings and operating at a rate of 1770 rpm. The pump shall be
furnished complete with the following fittings: discharge tee, hose valve
head, hose valves, discharge gauges, 19 mm casing relief valve, umbrella
clock and capacity plates.
15453 -7 Pumps
3. Electric Motor: The motor shall be TEFC type with Class F insulation.
Voltage and rating shall be as shown on drawings or as required.
The motor locked rotor current shall not exceed the values stated in NFPA
20. The motor shall be constructed so that the total hydraulic and static
thrust of the pump's rotating assembly can be carried by the motor thrust
bearings. The motor shall mount directly on the pump discharge head
assembly with a registered fit for correct shaft alignment. The motor shall
be equipped with a top drive coupling and nut for axial adjustment of the
pump impellers and shall have a non-reverse ratchet to prevent the pump
backspin.
4. Fire Pump Controller: Controller shall be UL listed and FM approved with

transfer switch combined manual and automatic; reduce voltage starting.
The controller shall be equipped with a line fused switch of an interrupting
capacity as required, a timer and pressure regulator having a range of 0.30
lb with pressure setting established at time of field acceptance test. An
instantaneous recycling running period timer to prevent too frequent
automatic starts of fire pump motor, set to keep the motor in operation for
3 minutes on auto-start and shall be interwired with pressure regulator.
Provide an automatic transfer switch.
5. Fire Pump Alarm Panel: Wired to fire pump controller to provide current
failure and pump operating alarms with visible and audible indicating
signals.
6. The pump driver, controls and necessary attachments specified herein

shall be purchased under a unit contract from a single pump manufacturer
or his representative, stipulating compliance with these specifications. Fire
pump shall be laboratory tested with a certified performance test curve
furnished to Engineer at the time of field acceptance test. Upon award of
contract, the manufacturer shall furnish the required number of pump unit
dimension prints, control cubicle dimension prints and schematic wiring
diagrams, all contained in an indexed booklet for the Engineer's approval.
The pump manufacturer shall provide the services of a qualified field

engineer to advise the Contractor on the proper installation of equipment,
make necessary mechanical adjustments and align fire pump flexible
coupling. The pump manufacturer shall arrange and conduct final field
acceptance test and provide all required test equipment including UL
playpipe hose, pilot, tachometer and clamp-on ammeter.
B. Jockey Pump:
1. The pump shall be vertical in-line centrifugal pump and shall be furnished
with threaded discharge outlet, type, capacity and number as shown on the
drawings. Motor shall be TEFC type with Class F insulation, voltage and
rating as shown on drawings or as required. Jockey pump controller shall
be UL Listed, FM approved..
2. Jockey Pump Control: To include a combination magnetic, across-the-line

type starter with fused disconnect switch, thermal over-current protection
and a hand-off-automatic selector switch in the enclosure. Control cubicle
shall incorporate an adjustable pressure switch with gauge clock.
15453 -8 Pumps
3. Pressure Gauge: Provide a 115 m dial brass case pressure gauge on
discharge pipe near jockey pump.
4. Relief Valve: Install a 19 mm relief valve on discharge line of jockey pump

to relieve excess pressure to nearest drain.
C. Diesel Engine Driven Fire Pump
1. Unit: to comprise diesel engine driven fire pump supplied complete as a

packaged unit with engine, fuel tank, hand operated diaphragm pump for
filling fuel tank, fuel pipework, automatic starting equipment with
automatic transfer switch and electric control panel all mounted on steel
skid type base for permanent mounting with foundation bolt holes and
adequate grout volume. Unit shall meet NFPA 20 requirements and shall
be UL Listed, FM approved, type, capacity and number as shown on the
drawings. The fire pump shall be capable of delivering not les than 150%
of rated flow at not less than 65% rated head. The shut off (no flow) head
shall not exceed 140% of rated head.
2. Pump to be horizontal in-line centrifugal type specifically labeled for fire

service. The total installed length of the pump from bottom of base plate
to bottom of suction inlet manifold shall be as shown on drawings. The
pump discharge head shall provide rigid mounting support for the
complete pump assembly. The pump line shaft bearings shall be water
lubricated by the liquid being pumped. Pump bowl assemblies shall
include cast iron bowls and bronze impellers and shall be submerged as
recommended in NFPA 20. The pump shall be installed with a cast or
fabricated non-ferrous metal strainer having a free area of not less than
four times the suction inlet area. Strainer openings shall be sized to
restrict the passage of objects 12 mm sphere size.
Pump shaft shall be stainless with bronze bearings and strainer shall be
brass.
Fire pump fittings which are subjected to pump discharge pressure shall
be ANSI 250 pound rating.
3. Pump Support to be substantial cast iron driving head is to be provided

to ensure rigid support for pump and bearings.
4. Accessories for pump to have automatic air release valve on casing;

discharge pressure gauge; drain plugs and continuous by-pass pipe with
orifice from pump discharge nozzle back to suction source to protect
pump from overheating when running with closed discharge and flow
meter.
5. Diesel Engine to be water cooled, with adequate power to drive pump at

rated speed continuously on full load at site elevation for six hours and
with dry type air filter on air intake. Engine Starting System to be
automatic, comprising two sets of 12 V batteries mounted on bedplate,
battery powered starting motor of axial displacement type, twin starter
relays, battery charging system and automatic starting control panel
resiliently mounted on engine bedplate. Each set of batteries to provide
ten consecutive starts of cold engine under full compression without
recharging.
15453 -9 Pumps
6. Control Panel to be housed in dust and damp protected cabinet and fully
connected and tested prior to shipment, requiring only simple external
connections to main system switch and to necessary AC supply to
operate battery charging system. Control panel is to incorporate the
following.
a. Automatic ten attempt engine starting circuit initiated by signal

from Main Failure Panel in electric control panel of main fire
pumps
b. Triple charging circuit capable of charging both sets of batteries

simultaneously
c. Ammeter to indicate charging current being supplied continuously

lit AC indicating light relays and timers including connections for
remote alarm system
d. Audible warning device automatically activated if engine fails to

start after ten attempts
e. Water pressure switch fitted to pump to inhibit automatic start

sequence on system start-up
f. Low suction pressure switch fitted to pump suction to prevent unit

from starting unless there is a minimum head of 0.3 m of water
on pump suction and to stop unit if pump looses suction.
g. Time clock for automatic test.
7. Engine Fuel System: to include the following:
a. Fuel tank of capacity for six hours running at full load
b. Hand operated fuel line valve lockable in the open position
c. Sediment trap
d. Fuel level gauge
e. Cleaning and inspection hole on tank
f. Hand operated fuel transfer pump for filling tank
g. Fuel filter between fuel tank and engine fuel pump
h. Air bleeding valve
i. Interconnecting fuel piping.
j. Low fuel level switch.
8. Engine Exhaust System: to include the following:
a. Residential type silencer
15453 -10 Pumps

b. Short length of flexible exhaust pipe for direct fitting to exhaust
out
c. Necessary lengths of steel exhaust pipe. Exhaust pipe to be

insulated inside the pump room.
9. Engine Accessories: to include standard tool kit, set of spare parts,

installation drawings, operating and maintenance instructions and circuit
diagram.
10. Fuel: Diesel oil. Fuel tank and piping shall comply with requirements of
Section 15483 – FUEL OIL SYSTEM; sizes as shown on drawings.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION:
A. Examine area and conditions under which pumps are to be installed. Do not
proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have corrected in manner
acceptable to Engineer.
B. Installation shall be done in accordance with NFPA 20, the manufacturer's written
instructions, and as specified herein. Provided remote alarm and flow meter for fire
pumps as per NFPA 20.
C. Provide access around the pumps for service as indicated or required, but in no
case less than that recommended by the manufacturer.
D. Unless indicated otherwise, install pumps on minimum of 100 mm high concrete

base equal or greater than 3 times total weight of pumps and motors, with anchor
bolts poured in place.
E. Piping Connection: Refer to the relevant Sections of Division 15 - MECHANICAL.

Provide ring, valves, gauges, accessories, supports and flexible connection as
shown on the drawings or as required.
F. Electrical Wiring: Refer to the relevant sections of Division 16 - ELECTRICAL for

materials and installation. Install electrical devices furnished by the manufacturer
but not specified to be factory-mounted.
3.2 SHOP TESTING:
A. Pump performance tests shall be conducted in accordance with Hydraulic Institute

test codes as described in HI E35.01, E37.01 and E39.01. In addition, each pump
shall be tested at five points of operation from shut-off head to run-out condition,
including the guaranteed pump's performance point.
B. All pumps shall be hydrostatically tested for leaks at 1.5 times the design
pressure. There shall be no leakage during the one hour test period.
C. The Contractor shall submit manufacturer's test certificates, including test data to
show that pump meets specifications.
15453 -11 Pumps

3.3 FIELD TESTING:
A. Field performance test of all pumps shall be witnessed by the Engineer.
B. Field testing shall be in accordance with following requirements:
1. All pumps, except for fire pumps, shall be tested in accordance with ANSI
B73.1 and ANSI B73.2.
2. Fire pumps shall be tested in accordance with the requirements of NFPA

20.
C. All tests shall be subject to approval of the Engineer.
3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING:
A. Check alignment, and where necessary, realign shafts or motors and pumps
within recommended tolerances by manufacturer.
B. Start-Up: Lubricate pumps before start-up. Start-up in accordance with

C. Cleaning: Clean factory-finished surfaces. Repair any marred or scratched

surfaces with manufacturer's touch-up paint.
END OF SECTION
15453 -12 Pumps

SECTION 15483
FUEL OIL SYSTEM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION:
A. Work included in this Section includes the providing of labor, materials, equipment
and services necessary for a complete and safe installation of complete fuel oil
system as shown on the drawings and as specified herein.
B. Fuel oil system with piping, valves, fittings, fuel storage tank, day tank, collecting
pans, fuel transfer pumps, controls and alarm actuators.
1.2 REFERENCES:

ASTM A 234 Piping Fittings of Wrought Carbon Steel and Alloy Steel for
Moderate and Elevated Temperatures.
ASTM D 4021 Glass Fiber-Reinforced Polyester Underground Petroleum

Storage Tanks.
B. ANSI - American National Standard Institute
ANSI B1.20.1 Pipe Threads.
ANSI B16.1 Cast Iron Flanges and Flanged Fittings, Classes 25, 125,
250 and 800.
ANSI B16.3 Malleable-Iron Threaded Fittings, Classes 150 and 300.
ANSI B16.5 Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings, Steel Nickel Alloy and
Other Special Alloys.
ANSI B16.22 Wrought Copper and Copper Alloy Solder-Joint Pressure

Fittings.
ANSI B16.39 Threaded Pipe Unions, Malleable-Iron, Classes 150, 250

and 300.
C. AWS - American Welding Society
AWS A5.8 Specifications for Brazing Filler Metal.
D. NFPA - National Fire Protection Association
NFPA 30 Flammable and Combustible Liquids Code.
NFPA 31 Standard for the Installation of Oil Burning Equipment.

Fuel Oil System
15483-1
E. UL - Underwriter's Laboratories
UL 343 Standard for Pumps for Oil-Burning Appliances.
UL 567 Pipe Connectors for Flammable and Combustible Liquids.
UL File (MH-1316) Standard for Glass-Fiber-Reinforced Polyester

Underground Petroleum Storage Tanks for Petroleum
Products.
1.3 SUBMITTALS:
A. Submit shop drawings and product data for the following:
1. For each system, provide dimensioned detail piping layout.
2. For pans, provide size and capacity, connections and support and
installation details.
3. Pumps, including pump curves.
B. Submit wiring diagrams for power and control systems, differentiating between
Manufacturer-installed wiring and field-installed wiring.
C. Maintenance data for oil transfer equipment shall be provided for inclusion in the
building operation and Maintenance Manual.
A. Provide systems in accordance with the diesel generator Manufacturer's

recommendations.
B. Fabrication and installation of any portion of Emergency Diesel Generator

Systems shall be in compliance with diesel generator Manufacturer, National Fire
Protection Association and all authorities having jurisdiction.
C. Comply with provisions of NFPA 31 - Standard for the Installation of Oil Burning
Equipment, for oil piping materials and components, oil piping installations, and
inspection, and testing of fuel oil piping systems.
D. UL Compliance: Provide fuel oil piping components and storage tanks which are
listed and labeled by UL.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PIPING MATERIALS:
A. Piping for fuel oil system shall be black steel pipe, seamless conforming to ASTM
A 53, Schedule 80, with beveled ends.
B. Malleable-Iron Threaded Fittings: ANSI B16.3, Class 150, standard pattern, for
threaded joints. Treads shall confirm to ANSI B1.20.1.
C. Steel Fittings: ASTM A234, seamless, for welded joints.

Fuel Oil System
15483-2
D. All black steel piping shall have a painted finish as per the requirements of Section
09900 - PAINTING, color shall be as selected by the Engineer.
2.2 FITTINGS AND ACCESSORIES:
Valves, fittings, flanges, joints and accessories shall be as follows:
A. For diesel oil, welded type minimum 125 lb wsp, (except as noted).
B. Check valves shall be spring loaded type.
C. Fittings, flanges, joints and accessories shall be as follows:
1. Steel Fittings: ASTM A 234, seamless or welded, for welded joints.
2. Steel Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ANSI B16.5, including bolts, nuts, and
gaskets of the following material group, end connection and facing:
a. Material Group : 1.1.

b. End Connections : Butt welding.
c. Facings : Raised Face.
3. Minimum 175 lb wsp for vent from tank.
D. Fill line and test well terminals shall be cast iron body, cadmium plated body with
brass cap and lock
E. Vent terminals shall be full size of vent line, threaded, recessed cast bronze vent
brick, with double-brick size and weatherproof vent cap. In the fuel oil supply line
quick-closing, spring loaded, lever gate valve with fusible link arranged to close the
valve automatically when the link melts.
F. Flexible connectors shall be of all bronze construction with bronze wire braid
covering. For insulated piping, provide insulation over flexible hose before the
application of bronze wire braid and insulation shall be as specified for service.
Type and pressure rating shall be as recommended by Manufacturer to suit
particular service.
G. Y-Pattern Strainers: 125 psig working pressure, cast-iron body conforming to

ASTM A 126, Class B, size as shown on drawings.
2.3 FUEL OIL STORAGE TANK:
A. Fuel Oil Storage Tank shall be factory fabricated glass fiber reinforced polyester
(GFRP) underground fuel oil storage tank of capacity as shown on drawings.
Tank shall be horizontal cylindrical with spherical heads and designed for
operation at atmospheric pressure. Tank suitable for diesel fuel shall be
constructed, tested and installed in accordance with NFPA recommendations and
comply with all regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Tank shall meet the design loading conditions when buried in ground due to
external hydrostatic pressure, surface H-20 axle loads (32,000 lbs/axle),
internal loads due to 5 psi test pressure in annular space and primary tank,
storage of fuel oil, and designed to support accessory equipment such as
ladders, drop tubes, etc.
Fuel Oil System
15483-3
2. Tank shall be vented to atmosphere.
3. Accessories: Tank Manufacturer shall provide the following accessories:
a. GFRP anchor straps.
b. One carbon steel ladder extending to bottom of tank with bolts, nuts,
lugs.
c. Flanged manway shall be 22 inch I.D. complete with UL listed gaskets,

bolts and cover. Each manway cover, shall have three 4 inch NPT
fittings welded in place.
d. Manway riser pipe shall be 48 inch diameter and 42 inch high shall
provide access to each manway lid.
e. Steel 4 inch diameter NPT threaded fittings for piping connections for
suction, return, vent, gage, fill and two spares.
f. 4 inch diameter GFRP fill tube, factory installed and terminating 4 inch
from bottom of tank.
g. Steel lifting lugs.
h. UL certification plate shall be affixed to the tank.
4. Installation and Tests: Underground tank shall be installed in accordance

with NFPA and written installation instructions of the tank manufacturer.
Tank shall be set on reinforced concrete slab with pea gravel bed and shall
be covered with pea gravel as shown on the drawings. Pea gravel shall be
naturally rounded aggregate, clean and free flowing, conforming to the
written requirements of the tank Manufacturer. After tank is set in place, test
the tank by applying internal air pressure of 5 psig, using soap suds to locate
leaks. Repair leaks in accordance with the instruction of the manufacturer
and under the on-site supervision of Manufacturer's representative. Retest
until all leaks are repaired. Tests shall be witnessed by the Engineer. Prior
to backfilling, clean and coat all metal parts which will be below grade
(including straps, bolts, piping) with protective coats of coal tar base pitch
using quantities and methods recommended by the Manufacturer of the
coating for underground service. Backfill around the tank as recommended
by the tank manufacturer. Backfill material shall be pea gravel identical to
the bed material. Do not place fluid in tanks until back filling is complete,
piping connections to tanks are complete, and tanks have been inspected by
the Engineer. Keep tank excavation dewatered.
5. Provide a digital indication of the actual tank content in gallons complete with
gauging sensors. Panel shall be factory prewired, UL listed, conform to
NEMA enclosures and supplied by the tank manufacturer.
Fuel Oil System

15483-4
2.4 DAY TANK:
A. General: Shall be single wall, non-pressure type, horizontal welded steel tank,
factory-fabricated and tested, and suitable for above ground installation. The
storage tank shall be constructed in accordance with National Board of Fire
Underwriters requirements, and shall bear UL labels. For the capacity of day tank
refer to Section 16231 - STANDBY ENGINE GENERATORS.
B. Fabrication: Tank shall be fabricated for operation at atmospheric pressures to

store liquids with specific gravities of 1.1. Fabricate shell and head joints, lifting
lugs, manholes, supports and pipe connections in accordance with UL
requirements.
C. Tank Accessories: Tank shall be provided with manufacturers standard

accessories, including gasketed filling capes, supply and drain pipe connections,
level gage, vent pipe, anchor straps and lifting lugs.
D. Corrosion Protection System: Tank and the piping shall be protected by properly
engineered, manufacturer's standard, installed and maintained corrosion
protection system in accordance with the requirements of Steel Tank Institute, for
intended use. In addition to above the external surfaces of the tank, ladder and
steel platform shall have manufacturers standard painted finish.
2.5 DIESEL FUEL-OIL TRANSFER PUMP:
A. Pumps shall be submersible turbine pump suitable for pumping diesel fuel. The
pumps shall be provided with:
1. Conduit junction box

2. Compression seal for top and bottom of electrical conduit, provide a
positively safety lock against any product leakage into the wiring areas.
3. Syphon check valve and syphon tube
4. Positive acting internal check valves.
5. Built in expansion relief valve
6. Motors shall have hermetically sealed windings encased in stainless steel
7. Impellers shall be statistically balanced for silent, trouble free operation.
B. Pumps shall conform to UL 343, and be UL listed. Pump shall be of type and
capacity as shown on the drawings.
2.6 CONTROLS, ALARMS AND OIL TANK GAUGES
A. For day tank provide level controls and alarm actuators including level indicator,
Level control to operate fuel-oil transfer pump on and off.
B. For collecting pan provide pump cut-off and alarm including diesel fuel-oil transfer
pump cut-off.
2.7 OPERATION:
A. Day tank level control and alarm: Double-throw selector switch for active pump
selection. Level controls shall automatically start oil transfer pump at low level and
stop at high-level settings to maintain oil supply in day tank. Alarm actuators shall
sound alarm when oil level in tank falls below low-level pump cut-in setting or rises
above high-level pump cutout setting.
Fuel Oil System
15483-5
B. Collecting pan pump cutoff and alarm: High-level pump cutoff and alarm
automatically stops oil transfer pumps and sounds alarm when oil reaches
high-level setting in collecting pan.
2.8 VALVES:
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION:
A. Refer to Section 15050 - BASIC PIPING MATERIALS AND METHODS for basic
piping installation instructions. Refer to the drawings for further details. Use steel
pipe with threaded joints and fittings for 2 inch and smaller, and with welded joints
for 2-1/2 inch and larger.
B. Provide Antisyphon valves at high points of suction lines from oil tanks also
provide bronze valves with dash pot.
C. Provide relief valves at discharge of oil pumps with outlets piped back to
respective storage tanks.
D. Paint underground (where required) black steel piping with 2 heavy coats of
asphaltum paint. Coating with a proper protective tape, of the appropriate
specification shall also be acceptable. Underground piping shall be installed in
PVC pipe sleeve.
E. Pumps: Provide line size basket type strainer at motor-driven pump suction inlets.
Diesel oil transfer pumps shall be arranged so that selected active pump starts
and stops automatically in response to level controller on day tank. Hand oil pump
shall be installed in parallel with motor-driven pump.
A. Test oil piping in accordance with NFPA 31. Remake leaking joints and
connections using new materials.
B. Tank shall be pressure tested in conformance with local ordinances and

Manufacturer's written instructions. Pumps, level controls and alarms shall be
operational tested. Replace damaged or malfunctioning controls and equipment.
Assist in performing operational test of entire emergency power system.
END OF SECTION
Fuel Oil System

15483-6
SECTION 15486
FUEL GAS SYSTEM
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. The Work under this section consist of furnishing and installing the fuel gas
piping network and gas storage tank as indicated on the drawings and
specified in this section. The drawings indicate the extent and general
arrangement of the equipment capacity of storage.
1.2 REFERENCES
ASTM A 53 Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc Coated (Galvanized),

Welded and Seamless.
ANSI B16.1 Cast Iron Flanges and Flanged Fittings, Classes 25, 125, 250
and 800.
ANSI B16.39 Threaded Pipe Unions, Malleable-Iron, Classes 150, 250 and
300.
C. NFPA - National Fire Protection Association
NFPA 70 National Electrical Code
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit shop drawings and product data for the following:
2. For gas tanks, provide size and capacity, connections and support and
installation details.
B. Maintenance data for gas transfer equipment shall be provided for inclusion in
the building operation and Maintenance Manual.
15486-1 Fuel Gas System

1.4 Quality Assurance
A. Equipment: All items of equipment shall be of the best quality used for the
purpose in commercial practice and shall be the products of reputable
manufacturers. Each major component of equipment shall have the
manufacturer’s name, address and catalogue number on a plate securely
affixed in a conspicuous place.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 Fuel Gas System:
A. Fuel Gas Storage Tank: L.P. gas storage tank shall be of size as indicated on
drawings and shall be as manufactured by the National Gas Company. Tank
shall be of structural steel suitable for external installation, and shall be
provided with manufacturer’s standard corrosion protection coating. Tank shall
be provided with necessary appurtenances for immediate installation and
service connection.
B. Aboveground Pipe and Fittings: All piping and fittings shall be Galvanized-
Seamless-Carbon steel-ASTM A53 Class B schedule 80, with beveled ends
wrapped in a tape.
C. Underground Pipes: Shall be same pipe as specified in clause 2.01 B and

pipes shall be enclosed in PVC sleeve.
D. Flexible Connectors: Flexible connectors shall conform to ANSI Z21.45.
E. Valves
1. Valves shall be of iron body plug type conforming to API 6D, including air
seat test.
2. Valves 38 mm and smaller shall be either lubricated or non-lubricated

type suitable for 8.625 kg/cm2 working pressure.
3. Valves 51 mm and larger shall be lubricated type and suitable for 12.075
kg/cm2 working pressure.
4. Service cocks shall be plug cock type iron body brass core with 8.625
2
kg/cm rating.
F. Pressure Regulators
1. Pressure regulators shall conform to ANSI Z21.18, shall be of iron or

steel body and suitable for the operation intended.
2. Regulators shall be adjustable for changing the downstream pressure

within reasonable limits.
3. Regulators shall be adjustable with automatic loading, and shall have

automatic pressure relief and automatic shut-off valve.

4. Regulators shall be adjusted for an outlet pressure of 127 mm to 203 mm
water column for manufactured and natural gases and 254 mm to 305
mm of water column for liquified petroleum gas.
5. Quick Disconnect Couplings: Quick disconnect couplings shall conform to

ANSI Z21.41.
6. Automatic Thermal Trip Valves: Automatic thermal trip valves shall be

bronze valves of required sizes and shall be installed after the primary
regulator at the gas tank.
7. Installation of gas system shall conform to NFPA No. 54.
G. Electrical Equipment:
1. The electrical equipment and wiring shall be installed in accordance with

the National Electrical Code, ANSI\NFPA 70, for hazard locations (Article
500, sections 501-1 through 501-17, Class 1, Division 2).
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 Tank Installation:
A. Tank shall be set died on reinforced concrete mats and saddles and held
securely in place with steel anchor straps as shown on the drawings. Grout
shall be used to seal the tank firmly in place. All metal straps and anchors,
except for the portions embedded in concrete, shall be painted as specified for
storage tank.
3.2 Tests
A. Upon completion and prior to acceptance of the installation, the contractor shall
subject the fuel storage tank to such operating tests as may be required by the
Engineer to demonstrate satisfactory functional and operating efficiency of the
system. Tests shall be the expense of the contractor.
B. All joints in pipe lines shall remain uncovered until the pipe has been tested
under a pneumatic pressure of 15 pound per square inch. The open ends of
the pipe shall be capped instead of relaying on valves for testing. When all
joints are found to be tight, and have been approved by the Engineer, the test
may be stopped and backfilling command. Test shall be performed by and at
the expense of the Contractor.
3.3 Cleaning and painting
A. Painting: After cleaning a primer coating, consisting of processed coat-tar pitch

and refined coal-tar oils suitably blended so as to be applied by brush or spray,
shall be applied to the outside of tank only. The primer shall contain no highly
violate solvents or added pigments and shall dry hard within 6 hours. The
primer shall not be heated, but the temperature when applied shall be 10°C to
270°C. After the prime coat has become hard to the touch, an enamel coat of a
specially processed coal-tar pitch combined with an enter mineral filler shall be
applied hot, in a layer not less than. 1.5 mm thick and in accordance with the
manufacturer's recommendations. The enamel shall not dag or flow for a
vertical surface when exposed to an atmospheric test temperature of 71°C and
shall not become brittle, crack, check, or peal when exposed to an atmospheric
temperature of 29°C. one coat of primer and one coat of enamel shall be
applied to the tank unless additional protection is required and approved by the
Engineer.
3.4 Guarantee
A. All equipment to be furnished under this section shall be guaranteed for a

period of One year form the date of acceptance therefore, either for beneficial
use or final acceptance, whichever is earlier, against any defective materials,
design and workmanship. Upon receipt of the notice from the Owner of failure
of any part of the guaranteed equipment during the guaranty period, the
affected part of parts shall be replaced promptly by and at the expense of the
Contractor.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 15489
COMPRESSED AIR AND VACUUM SYSTEM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION:
A. Work included in this Section includes supply and installation of complete

compressed air and vacuum system as shown on the drawings and as specified
herein.
1.2 REFERENCES:

250 and 800.
ANSI B16.22 Wrought Copper and Copper Alloy Solder-Joint Pressure

Fittings.
300.
ANSI B40.1 Gauges - Pressure Indicating Dial Type – Elastic Element
C. AWS - American Welding Society
AWS A5.8 Specifications for Brazing Filler Metal.
D. ASME - American Society of Mechanical Engineers
ASME BPVC SEC VIII D1 Boiler and pressure vessel code: section VIII
pressure vessels division 1
Compressed Air and

15489-1
Vacuum System
ASME BPVC SEC IX Boiler and pressure vessel code: section IX
qualifications standard for welding and bracing
procedures, welders, brazers, and welding, and
brazing operators
E. MSS - Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry,

Inc.
MSS SP-58 Pipe Hangers and Supports Materials, Design And

Manufacture
MSS SP-69 Pipe Hangers and Support Selection and Application
MSS SP-80 Bronze Gate, Globe, Angle and Check Valves
MSS SP-84 Valves – Socket Welding and Threaded Ends
MSS SP-89 Pipe Hangers And Supports Fabrication and Installation

Practices
F. NEMA - National Electrical Manufacturers Association
NEMA ICS 2 Industrial control devices, controllers and assemblies
NEMA ICS 6 Enclosures for industrial controls and systems
NEMA MG 1 Mmotors and generators
G. SASO - Saudi Arabian Standards Organization
SASO 326 Industrial safety and health regulations – Part 6: Equipment

– Sections 6.4, 6.5, 6.6 – Tanks, pressure vessels, boilers
and compressed gas equipment.
1.3 SUBMITTALS:
A. Submit shop drawings for the following:
B. Manufacturer’s product data and test reports for receiver and compressor
C. Operation and maintenance manual for all equipment.
A. Design, fabrication, installation, and testing of compressed air and vacuum

systems shall conform to ANSI B31.l, ASME BPVC SEC VIII Dl, and ASME BPVC
SEC IX or equivalent, except as specified otherwise.
Compressed Air and

15489-2
Vacuum System
B. Compressors or other equipment shall riot discharge compressed air and vacuum
system to the piping systems above 40C unless approved the contracting officer.
aftercoolers or other devices shall be provided” to comply with the temperature
restriction.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PIPING MATERIALS:
A. Piping shall be galvanized steel pipe, seamless, conforming to ASTM A 53,

Schedule 80, with beveled ends.
B. Malleable-Iron Threaded Fittings: ANSI B16.3, Class 150, standard pattern, for
threaded joints. Treads shall confirm to ANSI B1.20.1.
C. Steel Fittings: ASTM A234, seamless, for welded joints.
2.2 PACKAGED AIR COMPRESSORS
A. Factory-assembled, wired, piped, and tested; electric-motor-driven; air-cooled;

continuous-duty air compressors that deliver dry and oil-free air of quality equal to
intake air. Air compressors shall be oil-free rotary screw type, air cooled, electric
motor driven, continuous duty, two stage complete with electric motor drive and
operating and safety controls. Air compressor shall be totally self-contained,
package type, ready for start. The unit shall be pre-wired and base-plate
mounted, with star-delta-starter and control panel, factory tested and shipped
complete. Configuration and dimensions of the air compressors shall be
compatible with the indicated allocated space. Sound level shall not exceed
80dBa one meter from the unit. Stainless steel air seals and labyrinth oil seals
shall be provided to avoid air and oil leakages. Critical components shall be built
from non-corrosive materials. Rotors and housings hall have UtraCoat protection.
o
Compressor shall be designed to operate on minimum 46 C ambient
temperature. Capacity and number of units shall be as indicated on drawings.
B. The air compressors shall be complete with heavy duty industrial dry type air filter,
air receiver, built-in intercooler/aftercooler, dryer and the necessary instruments
and valving. The minimum safety control alarms shall include:
• High Lubrication Oil Temperature

• High Bearing Temperature
• High Discharge Air Temperature
• High Discharge Air Pressure
• High Motor Temperature
• High Intercooler Air Temperature
Standby Compressor Controls: The standby compressor shall start automatically

upon any one of the following events:
• Low pressure in the air receiver

• Failure of duty compressor
• Operation of manual start switch
Compressed Air and

15489-3
Vacuum System
General Alarms: Following alarms shall be provided:
• High pressure in the air receiver

• Shutdown of duty compressor
• Start of standby compressor while the duty compressor is on
• Low air header pressure
C. Air compressor shall have both automatic and manual start capabilities. A manual
switch shall be provided to permit selection of either of the compressor as the
duty compressor.
D. Instrumentation: Manufacturer’s standard instrumentation including receiver

pressure gage, discharge-air pressure gage, air-filter maintenance indicator, hour
meter, compressor discharge-air and coolant temperature gages, and control
transformer.
E. A check valve shall be installed between each compressor discharge and first
isolation valve.
F. All equipment of the compressed air and vacuum system shall be capable of
being isolated by isolation valve.
G. Compressed air and vacuum system shall be interfaced with BMS system.
2.3 AIR RECEIVER
A. The air receiver shall be the vertical type of steel construction per ASME Boiler and
Pressure Vessel Code (BPVC) Section VIII labeled and rated for working pressure
at least as high as highest discharge pressure of connected compressors; and
bearing appropriate code symbols and equipped with an ASME rated pressure
safety relief valve, service valves, pressure gage and automatic float type air valve.
Exterior and interior shall be sand blasted to SSSP SP1O. Lining shall be factory
applied 0.2 mm minimum white epoxy coating. Exterior finish shall be standard
factory finish. Capacity of the unit shall be as indicated on drawings.
B. The receiver shall be provided with an automatic and manual drain for liquid
removal.
2.4 INTAKE AIR FILTER AND SILENCER (PRE-FILTER)
A. Filter shall provided general purpose protection (GP grade) and shall be dry type
combination filter/silencer with backed enamel steel housing. Filter shall be 99
percent efficient with particle removal down to 1 micron including coalesced liquid
water and oil and providing a maximum remaining oil aerosol content of 0.5
3 o
mg/m @ 21 C. Silencer shall be the residential quality type. Filters shall comply
with requirements of ISO 8573.1 or equivalent standards. Type and size
Compressed Air and

15489-4
Vacuum System
2.5 AIR FILTER
A. Filter shall provided high efficiency oil removal filtration (HE grade) and shall be
dry type combination filter/silencer with backed enamel steel housing. Filter shall
be 99 percent efficient with particle removal down to 0.01 micron including water
3 o
and content of 0.1 mg/m @ 21 C. Filters shall comply with requirements of ISO
8573.1 or equivalent standards. Type and size of filter shall be as shown on
drawings.
2.6 COMPRESSED-AIR DRYERS
A. Refrigerant-Type Dryers: Noncycling, air-cooled, electric-motor-driven unit with

steel enclosure and capability to deliver 2 deg C, 100-psig air at dew point.
Include automatic ejection of condensate from airstream, step-down transformers,
disconnect switches, inlet and outlet pressure gages, thermometers, automatic
controls, and filters. Capacity of unit shall be as shown on drawings.
B. An inline continuous indicator shall be provided in dryer discharge.
2.7 ACCESSORIES
A. General: Include accessories with working-pressure rating not less than system
pressure at location where used, and compatible with equipment and piping
system used.
B. Valves: Refer to Section 15100 – VALVES.
C. Safety Valves: ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII, Division 1,
construction; National Board certified, labeled, and factory sealed; constructed of
bronze body with poppet safety valve for compressed-air service. Pressure
settings shall be higher than discharge pressure and same or lower than receiver
pressure rating. Safety valves shall be installed on all equipment requiring
overpressure protection.
D. Pressure Regulators: Diaphragm type, bronze body, direct acting, spring loaded,
manual pressure-setting adjustment, and rated for 250-psig inlet pressure, unless
otherwise indicated on drawings
E. Pressure Gages: ANSI B40.1, Accuracy Grade A, for air, with brass case, and
non-shatterable safety glass, and a pressure blowout back to prevent glass from
flying out in case of an explosion. Gages shall have an 80 mm minimum diameter
dial and a dial range of approximately twice working pressure.
F. Quick Disconnect Couplings: All brass and suitable for a working pressure of not
less than 861 kPa. Female side of coupling (fixed end) shall have male thread
connection with automatic shutoff. Provide male side of coupling with hose stem
and ball check to bleed pressure from hose and prevent hose whipping.
G. Strainers: Bronze or malleable iron body, Class 125, Style Y, Type II, simplex
type, with 20-mesh Monel or stainless steel screen.
H. Traps: Type of traps, shall be as indicated, and rated working pressure not less
than system operating pressure.
Compressed Air and

15489-5
Vacuum System
I. Lubricators: Brass body, 861 kPa minimum rating, with clear plastic bowl and
metal guard, metal bowl.
J. Flexible Connections: Vibration isolation, wire braid reinforced corrugated metal

hose type, line-sized, with bronze end connections, suitable for pressure
indicated. Length as recommended by manufacturer but not less than 450 mm.
K. Dielectric Unions: Steel female pipe thread end and copper solder—joint ends.
Steel parts shall be galvanized or plated. Union shall have a water-impervious
insulation barrier capable of limiting galvanic current to one percent of the short-
circuit current in a corresponding bimetallic joint. When dry, it shall also be able to
withstand a 600-volt breakdown test.
L. Hose Reel Assembly: Complete with 15m hose rated for a minimum of 861 kPa,
ball stop, hose extension with air coupler, hose rollers, reel enclosure,
nonsparking ratchet pawl, and required accessories.
2.8 PACKAGED VACUUM PUMPS AND RECEIVERS
A. Description: Factory-assembled, -wired, -piped, and -tested; electric-motor-

driven; air-cooled; continuous-duty vacuum pump and receivers.
B. Control Panels: Automatic control station with load control and protection
functions. Comply with NEMA ICS 2 and UL 508.
1. Mounting and Wiring: Factory installed and connected as an integral part

of equipment package.
2. Enclosure: NEMA ICS 6, Type 12 control panel, unless otherwise

indicated.
3. Motor Controllers: Full-voltage, combination-magnetic type with

undervoltage release feature and motor-circuit-protector-type
disconnecting means and short-circuit protective device.
a. Control Voltage: 120-V ac or less, using integral control power

transformer.
b. Motor Overload Protection: Overload relay in each phase.
c. Starting Devices: Hand-off-automatic selector switch in cover of

control panel, plus pilot device for automatic control.
1) Automatic control switches to alternate lead-lag vacuum pumps

for duplex vacuum pumps.
4. Instrumentation: Include receiver vacuum gage, inlet-line vacuum gage,

hour meter, discharge-air and coolant temperature gages, and control
transformer.
5. Alarm Signal Device: For connection to master alarm panels to indicate

when backup vacuum pump is operating.
Compressed Air and

15489-6
Vacuum System
C. Motors: General requirements for motors are specified in Division 15 Section
"Motors." Minimum sizes of motor shall be sizes as indicated on drawings. If not
indicated, provided large enough so driven load will not require motor to operate
in service factor range above 1.0.
D. Receivers: Steel tank constructed according to ASME Boiler and Pressure

Vessel Code, Section VIII, Division 1; and bearing appropriate code symbols.
Include vacuum relief valve, vacuum gage, and automatic drain.
E. Fabricate base and attachment to pressure vessel with reinforcement strong

enough to resist packaged equipment movement during a seismic event when
base is anchored to building structure.
2.9 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS:
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Refer to Section 15050 - BASIC PIPING MATERIALS AND METHODS for basic
piping installation instructions. Refer to the drawings for further details. Use steel
pipe with threaded joints and fittings for 2 inch and smaller, and with welded joints
for 2-1/2 inch and larger.
3.2 VALVES, GAUGES, STRAINERS
A. Install valves at the locations indicated and elsewhere as required for the proper
functioning of the system. Install globe valves so that the pressure will be below
the disk. Install globe valves with the stems vertical.
B. Pressure-Reducing Valves: Provide compressed air entering each pressure-

reducing valve with a strainer. Provide each pressure-reducing valve unit with two
block valves and with a globe or angle bypass valve and bypass pipe. Provide a
bypass around a reducing valve of reduced size to restrict its capacity to
approximately that of the reducing valve. Provide each pressure reducing valve
unit with an indicating gage to show the reduced pressure, and a safety valve on
the low pressure side. These requirements do not apply to small pressure
regulating valves used to adjust pressure for pneumatic equipment.
C. Pressure Gages:Provide pressure gages with a shut-off valve or petcock installed

between the gage and the line.
D. Strainers: Provide strainers with meshes suitable for the services where indicated,
or where dirt might interfere with the proper operation of valve parts, orifices, or
moving parts of equipment.
3.3 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. Selection, fabrication and installation of piping hanger and supports shall conform
to MSS SP58/69 and to the requirements of section 15140 “HANGERS AND
SUPPORTS”
Compressed Air and
15489-7
Vacuum System
3.4 CLEANING OF SYSTEM
A. General: Clean the various system components before final closing as the
installations are completed. Remove foreign matter from equipment and
surrounding areas. Preliminary or final tests will not be permitted until the cleaning
is approved by the contracting officer.
B. Painting of Piping and Equipment: Paint piping and equipment in accordance with
Section 09900, “Painting.”
3.5 TESTING
A. General Requirements: Perform testing after cleaning. Contractor shall provide

everything required for tests. Tests shall be subject to the approval of the
Engineer. Calibrate the test pressure gages with a dead weight tester within 15
days before use and certify by initial and date on a sticker applied to dial face.
Pressurize each piping system individually and check to assure that there are no
cross-connections between different systems prior to hydrostatic and operational
tests.
B. Leak Tightness Tests: Blow systems dry with clean, oil-free compressed air, and
test with clean, dry air at design working pressure. Brush joints with soapy water
solution to check for leaks. Install a calibrated test pressure gage in piping system
to observe any loss in pressure. Maintain required test pressure for a sufficient
length of time to enable an inspection of joints and connections.
C. Operational Tests: Test equipment as in service to determine compliance with

contract requirements and warranty. During the tests, test equipment under every
condition of operation. Test safety controls to demonstrate performance of their
required functions. Completely test system for compliance with specifications.
END OF SECTION
Compressed Air and

15489-8
Vacuum System
SECTION 15510
CHILLED WATER PIPING SYSTEM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION:
A. The work under this Section consists of furnishing and installation of chilled
water piping system as indicated on the drawings and as specified herein.
1.2 REFERENCES:
A. ASME - American Society of Mechanical Engineers:
ASME B31.9 Building Services Piping.
B. ASTM - American Society of Testing and Materials:

ASTM A 449 Quenched and Tempered Steel Bolts and Studs.
ASTM A 536 Ductile Iron Castings.
ASTM A333 Seamless and Welded Steel Pipe for Low-

Temperature Service.
ASTM F 1476 Standard Specification for Performance of

Gasketed Mechanical Couplings for use in Piping
Applications.
C. ANSI - American National Standard Institute
ANSI B16.1 Cast Iron Flanges and Flanged Fittings, Classes 25,
125, 250 and 800.
ANSI B16.3 Malleable-Iron Threaded Fittings, Classes 150 and

300.
ANSI B16.5 Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings, Steel Nickel Alloy
and Other Special Alloys.
ANSI B16.22 Wrought Copper and Copper Alloy Solder-Joint

Pressure Fittings.
ANSI B16.39 Threaded Pipe Unions, Malleable-Iron, Classes 150,

250 and 300.
15510 - 1 Chilled Water Piping System

ANSI/AWWA C606 Grooved and Shouldered Joints.
D. BSI - British Standards Institute
BS 21 Pipe Threads for Tubes and Fittings.
BS 143 Malleable Cast Iron and Cast Copper Alloy threaded Pipe
fittings.
BS 1560 Steel Pipe Flanges.
BS 4504 Flanges and Bolting for Pipes, Valves and Fittings.
BS 5154 Copper alloy Globe, Globe Stop, and Check, Check and
Gate valves
E. ISO – International Standards 0rganization:
ISO 1183 Polyethylene – Measurement of Density
F. HI - Hydraulic Institute:
HI E.35.01 Centrifugal Pumps.
1.3 SUBMITTALS:

instructions for chilled water piping materials and products.
B. Shop Drawings: Submit scaled layout drawings of chilled water piping and
fittings including, but not necessarily limited to, pipe sizes, location,
elevations and slopes of horizontal runs, wall and floor penetrations, and
connections. Show interface and spatial relationship between piping and
proximate equipment.
C. Record Drawings: At project closeout, submit record drawings of installed

chilled water piping and piping products.
D. Grooved joint couplings and fittings shall be shown on drawings and product
submittals, and shall be specifically identified with the applicable style or
series designation
E. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data and parts lists for chilled
water piping materials and products. Include this data, product data, shop
drawings, and record drawings in maintenance manual.
F. Test Results: Submit test results as required.

1.4 WARRANTY:
A. Submit written guarantee signed by the contractor and manufacturer for the
period of 1 year from the date of substantial completion. The guarantee shall
cover the repair and replacement of defective materials and workmanship as
directed by the Engineer. If manufacturer warranties any equipment for more
than one year as a standard practice such warranties shall also be
submitted.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 CHILLED WATER PIPING:
A. Pipes
1. Pipes for above ground installation shall be seamless, black steel,

Schedule 40 conforming to ASTM A 153, with beveled ends.
2. Pipes for underground chilled water installation shall be preinsulated

pipes suitable for direct burial and shall consist of carrier pipe,
insulation and outer casing conforming to following:
a. Carrier Pipe: Black steel seamless pipe, BS 1387 Medium

Class, with grooved ends.
b. Insulation: CFC-free rigid polyurethane foam insulation, 48

kg/m3 density (minimum.) to ASTM D 1622, not less than 50
mm thickness.
c. Outer Casing: Extruded high-density polyethylene (HDPE)

pipe conforming to ISO or SASO Standards with 950 kg/m3
density (minimum.) to ISO 1183, elongation at break 600%
(min) and yield stress 20 MPa (min) to ISO 527-2.
B. Fittings:
1. Install above ground black steel pipes with threaded joints and
fittings for 50 mm and smaller, and 65 mm and larger pipes.
a. Malleable-Iron Threaded Fittings: ANSI B16.3, Class 150,

standard pattern, for threaded joints. Treads shall confirm to
ANSI B1.20.1.
2. Couplings: Couplings shall consist of two ductile iron housing

segments conforming to ASTM A 536, a pressure responsive
elastomer gasket and zinc electroplated steel bolts and nuts.
a. 65 mm through 300 mm:
1) Rigid Type: Housings shall be cast with offsetting

angle-pattern bolt pads to provide rigidity and system

support and hanging in accordance with ANSI B31.1
and B31.9.
2) Flexible Type: For use in locations where vibration

attenuation and stress relief are required. Three
couplings may be used in lieu of a flexible connector.
The couplings shall be placed in close proximity to
the source of vibration.
b. 14” through 24”:
1) Flexible Type: Housing key shall fit into the wedge

shaped groove and allow for linear and regular pipe
movement.
3. Dielectric Union or Waterway Fitting: Threaded, grooved or soldered

end connections for the pipe material in which installed; constructed
to isolate dissimilar materials, prevent galvanic action, and prevent
corrosion..
4. Flexible Connectors: Stainless steel bellows with woven flexible

bronze wire reinforcing protective jacket; minimum 1035 kPa working
pressure, maximum 120oC operating temperature. Connectors shall
have flanged or threaded end connections to match equipment
connected; and shall be capable of 19 mm misalignment.
a. Couplings may be used in lieu of a flexible connector for

vibration attenuation and stress relief in systems with
operating temperatures to 110°C. The couplings shall be
placed in close proximity to the source of the vibration.
5. Gasket Material: Thickness, material, and type suitable for fluid to

be handled, and design temperatures and pressures.
6. Welding Materials (Where required): Comply with Section II, Part C

ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code for welding materials
appropriate for wall thickness and chemical analysis of pipe material
being used.
7. Grooved Joint Lubricants: Lubricate gaskets in accordance with the

manufacturer’s recommendations with lubricant supplied by the
coupling manufacturer that is suitable for the gasket elastomer and
system media.
C. General Duty Valves:
1. As specified in Section 15100 - VALVES.
D. Special Duty Valves:
1. Calibrated Plug Valves: 1200 kPa water working pressure, 40oC

maximum operating temperature, bronze body, plug valve with

calibrated orifice. Provide with connections for portable differential
pressure meter with integral check valves and seals. Valve shall
have integral pointer and calibrated scale to register degree of valve
opening. Valves 50 mm and smaller shall have threaded
connections and the 65 mm valves shall have flanged connections.
2. Circuit Setters: A calibrated balance valve equipped with readout

valves and provided with differential pressure meter.
3. Self Contained Flow Control Valves: Class 150, cast iron housing,
stainless steel operating parts; threaded connections for 50 mm and
smaller, flanged connection for 65 mm and larger. Factory set to
automatically control flow rates within plus or minus 5 percent
design, while compensating for system operating pressure
differential. Provide quick disconnect valves for flow measuring
equipment. Provide a metal identification tag with chain for each
valve, factory marked with the zone identification, valve model
number, and rate flow in m3/min.
E. Piping Specialties:
1. Manual Air Vent: Bronze body and non-ferrous internal parts; 1035
kPa working pressure, 110oC operating temperature; manually
operated with screw-driver or thumb-screws; and having 3 mm
discharge connection and 13 mm inlet connection.
2. Automatic Air Vent: Designed to vent automatically with float

principles; bronze body and non-ferrous internal parts; 1035 kPa
working pressure, 120oCoperating temperature; and having 6 mm
discharge connection and 13 mm inlet connection.
3. Pressure and Temperature Taps: Install pressure and temperature

taps at all coil connections across two port valves, pumps, chiller
evaporator, or otherwise as indicated:
a. Taps shall be 13 mm solid brass fittings which shall receive

either pressure or temperature probe with valve core or
Nordel fitted color coded and marked cap and gaskets, and
rated at 135oC and 7000 kPa.
b. Furnish No. 500 pressure gauge adapters with 3-8 mm probe

and No. 701, 125 mm stem pocket thermometers with - 5o to
50o range for chilled water.
4. Chemical Feeder: Bypass type chemical feeders of 19 liter capacity,

welded steel construction; 850 kPa working pressure; complete with
fill funnel and inlet, outlet, and drain valves.
5. Y-Pattern Strainers: Ductile iron body, ASTM A536, Grade 65-45-

12, grooved ends or Cast iron body, ASTM A126, Class B, flanged
ends for 65 mm and larger, threaded connections for 50 mm and
smaller, bolted cover, perforated Type 304 stainless steel basket,

bottom drain connection, , 2065 kPa working pressure.
a. For sizes 350 mm to 600 mm, T-pattern strainer, with T-bolt

hinged closure and Type 304 stainless steel basket.
2.2 DIAPHRAGM-TYPE COMPRESSION TANKS:
A. Size and number as indicated; construct of welded carbon steel for 850 kPa
working pressure, 1900C maximum operating temperature. Separate air
charge from system water to maintain design expansion capacity, by means
of a flexible diaphragm securely sealed into tank. Provide taps for pressure
gauge and air charging fitting, and drain fitting. Support vertical tanks with
legs or base; support horizontal tanks with steel saddles. Tank, with taps
and supports, shall be constructed, tested, and labeled in accordance with
ASME Pressure Vessel Code, Section VIII, Division 1.
2.3 MAKE-UP WATER CONNECTION:
A. Provide pressure relief valve and automatic cold sweet water fill assembly
complete with pressure reducing valve, after meter arrester, sight glass,
backflow preventer with test cocks, water filter, vacuum breaker and valved
by-pass.
2.4 AIR SEPARATOR:
A. Type: The air release tank shall be of the in-the-pipe-line type with
tangential openings for water in and out. The inside shall be specifically
designed to create a low velocity vortex for the separation of free air from
the water stream.
B. Size: The size of the air release tank shall be based on the line size of the
pipe shown on the drawings.
C. Shell: The shell shall be constructed of welded carbon steel; ASME

constructed and labeled for 8.78 kg/cm2 (850 kPa) water working pressure
and 1900C operating temperature.
D. Strainer: The tank shall be equipped with an internal steel strainer with
perforations sized for water flow. The strainer shall be installed in a location
of assist in the separation of air. The strainer shall be removable from the
bottom by unbolting the steel bolt heads.
E. Drain: The tank shall be equipped with a bottom drain and this drain shall
be piped to the nearest open site drain. The drain line shall be equipped
with a gate valve and a union to facilitate the removal of the strainer.
2.5 CHILLED WATER PUMPS:
A. General:
1. Centrifugal pump fabrication, installation and testing shall be in

conformance with Hydraulic Institute Standards.

2. The selection of pump type and pump drive shall be based on each
specific application requirements. Pump drivers shall be selected to
be non-overloading over the whole range of the Q-TDH curves,
consideration temperature variations of the fluid being pumped.
3. Pump Q-TDH curve shall be such that it provides stable operation

for the pump when operating at any point on the curve. Shut-off
head shall be approximately 25 to 35 percent above the rated head.
4. Provide vertical in-line pumps, single stage single suction type as

shown on drawings, with pump characteristics which provide rising
heads to shut off. Refer to pump schedule for pump flows, heads,
motor speed, enclosure, efficiency and power requirements.
5. Pumps shall be of variable speed drive for secondary pump and

constant speed drive for primary pump and capable of parallel
operation.
6. For pumps with variable speed drive, the control system shall
include as a minimum, the programmable logic pump controller,
adjustable frequency drive(s) and remote sensor/transmitter as
required. All additional items required to properly execute the
sequence of operation shall be provided.
B. Pumps shall be Separately coupled, base-mounted, end-suction

centrifugal pumps of the capacity as shown on the drawings.
C. Pump Casing: Cast Iron for working pressure below 12.05 bar at 65 °C
(PN16 flange rating) and Ductile Iron for working pressures to 25 bar at °C
(PN25 flange rating).Suction discharge connection shall be flange and the
same time size and shall be drilled and tapped for seal flush and gauge
connections.
D. Impeller: Bronze, fully enclosed type. Dynamically balance.
E. Shaft: Provide Stainless Steel pump Shaft with stainless steel sleeves.
F. Coupling: Rigid spacer type of high tensile aluminum alloy. Couplings

shall be split to allow removal from pump and motor shaft, leaving space
between the shaft sufficient to replace all mechanical seal components
without disturbing the pump or motor.
G. Pump Motor shall be TEFC Class ‘F’.
H. Mechanical Seal: Shall be Stainless Steel outside multi spring balanced

type with secondary seal. Provide bronze gland plate with Stainless Steel
trim. Provide factory installed flush line with manual vent.
I. All Split coupled pumps shall be provided with a lower seal chamber
throttle bushing. Seal flush line fittings, if required:

1. Supply in the flush line to the mechanical seal a 50 micron
cartridge filter and sight flow indicator, to suit the working pressure
encountered.
2. Filters shall be changed, by the installing contractor, after system

is flushed and on a regular basis until over to the owner.
J. Pump performance tests shall be conducted in accordance with the

Hydraulic Institute test codes as described in HI E.35.01, E.37.01 and
E.39.01. In addition, each pump shall be tested at five points of operation
from shut-off head to run out condition, including the guaranteed pump's
performance point.
K. The manufacturer shall submit certificate, including test data to show that
pump meets performance specifications.
2.6 CHEMICAL TREATMENT FOR CHILLED WATER SYSTEM:
A. The analysis and treatment recommendation shall be made by a specialist

with a minimum of 5 years experience in this field.
B. The Contractor shall supply and/or install the water treatment facilities and
chemicals as listed below. Chemicals shall be specially formulated to
prevent accumulation of scale and corrosion in piping system and connected
equipment, developed based on a water analysis of make-up water.
1. Chemical pot feeder complete with sampling point and valving as

indicated.
2. Corrosion scale and electrolytic action inhibiter dosing in the chilled

water system.
3. Test Kit.
4. Carry out tests on local water necessary to finalize details of the

water treatment.
C. Treatment:
1. Thoroughly clean and system of oil grease and swarf deposits using
an approved soluble solvent in accordance with the manufacturer's
instructions.
2. Circulate the solution for at least one hour, drain and then flush
system thorough with fresh water.
3. Does system with corrosion and electrolytic action and scale

inhibitor.
D. Handover:
1. The Contractor shall supply a test kit and instruct the user in its use.

2. Full instructions shall be given to the user on the dosing
methodology.
3. Prior to handover, the Contractor shall carry out his own tests and
ensure the system is correctly dosed.
4. Provide the user with 6 months supply of chemicals.
2.7 INSULATION:
A. Refer to Section 15250 - MECHANICAL INSULATION.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION:
A. Refer to Section 15050 - BASIC PIPING MATERIALS AND METHODS for

basic piping installation instructions. Refer to the drawings for further details.
The entire chilled water system installation shall conform to the requirements
of ASME B 31.9 Building Services Piping, IAPMO Uniform Mechanical
Code, ARI Standard 260, and ANSI B 9.1, or equivalent.
B. Install above ground black steel pipes with threaded joints and fittings for 50
mm and smaller, and with approved fittings for 65 mm or larger.
For underground pre-insulated pipe use approved fittings. Provide concrete

support at the interval of maximum 4000 mm, at both sides of coupling and
at change of direction. Provide concrete thrust blocks at each change of
direction. Details of concrete support and thrust block shall be as approved
by the Engineer.
C. Grooved joints shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s latest

published installation instructions. Grooved ends shall be clean and free
from indentations, projections, and roll marks in the area from pipe end to
groove. Gaskets shall be of an elastomer grade suitable for the intended
service, and shall be molded and produced by the coupling manufacturer.
The grooved coupling manufacturer’s factory trained representative shall
provide on-site training for contractor’s field personnel in the use of grooving
tools and installation of grooved joint products. The representative shall
periodically visit the jobsite and review contractor is following best
recommended practices in grooved product installation. (A distributor’s
representative is not considered qualified to conduct the training or jobsite
visit(s).)
D. Proper foundations for mounting of piping system shall be provided,

including supports, vibration isolators, guides, anchors, clamps and
brackets.
E. Pumps shall be installed in strict conformance with manufacturer's written

instructions.

F. If oil grease lubricated bearings are supplied with the pumps, the oiler shall
be filled with the specified lubricating oil, or bearings shall be pre-lubricated
with specified grease prior to start-up.
G. Field testing of the pumps shall be performed at the time of overall system
start-up and testing. Installed pumps shall meet the performance
specifications.
H. Pipe Workmanship: Install completed system, size as shown on the

drawings. Install piping parallel or perpendicular to the building construction.
Allow for expansion.
I. Air Vents: Provide at all changes in elevation downward in direction of flow.

Except where shown, provide automatic air vents. Also provide air vents at
system high points.
J. The air separator shall be installed dead level in both directions and shall be
supported from the structure so that all pipes can be removed without
moving the air separator. The separator shall be installed so that the
strainer can be removed without moving the tank.
K. The chilled water piping, valves, fittings, separator and expansion tank shall
be insulated as per Section 15250 - MECHANICAL INSULATION.
L. Chilled Water Treatment:
1. Water for the chiller system shall be chemically analyzed and shall
be treated to insure its suitability as the permanent system charge.
Additional water treatment shall be provided whenever required after
final analysis at no additional cost to Owner.
2. Results of the chemical analysis and the proposed treatment method

are to be submitted to the Engineer for review and approval prior to
the Contractor's filling the system.
A. The grooved coupling manufacturer’s factory trained representative shall

provide on-site training for contractor’s field personnel in the use of grooving
tools and installation of grooved joint products. The representative shall
periodically visit the jobsite and review contractor is following best
recommended practices in grooved product installation. (A distributor’s
representative is not considered qualified to conduct the training or jobsite
visit(s).)
B. Preparation for testing: Prepare chilled water piping in accordance with

ASME B 31.9 and as follows:
1. Leave joints uninsulated and exposed for examination during the

test.

2. Provide temporary restraints for expansion joints which cannot
sustain the reactions due to test pressure.
3. Flush system with clean water. Clean strainers.
4. Isolate equipment that is not to be subjected to the test pressure

from the piping.
5. Install relief valve set at a pressure no more than 1/3 higher than the
test pressure, to protect against damage by expansion of liquid or
other source of over pressure during the test.
C. Testing: Test chilled water piping as follows:
1. Use ambient temperature water as the testing medium.
2. Use vents installed at high points in the system to release trapped air
while filling the system. Use drains installed at low points for
complete removal of the that liquid.
3. Subject piping system to a hydrostatic test pressure which at every

point in the system in not less than 1.5 times the design working
pressure. The test pressure shall not exceed the maximum pressure
for any vessel, pump, valve, or other component in the system under
test. Make a check to verify that the stress due to pressure at the
bottom of vertical runs does not exceed either 90 percent of
specified minimum yield strength, or 1.7 times the "SE" value in
Appendix A of ASME B 31.9, Code for pressure piping, building
services piping.
4. After the hydrostatic test pressure has been applied for at least 10
minutes, examine piping, joints, and connections for leakage.
Eliminate leaks by tightening, repairing, or replacing components as
appropriate, and repeat hydrostatic test until there are no leaks.
5. For further requirements refer to Section 15990 - TESTING,

ADJUSTING AND BALANCING.
3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Clean and flush chilled water piping system. Remove, clean, and replace
strainer screens. After cleaning and flushing chilled water piping system, but
before balancing, remove disposable fine mesh strainers in pump suction
diffusers.
B. Mark calibrated name plates of pump discharge valve after chilled water
system balancing has been completed, to permanently indicate final
balanced position.
C. Chemical treatment: Provide a water analysis prepared by the chemical

treatment supplier to determine the type and level of chemicals required for

prevention of scale and corrosion. Perform initial treatment after completion
of system testing.
D. Check expansion tanks to determine that they are not air bound and that the
system is completely full of water.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 15556
STEAM BOILER
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Furnishing and installation of steam boiler, distribution piping (for steam &
condensate) and related equipment as shown on drawings and specified here in to
form a complete operational boiler plant.
B. Co-ordinate with all other trades affecting the development.
1.2 REFERENCES:
SASO 694 Code of practice for the inspection and testing of steam and
hot water boilers-Part 1: Inspection during installation and
commissioning.
hot water boilers-Part 2: acceptance tests.
hot water boilers-Part 3: Concise procedure for thermal
performance tests.
hot water boilers-Part 4: Comprehensive procedure for
thermal performance tests.
hot water boilers-Part 5: Periodic external inspection.
hot water boilers-Part 6: Periodic internal inspection.
hot water boilers-Part 7: Periodic hydrostatic testing.
SASO 1338 Steam boilers - Part 8: General safety requirements
SASO 1340 Steam boilers - Part 10: Approval of operators.
SASO 1584 Steam Boilers - Part 14: Requirements for Installation.
SASO 1585 Steam Boilers - Part 16: Requirements for Maintenance.
15556-1 Steam Boiler

B. ASME - American Society of Mechanical Engineers:
ASME B16.3 Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings
ASME B16.5 Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings
ASME B31.9 Building Services Piping
C. ASTM - American Society of Testing and Materials:

(Galvanized), Welded and Seamless
Moderate and Elevated Temperatures
ASTM A 106 Specification for Seamless Carbon Steel Pipe for High-
Temperature Service
D. BS – British Standards Institution
BS 759 Valves, gauges and other safety fittings for application to

boilers and to piping installations for and in connection with
boilers
BS 970 Requirements for steels for the manufacture of hot formed

springs
BS 1449: Part 1 Carbon and carbon-manganese plate, sheet and strip
BS 1449: Part 2: Stainless steel and heat resistant steel plate, sheet and strip
BS 1470 Wrought aluminum and aluminum alloys for general purpose

engineering purposes: plates, sheets and strip
BS 1501 Steels for pressure purposes: plates
BS 2790 Design and manufacture of shell boilers of welded

construction
BS 2815 Compressed asbestos fiber jointing
BS 3059: Part 1: Specification for low tensile carbon steel tubes without
specified elevated temperature properties
BS 3602 Seamless and Electric Resistance Welded including

Induction Welded Tubes
BS 4504 Copper alloy and composite flanges

BS 4504 Specification for flanges and bolting for pipes, valves and
fittings

BS 5352 Specification for steel wedge gate, globe and check valves
50 mm and smaller for petroleum, petrochemical and allied
industries
E. ANSI - American National Standard Institute
250 and 800.
300.
F. HI - Hydraulic Institute:
HI E.35.01 Centrifugal Pumps.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit complete manufacturers details, operating instructions, maintenance and

repair data.
B. Submit shop drawings of the boiler plant including manufacturers installation details
and recommendations.
C. Material and equipment information: Shall include catalog cuts and technical data
for each component or device used in the system.
D. Certification and Guarantees:
1. Manufacturer's Guarantees for all proprietary equipment in brochure
2. Certificate of Compliance
3. Test Reports.
A. Comply with the following provisions:
1. ASME B31.19, "Building Services Piping" for materials, products, and

installation
2. Fabricate and stamp tanks to comply ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel
Code, Section VIII, Division 1.

3. Welding Standards: Qualify welding process and operators according to
ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section IX, "Welding and Brazing
Qualifications.
1.5 WARRANTY
A. Submit written guarantee signed by the contractor and manufacturer for the period
of 1 year from the date of substantial completion. The guarantee shall cover the
repair and replacement of defective materials and workmanship as directed by the
Engineer. If manufacturer warranties any equipment for more than one year as a
standard practice such warranties shall also be submitted.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Pipes:
1. Pipes, 2 inches (DN 50 mm) and smaller, shall be black steel pipe,
conforming to ASTM A 53, Type S (seamless), Grade A, Schedules 80,
plain ends.
2. Pipes, 2-1/2 inches (DN 65 mm) and larger, shall be black steel pipe,
conforming to ASTM A 53, Type E (electric-resistance welded), Grade A,
Schedules 80, plain ends.
B. Fittings:
1. Cast-iron threaded fittings, conforming to ASME B16.4, Classes, 125, 150

and 300 as required by design.
2. Malleable-iron threaded fittings, conforming to ASME B16.3, Classes 150

and 300 as required by design.
3. Wrought-steel fittings, conforming to ASTM A 234, Schedules 40 and 80,
4. Wrought-steel flanges and flanged fittings conforming to ASME B16.5,

including bolts, nuts and gaskets of the following material group, facings:
a. Material Group: 1.1

b. End Connections: Butt welding
c. Facings: Raised face.
C. Flexible Connectors: Stainless-steel bellows with woven, flexible, bronze, wire-

reinforcing protective jacket; 1035-kPa minimum working pressure and 121 deg C
maximum operating temperature. Connectors shall have flanged or threaded-end
connections to match equipment connected and shall be capable of 20-mm
misalignment.
D. Welding Materials: Comply with Section II, Part C, of the ASME Boiler and
Pressure Vessel Code for welding materials appropriate for wall thickness and for
chemical analysis of pipe being welded.

E. Gasket Material: Thickness, material, and type suitable for fluid to be handled;
and design temperatures and pressures.
2.2 STEAM BOILER
A. General:
1. Package steam boiler of horizontal three pass conventional (2 passes of

tube) reverse flame wet back type shall be designed and constructed in
accordance with latest edition of BS 2790 or equivalent standards and shall
comply with the requirements of Factory Act, and Health & Safety Executive
Guidance Notes PM5, the latter being the acceptance criteria for compliance
with A.O.T.C requirements. Boiler shall be complete with pressure, vessel,
valves and fittings, feed water pumps and controls, combustion equipment,
control panel and all other equipment and accessories required to make it
fully operational. Boiler shall be suitable for minimum 10.34 BAR working
pressure, number of boilers and capacity as shown on drawings.
2. Boiler shall be subject to independent inspection and testing by reputable

Independent Testing Agency throughout manufacture. All X-Ray and NDT
examinations and material testing will be witnessed in accordance with
BS2790 Class “B” or Equivalent Standards. The boiler once built shall be
hydraulically tested in accordance with BS2790 Class “B” and witnessed
by the Third Party Insurance Company.
3. The boiler shall be stamped on the mandoor “ring” with the following
information:
 Manufacturer and address

 Design Pressure
 Hydraulic test pressure and test date
 Year of manufacture
 Boiler serial number
 Third Party Insurance Company Inspector‟s stamp
 Maximum continuous rating
 The standard to which the boiler has been designed and
manufactured.
B. Boiler Shell:
1. Boiler shell shall be constructed in suitable sections dependent on boiler

size. The boiler shell, furnace, reversal chamber and tube plates shall be
manufactured from Boiler / Pressure Vessel Quality Carbon Steel
complying with BS1501-161-430A or Equivalent Standards. All longitudinal
and circumferential seams shall be machine welded and subjected to X-ray
and NDT Inspection in accordance with BS2790 Class “B” or Equivalent
Standards.
2. Furnace and Reversal Chamber: Furnace and reversal chamber shall be

wet back design. The boiler shall have ONE furnace only. The furnace
shall be complete with a reversal chamber. Reversal chamber shall be

FULLY submerged in water. The furnace shall be eccentric to the shell
and towards the bottom of the boiler shell. Where required the furnace tube
shall incorporate sections with “bowling hoop” joints to allow adequate
expansion to take place and shall be located between front boiler tube plate
and front tube plate of the totally submerged reversal chamber. Rear
reversal chamber plate is stayed into the rear boiler tube plate with required
number of stay bars. Furnace, reversal chamber and furnace access tube
shall be manufactured from Boiler / Pressure Vessel Quality Carbon Steel
complying with BS1501-161-430A or Equivalent Standards.
3. Convection Tubes: All convection tubes shall be electrically welded. The

tube passes shall be made up of plain and stay tubes. Two separate
passes of convection tubes shall be fitted. The first pass between the boiler
front tube plate and the reversal chamber tube plate, second pass tubes
between boiler front and rear tube plates. All plain tubes shall be expanded
into position with inlet to first pass tubes in the reversal chamber being
expanded and welded. Stay tubes and stay bars shall be fitted to ensure
that stressing of tube plates and tube nests are within construction Code
limits.
4. The stay bars shall be manufactured from steel bar complying with
BS1502-161-430. The plain and stay tubes shall be manufactured from
Low Tensile Carbon Steel Tube material complying with BS3059, Pt 1.
ERW 320 or HFS 320. The required number of stay tubes and stay bars
shall be fitted. All stay tubes shall be lightly expanded before being welded
in the tube plates and reversal chamber. Stay bars shall be welded into tube
plates.
5. Bosses shall be manufactured from material complying with BS970-080-

A15. Standpipes shall be manufactured from Carbon Steel material
complying with BS3602, Pt 1, HFS410, CT2.
6. Access Doors: Mandoors, muddoor, lifting lug and pads (valves) shall be
manufactured from Boiler / Pressure Vessel Quality Carbon Steel
complying with BS1501-161-430A. Furnace access tube shall be
manufactured from Carbon Steel material complying with BS3602 – HFS
430 or ASTM A106. Access Doors shall permit as far as is practicable, the
internal inspection of heating surfaces and include a 405 x 305 man door on
top of the boiler shell along with two inspection doors in lower quadrant of
shell and one muddoor in the rear tube plate.
Reversal chamber shall be provided with access door/plug complete with

flame sight glass to permit observation and access into boiler furnace tube.
7. Seating: Mountings and controls shall be fitted to pads and welded to

standpipe and bosses.
C. Casing, Insulation/Sheeting, Support and Platform:
1. Front and Rear Casings: Boiler front and rear casings shall be fabricated
mild steel plate fully welded to the boiler tube plates and shell. Front casing
shall be insulated internally to reduce radiation loss to minimum and

provided with hinged doors with screen plates, to allow access to the boiler
tube plates and tubes to facilitate cleaning and inspection. The rear casing
shall be provided with flanged outlet for chimney connection and lift off doors
for access to the convection tubes.
2. Insulation and Sheeting: All exposed areas of the boiler shell and tube plates
shall be lagged with insulation mattress not less than 100 mm thick and
retained in position with 19 mm wide mild steel bands.
Stucco (Aluminum) sheeting to BS1470 SICH.H shall be applied to shell and

tube plates, pads and standpipes and finished with aluminum collars.
3. Boiler Supports: Boiler supports shall be fabricated as an all welded

structure incorporating outriggers, positioning and maneuvering the boiler
feed pump. The boiler shall be self supporting sitting on end plates and be
supplied with jacking points to assist with offloading and final positioning.
4. Ladder and Platform: Manufacturer‟s standard access ladder and platform

with 950 mm high safety handrail shall be fitted to allow access to top boiler
outlet and safety valves.
D. Valves, Gauges and fittings
1. Each boiler shall be complete with valves and gauges as listed complying
with BS759 Part 1, fitted to the boiler standpipes with suitable joints
complying with BS2815 and flanges drilled to BS4504. Flange fixing shall be
by metric studs and nuts or bolts.
Quantity Description
1 Steam Stop Valve, Cast Steel

1 High Lift Double Enclosed Safety Valve, Cast Iron
2 Sets Water Level Gauges c/w Isolating & Blowndown Cocks,
gauge Glasses and Protectors, Gunmetal
1 Blowndown Valve (Parallel slide), Gunmetal
1 Angle Type feed isolating Valve
1 Feed Check Valve, Cast Iron
1 Feed Water Non-Return Valve, Carbon Steel
1 Sequence Blowndown Valve, Cast Iron
1 Pressure Gauge (Bourdon Type) c/w Inspectors Test Point
1 Air Relief Valve, bronze
1 Pressure switch isolating valve
2. Drain pipework from the water gauge drain cocks, sequence blowndown
valves and safety valve drain shall be extended in suitable sized pipework
terminating individually at boiler center line. All valves shall be suitable for
the, pressure and temperature of the boiler.
E. Painting
1. Boiler and related equipment shall be factory finished with manufacturers

standard coating. Surfaces shall be degreased prior to painting and applied
with on coat of primer, one coat of undercoat and one finishing coat.

2.3 FEED TANK, CONTROLS & ACCESSORIES
A. Feed Tank: Feed Tanks shall be designed to have a capacity to ensure that the
Boiler plant can operate safely for one hour evaporation time. Feed tanks shall
condition the feed water prior to being pumped to the Boiler. This shall be
achieved by heating the cold make-up to drive off the Oxygen and to achieve a
temperature near to 100 Deg C.
B. Construction: Feed tank shall be rectangular section tank made in Austenitic

stainless steel and of fully welded construction. The sides and bottom of the tanks
are stiffened as required using Carbon steel channel section. The tanks are fitted
with inspection opening and lifting eyes. Each Feed tank shall be hydrostatically
tested (i.e filled with water) for 12 hours on completion of manufacture.
C. Accessories: Feed tank shall be incorporated with the following accessories:
 Flash Condensing De-aerator Head,

 Re-circulating feed water spray system,
 Steam injector and associated temperature control equipment,
 Feed tank Level control system including the Level Probe, Controller and
Control Valve,
 Water level gauge
 Dial thermometer
 Boiler Feed
 Vent
 Overflow
 Drain
2.4 BOILER TDS BLOWDOWN CONTROL SYSTEM
A. Controller: TDS controller shall be of electronic type for the control of TDS in the
boilers. They shall be of the wall mounted type and be housed in an IP65
polystyrene case and poly carbonate cover, or the Controller shall be panel
mounted and housed in a noryl (glass filled) case and polyester front cover. They
shall incorporate a 4 digit LED display and provide a 4 -20mA output and high
TDS alarm and have a patented probe conditioning device.
B. Conductivity Probe: TDS conductivity probe shall be with austenitic stainless steel
sensor tips incorporating a built in temperature sensor to accommodate the
changes in boiler pressure. They shall also incorporate a self monitoring facility to
check the sensor tips for scaling and when used in conjunction with the
Controller, be able to automatically compensate for scale formation on the sensor
tips and when severe, activate an electronic self cleaning routine. Should the
system be unable to clean the probe, it shall be able to activate a warning on the
controllers display panel plus a remote alarm if required.
They shall also be able to automatically compensate for any polarization effects at
the sensors. They shall be suitable for boiler pressures up to 32 bar g and a
maximum working temperature of 239 deg. C. They shall be available in 300 / 500
/ 1000 mm lengths and have a 3/8" BSPT connection to allow the probe to be
fitted to the boiler.

C. Probe Elbow: The probe Elbow shall be suitable for connecting Conductivity probe
with the boiler. The boiler connection shall be PN40 (BS10 Table D,E,F) for DN20
sizes.
D. Blowdown Control Valve: Blow down control valves shall be electro hydraulically
actuated type with cast steel bodies and stainless steel internals. They shall
incorporate a spring closure mechanism on power failure. A valve position
indicator and an articulated valve cone ensuring a tight shut -off and the correct
alignment of the valve.
E. Stop Valve: Gland seal stop valves shall be with cast steel bodies and flanged
connections. They shall incorporate a raising hand wheel for easy indication of
valve position, and have stainless steel seat ring, disc/plug and stem for long life.
F. Check Valve: Disc check valves shall be wafer type ferritic stainless steel bodies
and a maximum body design of PN40. They shall generally be suitable for
insertion between BS4504 flanges and BS10 flanges tables 'E' & 'H'. The shut off
standard shall confirm to DIN 3230 part 3, BN2 for metal to metal seats and BN1
& B01 for soft seats.
2.5 SAMPLE COOLER SYSTEM
A. The sample cooler system shall consist of sample cooler, inlet valve, cooling
water valve and 3 compression fittings. A sample cooler shall be of all 316L
stainless steel construction, screwed and with compression fitting connections.
They shall incorporate a 316L stainless steel coil and a pre drilled mounting
bracket in both end caps.
2.6 TIMER CONTROLLED BOILER BOTTOM BLOW DOWN SYSTEM
A. Time controlled automatic boiler bottom blow down systems for single or multiple
boiler installations shall consist of blowdown valves and blowdown timers.
B. 25 to 50mm Blowdown Valve: Blow down valves shall be pneumatic actuated or

hydraulic actuated with carbon steel valve bodies, carbon reinforced PTFE valve
seats, and have flanged connections. Blow down valves shall have rotary
pneumatic actuators for fast response and spring return to close for safety.
Actuators shall be fitted with NAMUR (VDI / VDE) interface for solenoid valves,
and the actuators shall be fitted with switch boxes to provide a valve open signal
to the timer.
C. Boiler Blowdown Timer: Blow down timer shall be DIN Rail or Chassis plate
mounted housed in a polystyrene case. They shall incorporate a 4digit LED
display and 2 push buttons for the controls of blow down intervals and duration
and have a programmable delay. Accuracy (typical 5 seconds per day), time
between blow downs 1-99 hours, time of each blow down 0-99 seconds / 0-0.99
hours, pause time minimum intervals between blow down from different boiler 0-
9.9 hours.

2.7 BLOW DOWN VESSEL
A. Blow down vessel shall be complying with PD 5500:2003 in accordance with

Modules B and F of the Pressure Equipment Directive and shall come complete
with full compliance documentation to the user. The vessel shall be fitted with 3
Inlet Manifolds, 1 blow down outlet, 1 vent to atmosphere, a residual blow down
drain valve plus an oval inspection opening with non- asbestos gasket. The vessel
shall also have connections suitable for a cooling water inlet, temperature sensor
and a pressure gauge. The vessel shall come complete with lifting lugs and tripod
feet as standard and shall have an external silver hammerite end finish. The
system shall comprise of the following:
 Manifolds for TDS Blowdown and Bottom Blowdown lines.

 Valves and Check Valves for the Boiler Blowdown connections
 Pressure Gauge, Drain Valve and
 Cooling Water System consisting of valve, strainer, temperature control valve,
check valve and temperature controller.
2.8 HEADER
A. Isolation Valves: Bellows sealed stop valve shall be with SG iron bonnet and
bodies to design condition PN25 and have flanged connection with face to face
dimension confirming to DIN3202 F1. They shall incorporate a non raising hand
wheel and an open / closed indicator. The bellows shall be manufactured from
titanium stabilized stainless steel. Stop valve shall confirm to DIN 3230 B01 & ISO
5208 rated A on leakage.
B. Trap set for Header: The trap set consists of Isolation valve, Strainers, Spiratec
sensor chamber, Ball float steam trap, and Check Valve.
C. Ball Valves: Ball valves shall be 3 piece with zinc plated forged carbon steel body
and screwed connection. They shall have an austenitic stainless steel ball and
stem with R-PTFE seats and seals, shall be reduced bore suitable for steam
service upto 17.50 Bar g (207 deg C). They shall confirm to ISO 5208 rate 3
leakage test requirements.
D. Air Vents: Air Vent for steam system shall be maintainable balanced pressure
thermostatic type, having brass body and angled screwed Connections.
2.9 STEAM FLOW METER & ACCESSORIES
A. Separator and Trap Set: Separators for the removal of entrained liquids in steam
system shall be horizontal baffle type, SG iron bodies, flanged BS4504 PN16 &
PN25 connection and having a maximum body design condition PN25,
 Maximum allowable pressure 25 bar g

 Maximum allowable temperature - 350 deg C
 Maximum cold hydraulic test pressure – 24 bar g for PN16 & 38 bar g for
PN25.
Trap Set for Separator: The trap set consists of Isolation valve, Strainers, Spiratec
sensor chamber, Ball float steam trap and Check Valve.

B. Isolation Valve – Flanged Connection: Bellows sealed stop valve shall be with SG
Iron bonnet and cast iron bodies to design condition PN16 and KS10 and have
flanged connection with face to face dimension confirming to DIN3202 F1. They
shall incorporate a non raising hand wheel and a open / closed indicator. The
bellows shall be manufactured from titanium stabilized stainless steel. Stop valve
shall confirm to DIN 3230 B01 & ISO 5208 rated A on leakage.
 Maximum body design conditions - PN16

 Maximum Design temperature - 300 deg. C
 Maximum Designed cold hydraulic test pressure - 24 bar g
C. Strainer- Flanged Connection: Strainer shall be „Y type strainer with Cast Iron
body and flanged connection to body design condition PN16. Strainer shall
incorporate a perforated or mesh, stainless steel or monel strainer screen.
Material certification for body and cap to EN10204 2.2.
D. Steam Flow Meter: Steam flow meter shall operate on the Spring Loaded Variable
Area principle and produces a differential pressure related to the rate of flow.
Flow Meter shall be with Stainless Steel body and suitable for fitting between pipe
flanges. The Flow Meter shall have a Turn Down ratio of 100:1, Repeatability of
0.25% and Accuracy of +/- 1% of measured value from 5% to 100% of maximum
rated flow.
E. Differential Pressure (DP) Transmitter: DP Transmitter Assembly shall consist of

a High Accuracy differential pressure transmitter and a 3 Way Carbon Steel
Isolation Manifold.
F. Flow Computer: The Steam Flow Computer shall receive signals from the DP
Transmitter and converts them to display Flow Rate, Total Flow, Temperature and
Pressure.
G. Check Valve: Disc check valves shall be wafer pattern having ferritic stainless
steel bodies and a maximum body design of PN40. They shall generally be
suitable for insertion between BS4504 flanges and BS10 flanges tables 'E' & 'H'.
The shut off standard shall confirm to DIN 3230 part 3, BN2 for metal to metal
seats and BN1 & B01 for soft seats.
2.10 PRESSURE REDUCING VALVE STATION
A. Steam Separator
1. For the sizes 1/2" (15mm) to 1" (25mm): Separators for the removal of
entrained liquids in steam system shall be vertical baffle with SG iron bodies
and screwed connection and having a maximum body design condition rated
to DIN PN16.
2. For the sizes 1-1/4" (32mm) to 2" (50mm): Separators for the removal of
entrained liquids in steam system shall be horizontal baffle with SG iron
bodies and screwed connection and having a maximum body design
condition rated to DIN PN25
3. For the sizes 2" (50mm) to 8" (200mm): Separators for the removal of
entrained liquids in steam system shall be horizontal baffle with SG iron

bodies, flanged BS4504 PN16 & PN25 connection and having a maximum
body design condition PN25
B. Trap set for Separator: The trap set consists of Isolation valve, Strainers, Spiratec
sensor chamber, Ball float steam trap and Check Valve.
1. Isolation Valve: Bellows sealed stop valve shall be with SG Iron bonnet and
cast iron bodies to design condition PN16 and KS10 and have flanged
connection with face to face dimension confirming to DIN3202 F1. They
shall incorporate a non raising hand wheel and a open / closed indicator.
The bellows shall be manufactured from titanium stabilized stainless steel.
Stop valve shall confirm to DIN 3230 B01 & ISO 5208 rated A on leakage.
2. Strainer: Strainer shall be „Y type strainer with Cast Iron body and flanged
connection to body design condition PN16. Strainer shall incorporate a
perforated or mesh, stainless steel or monel strainer screen.
3. Pressure Gauge: Pressure gauges shall be of the with 100mm diameter

gauge and mild steel ring type syphon or U syphon and brass cock.
4. Pressure Reducing Valve - upto 50mm: Pressure reducing valve shall be

pilot controlled, diaphragm operated with a single seat main valve and shall
have SG Iron bodies with flanged or screwed connections, phosphor bronze
or stainless steel pilot and main diaphragms and stainless steel trim. The
down stream pressure may be sensed either integrally or remotely via an
external taping.
 Maximum Body design conditions PN25

 Maximum design temperature - 232 deg C
 Maximum design cold hydraulic test pressure - 38 bar g
5. Pressure reducing valve- up to 80mm: Pressure reducing valve shall be pilot

controlled, diaphragm operated with a single seat main valve and cast steel
bodies with flanged connections, stainless steel pilot and main diaphragm,
and stainless steel trim. The down stream pressure may be sensed either
integrally or remotely via an external taping.

6. Safety Valve: Safety valve shall be pop type with SG Iron body and flanged
inlet of PN25 and outlet of PN16 connections for use on steam. Approved by
the TUV to AD Merkblatt A2 and TRD 421. Seat tightness to AP527.
2.11 TYPICAL UPSTREAM EQUIPMENT / TRAPSET FOR AUTOCLAVES/STERILIZERS
A. Steam Separator: As specified earlier in the specifications of the Separator.
B. Trap Set for Separator: As specified earlier in the specifications of the Separator
Trap Set.

1. Isolation Valve: Bellows sealed stop valve shall be with SG Iron bonnet and
cast iron bodies to design condition PN16 and KS10 and have flanged
connection with face to face dimension confirming to DIN3202 F1. They
shall incorporate a non raising hand wheel and a open / closed indicator.
The bellows shall be manufactured from titanium stabilized stainless steel.
Stop valve shall confirm to DIN 3230 B01 & ISO 5208 rated A on leakage.
2. Strainer: Strainers, 2 inches (50 mm) and smaller shall be with SG Iron
bodies and screwed connections to body design conditions PN25. Strainer
shall incorporate perforated (or) mesh, stainless steel strainer screen.
Strainers, 2-1/2 inches (65 mm) and larger shall be „Y type strainer with Cast
Iron body and flanged connection to body design condition PN16. Strainer
shall incorporate a perforated or mesh, stainless steel or monel strainer
screen. Material certification for body and cap to EN10204 2.2.
3. Pressure Gauge: Pressure gauges shall be of the with 100mm diameter

gauge and mild steel ring type syphon or U syphon and brass cock.
4. Pressure Reducing Valve – up to 50mm: Pressure reducing valve shall be

pilot controlled, diaphragm operated with a single seat main valve and shall
have SG Iron bodies with flanged or screwed connections, posphor bronze
or stainless steel pilot and main diaphragms and stainless steel trim. The
down stream pressure may be sensed either integrally or remotely via an
external taping.

5. Pressure reducing valve- up to 80mm: Pressure reducing valve shall be pilot

controlled, diaphragm operated with a single seat main valve and cast steel
bodies with flanged connections, stainless steel pilot and main diaphragm,
and stainless steel trim. The down stream pressure may be sensed either
integrally or remotely via an external taping.

6. Safety Valve: Safety valves, 2 inches (50 mm) and smaller shall be pop
type, with bronze body and screwed inlet / outlet connections for use on
steam. Approval authority and notified body is SAFed TAS. Seat tightness
complies with API527.
Safety valves, 2-1/2 inches (65 mm) and larger shall be pop type with SG Iron
body and flanged inlet of PN25 and outlet of PN16 connections for use on steam.
Approved by the TUV to AD Merkblatt A2 and TRD 421. Seat tightness to AP527
C. Trap Set For Sterilizers
1. Isolation Valve: Isolation valve shall be Ball valve, 3 piece type stainless

steel body screwed or flanged connections. They shall have an austenitic
stainless steel ball and stem with R-PTFE seats and seals, and shall be in
full bore.
2. Steam Trap: Steam trap shall be of Balanced pressure maintainable type

with angled Brass bodies and screwed connections. They shall be fitted with
a capsule (12 Degree C, below saturation temperature).
2.12 TYPICAL TRAPSET FOR LAUNDRY PRESSES
A. Isolation Valve: Globe stop valves shall be with bronze bodies and screwed
connections. They shall have an Aluminium hand wheel and a stainless steel disc
and seat.
B. Spiratec Sensor Chamber: Steam trap sensor chamber shall be with SG Iron
bodies and screwed connections, They shall incorporate a stainless steel level
sensing electrode with connection for a portable indicator, remote test facility (or)
Automatic monitoring unit. When used in conjunction with the automatic steam
trap monitoring unit, a water logging sensor may be used to indicate both leakage
and blockage of the steam trap.
C. Thermodynamic Steam Trap: Thermodynamic Steam trap shall be maintainable

high capacity with stainless steel bodies and screwed connections. They shall
incorporate a stainless steel Y type strainer screen and disc.
 Maximum Body design condition - PN63

 Maximum operating pressure - 42 bar g
 Maximum operating temperature - 400 deg C
 Cold Hydraulic test pressure - 95 bar g
D. Check Valve: Lift Check valve shall be having bronze body with screwed
connections and a brass valve cone.
2.13 TYPICAL TRAPSET FOR FLAT WORK IRONER
A. Isolation Valve: Bellows Sealed stop valve shall be with forged steel bodies to
design condition class 800, and have screwed / socket weld connections. Stop
valves shall incorporate a non-rising hand wheel. The bellows shall be
manufactured from titanium stabilized stainless steel and have a fatigue life
conforming to BS 5352 for globe valves. They shall confirm to API 598 and DIN
3230(BO1) on leakage, and can be made available with material certification to
EN 10204 3.1B upon request.
B. Strainer: Strainers shall be „Y‟ type strainer with SG Iron bodies and screwed
connections to body design conditions PN25. Strainer shall incorporate perforated
(or) mesh, stainless steel Strainer screen. Material certification for body and cap
to EN 10204 2.2.
C. Spiratec Sensor Chamber: Steam trap sensor chamber shall be with SG Iron

D. Ball Float steam trap with steam lock release: Ball float steam trap shall be having
SG Iron bodies with horizontal or vertical flanged / screwed connections, and a
stainless steel main valve and float assembly. They shall incorporate automatic
air venting facility and an externally adjustable steam lock release mechanism.
 Maximum body design conditions - PN16

 Maximum allowable pressure -16.00 bar g
 Maximum allowable temperature - 250 deg C
 Maximum cold hydraulic test pressure - 24 bar g
E. Check Valve: Lift Check valve shall be having bronze body with screwed
2.14 TYPICAL TRAPSET FOR LAUNDRY DRYER & DRY CLEANING MACHINE
A. Bellows Sealed Isolation Valve: Bellows Sealed stop valve shall be with forged
steel bodies to design condition class 800, and have screwed / socket weld
connections. Stop valves shall incorporate a non rising hand wheel. The bellows
shall be manufactured from titanium stabilized stainless steel and have a fatigue
life conforming to BS 5352 for globe valves. They shall confirm to API 598 and
DIN 3230(BO1) on leakage, and can be made available with material certification
to EN 10204 3.1B upon request.
B. Strainer: Strainers shall be „Y‟ type strainer with SG Iron bodies and screwed
connections to body design conditions PN25. Strainer shall incorporate perforated
(or) mesh, stainless steel or Monel Strainer screen.
C. Spiratec Sensor Chamber: Steam trap sensor chamber shall be with SG Iron
D. Ball Float Steam Trap: Ball float steam trap shall be having SG Iron bodies with
horizontal or vertical flanged / screwed connections, and a stainless steel main
valve and float assembly. They shall incorporate automatic air venting facility
using a thermostatic capsule.
E. Check Valve: Lift Check valve shall be having bronze body with screwed
2.15 STEAM ACCESSORIES FOR STORAGE CALORIFIERS
A. Isolation Valve: Bellows sealed stop valve shall be with SG Iron bonnet and cast
iron bodies to design condition PN16 and KS10 and have flanged connection with
face to face dimension confirming to DIN3202 F1. They shall incorporate a non
raising hand wheel and a open / closed indicator. The bellows shall be
manufactured from titanium stabilized stainless steel. Stop valve shall confirm to
DIN 3230 B01 & ISO 5208 rated A on leakage.

B. Strainer: Strainer shall be „Y type strainer with Cast Iron body and flanged
connection to body design condition PN16. Strainer shall incorporate a perforated
or mesh, stainless steel or monel strainer screen.
C. Temperature Control System
1. Self Acting Control Valve: Self acting control valves shall be normally open
type with phosphor bronze pressure balancing bellows and flanged
connections. They shall have Cast Iron bodies and stainless steel main
valve assembly.
2. Self Acting Controller: Self acting controller shall be immersion or wall

mounting type with a brass sensor and actuator and a PVC covered copper
capillary tube. They shall be used with 2 port or 3 port valves, have
adjustment at the sensor head and may include stainless steel sensor
pocket.
D. High Limit Control System
1. Self Acting Control Valve: Self acting control valves shall be normally open
type with phosphor bronze pressure balancing bellows and flanged
connections. They shall have Cast Iron bodies and stainless steel main
valve assembly.
2. Self Acting Controller: Self acting controller shall be immersion type with a
brass sensor and stainless steel actuator. They shall have a PVC covered
copper capillary tube and a stainless steel pocket. They shall be used in
conjunction with a high limit cut out device coupled to an appropriate self
acting valve and the control system shall be deemed and intrinsically safe
high temperature limiting system, giving safe guard over heat protection.
3. High Limit Cut Out: High limit cut outs shall be bronze body and screwed
connections. They shall incorporate a visual red indicator and an optional
micro switch facility for a remote audio / visual indicator. They shall
incorporate a manual reset.
E. Vacuum Breaker: Vacuum breaker shall be with brass bodies and screwed
Connections. Vacuum breaker shall have stainless steel internals and be suitable
for steam.
F. Automatic Pump Trap Unit: Automatic pump trap shall be operated by steam to
maximum 13.80 bar g. No electrical energy shall be required. Body material SG
Iron (DIN 1693 GGG 40.3 dual satisfied with ASTM A395) with a swing type inlet
check valve and a ball type outlet check valve. The internal trap mechanism shall
contain dual stainless steel floats connected with a two stage trap, while the
internal pump mechanism shall be a stainless steel single tension spring snap -
action device with no external seals or glands. The pump trap shall be flanged
PN16 with BSP motive fluid connections.
2.16 CONDENSATE RECOVERY PUMPS
A. Packaged Pump Unit: Automatic pump shall be vented unit with SG Iron body and

flanged BS4504 PN16, ANSI class 150 and screwed BSP connections. They shall
have stainless steel valve and float assemblies and a stainless steel disc check
valve at the condensate inlet and outlet connections. The complete system shall
be supplied with a steel receiver designed to be compliant with the PED and
manufactured in accordance with EN287/288. The whole system shall be supplied
ready to fit with a skid mounted base plate. The automatic pump shall be
operated by steam to 13.80 bar g.
2.17 STORAGE CALORIFIERS HEAT EXCHANGER for Domestic Hot Water Supply
A. Refer to Section 15411 – WATER SUPPLY SYSTEM.
2.18 HEAT EXCHANGER for HVAC Hot Water Supply
A. Package heat exchangers shall be fully assembled skid mounted pressure tested
and ready for installation as shown on drawings. The heat exchangers shall be of
counter-flow design to accommodate thermal duties with an acceptable temperature
cross and approach. Heat exchanger shall use steam to provide heating for low
temperature hot water (for HVAC use) and domestic hot water.
B. The heat exchanger shall be rated with fouling allowance required for the specified
duty.
C. Nozzle velocity shall not exceed 6m/sc.
D. The heat exchanger shall have one-piece inter-plate gaskets made of material
suitable for the given fluids temperature and the given process conditions.
E. The heat exchanger shall be of compact design complete with condensate removal
system, not requiring more than 50% installed space for servicing and maintenance.
F. Plates shall be designed to withstand full maximum differential pressure without any
pressure on the adjacent plates.
G. All heat transfer surfaces must be accessible for mechanical cleaning.
H. Plate corrugation for the entire plate shall be pressed in a single stroke of the press.
I. All inlet outlet connections shall be flanged.
J. The thickness of plates shall be sized to accommodate a 1725 kPa working

pressure.
K. The heat exchanger shall be made with heat transfer plates fabricated from type
304 stainless steel.
L. Pressure plates shall be fabricated from steel.
M. The heat exchanger nozzles shall be of the same materials as the heat transfer
plates.
N. The heat exchanger design and fabrication shall confirm to the latest edition of

Section VII, division 1 of the ASME code or equivalent.
O. The heat exchanger shall be tested in accordance with the applicable code
requirement.
P. Packaged system shall be complete with pneumatic controls, heat exchanger and
condensate removal equipment. All control equipment shall be pre-wired and piped
ready for connection to the air supply and power source.
2.19 RECOMMENDED WATER CHARACTERISTICS FOR SHELL BOILER
A. Feed Water:
Colorless, clear, free from

Appearance
undissolved substances
0
pH value at 25 C 9.0 to 9.5
Hardness [Ca(II) + Mg(II)] < 0.01 mm0I/I (1 mg/I CaCO3)
Oxygen (O2) < 0.02 mg/I
Total iron (Fe) <0.05 mg/I
Oxidizability Mn(VII) - Mn(II) (as KMnO4) <10 mg/I
Oil, grease <1mg/I
Bound CO2 <25 mg/I
B. Boiler Water
Colorless, clear, free from

Appearance
undissolved substances
pH value at 250C 10.0 to 12.0
Aqueous sodium hydroxide alkalinity 0.75 mm0I/I to 12.0 mm0I/I
Dependent upon pressure an
Silica (SiO2)
dalkalinity
Phosphate (PO4) 10 mg/I to 20 mg/I
Sodium sulfite (Na2SO3) 10 mg/I to 30 mg/I
Hydrazine 0.1 mg/I to 1.0 mg/I
The contractor shall take a sample of the water supplied at and analyze its content
with the above requirements and provide the required water softening system for
feed water and chemical charging for boiler water to achieve the desired criteria, as
above mentioned.
2.20 BOILER FLUE
A. Boiler flue shall be of twin wall construction, having a 25 mm air gap between the
inner and outer wall. The vertical seam of inner wall shall be continuously welded
and shall have a 12 mm flange formed on each end of the wall. The vent section
and fitting shall be joined by clamping over mating flanges of adjacent components.
Size of flue shall be as shown on drawing or as recommended by the manufacturer.
Height of flue above the building shall comply with internationally acceptable

environmental requirements and subject to the approval of governmental agency
having the jurisdiction.
B. The inner wall shall be structural load bearing component and expansion of the
inner wall due to changes in temperature shall be catered for by bellow(s) fitted, as
necessary, throughout the system. The outer casing shall be non-load bearing and
shall be retained around the inner wall by suitable spacing clips.
C. The boiler flue system shall be factory fabricated complete with all required fittings
and accessories including full range of starting components, lengths, tees, elbows,
load bearing components, flashings and terminals necessary to complete the
system. The load bearing and wind load capacity of all components when installed
within a system shall be determined by the manufacturer in accordance with the
applicable codes and design the system accordingly. When required the
manufacturer shall submit relevant calculations and test reports of above to the
Engineer.
D. The inner wall/liner, fitting and all surfaces in contact with flue gases shall be
constructed of Grade 304 stainless steel to BS 1449 Part 2, not less than 1 mm wall
thickness. The outer casing for interior use shall be of aluminized steel to BS 1449
Part 1 and for exterior use shall be of Grade 304 stainless steel to BS 1449 Part 2.
E. Insulation: Insulation shall be mineral fiber, thickness and density as recommended

by manufacturer for particular application.
2.21 VALVES:
A. Valves shall be as specified in Section 15100 - VALVES.
A. Insulation for steam and condensate piping shall be Glass Fiber Pipe Insulation as
per requirements of Section 15250 - MECHANICAL INSULATION.
2.24 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
A. Electrical Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1 ventilated enclosure with hinged door
and key-locking handle.
B. Electrical Circuits: 48 A, maximum.
C. Electrical Connectors: Mechanical lugs bolted to copper bus bars or distribution

blocks with pressure connectors.
D. Fuses: NEMA FU 1, Class J or K5; 60 A, maximum.
E. Contactors: 3-pole magnetic contactors, listed for 500,000 cycles at full load.
F. Factory-wired internal control devices and heating elements.

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PIPING INSTALLATION
A. General: Comply with the requirements of Section 15050 - BASIC PIPING

MATERIALS AND METHODS, and boiler manufacturers written recommendations.
B. Steam Piping, 2 inches (DN 50) and Smaller: Schedule 80 black steel pipe, with
threaded joints using Class 125 cast-iron threaded fittings.
C. Steam Piping, 2-1/2 inches (DN 65) and Larger: Schedule 80 black steel pipe, with
welded joints using Schedule 80 wrought-steel welding fittings and Class 150
wrought-steel flanges.
D. Condensate Piping, 2 inches (DN 50) and Smaller: Schedule 80 black steel pipe,
with threaded joints using Class 125 malleable-iron threaded fittings.
E. Condensate Piping, 2-1/2 inches (DN 65) and Larger: Schedule 80 black steel pipe,
with welded joints using Schedule 80 wrought-steel welding fittings and Class 150
wrought-steel flanges.
F. Install groups of pipes parallel to each other, spaced to permit applying insulation
and servicing of valves.
G. Install steam supply piping at a uniform grade of 0.2 percent downward in direction
of steam flow.
H. Install condensate return piping at a uniform grade of 0.4 percent downward in

direction of condensate flow.
I. Reduce pipe sizes using eccentric reducer fitting installed with level side down.
J. Unless otherwise indicated, install branch connections to steam mains using 45-
degree fittings in main pipe, with the takeoff coming out the top of the main pipe.
Use of 90-degree tee fittings is permissible if 45-degree fittings are impractical. If
length of branch takeoff is less than 3 m, pitch branch line down toward mains at
a 0.4 percent grade.
K. Install unions in piping 2 inches (DN 50) and smaller adjacent to each valve, at
final connections of each piece of equipment, and elsewhere as indicated.
L. Install flanges in piping 2-1/2 inches (DN 65) and larger at final connections of
each piece of equipment and elsewhere as indicated.
M. Install strainers on supply side of each control valve, pressure-reducing valve,

solenoid valve, traps, and elsewhere as indicated. Install 3/4 inches (DN20)
nipple and ball valve in blowdown connection of strainers 2 inches (DN50) and
larger. Match size of strainer blowoff connection for strainers smaller than 2
inches (DN 50).
N. Install all required fittings and accessories as shown on drawings or as applicable

to make the system fully functional.
O. Insulate all steam and condensate piping complying with the requirements of
Section 15250 - MECHANICAL INSULATION.

P. Anchor piping for proper direction of expansion and contraction.
3.2 EXAMINATION
A. Examine area to receive boiler for compliance with requirements for installation
tolerances and other conditions affecting boiler performance. Do not proceed with
installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.3 BOILER INSTALLATION
A. Install boilers level and plumb, according to manufacturer's written instructions and
referenced standards.
B. Support boilers on 100-mm- thick concrete base, 100 mm larger on each side than
base of unit, unless indicated otherwise on drawings.
C. Assemble units and parts shipped loose or disassembled.
D. Install electrical devices furnished with boiler, but not specified to be factory
mounted.
3.4 CONNECTIONS
A. Connect piping as shown drawings.
A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to

supervise the field assembly of components and installation of boilers, including
piping and electrical connections. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace
damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.
B. Hydrostatically test assembled boiler and piping, according to applicable sections of

the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.
C. Perform all tests in the presence of the Engineer. Report results in writing to the
Engineer.
D. Prepare steam and condensate piping according to ASME B31.9 and as follows:
1. Leave joints, including welds, uninsulated and exposed for examination

during test.
2. Flush system with clean water. Clean strainers.
3. Isolate equipment from piping. If a valve is used to isolate equipment, its

closure shall be capable of sealing against test pressure without damage to
valve. Install blinds in flanged joints to isolate equipment.
4. Install safety valve, set at a pressure no more than one-third higher than test
pressure, to protect against damage by expanding liquid or other source of
overpressure during test.

E. Perform the following tests on steam and condensate piping according to
ASME B31.9 and as follows:
1. Use ambient temperature water as a testing medium unless there is risk of

damage due to freezing. Another liquid that is safe for workers and
compatible with piping may be used.
2. While filling system, use vents installed at high points of system to release
trapped air. Use drip legs installed at low points for complete draining of
liquid.
3. Subject piping system to hydrostatic test pressure that is not less than 1.5
times the design pressure. Test pressure shall not exceed maximum
pressure for any vessel, pump, valve, or other component in system under
test. Verify that stress due to pressure at bottom of vertical runs does not
exceed either 90 percent of specified minimum yield strength or 1.7 times
"SE" value in Appendix A of ASME B31.9, "Building Services Piping."
4. After hydrostatic test pressure has been applied for at least 10 minutes,
examine piping, joints, and connections for leakage. Eliminate leaks by
tightening, repairing, or replacing components, and repeat hydrostatic test
until there are no leaks.
5. Prepare written report of testing.
3.6 CLEANING
A. Flush and clean boilers and piping on completion of installation, according to

B. After completing boiler installation, including outlet fittings and devices, inspect
exposed finish. Remove burrs, dirt, and construction debris and repair damaged
finishes including chips, scratches, and abrasions with manufacturer's touchup
paint.
3.7 COMMISSIONING
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to provide startup service.
B. Verify that installation is as indicated and specified. Verify that electrical wiring
installation complies with manufacturer's submittal and installation requirements
applicable Section Division 16 - ELECTRICAL. Do not proceed with boiler startup
until wiring installation is acceptable to equipment Installer.
C. Complete manufacturer's installation and startup checklist and verify the following:
1. Boiler is level on concrete base.
2. Flue and chimney are installed without visible damage.
3. No damage is visible to boiler jacket, refractory, or combustion chamber.
4. Pressure-reducing valves are checked for correct operation and specified

relief pressure. Adjust as required.

5. Clearances have been provided and piping is flanged for easy removal and
servicing.
6. Heating circuit pipes have been connected to correct ports.
7. Labels are clearly visible.
8. Boiler, burner, and flue are clean and free of construction debris.
9. Pressure and temperature gages are installed.
10. Control installations are completed.
D. Ensure pumps operate properly.
E. Start pumps and boilers, and adjust burners to maximum operating efficiency.
1. Fill out startup checklist and attach copy with Contractor Startup Report.
2. Check and record performance of factory-provided boiler protection devices

and firing sequences.
3. Check and record performance of boiler fluid-level, flow-switch, and high-

temperature interlocks.
4. Run-in boilers as recommended or required by manufacturer.
5. Measure and record combustion-air temperature at inlet to burner.
F. Measure and record water flow rate, pressure drops, and temperature rise through
each boiler.
G. Inspect expansion tank, makeup water meter, tank pressure, pressure-reducing

valve, water level, and backflow preventer.
3.8 DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance

personnel as specified below:
1. Operate boiler, including accessories and controls, to demonstrate

compliance with requirements.
2. Train Owner's maintenance personnel on procedures and schedules related

to startup and shutdown, troubleshooting, servicing, and preventive
maintenance.
3. Review data in the maintenance manuals. Refer to Division 1 Section

“Project Closeout Requirements."
4. Schedule training with Owner‟s representative with at least 7 days' advance

notice.
END OF SECTION

SECTION - 15625
AIR COOLED SCREW CHILLERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE
A. The requirements of the General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and

Drawings apply to all work herein.
B. Provide Microprocessor controlled, twin-screw compressor, air-cooled, liquid

chillers of the scheduled capacities as shown and indicated on the Drawings,
including but not limited to:
1. Chiller package
2. Charge of refrigerant and oil.
3. Electrical power and control connections
4. Chilled water connections
5. Factory start-up
1.2 REFERENCES
ARI 550/590 Water Chilling Packages Using the Vapor

Compression Cycle
ARI 70 Sound Rating of Large Outdoor Refrigerating and Air

Conditioning Equipment
ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 15 Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration
ASHRAE 34 Number Designation and Safety Classification of

Refrigerants
ASHRAE 90.1 Energy Standard for Buildings Except Low-Rise

Residential Buildings
ANSI/NFPA Standard 70 National Electrical Code (N.E.C).
ASTM A48 Gray Iron Castings
OSHA Occupational Safety and Health Act
ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section VIII, Division 1.
Manufactured in facility registered to ISO 9001
Conform to Underwriters Laboratories (U.L.) for construction of chillers and provide

U.L./cU.L. listing label.
15625-1 Air Cooled Screw Chillers

A. Factory Test: Chiller shall be pressure-tested, evacuated and fully charged with
refrigerant and oil, and shall be factory operational run tested with water flowing
through the vessel.
B. Chiller manufacturer shall have a factory trained and supported service

organization.
C. Warranty: Manufacturer shall Warrant all equipment and material of its

manufacture against defects in workmanship and material for a period of eighteen
(18) months from date of initial start-up or date of availability.
1.4 DELIVERY AND HANDLING
A. Unit shall be delivered to job site fully assembled and charged with refrigerant and
oil by the Manufacturer.
B. During shipment, provide protective covering over vulnerable components. Fit

nozzles and open ends with plastic enclosures.
C. Unit shall be stored and handled per Manufacturer’s instructions.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
A. Description: Install and commission, as shown on the schedules and plans,

factory assembled, charged, and operational tested air cooled screw compressor
chiller(s) as specified herein. Chiller shall include, but is not limited to: a complete
system with multiple independent refrigerant circuits, semihermetic twin screw
compressors, shell and tube type evaporator, air-cooled condenser, R134a
refrigerant, lubrication controls including capacity controller, control center, motor
starting components, and special features as specified herein or required for safe,
automatic operation.
B. Operating Characteristics:
1. Provide low ambient control and high ambient options as required to

ensure unit is capable of operation from 0°F to 125°F ambient.
2. Provide capacity control system capable of reducing unit capacity to (10%

for 2 compressor units and 7.5% for 3 compressor units) of full load.
Compressor shall start in unloaded condition. Application of factory
installed hot gas bypass shall be acceptable as required to meet specified
minimum load.
C. Cabinet: Unit panels, structural elements, control boxes and heavy gauge
structural base shall be constructed of galvanized steel. Unit panels, control boxes
and structural base are finished with a baked on powder paint. All painted
surfaces shall be coated with baked on powder paint which, when subject to
ASTMB117, 1,000 hour, 5% salt spray test, yields minimum ASTM 1654 rating of
“6”.

D. Unit shall ship in one piece and shall require installer to provide only a single
evaporator inlet and outlet pipe connection. If providing chiller model that ships in
multiple pieces, bid shall include all the material and field labor costs for factory
authorized personnel to install a trim kit to connect the pieces as well as all
interconnecting piping and wiring.
2.2 COMPRESSORS AND MOTORS
A. Compressors: Shall be direct drive, semihermetic, rotary twin-screw type,

including: muffler, temperature actuated ‘off-cycle’ heater, rain-tight terminal box,
discharge shut-off service valve, and precision machined cast iron housing
mounted on neoprene isolators. Design working pressure of entire compressor,
suction to discharge, shall be 350 PSIG or higher. Compressor shall be U.L.
Recognized.
B. Motors: Refrigerant suction gas cooled accessible hermetic compressor motor, full
suction gas flow through 0.006” maximum mesh screen, with inherent internal
thermal overload protection and external current overload on all three phases.
C. Lubrication: External oil separators with no moving parts, 450 PSIG design
working pressure, and UL listing. Refrigerant system differential pressure shall
provide oil flow through service replaceable, 0.5 micron, full flow, cartridge type oil
filter internal to compressor. Filter bypass, less restrictive media, or oil pump not
acceptable.
D. Capacity Control: Compressors shall start at minimum load. Provide

Microprocessor control to command compressor capacity to balance compressor
capacity with cooling load. When required to meet minimum load, hot gas bypass
shall be factory installed and integrated into standard control system.
2.3 REFRIGERANT CIRCUIT COMPONENTS
A. Each independent refrigerant circuit shall include: liquid line shutoff valve with
charging port, low side pressure relief device, removable core filter-drier, sight
glass with moisture indicator, and electronic expansion valve.
B. Chiller manufacturer shall provide independent circuit for each compressor to

provide maximum redundancy. If equipment does not have independent circuits
per compressor, manufacturer shall provide owner one spare compressor of each
unique size.
C. Discharge lines shall be provided with manual compressor shutoff service valves.
Suction line shall be covered with closed cell foam insulation.
2.4 HEAT EXCHANGERS
A. Evaporator:
1. Direct expansion type or flooded type shell and tube evaporator with high
efficiency copper tubes. Independent refrigerant circuits shall be provided
per compressor.
2. Constructed, tested, and stamped IAW applicable sections of ASME
pressure vessel code for minimum 235 PSIG refrigerant side design
working pressure and 150 PSIG water side design working pressure.

3. Shell covered with 19mm, flexible, closedcell insulation, thermal
conductivity of 0.26k (BTU/HR-Ft2-°F/in.) maximum. Water nozzles with
grooves for mechanical couplings, and insulated by Contractor after pipe
installation.
4. Provide vent and drain fittings, and thermostatically controlled heaters to
protect to -20°F ambient in off-cycle.
B. Air Cooled Condenser:
1. Coils: Internally enhanced, seamless copper tubes, mechanically

expanded into copper fins with full height collars. Sub-cooling coil an
integral part of condenser. Design working pressure shall be 450 PSIG.
2. Low Sound Fans: Shall be dynamically and statically balanced, direct
drive, corrosion resistant glass fiber reinforced composite blades molded
into low noise, full airfoil cross section, providing vertical air discharge from
extended orifices. Guards of heavy gauge, PVC (polyvinyl chloride) coated
or galvanized steel.
3. Fan Motors: High efficiency, direct drive, 3- phase, insulation class “F”,
current protected, Totally Enclosed Air Over (TEAO), with double sealed,
permanently lubricated ball bearings.
2.5 POWER AND ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Power/Control Panel:
1. NEMA 3R (IP55), powder painted steel cabinets with hinged, latched, and
gasket sealed outer doors equipped with wind struts for safer servicing.
Provide main power connection(s), compressor starters and fan motor
contactors, current overloads, and factory wiring.
2. Panel shall include control display access door.
B. Single Point Power (As standard for 2 and 3 compressor chillers)
1. Provide single point power connection to chiller, shall be 3 phase of

scheduled voltage.
2. Terminal Block connections shall be provided at the point of incoming
single point connection.
C. Control Transformer: Power panel shall be supplied with a factory mounted and
wired control transformer that will supply all unit control voltage from the main unit
power supply. Transformer shall utilize scheduled line voltage on the primary side
and provide 115V/1Ø on secondary.
D. Short Circuit Withstand Rating of the chiller electrical enclosure shall be (380, 400,
& 460V: 65,000 Amps). Rating shall be IAW UL508.
E. Motor Starters: Motors starters shall be reduced inrush type (Wye-Delta or Solid
State) for minimum electrical inrush. Across the line type starters will not be
acceptable.
F. Power Factor:
1. Provide equipment with power factor correction capacitors as required to

maintain a power factor of 95% at all load conditions.

2. The installing contractor is responsible for additional cost to furnish and
install power factor correction capacitors if they are not factory mounted
and wired.
G. Exposed compressor and fan motor power wiring shall be routed through liquid
tight conduit.
2.6 CONTROLS
A. General:
1. Provide automatic control of chiller operation including compressor

start/stop and load/unload, anti-recycle timers, condenser fans, evaporator
pump, evaporator heater, unit alarm contacts and run signal contacts.
2. Chiller shall automatically reset to normal chiller operation after power
failure.
3. Unit operating software shall be stored in non-volatile memory. Field
programmed set points shall be retained in lithium battery backed
regulated time clock (RTC) memory for minimum 5 years.
4. Alarm contacts shall be provided to remote alert for any unit or system
safety fault.
B. Display and Keypad:
1. Provide minimum 80 character liquid crystal display that is both viewable in

direct sunlight and has LED backlighting for nighttime viewing Provide one
keypad and display panel per chiller.
2. Display and keypad shall be accessible through display access door
without opening main control/electrical cabinet doors.
3. Display shall provide a minimum of unit setpoints, status, electrical data,
temperature data, pressures, safety lockouts and diagnostics without the
use of a coded display.
4. Descriptions in English (or available language options), numeric data in
English (or Metric) units.
5. Sealed keypad shall include unit On/Off switch.
C. Programmable Setpoints (within Manufacturer limits): display language; leaving

chilled liquid temperature: setpoint, control range; local or remote control; units of
measure; compressor lead/lag; and maximum chilled water setpoint reset
temperature range.
D. Display Data: Chiller liquid return and leaving temperatures, ambient, lead
compressor identification, clock and schedule, (variable) out of range, remote
input indication, chilled liquid reset setpoint, and history data for last ten shutdown
faults. Compressor suction, discharge, and oil pressures and temperatures,
suction and discharge superheats, percent of fullload, operating hours, starts, and
anti-recycle timer status. Status Messages for manual override, unit switch off,
compressor run, run permissive, remote controlled shut down, no cooling load,
daily/holiday shut down, anti-recycle timer.
E. Predictive Control Points: Unit controls shall avoid safety shutdown when
operating outside design conditions by optimizing the chiller controls and cooling
load output to stay online and avoid safety limits being reached. The system shall
monitor the following parameters and maintain the maximum cooling output

possible without shutdown of the equipment: motor current, suction pressure and
discharge pressure.
F. System Safeties: Shall cause individual compressor systems to perform auto-

reset shut down; manual reset required after the third trip in 90 minutes. Includes:
high discharge pressure or temperature, low suction pressure, high / low motor
current, high motor temperature, high pressure switch, high / low differential oil
pressure, high oil temperature, low suction superheat, critical sensor malfunction,
low or high current, phase loss/single phase power, overload of motor windings,
and low voltage.
G. Unit Safeties: Shall be automatic reset and cause compressors to shut down if:
high or low ambient, low leaving chilled liquid temperature, under voltage, and
flow switch operation. Contractor shall provide flow switch and wiring per chiller
manufacturer requirements.
H. Manufacturer shall provide any controls not listed above, necessary for automatic
chiller operation. Mechanical Contractor shall provide field control wiring
necessary to interface sensors to the chiller control system.
2.7 ACCESSORIES and OPTIONS
A. Sound Reduction
1. Provide the following options as required to meet scheduled sound

performance data at all load points.
a. Normal speed fans and unlined compressor enclosure. (Factory

Mounted)
b. Two-speed fans and acoustically lined enclosure. (Factory
Mounted)
c. Sound power octave band data, dB per ARI standard 70 and IAW
ISO3744 at 35°C ambient and 7°C leaving chilled water.
2. Provide optional control input to limit sound output of the chiller based on
time of day. Shall be programmable at the chiller panel or controlled
remotely via signal (4-20mA or 0-10 VDC) from BAS system. Chillers
without this feature shall be provided with the necessary sound attenuation
to meet the scheduled sound performance data at all load points.
B. Power Supply/Connections:
1. Circuit breaker is optional at point of incoming single point connection to

provide disconnecting means AND be sized to provide the motor branch
circuit protection, short circuit protection and ground fault protection for the
motor branch-circuit conductors, the motor control apparatus and the
motors. Circuit breaker shall be equipped with lockable operating handle
that shall extend through power panel door so that power may be
disconnected without opening any panel doors.
C. Protective Chiller Panels (Factory Mounted):
1. Louvered Panels (condenser coils only): Painted steel to match unit

panels, over external condenser coil faces.

2. Wire Panels (full unit): Heavy gauge, welded wire mesh, coated to resist
corrosion, to protect condenser coils from incidental damage and restrict
unauthorized access to internal components.
3. Louvered Panels (full unit): Painted steel to match unit panels, to protect
condenser coils from incidental damage, visually screen internal
components, and prevent unauthorized access to internal Louvered/Wire
Panels: Louvered steel panels on external condenser coil faces, painted to
match unit panels. Heavy gauge, welded wiremesh, coated to resist
corrosion, around base of machine to restrict unauthorized access.
D. Evaporator options:
1. Provide 38mm cooler insulation in lieu of standard 3/4” (19mm).

2. Provide Raised Face Flanges for cooler nozzles:
a. 150 PSIG, welded flanges (field kit, matching pipe flange by

contractor).
b. 150 PSIG companion flanges. (not available with 460V units)
c. 150 PSIG, ANSI/AWWA C-606 couplings (field kit, matching pipe
flange by contractor).
E. Flow Switch (Field Mounted): Vapor proof SPDT, NEMA 3R switch 10.3 bar or
20.7 bar, -20°F to 250°F.
F. Building Automation System Interface:

1. Chiller to accept 4 to 20mA or 0 to 10 VDC input to reset the leaving
chilled liquid temperature. (Factory Mounted)
G. Multi-Unit Sequence Control (Field Mounted): Separate Sequencing control center

provided to permit control of up to eight chillers in parallel based on mixed liquid
temperature.
H. Vibration Isolation (Field Mounted):
1. Neoprene Isolators.
2. 1 Inch Deflection Spring Isolators: Level adjustable, spring and cage type
isolators for mounting under the unit base rails.
3. 2 Inch Deflection Seismic Isolators: Level adjustable, restrained mounts in
rugged welded steel housing with vertical and horizontal limit stops.
Housings shall be designed to withstand a minimum 1.0g accelerated
force in all directions to 2” (50.8 mm).
I. Service Shut-Off Valve: Provide suction service shut-off valve for each compressor.
(Factory Mounted)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. General: Rig and Install in full accordance with Manufacturer’s requirements,

Project drawings, and Contract documents.

B. Location: Locate chiller as indicated on drawings, including cleaning and service
maintenance clearance per Manufacturer instructions. Adjust and level chiller on
support structure.
C. Components: Installing Contractor shall provide and install all auxiliary devices
and accessories for fully operational chiller.
D. Electrical: Coordinate electrical requirements and connections for all power feeds
with Electrical Contractor (Division 16).
E. Controls: Coordinate all control requirements and connections with Controls

Contractor.
F. Finish: Installing Contractor shall paint damaged and abraded factory finish with
touch-up paint matching factory finish.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 15725
AIR-HANDLING UNITS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes Modular Indoor Central-Station Air-Handling Units as shown

drawings and specified herein.
1.2 REFERENCES
SASO 1302 Air ducts for air conditioning - Part 1: Definitions,

classification and terminology
SASO 1434 Thermal environmental conditions for human

occupancy.
SASO 1435 Safety requirements for the installation on air

conditioning and ventilating systems - Part 1:
Definitions and technical terms.

Requirements of HVAC systems.
SASO 772 Code of practice for mechanical ventilation and air

conditioning in buildings -Part 1: General basis of
design.

conditioning in buildings -Part 2: General
requirements for installation.
B. Air-Conditioning & Refrigeration Institute
ARI 410 Forced-Circulation Air-Cooling and Air-Heating Coils
ARI 430 Central-Station Air-Handling Units
C. Air Movement and Control Association International, Inc.
AMCA 99-2408 Operating Limits for Centrifugal Fans. (AMCA 99-86:

Standards Handbook)
AMCA 210 Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Aerodynamic

Performance Rating (ANSI)
AMCA 300 Reverberant Room Method for Sound Testing of Fans
15725-1 Air Handling Unit

AMCA 301: Methods for Calculating Fan Sound Ratings from
Laboratory Test Data
AMCA 500-D Laboratory Methods of Testing Dampers for Rating
D. American Society of Civil Engineers/Structural Engineering Institute
ASCE/SEI 7 Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other

Structures
E. American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers
ASHRAE 33 Methods of Testing Forced Circulation Air Cooling and

Air Heating Coils
ASHRAE 52.1 Gravimetric and Dust-Spot Procedures for Testing Air-

Cleaning Devices Used in General Ventilation for
Removing Particulate Matter
ASHRAE 52.2 Method of Testing General Ventilation Air-Cleaning

Devices for Removal Efficiency by Particle Size
(ANSI)
ASHRAE 62.1 Ventilation for Acceptable Indoor Air Quality (ANSI)
F. American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning

Engineers/Illuminating Engineering Society of North America
ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1 Energy Standard for Buildings except Low-Rise

Residential Buildings (ANSI)
G. ASME International
ASME N510 Testing of Nuclear Air Treatment Systems
H. ASTM International
ASTM A 666 Specification for Annealed or Cold-Worked Austenitic

Stainless Steel Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar
ASTM B 88 Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube
ASTM B 88M Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube Metric
ASTM C 916 Specification for Adhesives for Duct Thermal

Insulation
ASTM C 1071 Specification for Fibrous Glass Duct Lining Insulation

(Thermal and Sound Absorbing Material)
I. National Electrical Manufacturers Association
NEMA AB 1 Molded Case Circuit Breakers, Molded Case

Switches, and Circuit-Breaker Enclosures

NEMA ICS 2 Industrial Control and Systems: Controllers,
Contactors, and Overload Relays, Rated Not More
Than 2000 Volts AC or 750 Volts DC
NEMA MG 1 Motors and Generators
J. NFPA
NFPA 90A Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating

Systems
K. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association
HVAC Duct Construction Standards.
L. Underwriters Laboratories Inc.
UL 181 Factory-Made Air Ducts and Air Connectors
UL 586 High-Efficiency, Particulate, Air Filter Units
UL 1995 Heating and Cooling Equipment
M. EUROVENT: All relevant standards as applicable
1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Structural Performance: Casing panels shall be self-supporting and capable of

withstanding 133 percent of internal static pressures indicated, without panel joints
exceeding a deflection of L/200 where "L" is the unsupported span length within
completed casings.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each air-handling unit indicated.
1. Unit dimensions and weight.

2. Cabinet material, metal thickness, finishes, insulation, and accessories.
3. Fans:
a. Certified fan-performance curves with system operating conditions

indicated.
b. Certified fan-sound power ratings.
c. Fan construction and accessories.
d. Motor ratings, electrical characteristics, and motor accessories.
4. Certified coil-performance ratings with system operating conditions indicated.

5. Dampers, including housings, linkages, and operators.
6. Filters with performance characteristics.

B. Coordination Drawings: Floor plans and other details, drawn to scale, on which the
following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from
installers of the items involved:
1. Mechanical-room layout and relationships between components and

adjacent structural and mechanical elements.
2. Support location, type, and weight.
3. Field measurements.
C. Source quality-control reports.
D. Field quality-control reports.
E. Operation and Maintenance Data: For air-handling units to include in emergency,

operation, and maintenance manuals.
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in

NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and
application.
B. NFPA Compliance: Comply with NFPA 90A for design, fabrication, and installation
of air-handling units and components.
C. ARI Certification: Air-handling units and their components shall be factory tested
according to ARI 430, "Central-Station Air-Handling Units," and shall be listed and
labeled by ARI.
D. ASHRAE Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1-2011, Section of

"Systems and Equipment" and Section of "Construction and Startup."
E. Comply with NFPA 70.
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided.
B. Coordinate sizes and locations of structural-steel support members, if any, with

actual equipment provided.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 AIR HANDLING UNITS
A. General: Provide factory-fabricated and factory-tested air handling units as indicated,

sizes and capacities (cooling/heating) as shown on drawings. The precision unit shall
be suitable for Data Computer rooms and Data Centers and to be installed indoors.
Units shall be tested, rated, and certified in accordance with ARI 430 or EUROVENT.
Unit shall bear ARI or EUROVENT certification label and shall be listed in ARI
directory of Certified Applied Air Conditioning Products.
B. For coastal areas environmental protection, Condenser coils shall be of copper fins
and copper tubes.
C. Casings: Component modules shall be 50 mm thick constructed of sectionalized, mill
galvanized steel formed double skin insulated panels, rigidly reinforced with external
structural steel frame. Provide hinged access doors with neoprene type door gasket
for access to sections and components requiring servicing. All units installed
externally shall have close cell self-adhesive neoprene foamed gasket joints k value
of 0.4 W/mo K between panels. Externally mounted units shall have a pitched roof
with extra anticorrosive paint and self-adhesive protection foil.
D. Insulation: Coil, fan and accessory section panels shall be secured to casing with
permanent fasteners and shall meet NFPA 90A flame spread and smoke generation
requirements. All units shall be double skinned construction with 50 mm thick
thermal and acoustic insulation injected polyurethane having thermal coefficient of
0.5 W/mo K.
E. Condensate Drain Pans: Shall be stainless steel double wall construction with
threaded drain connections on both sides and shall extend under the complete coil
section of units. Condensate drain pans shall be insulated with minimum 16 mm
thick isocyanurate foam faced with an additional aluminum foil vapor barrier and
cemented between the outer pan and the inner stainless steel pan. Insulation
adhesive and inner coating shall comply with NFPA 90A flame spread and smoke
generation requirements.
F. Fan Sections: Fan sections shall be constructed of galvanized steel and have a
formed channel base for integral mounting of fan, motor and casing panels. Fan
scroll, wheel, shaft and bearings shall be mounted on structural steel frame rigidly
secured to the channel base. Fans shall be double width, double inlet type with
forward curved blades or backward curved airfoil section blades as indicated on the
schedule. Forward curved wheels shall be bonderized steel painted with baked
enamel or galvanized steel. Airfoil wheels shall be steel painted with zinc chromate
primer and an enamel finish coat. Externally mounted AHU's shall have backward
inclined or airfoil wheels.
Motor shall be factory installed on slide rails. Motors shall be totally enclosed fan
cooled (TEFC) with Class F insulation.
Fan shafts shall be solid steel, turned, ground and polished. Fan wheels shall be
keyed to the shaft and shall be designed for continuous operation at the maximum
rated fan speed and motor horsepower. Fan wheels and shafts shall be selected to
operate at least 25% below the first critical speed, and shall be statically and
dynamically balanced as an assembly. Fan bearings shall be self-aligning, pillow
block regreaseable ball type selected for an average life of 200,000 hours at design
operation conditions, per ANSI B 3.15.
Vibration isolation of the entire fan, motor and drive assembly shall be by use of 50
mm deflection springs, internally mounted at the factory, together with fan discharge
flexible connection and thrust restraint springs.
Fan motors shall be factory mounted inside the fan section casing, on slide rails
having 2 adjusting screws. Motor capacity shall be as indicated. Fan drives shall be
factory mounted with final alignment and belt adjustment to be made by the
Contractor after installation.
Motor s upto 7.5 kW shall be provided with direct online power and all motors of 11.2
kW and above shall be provided with soft motor starter.
Fan discharge dampers, with forward curved fans, shall be provided where required.
Dampers shall have opposed action damper blades, formed at the edges and
mechanically secured to steel rods rotating in bronze bushings, mounted on a rigid,
flanged, galvanized steel frame.
G. Coil Sections: Coil sections shall have heavy-duty coil tracks extending the full width
of the unit to provide slip-in, slip-out coils for ease of service and maintenance. All
coils shall be of the cartridge type, removable from coil connection side of casing.
They shall be tested at 400 psig air pressure while submerged in water. Coil
performance shall be certified in accordance with ARI 410 or EUROVENT.
Chilled water coils shall be aluminum plate fins with belled collars and bonded to
copper tubes by mechanical expansion. The fins for AHU shall have baked phenolic
or equivalent coating after production. Coils shall have galvanized steel casings and
steel headers with threaded connections. Working pressure shall be 20 bar (300
psig) at 93° C (200° F). Coils shall be drainable and shall have non-trapping circuits.
No turbulence promoting devices will be permitted inside the tubes. Headers shall
have drain and vent connections. Coils for 100% fresh air units shall be constructed
of copper tubes with copper fins.
An integral control box shall be furnished by the manufacturer and shall contain
thermal cutouts, primary and secondary control, back-up contactors, sub-circuit
fusing, airflow switch and fused control transformer.
Where coils are stacked, provide intermediate drain pans with drain tubes at either
end to drain condensate to the main drain pan without flooding the lower coil. Water
traps to be designed to prevent water and odors’ ingress to the air handling units’
negative pressure section.
Electric heating coils, where required, shall be open wire type, 80% nickel, 20%
chromium resistance coils, insulated by floating ceramic bushings and supported in
galvanized steel frame. Bushings shall be recessed into embossed openings and
stacked into supporting brackets spaced on not more than 100 mm centers. Thermal
cutouts for primary and secondary over temperature protection shall be provided to
meet UL, NEC or IEC requirements.
H. Filter Sections: Filter sections shall be supplied by the AHU unit manufacturer, with
the same casing construction as specified for other unit sections. Cartridge filter
sections for installation of fan inlet shall be capable of accepting standard 50 mm
thick cleanable prefilters and a combination of 300 mm x 600 mm and 600 mm x 600
mm cartridge filters and with minimum 85% efficiency (ASHRAE Standards 52-76).
Cartridge filter sections shall have hinged access doors on both sides for filter
replacement. Low velocity filter sections shall be capable of receiving 50 mm thick
filters of standard sizes arranged in horizontal V formation. Hinged access doors
shall be provided on both sides.
I. Mixing Boxes: Shall have motorized parallel blade, interconnected outside air and return air
dampers. Damper blades shall have parallel bends for stiffness and shall be welded
to 13 mm diameter steel rods rotating in nylon bushings and mounted in rigid
galvanized steel damper frames. Dampers shall be sectionalized to limit the blade
length to not more than 1270 mm in order to prevent excess blade warping and to
assure tight closure. All units installed externally shall have fresh air intake with rain
hood and filters.
J. Humidifier–Evaporative Sections: Humidifier section shall be supplied by the AHU
unit manufacturer with the same casing construction as specified for other unit
sections. It shall consist of an unheated fill of corrugated glass fibre for 90% efficient.
A corrosion resistant water distribution system complete with pump shall be included.
The water tank shall be stainless steel sloping to simplify cleaning and avoid
standing water during shut-off periods. The water bleed-off system shall be to
minimize water consumption and mineral salt deposits by the sensors. The
humidifier shall be equipped with a droplet eliminator to prevent water carry over.
The control of humidification and or cooling shall be through on/off control of pump
achieved by humidity and temperature controller. All necessary contracts for control
purposes shall be provided in the panel by the manufacturer of AHU.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of
the Work.
B. Examine casing insulation materials and filter media before air-handling unit
installation. Reject insulation materials and filter media that are wet, moisture
damaged, or mold damaged.
C. Examine roughing-in for steam, hydronic, and condensate drainage piping systems
and electrical services to verify actual locations of connections before installation.
D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Equipment Mounting: Install air-handling units on concrete bases using restrained

spring isolators. Secure units to anchor bolts installed in concrete bases. Comply
with requirements for concrete bases specified in Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place
Concrete." Comply with requirements for vibration isolation devices specified in
Division 15 Section "Vibration Isolation and Noise Control."
1. Minimum Deflection: 13 mm.

2. Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless
otherwise indicated, install dowel rods on 450-mm centers around the full
perimeter of concrete base.
3. Install epoxy-coated anchor bolts that extend through concrete base and
anchor into structural concrete floor.
4. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use setting drawings, templates,
diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.
5. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported
equipment.
B. Arrange installation of units to provide access space around air-handling units for
service and maintenance.

C. Do not operate fan system until filters (temporary or permanent) are in place.
Replace temporary filters used during construction and testing, with new, clean
filters.
D. Install filter-gage, static-pressure taps upstream and downstream of filters. Mount

filter gages on outside of filter housing or filter plenum in accessible position. Provide
filter gages on filter banks, installed with separate static-pressure taps upstream and
downstream of filters.
3.3 CONNECTIONS
A. Comply with requirements for piping specified in other Division 15 Sections.

Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
B. Install piping adjacent to air-handling unit to allow service and maintenance.
C. Connect piping to air-handling units mounted on vibration isolators with flexible

connectors.
D. Connect condensate drain pans using DN 32 galvanized steel pipe. Extend to

nearest equipment or floor drain. Construct deep trap at connection to drain pan and
install cleanouts at changes in direction.
E. Hot- and Chilled-Water Piping: Comply with applicable requirements in Division 15

Section "Chilled Water Piping." Install shutoff valve and union or flange at each coil
supply connection. Install balancing valve and union or flange at each coil return
connection.
F. Steam and Condensate Piping: Comply with applicable requirements in Division 15

Section "Chilled Water Piping." Install shutoff valve at steam supply connections,
float and thermostatic trap, and union or flange at each coil return connection. Install
gate valve and inlet strainer at supply connection of dry steam humidifiers, and
inverted bucket steam trap to condensate return connection.
G. Connect duct to air-handling units with flexible connections. Comply with

requirements in Division 15 Section "Air Duct Accessories."
A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to

inspect, test, and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations,
including connections.
B. Perform tests and inspections.
1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service

representative to inspect components, assemblies, and equipment
installations, including connections, and to assist in testing.
C. Tests and Inspections:
1. Leak Test: After installation, fill water and steam coils with water, and test
coils and connections for leaks.
2. Charge refrigerant coils with refrigerant and test for leaks.

3. Fan Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units
to confirm proper motor rotation and unit operation.
4. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning
controls and equipment.
D. Air-handling unit or components will be considered defective if unit or components do

not pass tests and inspections.
E. Prepare test and inspection reports.
3.5 STARTUP SERVICE
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service.
1. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written

instructions.
2. Verify that shipping, blocking, and bracing are removed.
3. Verify that unit is secure on mountings and supporting devices and that
connections to piping, ducts, and electrical systems are complete. Verify that
proper thermal-overload protection is installed in motors, controllers, and
switches.
4. Verify proper motor rotation direction, free fan wheel rotation, and smooth
bearing operations. Reconnect fan drive system, align belts, and install belt
guards.
5. Verify that bearings, pulleys, belts, and other moving parts are lubricated with
factory-recommended lubricants.
6. Verify that zone dampers fully open and close for each zone.
7. Verify that face-and-bypass dampers provide full face flow.
8. Verify that outdoor- and return-air mixing dampers open and close, and
maintain minimum outdoor-air setting.
9. Comb coil fins for parallel orientation.
10. Verify that proper thermal-overload protection is installed for electric coils.
11. Install new, clean filters.
12. Verify that manual and automatic volume control and fire and smoke
dampers in connected duct systems are in fully open position.
B. Starting procedures for air-handling units include the following:
1. Energize motor; verify proper operation of motor, drive system, and fan
wheel. Adjust fan to indicated rpm
2. Measure and record motor electrical values for voltage and amperage.
3. Manually operate dampers from fully closed to fully open position and record
fan performance.
3.6 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust damper linkages for proper damper operation. Comply with requirements in
Division 15 Section "Testing, Adjusting and Balancing " for air-handling system
testing, adjusting, and balancing.
3.7 CLEANING
A. After completing system installation and testing, adjusting, and balancing air-
handling unit and air-distribution systems and after completing startup service, clean
air-handling units internally to remove foreign material and construction dirt and dust.
Clean fan wheels, cabinets, dampers, coils, and filter housings, and install new,
clean filters.

3.8 DEMONSTRATION
A. Train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain air-handling

units.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 15763
FAN COIL UNITS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes fan-coil units and accessories.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. Air-Conditioning & Refrigeration Institute
ARI 210/240 Unitary Air Conditioning & Air-Source Heat Pump

Equipment
ARI 440 Room Fan Coils
B. American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers
ASHRAE 52.1 Gravimetric and Dust-Spot Procedures for Testing

Air-Cleaning Devices Used in General Ventilation for
Removing Particulate Matter (ANSI)
ASHRAE 52.2 Method of Testing General Ventilation Air-Cleaning

Devices for Removal Efficiency by Particle Size
(ANSI)
ASHRAE 62 Ventilation for Acceptable Indoor Air Quality (ANSI)
C. ASME International
ASME B16.22 Wrought Copper and Copper Alloy Solder Joint

Pressure Fittings
D. ASTM International
ASTM A 126 Specification for Gray Iron Castings for Valves,

Flanges, and Pipe Fittings
ASTM B 88 Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube
ASTM C 916 Specification for Adhesives for Duct Thermal

Insulation
ASTM C 1071 Specification for Fibrous Glass Duct Lining

Insulation (Thermal and Sound Absorbing Material)
ASTM E 84 Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of

Building Materials
15763-1 Fan Coil Units

E. NFPA

Systems
F. Underwriters Laboratories Inc.
UL 1995 sHeating and Cooling Equipment
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. BAS: Building automation system.
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, furnished

specialties, and accessories.
B. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights,

loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location
and size of each field connection.
1. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring.
C. Samples for Initial Selection: For units with factory-applied color finishes.
D. Samples for Verification: For each type of fan-coil unit indicated.
1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Coordination Drawings: Floor plans, reflected ceiling plans, and other details,
drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each
other, based on input from installers of the items involved:
1. Ceiling suspension components.

2. Structural members to which fan-coil units will be attached.
3. Method of attaching hangers to building structure.
4. Size and location of initial access modules for acoustical tile.
5. Items penetrating finished ceiling, including the following:
a. Lighting fixtures.
b. Air outlets and inlets.
c. Speakers.
d. Sprinklers.
e. Access panels.
6. Perimeter moldings for exposed or partially exposed cabinets.
B. Manufacturer Seismic Qualification Certification: Submit certification that fan-coil

units, accessories, and components will withstand seismic forces defined in
Division 15 Section "Vibration Isolation and Noise Controlt." Include the following:

1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on
actual test of assembled components or on calculation.
a. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without
separation of any parts from the device when subjected to the
seismic forces specified and the unit will be fully operational after
the seismic event."
2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of

gravity and locate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions.
3. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the
certification is based and their installation requirements.
C. Field quality-control test reports.
D. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section.
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined

in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.
B. ASHRAE Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1, Section 5 -

"Systems and Equipment" and Section 7 - "Construction and Startup."
C. ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1 Compliance: Applicable requirements in

ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1, Section 6 - "Heating, Ventilating, and Air-Conditioning."
1.7 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of fan-coil units and suspension system

components with other construction that penetrates or is supported by ceilings,
including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, fire-suppression-system components,
and partition assemblies.
B. Coordinate size and location of wall sleeves for outdoor-air intake.
1.8 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to

repair or replace components of condensing units that fail in materials or
workmanship within specified warranty period.
1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Compressor failure.
b. Condenser coil leak.
2. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.

3. Warranty Period (Compressor Only): Five years from date of Substantial
Completion.
4. Warranty Period (Condenser Coil Only): Five years from date of
Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 FAN-COIL UNITS
A. Unit shall deliver published cooling capacities when tested in accordance with
current ARI Standard 441 or EUROVENT. Unit, options and accessories shall be
wired and assembled in accordance with NEC. Unit without options and accessories
shall be UL listed or as per EUROVENT standards.
B. For coastal areas environmental protection, Condenser coils shall be of copper

tubes copper fins.
C. Basic Unit shall be complete with water coil, one or more centrifugal fans with PSC
motors, 3-speed switch, condensate drain pan and 18-gage galvanize steel casing.
The cabinet shall be acoustically and thermally insulated with 12 mm thick glass fiber
insulation meeting NFPA-90A requirements. Capacity shall be as shown on
drawings.
D. Furred-in Plenum Units shall have a 62 mm return air duct collar at the bottom of the
plenum that permits removal of optional filter without removing any panels.
Removable rear panels shall provide access to the motor blower assembly, valves
and piping.
E. Units for exposed installation shall include hinged bar type return air grille on the rear
of unit with cleanable filter and integral double deflection supply grille.
F. Coils shall be (standard 4 or 6-row) with 12 mm or OD copper tubes and aluminum

fins mechanically bonded to tubes. Coils shall be leak-tested at 2.4 Mpa minimum air
pressure and shall be suitable for working pressures up to 1.72 Mpa. Each coil shall
have a manual air vent (standard) or automatic air vent (optional). Coil sweat
connections shall be OD copper of the size listed in the plans.
G. Fan Motors shall be 3-speed, permanent split capacitor type with built-in thermal
overload protection. Fans shall be centrifugal, forward curved type and shall be both
statically and dynamically balanced. Fan wheels and housings shall be of coated
steel.
H. Junction Box shall be factory installed and wired to fan motor and optional electric
valves, electric heater and aquastats.
I. Drain Pan shall be of 18 gage galvanized steel, pitched for positive drainage when
until is level. Interior and exterior surfaces shall be insulated with fire-retardant,
closed cell foam. Drain connection shall be 21.8 mm OD male sweat fitting.
J. Filters shall be 25 mm thick cleanable filter media in aluminum frame.
K. Valves: Motorized valve package, including 2-way modulating motorized valve, one
balancing valve and two gate valves; connecting piping made with copper tube;
electric cables of valve motor. Valve packages are to be provided with factory
installed unions. All units should have 3/4 inch valve packages for flow rates above
5 gpm and 1/2 inch packages for flow rates up to 5 gpm. All units to be provided
with driplips beneath the valve packages.
L. Electric heating coils, shall be open wire type, 80% nickel, 20% chromium resistance
coils, insulated by floating ceramic bushings and supported in galvanized steel

frame. Bushings shall be recessed into embossed openings and stacked into
supporting brackets spaced on not more than 100 mm centers. Thermal cutouts for
primary and secondary over temperature protection shall be provided to meet UL,
NEC or IEC requirements.
An integral control box shall be furnished by the manufacturer and shall contain
thermal cutouts, primary and secondary control, back-up contactors, sub-circuit
fusing, airflow switch and fused control transformer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas to receive fan-coil units for compliance with requirements for
installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.
B. Examine roughing-in for piping and electrical connections to verify actual locations
before fan-coil-unit installation.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install fan-coil units level and plumb.
B. Install fan-coil units to comply with NFPA 90A.
C. Suspend fan-coil units from structure with elastomeric hangers. Vibration

isolators are specified in Division 15 Section "Vibration Isolation and Noise
Control"
D. Verify locations of thermostats, humidistats, and other exposed control sensors

with Drawings and room details before installation. Install devices 1525 mm
above finished floor.
E. Install new filters in each fan-coil unit within two weeks after Substantial
Completion.
3.3 CONNECTIONS
A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections.

Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
Specific connection requirements are as follows:
1. Install piping adjacent to machine to allow service and maintenance.

2. Connect piping to fan-coil-unit factory hydronic piping package. Install
piping package if shipped loose.
3. Connect condensate drain to indirect waste.
a. Install condensate trap of adequate depth to seal against the

pressure of fan. Install cleanouts in piping at changes of direction.
B. Connect supply and return ducts to fan-coil units with flexible duct connectors
specified in Division 15 Section "HVAC Ductworks." Comply with safety
requirements in UL 1995 for duct connections.
C. Ground equipment according to Division 16 Section "Grounding"
D. Connect wiring according to Division 16 Section "Low Voltage Cables and Wires."
A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative

to inspect, test, and adjust field-assembled components and equipment
installation, including connections, and to assist in field testing. Report results in
writing.
B. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:
1. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units
to confirm proper motor rotation and unit operation.
2. Test and adjust controls and safety devices. Replace damaged and
malfunctioning controls and equipment.
C. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.
3.5 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust initial temperature and humidity set points.
B. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months of date of

Substantial Completion, provide on-site assistance in adjusting system to suit
actual occupied conditions. Provide up to two visits to Project during other than
normal occupancy hours for this purpose.
3.6 DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance

personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain fan-coil units.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 15781
AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. The Work shall consist of furnishing and installation of air conditioning

systems as shown on the drawings and as specified herein.
1.2 REFERENCES

SASO 1434 Thermal environmental conditions for human

occupancy.

Definitions and technical terms.

Requirements of HVAC systems.
SASO 385 Methods of test for room air conditioners
SASO 386 Room air conditioners

conditioning in buildings -Part 1: General basis of
design.

conditioning in buildings -Part 2: General
requirements for installation.
B. ARI - Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute:
ARI 210 Unitary Air Conditioning Equipment.
ARI 260 Application, Installation, and Servicing of Unitary

Systems.
ARI 360 Commercial and Industrial Unitary Air Conditioning

Equipment.
15781 - 1 Air Conditioning System

ARI 410 Forced Circulation Air-cooling and Air-Heating Coils.
ARI 440 Room Fan Coil Air Conditioners.
ARI 520 Positive Displacement Refrigerant Compression and

Condensing Units.
C. ANSI - American National Standards Institute :
ANSI B9.1 Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration.
ANSI B15.1 Safety Standard for Mechanical Power Transmission

Apparatus.
D. ASHRAE - American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning

Engineers, Inc.:
ASHRAE 15 Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration.
ASHRAE 33 Methods of Testing Forced Circulation Air Cooling

and Heating coils.
ASHRAE 37 Methods of Testing for Rating Unitary Air

Conditioning and Heating Pump Equipment.
ASHRAE 90A Energy Conservation in New Building Design.
E. NEMA - National Electrical Manufacturer's Association:
NEMA MG-1 Motors and Generators.
NEMA ICS General Standards for Industrial Control and System.
F. NFPA - National Fire Protection Association:
NFPA 70 National Electric Code.
NFPA 90.A Installation of Air-Conditioning and Ventilation

Systems.
G. UL - Underwriters Laboratories Inc.:
UL-465 Central Cooling Air Conditioners.
UL-883 Safety Standards for Fan Coil Units and Room Fan
Heaters Units.
H. EUROVENT
All relevant standards as applicable.

1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data, including rated

capacities for all air conditioning units indicated, weights (shipping, installed
and operating), supplied specialties and accessories; and installation and
start-up instructions.
B. Shop Drawings: Submit manufacturer's assembly type shop drawings

indicating dimensions, weight loadings, required clearances, methods of
assembly of components, and location and size of each field connection.
C. Wiring Diagrams: Submit manufacturer's electrical requirements for power

supply wiring to units.
D. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data and parts list
for each unit, control, and accessory, including Trouble-Shooting
maintenance guide, servicing guide, and preventive maintenance schedule
and procedures.
E. As-built Drawings: A complete and up-to-date set of all mechanical work as

installed shall be maintained and submitted.
F. Spare Parts List: Submit the manufacturer's spare parts list for the air-
conditioning equipment for a period of 2 years for the Engineer's review and
approval.
A. Tests: Submit proposed testing program to the Engineer at least 2 weeks

prior to scheduled test to assure agreement and approval of personnel and
instrumentation required, and the scope of testing program. Conduct tests in
the presence of Engineer. Engineer shall be given a 2-days notice before
conducting tests. Water and electricity required for tests shall be the
responsibility of the Contractor. Materials, equipment, instruments and
personnel required for the tests shall be provided by the Contractor.
B. Testing: System testing and the submittal of reports shall comply with the
applicable ASHRAE Standards.
1.5 TRANSPORTATION, HANDLING AND STORAGE
A. Transportation, handling and storage of materials shall be in accordance

with manufacturer's recommendations regarding transportation, handling
and storage of materials.
B. Deliver materials to the site in manufacturer's original factory wrappings and

containers, clearly labeled for identification of manufacturer, brand name
and contents. Store materials off ground in original undamaged packages
and containers, inside well-ventilated area protected from weather, moisture,
soiling, extreme temperatures, and humidity.

1.6 WARRANTY
A. The entire system shall be warranted for 1 year from substantial completion.
Refrigeration compressors shall have an additional 3 year warranty starting
from the date of final acceptance by the Owner. Date of final acceptance is
defined as date of final payment to Contractor.
1.7 OPERATIONAL TESTS
A. Prior to final inspection, operate systems continuously free and stable for a
minimum of 14 consecutive days. Each day shall be a minimum of an 8-
hour day. Should a problem arise, the 14-day period shall be restarted and
repeated until successfully operated for 14 days.
1.8 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
A. Contractor shall provide full operating instructions to the Owner's personnel

of items of equipment that are, or have components that are motor-driven, or
electric resistance heated. Instructions are to be given at the Engineer
convenience.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
A. Materials used shall be new of first quality as approved by the Engineer.

Minor items, accessories, devices reasonably inferable as necessary to the
complete and proper operation of a system shall be provided by contractor
for such system whether or not they are specifically called for by
specifications or drawings.
B. Air Conditioning Units: Design, manufacture and installation of mechanical

refrigeration equipment shall meet the requirements of ASHRAE 15,
ASHRAE 90.1, ASME, OSHA, ARI 590 or EUROVENT.
C. Fully guard drive mechanisms or other moving parts shall be in accordance

with ANSI B15.1.
D. All Air Conditioning equipments selection shall be based on 2 C° higher

temperature than ambient conditions.
2.2 PIPES AND PIPE FITTINGS
A. Precharged Tubing: Refrigerant pipes for mini-split and ducted-split air

conditioning units shall be Type L streamlined, cleaned and dehydrated
copper tubing supplied with refrigerant charge and pressure tight plugs for
each length. Insulated tubing shall be supplied by the manufacturer of air
conditioning units.

B. Rigid Tubing: Refrigerant pipe shall be Type K streamlined hard temper
conforming to ASTM B 88 and provided with pressure tight plugs for each
length.
C. Fittings: Pipe fittings including unions, flanges or alike shall be streamlined

pattern wrought copper with minimum 2 MPa working pressure, all
complying with ASTM B75.
D. Valves: Valves shall be of brass body, UL listed, minimum 3 Mpa working

pressure rating. Unless indicated otherwise on drawings, valves shall
include Manual Shut-Off Valves, Expansion Valves, Charging Valves,
Solenoid Valves, Throttling Valves, Pressure Relief Valves, Check Valves;
sizes as required for application.
E. Specialties:
1. Liquid and Moisture Indicators: Single port type; forged brass body;
reversible color moisture indicator; minimum 3.4 MPa working
pressure; leakproof; solder connections; self-cleaning molded sight
glass with brass safety cap; UL labeled.
2. Strainers: Y-pattern; cast bronze body for refrigerant system; monel

wire cloth screen of mesh as recommended by manufacturer;
cleanout plug.
3. Vibration Eliminators: Shall have seamless tin bronze or stainless

steel core; high tensile bronze braid covering; solder connections;
pressure tested; dehydrated; synthetic covering; minimum 3.4 Mpa
working pressure; UL labeled; minimum 175 mm in length.
4. Driers: Combination filter drier type; angle type solder connections;

heavy steel body; neoprene gasketed removable flange; spring
loaded core; replaceable non-dusting and non-channeling molded
desiccant briquettes; sintered bronze outlet filter; minimum 3.4 Mpa
working pressure; UL labeled.
2.3 MINI-SPLIT AIR CONDITIONING UNITS
A. Air conditioning system shall consist of a remote air cooled condensing unit
and an indoor fan coil unit.
B. Air cooled condensing unit and the matched indoor fan coil unit shall
conform to the requirements of ARI 210.
C. Cooling and Heating Capacities: As shown on Drawings.
D. Condensing unit shall be a complete packaged, factory assembled,

electrically operated unit consisting of compressor, condenser coil,
condenser fan and motor and the necessary structural frame, weather
protected housing, valves, piping, wiring and controls. Unit shall be pre-
charged with refrigerant R-22.

E. The condenser coil shall have copper tubes and aluminum fins coated with
manufacturer’s standard anti-corrosive coating. For costal applications,
condenser coil shall have copper tubes and copper fins.
F. Direct expansion type indoor fan coil units with remote thermostat and
switches shall include evaporator coils, expansion device, heat pump,
centrifugal fans, motors and controls, air filters, and condensate pans and
drains. Each unit shall be provided with a factory operating charge of
refrigerant and oil or holding charge. Refrigerant shall be R-22 type.
G. Compressor shall be scroll type, hermetically sealed and shall incorporate

internal high temperature motor overload protection, motor to be mounted
on spring isolators. Compressors shall have an internal pressure relief
assembly to protect against excessive pressure differential.
H. Units shall be supplied with required length of pre-insulated refrigerant pipes

by the unit manufacturer.
I. Mini-split unites shall be cooling/heat pump type. for heat pump type provide
reversing valve, suction line accumulator, discharge muffler, flow control
check valve and solid-state defrost control utilizing thermisters.
2.4 DX DUCTED SPLIT SYSTEM AIR CONDITIONING UNITS
A. Air-Cooled Condensing Units: The units shall be properly assembled and

tested at the factory. Refrigerant shall be R-22. Nominal unit characteristics,
performance and cooling capacities shall be as shown on the drawings. The
condenser coil shall have copper tubes and aluminum fins coated with
manufacturer’s standard anti-corrosive coating. For costal applications,
condenser coil shall have copper tubes and copper fins. Compressors shall
be hermetic reciprocating type designed with external spring isolators and
shall have automatically reversible oil pumps. The unit shall be designed for
outdoor application with direct driven propeller type fans.
B. Ducted Type Fan Coil Units: Units shall be of the type, size, and capacity as
indicated on the drawings. Furnish fan coil unit with filter section, cooling and
heating coil section and fan section. Location shall be as indicated on
mechanical drawings. The unit shall be certified in accordance with the ARI
Standards.
C. DX Ducted -split unites shall be cooling/heat pump type. for heat pump type
provide reversing valve, suction line accumulator, discharge muffler, flow
control check valve and solid-state defrost control utilizing thermisters.
2.5 CENTRAL-SPLIT SYSTEM AIR CONDITIONING UNITS
A. Air-Cooled Condensing Units: The units shall be properly assembled and

tested at the factory. It shall be designed for use with Refrigerant R-410.
Nominal unit characteristics, performance and cooling capacities shall be as
shown on the drawings. The condenser coil shall have copper tubes and
aluminum fins. Condenser coils shall be of copper tubes copper fins for
coastal areas environmental protection. Compressors shall be of hermetic

reciprocating type designed with external spring isolators and shall have
automatically reversible oil pumps. The unit shall be designed for outdoor
application with direct driven propeller type fans.
B. Ducted Type Air Handling Units: Units shall be of the type, size, and
capacity as indicated on the drawings. Furnish air handling unit with filter
section, cooling and heating coil section and fan section. Location shall be
as indicated on mechanical drawings. The unit shall be certified in
accordance with the ARI Standards.
2.6 PACKAGE AIR CONDITIONING UNITS
A. General: Factory-assembled, single-piece cooling and heating unit.

Contained within the unit enclosure shall be all factory wiring, piping,
controls, refrigerant charge (R-410), and special features required prior to
field start-up. Units shall comply with the requirements ASHRAE, ARI or
EUROVENT.
B. Unit Cabinet:
1. Unit cabinet shall be constructed of galvanized steel, bonderized and

coated with a baked enamel finish on all externally exposed
surfaces.
2. Evaporator fan cabinet interior shall be insulated with a minimum ½-

in. thick flexible fiberglass insulation coated on the air side.
Aluminum foilfaced fiberglass insulation shall be used in the furnace
compartment.
3. Cabinet panels shall be easily removable for servicing.
4. Holes shall be provided in the base rails for rigging shackles to

facilitate overhead rigging, and forklift slots shall be provided to
facilitate maneuvering.
C. Fans:
1. Indoor blower (evaporator fan) shall be of the direct or belt-driven,

double inlet, forward-curved centrifugal type. Belt drive shall include
an adjustable pitch motor pulley.
2. Indoor blower (evaporator-fan) shall be made from steel with a

corrosion-resistant finish and shall be dynamically balanced.
3. Bearings shall be of the sealed, permanently lubricated, ball-bearing

type for longer life and lower maintenance.
4. Condenser fan shall be of the direct-driven propeller type and shall

discharge air vertically.
5. Condenser fan shall have aluminum blades riveted to corrosion-

resistant steel spiders and shall be dynamically balanced.

D. Compressor(s):
1. Fully hermetic type, internally protected.
2. Factory rubber shock mounted and internally spring mounted for

vibration isolation.
3. On independent circuits (008-014)
E. Coils:
1. Condenser coils shall have aluminum plate fins mechanically

bonded to enhanced copper tubes with all joints brazed coated with
manufacturer’s standard anti-corrosive coating. For costal
applications, condenser coil shall have copper tubes and copper
fins.
2. Tube sheet openings shall be belled to prevent tube wear.
3. Evaporator coil shall be of the full face active design.
F. Refrigerant Components:
1. Acutrol feed system.
2. Refrigerant strainer.
3. Service gage connections on suction, discharge, and liquid line.
G. Filter Section:
1. Flat Panel Filter, Replaceable.
2. Bag Filter, Extended Surface
3. Standard filter section shall consist of factory-installed low-velocity,

throwaway 2-in. thick fiberglass filters of commercially available sizes.
4. Filter face velocity shall not exceed 320 fpm at nominal airflows.
H. Controls and Safeties:
1. Unit Controls: Unit shall be complete with self-contained low voltage

control circuit, protected by a manual-reset circuit breaker.
2. Standard Safeties: Unit shall incorporate compressor over

temperature and over current safety devices to shut off compressor.
I. Operating Characteristics:

1. Unit shall be capable of starting and running at +2o C higher than
ambient outdoor temperature, meeting maximum load criteria of ARI
Standard 210/240 or 360 at ± 10% voltage.
2. Compressor with standard controls shall be capable of operation

down to 25oF ambient outdoor temperature.
J. Electrical Requirements: All unit power wring shall enter unit cabinet at a
single factory-predrilled location.
K. Motors:
1. Compressor motors shall be cooled by refrigerant passing through

motor windings and shall have line break thermal and current
overload protection.
2. Indoor blower (evaporator-fan) motor shall have permanently

lubricated bearings and inherent automatic-reset thermal overload
protection.
3. Totally-enclosed (TEFC with Class F insulation) condenser-fan

motor shall have permanently lubricated bearings, and inherent
automatic-reset thermal overload protection.
L. Special Features:
1. Manual Outdoor Air Damper: Manual damper package shall consist

of damper, birdscreen, and rainhood which can be preset to admit
up to 25% outdoor air for year-round ventilation.
2. Electronic Programmable Thermostat: Capable of using deluxe full-

featured electronic thermostat with duct mounted temperature
sensor.
M. Cooling Capacity: As shown on drawings.
2.7 ENERGY RECOVERY HEAT PIPES
A. General: Where shown on drawings, air conditioning equipment shall be

equipped with energy recovery heat pipes to recover the cooling from
exhaust air and pre-cool the fresh air entering the air handling unit. The
heat pipe shall be a single section and will straddle the airways in the
supply and extract decks of the AHU or the supply and extract ductwork.
The two airways shall be adjacent to each other with a maximum distance
between them of 500mm.
Heat pipes for energy recovery shall comprise a supply fin block coupled
directly to an extract fin block. In order to optimize the performance of the
heat pipe, supply and extract airflows shall be arranged to be in counter
flow as they pass through the heat pipe section. The heat pipe shall be
suitable for either side by side mounting between the two adjacent ducts

(horizontal heat pipe) or top and bottom mounting with the warmer air
flowing through the bottom section (vertical heat pipe). The length of the
heat pipes in the supply and extract section shall be selected so as to
match the respective air volumes. The number of heat pipes shall be
constant in both sections. The heat pipe assemblies will be delivered to
the AHU manufacturer or contractor fully charged and sealed with casing
flanges to suit the application.
B. Fins: The external fins shall be of vinyl pre-coated on aluminium with a

minimum thickness of 0.15mm. Fins shall be of the continuous plate type
to maximize the external surface area rather than individually finned tube
pattern. If necessary, fin spacing may differ between the supply and
extract section.
C. Tubes: Tubes shall be of refrigeration standard seamless copper C106 for

heat exchanger use. Tube diameter shall be 12mm with a grooved inner
surface to enhance the internal surface area and prevent pooling of liquid.
The minimum root thickness of the tube shall be 0.35mm. The number of
rows of tubes shall be selected to suit the application. Multiple row heat
pipes shall have tubes in a staggered, equilateral pattern to optimize the
airside heat transfer. Aluminum tubes will not be allowed.
D. Casing: Casings shall be from galvanized sheet steel with a minimum

thickness of 1.6mm. The casing shall incorporate tube plates, continuous
side plates and a centre dividing plate to prevent cross-contamination
between the two airstreams. Should the conditions allow moisture to be
condensed on the surface of the heat pipe then, unless overall catchment
is provided in the AHU, the heat pipe shall be complete with an integral
drain pan. Vertical heat pipes with drain pans shall be complete with
moisture eliminator blades to trap moisture blown off the horizontal fin
surfaces. Cover boxes shall be provided around the ends to protect the
exposed pipes. The drain pan should be of Stainless Steel 304 Grade.
E. Working Fluid: The working fluid shall be refrigerant type classified as

ASHRAE safety group A1. The refrigerant shall be R-134a. The heat pipe
circuits shall be factory charged and hermetically sealed with the
calculated weight of refrigerant.
F. Circuitry: Heat pipes shall be formed from an array of complete loops,

each loop straddling the supply and extract airways with the same number
of tubes per loop in both sections.
There shall be a multitude of loops in the height/width of the heat pipe and
each loop shall be individually charged. Heat pipes with header
assemblies containing a single circuit are not suitable as a single leak will
render the entire heat pipe inoperative.
When multiple row heat pipes are used tubes in different rows shall not be
connected together, this will ensure correct counter flow between the
airstreams and optimize the performance of the heat pipe. Rows shall not
be manifolded together.

Heat pipe loops shall be arranged to allow gravity assisted liquid return to
maximize the internal heat transfer. Vertical heat pipes will have the
warmer air flowing over the bottom of the heat pipe and horizontal heat
pipes will incorporate a slope from the warmer side up to the cooler side.
G. Performance: Heat pipes shall be designed to comply with the specified

conditions when subject to the air volumes given in the specification. Heat
pipe performance shall be independently type tested and certified in line
with the requirements of British Standards BS 5141 pt1 / European
Standards EN 305 & 306 / American Standards ARI 410 for testing and
rating of heat exchangers. All software used to predict the performance of
heat pipes shall be based upon the results of these independent tests.
H. Conditions: Heat pipes shall be specified based upon a standard set of

conditions for the outside/supply air and the actual condition of the extract
air. The outside conditions can be either climatic design conditions or
most commonly occurring conditions for the location in question. Both dry
bulb and wet bulb temperatures shall be specified for the outside and
extract air along with the required condition of the supply air having
passed through the heat pipe.
I. Installation
1. The Heat Pipes shall be installed as shown on the drawings.
2. For AHU mounting, the heat pipe shall be designed to fit within the
supply and extract sections with flanges on the centre dividing plate
sized to match the thickness of the panels separating the two decks.
The heat pipe shall be sized to maximize the available finned
surface area when fitted in the AHU. Once installed within the AHU
the heat pipe shall be blanked-off to ensure that there is no air
bypass around the fin blocks of either the supply or extract section.
3. For duct-mounted applications the heat pipe shall be sized to match

the area of the supply and extract ducts. Whenever necessary
ducting transformation pieces shall be fitted by the installer
upstream and downstream of the heat pipe so as to ensure the
correct air velocity. The casing of the heat pipe shall be complete
with flanges for mating to the adjoining ductwork. Mating faces shall
be screwed or riveted and sealed in line with standard ductwork
practice.
J. Independent Test Report: The heat pipe should have a third party
independent test report conducted by a certified laboratory.
K. Manufacturing Experience: The heat pipe manufacturer shall have

minimum 10 years experience in manufacturing of heat pipes and must
have heat pipes commissioned for a minimum period of 5 years in the
Middle East market.
2.8 HUMIDIFIER:

A. Supply and install self-contained electronically controlled steam generating
humidifiers of the size(s) shown on the drawings. The humidifier(s) shall be
U.L. listed and CSA certified. Steam shall be generated from tap water in a
factory sealed cylinder containing electrodes. Cylinders shall not require
setting of electrode spacing, cleaning or maintenance and shall be of the
disposable type.
B. The humidifier(s) shall include an automatic drain cycle controlled

electronically to maximize energy efficiency. Drain cycle shall adapt to
variations in water conditions and not require manual setting.
C. Humidifier(s) shall include overcurrent protection as an integral function of

the solid-state circuit board. In the event of overcurrent, the humidifier shall
signal that a fault condition exists by flashing an abnormal light. Overcurrent
protection shall be resettable. Replaceable type fuses are not acceptable.
Humidifier(s) shall also include secondary magnetic overload switches that

shall be manually resettable and shall be of the type that positively
disconnects power to the steam cylinder. Humidifier(s) shall include a door
interlock safety switch to disconnect power to the steam cylinder(s) when
cabinet door is opened.
D. The system shall include one steam distributor pipe for each steam
generating cylinder for mounting in the duct as shown on the plans. Steam
distributing pipe(s) shall be of corrosion resistant design and be designed to
provide uniform distribution over the entire pipe length. Supply and install
remote (or humidifier mounted) fan distribution units to discharge steam
directly into the conditioned area. Provide following components:
1. Fan motor.
2. Transformer for required voltage to operate fan motor.
3. Pressure differential type air flow switch.
4. Integral on-off control humidistat.
5. Integral proportional control humidistat.
The system shall include flexible hose to connect the steam cylinder(s) to
the stream distributor pipe(s). A separate condensate return line shall return
condensate to the humidifier for reuse to minimize energy consumption.
E. The humidifier(s) shall incorporate a 1" air gap on the fill water line to
prevent backflow. An air gap fitting shall also be provided on the drain line to
isolate the unit from any backflow in external drain pipes.
F. The humidifier cabinet(s) shall be constructed of 18 gauge galvanized steel

protected by a gray enamel finish for corrosion resistance. The cabinet door
shall be hinged and provided with a lock and key. A steam output meter
calibrated in pounds of steam per hour, indicator lights and on-off-drain
switch shall be accessible with the cabinet door closed.
G. The humidifier(s) shall be controlled by a humidistat which operates through

the solid state circuit board. Humidifier(s) shall incorporate terminals for

connection of humidistat, air flow switch and high limit humidistat. Provide
following controls:
1. Wall mounted humidistat, on-off control.

2. Wall mounted humidistat, proportional control.
3. Duct mounted humidistat, proportional control.
4. Duct mounted humidistat, on-off control, with sail type air flow switch.
5. High limit duct mounted humidistat.
6. Pressure differential type air flow switch.
7. Paddle type air flow switch.
The fill water line shall include a strainer to remove sediment from incoming
water and a flow regulating control to automatically compensate for water
pressures from 20 - 120 psi.
H. Humidifier(s) electronic circuit shall include automatic controls to

compensate for varying water conditions without changing cylinders or
electrode spacing. The control shall activate the fill and drain solenoid valves
to automatically maximize efficiency.
I. The humidifier(s) shall include a high water sensor to prevent overfilling and
loss of water. Abnormal light shall signal if high water level reduces output to
less than 50% of the desired level. The fill solenoid valve shall open
whenever the drain solenoid valve is activated to prevent discharge of
boiling water into drainage system. Abnormal light shall indicate that switch
is in drain position.
2.9 VIBRATION ISOLATORS AND EQUIPMENT PADS
A. Refer to Section 15240-VIBRATION ISOLATION AND NOISE CONTROL.
2.10 SAND TRAP LOUVERS:
A. Sand trap louvers shall separate sand from intake air. Louvers shall be
vertical fixed blade type with blades arranged to provide tortuous air flow
path and thus trap sand.
B. Louver shall have self emptying drain holes. Louvers shall be constructed of
aluminum to ASTM B209 and ANSI.1. Blades shall be 1.6 mm thick and
casing 2.0 mm thick. Maximum louver face velocity shall be 1.2 M/s and
maximum pressure drop 50 Pa.
C. Louvers shall be provided with washable filter and an insect screen of

aluminum 2 mm X 2 mm mesh mounted on a standard U type frame with
miter corners. Screens shall be secured to the interior face of the louver with
self-tapping stainless steel screws.
D. Size of louvers shall be as indicated on the drawings. Louvers of heights

1125 mm to 2250 shall have central transom and sand chute and for heights
2250 mm to 4500 mm louver shall have additional central bracing support as
recommended by the manufacturer.

E. Louvers shall have efficiency of 80% with coarse test dust (20 to 200
microns) and 50% efficiency with fine test dust (1 to 70 microns).
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. The entire air conditioning system installation shall conform to the

requirements of ARI 260 and ANSI B9.1
B. Equipment and components shall be completely installed in a manner to

insure proper and sequential operation of the equipment and its controls.
Equipment shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations. Proper foundations for mounting of equipment,
accessories, appurtenances, piping and controls shall be provided, including
supports, vibrations isolators, stands, guides, anchors, clamps and brackets.
Isolation units shall be selected and sized, based on load-bearing
requirements and lowest frequency of vibration. Foundations for equipment
shall conform to equipment manufacturer's recommendation, unless
otherwise shown on Drawings. Anchor bolts and sleeves shall be set
accurately using properly constructed templates. Anchor bolts shall be of
adequate length and provided with welded-on plates on the head end
embedded in the concrete.
Equipment bases shall be leveled, using jacks or steel wedges and neatly
grouted-in using a non-shrinking type of grouting mortar. Keep equipment
thoroughly clean and free from all debris with all oil, dirt and paint spots
removed until final acceptance.
C. Electrical Wiring: Install all electrical devices furnished by manufacturer but

not specified to be factory-mounted.
3.2 FIELD TEST AND INSPECTION
A. Inspection: Materials, equipment and the completed installation will be

inspected by Engineer. Equipment, materials or work rejected because of
defects or non-conformance with Drawings and Specifications shall be
replaced or corrected by as directed by Engineer.
B. Start-up air conditioning system, in accordance with manufacturer's start-up

instructions, and in presence of the manufacturer's technical representative.
Test controls and demonstrate compliance with requirements. Replace
damaged or malfunctioning controls and equipment, and retest.
C. Tests:
1. Provide materials and equipment required to perform the tests.

Defects disclosed by the test shall be corrected at no cost to Owner.
2. Tests after installation and prior to acceptance shall be performed in

the presence of Engineer and subject to his Approval.
3. Conform to the applicable requirements specified in Section 15990 -

TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING.
4. Equipment and material certified as having complied with referenced

Specifications and Standards will not require retesting before
installation. Equipment and materials not tested at place of
manufacture will be tested before and after installation, as
applicable, where necessary to determine compliance with
referenced specifications and Standards.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 15855
COMPUTER ROOM AIR CONDITIONING UNIT – DX TYPE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. The Work shall consist of furnishing and installation of direct expansion coil (DX)
based Computer Room Air Conditioning (CRAC) Units as shown on the drawings
and as specified herein.
1.2 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
A. Computer Room Air Conditioning (CRAC) Unit shall be self-contained factory

assembled with up-flow or down-flow air discharge as shown on drawings.
Capacity shall be as indicated in drawings. The precision unit shall be suitable for
Data Computer rooms and Data Centers and to be installed indoors.
B. The unit shall be specifically designed for use in enclosed spaces where the
cooling capacity and its continuity are vitally important to the correct functioning of
the electronic equipment contained in that space. The manufacturer shall design
and furnish all equipment to be fully compatible with heat dissipation requirements
of the room.
C. In order to guarantee the maximum reliability of the performance of the machines,

the units to be selected must be listed in ARI or Eurovent test program, subjected
to the rigorous checks of this institute to obtain its certification of the relevant
cooling performance.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Submittals shall be provided with the proposal and shall include: Single-Line
Diagrams; Dimensional, declaration of conformity, technical manuals, any test
certificates, Electrical, and Capacity Data; Piping and Electrical Connection
Drawings.
PART 2 - PRODUCT
2.1 CABINET AND FRAME CONSTRUCTION
A. The structure shall be made of hot-galvanised sheet metal and the frame made of
aluminium profiles painted. The cover panels and access doors shall be made of
hot-galvanised steel sheet metal, covered in a PVC film in color. The doors shall
be fastened to the structure with hinges and safety access keys and the panels
shall be closed with quick-thread screws. The doors, profiles and panels shall
have a thermal acoustic insulation system consisting of 25 mm-thick, high density,
self-extinguishing class 1 fire-resistance polyurethane sheets, protected by a
plastic friction-proof superficial film that allows for a reduction of about 2 dB (A) of
the LPS of machines with upflow discharge and about 4 dB (A) of the LPS of
machines with downflow discharge. The front panels shall have a front air inlet
15855-1 Computer Room Air Conditioning Units

grille or the front panel closed and the air drawn from below or above. Color shall
be as selected by Engineer.
B. Discharge Air Plenum: Consists of a 550 mm structure with construction similar to

cabinet and frame construction.
C. Discharge Air Shut-Off Damper: Consisting of an air flow shut-off gravitational

damper installed on the air supply or motorised with an ON-OFF motor installed
on the air intake.
2.2 FAN SECTION
A. Fan section consists of one or more highly-efficient electronically commutated

centrifugal type electric fans, with backward blades and without a feed screw with
a direct current brushless motor with an external rotor coupled directly to
electronic adjustment: The fan shall be controlled by microprocessor without
needing an inverter or other electronic devices. The fans shall have silent
operation, with very high efficiency and optimal cleanability of the blades. The fan
must guarantee suitable high static pressure that is available for the system
requirements. The shaft shall be heavy duty steel with self-aligning ball bearings
with a minimum life span of 100,000 hours.
B. The precision unit shall be suitable for Data Computer rooms and Data Centers and
to be installed indoors
C. Up flow Air Discharge (Where required): The air shall enters through channels
and diffusers into the occupied area. The fan of the air conditioning unit to have a
greater pressure. The air intake shall be direct and shall draw in the air from the
front grille or the lower part.
D. Down flow Air Discharge (Where required): The air shall be emitted through floor
grilles or perforated tiles. The air return shall be direct, with no channelling and air
conditioning units shall draw in the air from upper part.
E. The type of setting :
1. Variable air flow depending on the cooling capacity required by the

system: The microprocessor of the machine lets you adjust the speed
depending on the type of "VAV" (Variable Air Volume) of the system,
which responds to the increased demand by increasing the air flow
proportionally.
2. Constant air flow regardless of the load loss of the filter: An internal probe
pilots the microprocessor control system of the machine to vary the air
flow treated by the fan according to the degree of clogging of the filters.
This ensures that no insufficient cooling will occur due to a reduced air
flow, which in turn is due to clogged filters.
3. Air flow depending on the pressure: This alternative adjustment is

intended on systems with raised flooring, where the air is distributed
beneath the flooring itself. The machine's microprocessor lets you
maintain the pressure beneath the flooring constant by varying the fan

speed in accordance with the signal of a pressure sensor that is to be
installed in a particular point beneath the flooring.
2.3 FILTER SECTION
A. Filter section consisting of self-extinguishing filter surfaces that cannot be

regenerated, of G4-class efficiency and 48 mm thick. The filters must be installed
upstream of the cooling coil, in an inclined position with an ample filtering surface
and low speed air-crossing that allows for less power consumption.
2.4 DIRECT EXPANSION REFRIGERATION CIRCUIT:
A. Direct expansion coil shall be with copper pipes in aluminium cooling fins that
swirl the air with one or two separate cooling circuits; one or two scroll
compressors fixed to the machine frame with rubber anti-vibration supports; one
or two thermostatic expansion valves with an equaliser; one or two drier filters
with a liquid inspection LED; one or two liquid receivers; thermal-insulated copper
discharge and suction pipes of suitable thickness; pressurisation nitrogen charge
and antifreeze lubrication oil charge. Refrigerant shall be R-410a. The cooling
circuit shall be also equipped with all the necessary adjustment and protection
devices such as high pressure switches (manual reset) and low pressure switches
(automatic reset), thermal protection of the power supply of the compressors and
if necessary, a casing oil heater.
B. For coastal areas environmental protection, Condenser coils shall be of copper

tubes copper fins.
2.5 HUMIDIFIER
A. Humidifier shall be factory installed inside the unit. Bypass air slots shall be
included to enable moisture to be absorbed in the air stream.
B. Infrared Humidifier: the humidifier shall be of the infrared type consisting of high
intensity quartz lamps mounted above and out of the water supply. The humidifier
pan shall be stainless steel and arranged to be removable without disconnecting
high voltage electrical connections. The complete humidifier section shall be pre-
piped ready for field connection to water supply. The humidifier shall be equipped
with automatic water supply system adjustable water-overfeed to prevent mineral
precipitation. A high water detector shall shutdown the humidifier to prevent
overflowing. A factory provided air gap shall prevent backflow of the humidifier
supply water.
2.6 MICROPROCESSOR CONTROL WITH GRAPHIC DISPLAY
A. The unit control shall be factory-set for Intelligent Control which uses “fuzzy logic”
and “expert systems” methods. Proportional and Tunable PID shall also be user
selectable options. Internal unit component control shall include the following:
B. System Auto Restart - The auto restart feature will automatically restart the
system after a power failure. Time delay is programmable.

C. Sequential Load Activation - On initial startup or restart after power failure, each
operational load is sequenced with a minimum of one second delay to minimize
total inrush current.
D. Hot Water Flush Cycles - Hot water reheat coils and Econ-O-Coils shall be
provided where required to periodically flush to prevent a buildup of contaminants.
E. Predictive Humidity Control - calculates the moisture content in the room and
prevents unnecessary humidification and dehumidification cycles by responding to
changes in dew point temperature.
F. The control shall be compatible with remote monitoring and control devices. The
control shall be suitable for BMS interface via MODbus, Jbus, BACNet, Profibus
and SNMP.
G. The control processor shall be microprocessor based with a 128x64 dot matrix
graphic front monitor display and control keys for user inputs mounted in an
ergonomic, aesthetically pleasing housing. The display & housing shall be
viewable while the unit panels are open or closed. The controls shall be menu
driven. The display shall be organized into three main sections: User Menus,
Service Menus and Advanced Menus. The system shall display user menus for:
active alarms, event log, graphic data, unit view/status overview (including the
monitoring of room conditions, operational status in % of each function, date and
time), total run hours, various sensors, display setup and service contacts. A
password shall be required to make system changes within the service menus.
Service menus shall include: setpoints, standby settings (lead/lag), timers/sleep
mode, alarm setup, sensor calibration, maintenance/wellness settings, options
setup, system/network setup, auxiliary boards and diagnostics/service mode. A
password shall be required to access the advanced menus which include the
factory settings and password menus.
H. The User Menus Shall be Defined as Follows:
1. Active Alarms: Unit memory shall hold the 200 most recent alarms with
time and date stamp for each alarm.
2. Event Log: Unit memory shall hold the 400 most recent events with id
number, time and date stamp for each event.
3. Graphic Data View: Eight graphic records shall be available: return air
temperature, return air humidity, supply air temperature, outdoor
temperature and four custom graphs.
4. Unit View: Status Overview: Simple or Graphical “Unit View” summary
displays shall include temperature and humidity values, active functions
(and percent of operation) and any alarms of the host unit.
5. Total Run Hours: Menu shall display accumulative component operating
hours for major components including fan motor, humidifier and reheat.
6. Various Sensors: Menu shall allow setup and display of optional custom
sensors. The control shall include four customer accessible analog inputs
for sensors provided by others. The analog inputs shall accept a 4 to
20mA signal. The user shall be able to change the input to 0 to 5VDC or 0
to 10VDC if desired. The gains for each analog input shall be
programmable from the front display. The analog inputs shall be able to be
monitored from the front display.

7. Display Setup: Customer shall pre-select the desired display languages
from manufacturer’s standard languages at the time of the order.
a. Service Contacts: Menu shall allow display of local service contact
name and phone number.
I. The Service Menus Shall be Defined as Follows:
1. Setpoints: Menu shall allow setpoints within the following ranges:
a. Temperature Setpoint 65-85ºF (18-29ºC)

b. Temperature Sensitivity +1-10ºF (0.6-5.6ºC)
c. Humidity Setpoint 20-80% RH
d. Humidity Sensitivity 1-30% RH
e. High Temperature Alarm 35-90ºF (2-32ºC)
f. Low Temperature Alarm 35-90ºF (2-32ºC)
g. High Humidity Alarm 15-85% RH
h. Low Humidity Alarm 15-85% RH
2. Standby Settings/Lead-Lag: Menu shall allow planned rotation or

emergency rotation of operating and standby units.
3. Timers/Sleep Mode: Menu shall allow various customer settings for turning
on/off unit.
4. Alarm Setup: Menu shall allow customer settings for alarm notification
(audible/local/remote). The following alarms shall be available:
a. High Temperature
b. Low Temperature
c. High Humidity
d. Low Humidity
e. Main Fan Overload (Optional)
f. Humidifier Problem
g. Change Filter
h. Fan Failure
i. Unit Off
5. Audible Alarm: The audible alarm shall annunciate any alarm that is
enabled by the operator.
6. Common Alarm: A programmable common alarm shall be provided to
interface user selected alarms with a remote alarm device.
7. Remote Monitoring: All alarms shall be communicated to the monitoring
system with the following information: Date and time of occurrence, unit
number and present temperature and humidity.
8. Sensor Calibration: Menu shall allow unit sensors to be calibrated with
external sensors.
9. Maintenance/Wellness Settings: Menu shall allow reporting of potential
component problems before they occur.
10. Options Setup: Menu shall provide operation settings for the installed
components.

11. System/Network Setup: Menu shall allow Unit-to-Unit (U2U)
communication and setup for teamwork modes of operation (up to 32
units).
12. Teamwork Modes of Operation: Saves energy by preventing operation of
units in opposite modes multiple units.
13. Auxiliary Boards: Menu shall allow setup of optional expansion boards.
14. Diagnostics/Service Mode: The control shall be provided with self-
diagnostics to aid in troubleshooting. The microcontroller board shall be
diagnosed and reported as pass/not pass. Control inputs shall be
indicated as on or off at the front display. Control outputs shall be able to
be turned on or off from the front display without using jumpers or a
service terminal. Each control output shall be indicated by an LED on a
circuit board.
J. Advanced Menus
1. Factory Settings: Configuration settings shall be factory-set based on the

pre-defined component operation.
2. Change Passwords: Menu shall allow new passwords to be set or
changed.
2.7 VALVES, FITTINGS AND ACCESSORIES:
A. Disconnect Switch: The manual disconnect switch shall be mounted in the high
voltage section of the electrical panel. The switch shall be accessible from the
outside of the unit with the door closed, and prevent access to the high voltage
electrical components until switched to the “OFF” position.
B. High Temp Stat: The high temp stat shall immediately shut down the unit when
activated. The high temp stat shall be mounted in the electrical panel with the
sensing element in the return air.
C. Provide 120 solid state water sensors under the raised floor.
D. Floor Stand: The floor stand shall be constructed of a heliarc-welded, tubular

steel frame. The floor stand shall have adjustable legs with vibration isolation
pads. The floor stand height shall be as required.
E. Smoke Sensor: The smoke sensor shall immediately shut down the unit and
activate the alarm system when activated. The smoke sensor shall be mounted in
the electrical panel with the sensing element in the return air compartment.
F. Provide a monitor system with the capability to monitor and change (at the user
direction) the temperature setpoints and sensitivities of each unit. The printer shall
provide the user with chronological alarm information. It shall also be capable of
being programmed to print out environmental conditions or operating modes at
each unit.
G. Electronic Expansion Valve: Consists of an electronic expansion valve (EEV)

servo activated with a stepper motor, which laminates the refrigerant flow in
variable mode using a pressure sensor and a temperature as its sensory
components. Both sensors are applied on the outlet of the evaporator and will be
read and processed by a controller that calculates the optimal opening of the

valve in real-time to guarantee the actual and appropriate required refrigerant to
the evaporator.
H. Protected Line And Cea Air Condenser Regulator: Consisting of an electrical line
protected from overload and short-circuits and a single-phase speed control, with
phase chopping regulation for air condenser fan regulation to check constant
condensate temperature.
I. Solenoid Valve On The Liquid Pipe: Consisting of an electro-mechanical solenoid

valve installed on the liquid piping to prevent liquid from returning to the
compressor.
2.8 ELECTRICAL CONTROL PANEL
A. Activated Flood Detection Alarm: Consisting of a flood detection probe supplied

with the appliance and an electronic detection board with a water detection alarm
voltage-free contact.
B. Fire/Smoke Detection Alarm: Consisting of a FVC on the terminal blocks for

connection of an external smoke/fire alarm signal.
C. Supply Limit Temperature Probe: Installed in the air supply compartment to

control the temperature limit of the system with activated adjustment of the
components to prevent the alarm thresholds from being exceeded.
D. Remote Control Terminal: Consisting of a LCD graphic display with a control

keyboard equipped with LED indicators for remote control of the units.
E. Setup for Local Network Connection and Connection Cable: Consisting of a

connection cable and setup for local network operation. The microprocessor
allows for the units to run on a local network with a number of units in the same
environment, up to a maximum of 12 installed units. Running in a local network
will let you assign the “master” and “slave”. The “slave” units will intervene in
emergency situations or at peak requests that exceed the project value. The
“slave” units must be rotated at determined periods (for instance, every 12 or 24
hours) and switched to “master” to equalise the number of operating hours.
F. Supervisory Systems Connection / BMS Modbus: Consisting of a serial

communication board with standard RS485 transmission with Modbus RTU Slave
transmission protocol. The units must be controlled by supervisory software
developed by the manufacturer or third parties.
G. TCP/IP Communication Gateway: Consisting of an electronic interface for

connection to control systems with TCP/IP communication protocol or for
supervision of units via Internet. The units must be controlled by supervisory
software developed by the manufacturer or third parties.

H. TCP/IP Communication Gateway with a GSM Modem: Consisting of an electronic
interface for connection to control systems with TCP/IP communication protocol
or for supervision of units via Internet and for sending alarm SMS via GSM
modem. The units must be controlled by supervisory software developed by the
manufacturer or third parties.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install computer room air conditioning units in accordance with

manufacturer’s installation instructions. Install units plumb and level, firmly
anchored in locations indicated, and maintain manufacturer’s recommended
clearances.
B. Electrical Wiring: Install and connect electrical devices furnished by manufacturer

but not specified to be factory mounted. Furnish copy of manufacturer’s electrical
connection diagram submittal to electrical contractor.
C. Piping Connections: Install and connect devices furnished by manufacturer but

not specified to be factory-mounted. Furnish copy of manufacturer’s piping
connection diagram submittal to piping contractor. REFER TO SECTION 15781 –
AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM.
A. Start up mainframe coolant units in accordance with manufacturer’s start up

instructions. Test controls and demonstrate compliance with requirements.
B. Unit Testing: The units must be provided after having been tested by the
manufacturer. The testing procedure must include a leak test, all-vacuum and
pressurisation of the cooling circuit, an electrical test in accordance with the
applicable regulation and a functional unit test with settings being implemented on
the microprocessor, all the components installed and any accessories supplied.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 15856
CHILLED WATER ENVIRONMENT CONTROL SYSTEM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. These specifications describe requirements for a precision environmental control

system (Chillers). The system shall be designed to maintain temperature
conditions in the rooms containing electronic equipment.
B. The manufacturer shall design and furnish all equipment to be fully compatible
with heat dissipation requirements of the room.
1.2 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
A. The precision environmental control system shall be a self-contained factory

assembled chiller unit or approved equal with up flow and down-flow air delivery.
Capacity shall be as indicated in drawings.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Submittals shall be provided with the proposal and shall include: Single-Line
Diagrams; Dimensional, Electrical, and Capacity Data; Piping and Electrical
Connection Drawings.
PART 2 - PRODUCT
2.1 CABINET AND FRAME CONSTRUCTION
A. The frame shall be constructed of heliarc welded tubular steel. It shall be painted
using the autophoretic coating process for maximum corrosion protection. The
exterior panels shall be insulated with a minimum 25.4mm, 0.68 kg density fiber
insulation. The main front panel shall have captive 1/4 turn fasteners. Color shall
be as selected by Engineer.
2.2 FILTER CHAMBER
A. The filter chambers shall be an integral part of the system, located within the
cabinet serviceable from either end of the unit. The filters efficiency shall be
based on ASHRAE 52.1.
2.3 FAN SECTION
A. The fan shall be the centrifugal type, double width double inlet, and shall be
factory-balanced as a completed assembly. The shaft shall be heavy duty steel
with self-aligning ball bearings with a minimum life span of 100,000 hours. The
fan motor power shall be as indicated in the drawings at 1750 RPM at 60 Hz and
mounted on an adjustable slide base. The drive package shall be two-belt,
variable speed, sized for 200% of the fan motor horsepower. The fans shall be
located to draw air over the A-frame coil to ensure even air distribution and
maximum coil performance.
15856-1 Chilled Water Environment Control System

2.4 ELECTRONICALLY-COMMUTATED (EC) FAN
A. The fan shall be the plug/plenum type, single inlet and shall be dynamically
balanced. The fan motor shall be 4.2 hp, 1520 rpm maximum operating speed.
The drive package shall be direct drive Electronically Commutated, variable
speed. The fans shall be located to draw air over the A-frame coil to ensure even
air distribution and maximum coil performance.
2.5 MICROPROCESSOR CONTROL WITH SMALL GRAPHIC DISPLAY
A. The unit controller shall be factory-set for Intelligent Control which uses “fuzzy
logic” and “expert systems” methods. Proportional and Tunable PID shall also be
user selectable options. Internal unit component control shall include the
following:
B. System Auto Restart - The auto restart feature will automatically restart the
system after a power failure. Time delay is programmable.
C. Sequential Load Activation - On initial startup or restart after power failure, each
operational load is sequenced with a minimum of one second delay to minimize
total inrush current.
D. Hot Water Flush Cycles - Hot water reheat coils and Econ-O-Coils or equal are
periodically flushed to prevent a buildup of contaminants.
E. Predictive Humidity Control - calculates the moisture content in the room and
prevents unnecessary humidification and dehumidification cycles by responding
to changes in dew point temperature.
F. The controller shall be compatible with remote monitoring and control devices.
Options are available for BMS interface via MODbus, Jbus, BACNet, Profibus
and SNMP.
G. The control processor shall be microprocessor based with a 128x64 dot matrix
graphic front monitor display and control keys for user inputs mounted in an
ergonomic, aesthetically pleasing housing. The display & housing shall be
viewable while the unit panels are open or closed. The controls shall be menu
driven. The display shall be organized into three main sections: User Menus,
Service Menus and Advanced Menus. The system shall display user menus for:
active alarms, event log, graphic data, unit view/status overview (including the
monitoring of room conditions, operational status in % of each function, date and
time), total run hours, various sensors, display setup and service contacts. A
password shall be required to make system changes within the service menus.
Service menus shall include: setpoints, standby settings (lead/lag), timers/sleep
mode, alarm setup, sensor calibration, maintenance/wellness settings, options
setup, system/network setup, auxiliary boards and diagnostics/service mode. A
password shall be required to access the advanced menus which include the
factory settings and password menus.
H. The User Menus Shall be Defined as Follows:
1. Active Alarms: Unit memory shall hold the 200 most recent alarms with
time and date stamp for each alarm.
2. Event Log: Unit memory shall hold the 400 most recent events with id
number, time and date stamp for each event.

3. Graphic Data View: Eight graphic records shall be available: return air
temperature, return air humidity, supply air temperature, outdoor
temperature and four custom graphs.
4. Unit View: Status Overview: Simple or Graphical “Unit View” summary

displays shall include temperature and humidity values, active functions
(and percent of operation) and any alarms of the host unit.
5. Total Run Hours: Menu shall display accumulative component operating

hours for major components including fan motor, humidifier and reheat.
6. Various Sensors: Menu shall allow setup and display of optional custom
sensors. The control shall include four customer accessible analog inputs
for sensors provided by others. The analog inputs shall accept a 4 to
20mA signal. The user shall be able to change the input to 0 to 5VDC or
0 to 10VDC if desired. The gains for each analog input shall be
programmable from the front display. The analog inputs shall be able to
be monitored from the front display.
7. Display Setup: Customer shall pre-select the desired grouping of display

languages at the time of the order from the following choices:
a. Group 1: English, French, Italian, Spanish, German
b. Group 2: English, Russian, Greek
c. Group 3: English, Japanese, Chinese, Arabic
d. Service Contacts: Menu shall allow display of local service

contact name and phone number.
I. The Service Menus Shall be Defined as Follows
1. Setpoints: Menu shall allow setpoints within the following ranges:
a. Temperature Setpoint 65-85ºF (18-29ºC)*
b. Temperature Sensitivity +1-10ºF (0.6-5.6ºC)
c. Humidity Setpoint 20-80% RH*
d. Humidity Sensitivity 1-30% RH
e. High Temperature Alarm 35-90ºF (2-32ºC)
f. Low Temperature Alarm 35-90ºF (2-32ºC)
g. High Humidity Alarm 15-85% RH
h. Low Humidity Alarm 15-85% RH
* The microprocessor may be set within these ranges, however, the unit
may not be able to control to extreme combinations of temperature and
humidity.
2. Standby Settings/Lead-Lag: Menu shall allow planned rotation or

emergency rotation of operating and standby units.

3. Timers/Sleep Mode: Menu shall allow various customer settings for
turning on/off unit.
4. Alarm Setup: Menu shall allow customer settings for alarm notification
(audible/local/remote). The following alarms shall be available:
a. High Temperature
b. Low Temperature
c. High Humidity
d. Low Humidity
e. Main Fan Overload
f. Humidifier Problem
g. Change Filter
h. Fan Failure
i. Unit Off
5. Audible Alarm: The audible alarm shall annunciate any alarm that is
enabled by the operator.
6. Common Alarm: A programmable common alarm shall be provided to

interface user selected alarms with a remote alarm device.
7. Remote Monitoring: All alarms shall be communicated to the monitoring

system with the following information: Date and time of occurrence, unit
number and present temperature and humidity.
8. Sensor Calibration: Menu shall allow unit sensors to be calibrated with

external sensors.
9. Maintenance/Wellness Settings: Menu shall allow reporting of potential

component problems before they occur.
10. Options Setup: Menu shall provide operation settings for the installed
components.
11. System/Network Setup: Menu shall allow Unit-to-Unit (U2U)

communication and setup for teamwork modes of operation (up to 32
units).
12. Teamwork Modes of Operation: Saves energy by preventing operation of

units in opposite modes multiple units.
13. Auxiliary Boards: Menu shall allow setup of optional expansion boards.
14. Diagnostics/Service Mode: The controller shall be provided with self-

indicated as on or off at the front display. Control outputs shall be able to
be turned on or off from the front display without using jumpers or a

service terminal. Each control output shall be indicated by an LED on a
circuit board.
J. Advanced Menus
1. Factory Settings: Configuration settings shall be factory-set based on the

pre-defined component operation.
2. Change Passwords: Menu shall allow new passwords to be set or

changed.
2.6 MICROPROCESSOR CONTROL WITH LARGE GRAPHIC DISPLAY
A. The unit control with large graphic display shall include all of the features as the
with small graphic display, except that it includes a larger graphical display and
shall include the additional features of:
“System View”, Spare Parts List, Unit Diary.
The control processor shall be microprocessor based with a 320x240 dot matrix
graphic front monitor display panel and control keys for user inputs mounted in
an ergonomic, aesthetically pleasing housing.
B. System View - Status Overview: “System View” shall display a summary of

operation for the total number of operating units within a Unit-to-Unit (U2U)
configuration.
C. Spare Parts List: Menu shall include a list of critical spare parts, their quantity
and part numbers.
D. Unit Diary: Menu shall include a free field area within the unit memory where unit
history may be stored for reference.
2.7 WALL MOUNT LARGE GRAPHIC DISPLAY
The Large Graphic Display Kit shall include an ergonomic, aesthetically pleasing
housing, a 320x240 dot matrix graphic display and a 120V power supply. The Wall
Mount Large Graphic Display shall be used to allow remote location of a “System View”
display and all features of the Large Graphic User, Service and Advanced menus for
use with controlled products connected for Unit-to-Unit (U2U) communications.
A. Control
The control system shall allow programming of the following room conditions:
Temperature Setpoint: 65-85°F (18-29°C)
Temperature Sensitivity: ±1° to 9.9°F (0.6 to 5.6°C) in 0.1°F (0.1°C) increments
All setpoints shall be adjustable from the individual unit front monitor panel.
Temperature and humidity sensors shall be capable of being calibrated using the
front monitor panel controls to coordinate with other temperature and humidity
sensors in the room.
In addition, the system shall provide the following internal controls:
1. System Auto-Restart

For startup after power failure, the system shall provide automatic restart
with a programmable (up to 9.9 minutes in 6-second increments) time
delay. Programming can be performed either at the unit or from the
central site monitoring system.
2. Sequential Load Activation
During startup or after a power failure, the control shall sequence

operational load activation to minimize inrush current. Systems allowing
multiple loads to start simultaneously are unacceptable.
3. Front Monitor Display Panel
The Control shall provide a front monitor LCD, backlit display panel with 4
rows of 20 characters with adjustable contrast. This display (along with
nine front-mounted control keys) shall be the only operator interface
required to obtain all available system information such as room
conditions, operational status, alarms, control and alarm setpoints and all
user selections including alarm delays, sensor calibration, DIP switch
selections and diagnostics. All indicators shall be in language form. No
symbols or codes shall be acceptable.
4. Alarms
a. The Control shall activate an audible and visual alarm in event of

any of the following conditions:
1) High Temperature
2) Low Temperature
3) High Humidity
4) Low Humidity
5) Main Fan Overload (opt)
6) Change Filters
7) Loss of Air Flow
8) Loss of Power
9) Custom Alarm (#1 to #4)
b. Custom alarms are four customer accessible alarm inputs to be

indicated on the front panel. Custom alarms can be identified with
prepared (programmed) labels for the following frequently used
inputs:
1) Leak Under Floor
2) Smoke Detected
3) Loss of Water Flow
4) Standby Unit On

User customized text can be entered for two of the four custom alarms.
Each alarm (unit and custom) can be separately enabled or disabled,

selected to activate the common alarm, and programmed for a time delay
of 0 to 255 seconds.
5. Audible Alarm
The audible alarm shall annunciate any alarm that is enabled by the
operator.
6. Common Alarm
A programmable common alarm shall be provided to interface user

selected alarms with a remote alarm device.
7. Remote Monitoring
All alarms shall be communicated to the site monitoring system with the
following information: date and time of occurrence, unit number and
current temperature and humidity.
8. Diagnostics
The control system and electronic circuitry shall be provided with self-
indicated as on or off at the front monitor panel. Control outputs shall be
able to be turned On or Off from the front monitor panel without using
jumpers or a service terminal.
9. Data Collection
The control system shall maintain accumulative operating hours of

compressors, fan motor and Econ-O-Coil. The 10 most recent alarms
shall be retained.
10. Communication
The control shall be compatible with remote monitoring and control

devices.
2.8 CHILLED WATER CONTROL VALVE
A. The water circuit shall include 2-way modulating valve. The Control positions the
valve in response to room conditions. Cooling capacity will be controlled by
bypassing chilled water around the coil.
2.9 HIGH PRESSURE CHILLED WATER CONTROL VALVE
A. The chilled water circuit shall include a 2-way high pressure modulating valve.
The valve shall be designed for up to 2758 kPa water pressure.
2.10 A-FRAME CHILLED WATER COIL
A. The cooling coil shall be of A-frame design with a minimum of 6 rows deep.

B. The coil shall be controlled by a 2-way modulating control valve. It shall be
constructed of copper tubes and aluminum fins and have a maximum face
velocity of 2.4 m/s.
C. For coastal areas environmental protection, Condenser coils shall be of copper

tubes copper fins.
D. The water circuit shall be designed to distribute water into the entire coil face
area. The coil shall be supplied with 6.7 °C entering water temperature, with a
5.6 °C temperature rise. The coil shall require volume of liquid per time
(liters/seconds) of chilled water as indicated in drawings and the pressure drop
shall not exceed 72 kPa. The entire coil assembly shall be mounted in a
stainless steel condensate drain pan.
2.11 FLOW SWITCH
A. The flow switch shall activate the alarm system should the chilled water supply
be interrupted. The switch shall be factory mounted and wired.
2.12 VARIABLE SPEED DRIVE
A. A variable speed drive (VSD) is to reduce energy consumption. The fan motor
speed shall be varied from 100% to 60% of rated speed in response to room
conditions. This shall be controlled automatically by the Control. The variable
speed drive option shall be available with an infrared humidifier.
2.13 SUPPLEMENTAL COMPONENTS
The computer room environmental control system shall be equipped with the following
supplemental components.
A. Disconnect Switch—Non-Locking Type
The manual disconnect switch shall be mounted in the high voltage section of
the electrical panel. The switch shall be accessible with the door closed.
B. Disconnect Switch—Locking Type
The manual disconnect switch shall be mounted in the high voltage section of
the electrical panel. The switch shall be accessible from the outside of the unit
with the door closed, and prevent access to the high voltage electrical
components until switched to the “OFF” position.
C. High Temp Stat
The high temp stat shall immediately shut down the environmental control
system when activated. The high temp stat shall be mounted in the electrical
panel with the sensing element in the return air.
D. Condensate Pump, Dual Float
The condensate pump shall have a minimum capacity of 100 GPH at 20 ft. (378
l/hr at 6m) head. (Consult factory for 200V or 230V, 50 Hz applications.) It shall
be complete with integral float switch, pump and motor assembly, and reservoir.
Secondary float shall shut down unit if tripped.

E. Sensors (Max. of Two Per Unit)
Provide 120 solid state water sensors under the raised floor.
F. Floor Stand
The floor stand shall be constructed of a heliarc-welded, tubular steel frame. The
floor stand shall have adjustable legs with vibration isolation pads. The floor
stand shall be 1 meter high. As shown on drawings.
G. Smoke Sensor
The smoke sensor shall immediately shut down the environmental control
system and activate the alarm system when activated. The smoke sensor shall
be mounted in the electrical panel with the sensing element in the return air
compartment.
H. Site Monitoring System
Provide a monitor system with the CW. The system shall have the capability to
monitor and change (at the user direction) the temperature setpoints and
sensitivities of each unit. The printer shall provide the user with chronological
alarm information. It shall also be capable of being programmed to print out
environmental conditions or operating modes at each unit.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION OF PRECISION COOLING UNITS
A. General
Install precision cooling units in accordance with manufacturer’s installation

instructions. Install units plumb and level, firmly anchored in locations indicated,
and maintain manufacturer’s recommended clearances.
B. Electrical Wiring
Install and connect electrical devices furnished by manufacturer but not specified
to be factory mounted. Furnish copy of manufacturer’s electrical connection
diagram submittal to electrical contractor.
C. Piping Connections
Install and connect devices furnished by manufacturer but not specified to be

factory-mounted. Furnish copy of manufacturer’s piping connection diagram
submittal to piping contractor.
A. Start up mainframe coolant units in accordance with manufacturer’s start up

instructions. Test controls and demonstrate compliance with requirements.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 15860
VENTILATION AND EXHAUST SYSTEM
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. The Work shall consist of furnishing and installation of ventilation and

exhaust system as shown on the drawings and specified herein.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. AFBMA The Anti-Friction Bearing Manufacturers Association
AFMBA 9 Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Ball Bearings.
AFMBA 11 Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Roller Bearings.
B. AMCA - Air Movement and Control Association, Inc.
AMCA 210 Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Rating.
AMCA 300 Reverberant Room Method for Sound Testing of

Fans.
AMCA 301 Fan Sound Ratings from Laboratory Test Data.
AMCA 500 Test Methods for Louvers, Dampers and Shutters.
C. ASTM - American Society for Testing and Materials
ASTM A 36 Specifications for Structural Steel.
ASTM C 150 Specifications for Portland Cement.
D. IEEE - Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers
IEEE 122 Poly-phase Induction Motors and Generators.
E. NEMA - National Electrical Manufacturers Association
MG 1 Motors and Generators.
F. NFPA - National Fire Protection Association

Systems.
NFPA 101 Life Safety Code.
15860 - 1 Ventilation And Exhaust System

G. UL - Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.
UL 33 Heat Response Links For Fire Protection Services.
UL 555 Fire Dampers.
UL 555 Ceiling Dampers.
UL 353 Limit Controls
H. UBC – Uniform Building Code.
Section 905 Smoke Control.
Section 906 Smoke and Heat Venting.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical data for air distribution

equipment, including capacity ratings, fan performance curves with operating
point clearly indicated, gages and finishes of materials, dimensions, weights,
furnished accessories, and installation and instructions.
B. Shop Drawings: Submit manufacturer's assembly type shop drawings

indicating dimensions, required clearances, installation details and field
connection details.
C. Wiring Diagrams: Submit the manufacturer's electrical requirements for

power supply wiring to the units.
D. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance and lubrication

instructions, motor and drive replacement instructions, and spare parts list
for each unit.
E. Spare Parts List: Submit the manufacturer's spare parts list for ventilation
equipment for a period of 2 years for the Engineer's review and approval.
1.4 TRANSPORTATION, HANDLING AND STORAGE
A. Deliver materials to the site in manufacturer's original factory wrappings and

containers, clearly labeled for identification of manufacturer, brand name and
contents. Store materials off ground in original undamaged packages and
containers, inside well-ventilated area protected from weather, moisture,
soiling, extreme temperatures, and humidity. Follow manufacturer's
recommendations regarding the transportation, handling and storage of
materials.

A. Motors and electrical accessories shall comply with the applicable NEMA
Standards.
B. Electrical components and installation shall comply with NFPA 70 - National

Electrical Code.
1.6 WARRANTY
A. Submit a written guarantee signed by manufacturer and installer agreeing to

replace systems or equipment which fail in material or workmanship within a
period of 1 year from the date of substantial handing over.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL:
A. The design, manufacture and installation of the ventilating fans shall meet
the requirements of AMCA 300, ASHRAE 51/210 or EUROVENT and shall
be listed and labeled by UL. Fans shall be licensed to bear AMCA Seal for
sound and air performance. Fans shall be provided with speed controller
(where required) to perform the duty as mentioned on schedules. The fans
shall be selected such that the sound levels within the area will not exceed
the specified levels. Each fan shall be equipped with disconnect switch,
backdraft damper (except for kitchen exhaust fans) and bird screen. Fans
shall be of sizes, types and capacities as shown on the drawings.
B. Roof-Mounted Centrifugal Exhaust Fans:
1. Spun aluminum exhaust fans shall be belt drive/direct drive type as

shown on drawings. The fan wheel shall be centrifugal backward
inclined, constructed of aluminum and shall include a wheel cone
carefully matched to the inlet cone for precise running tolerances.
Wheels shall be statically and dynamically balanced. The fan
housing shall be constructed of heavy duty gauge aluminum with a
rigid internal support structure and a birdscreen.
2. Motors shall be heavy duty ball bearing type, carefully matched to

the fan load, and furnished at the specified voltage, phase and
enclosure. Drive frame assembly shall be constructed of heavy duty
gauge steel. Motors and drives shall be mounted on vibration
isolators, out of the airstream. Fresh air for motor cooling shall be
drawn into the motor compartment through a large space between
the fan shroud and the motor cover. Motors and drives shall be
readily accessible for maintenance.

3. Precision ground and polished fan shafts shall be mounted in
permanently sealed, lubricated pillow block ball bearings. Bearings
shall be selected for a minimum (L10) life in excess of 100,000 hours
at maximum cataloged operating speed. Drives shall be sized for a
minimum of 150% of driven horsepower. Pulleys shall be of the cast
type, keyed and securely attached to the wheel and motor shafts.
4. Motor pulleys shall be adjustable for final system balancing. A

disconnect switch shall be factory installed and wired from the fan
motor to a junction box installed within the motor compartment. A
conduit chase shall be provided through the base to the motor
compartment for ease of electrical wiring.
5. All fans shall bear the AMCA Certified Ratings Seal for sound and air
performance. Each fan shall bear a permanently affixed
manufacturer’s engraved metal nameplate containing the model
number and individual serial number for future identification. Ratings,
type and size of fans shall be as indicated on Drawings.
C. Roof-Mounted Up-Blast Exhaust Fans (Kitchen Exhaust Fan):
1. Spun aluminum exhaust fans shall be centrifugal direct/belt driven

type. The fan wheel shall be centrifugal backward inclined, constructed
of aluminum and shall include a wheel cone carefully matched to the
inlet cone for precise running tolerances. Wheels shall be statically
and dynamically balanced. The fan housing shall be constructed of
heavy gauge aluminum with a rigid internal support structure. A
leakproof fan housing shall be constructed with a one piece windband
with an integral rolled bead for added strength and shall be joined to
the curbcap with a continuously welded seam.
2. Motors shall be heavy duty ball bearing type, carefully matched to the
fan load, and furnished at the specified voltage, phase and enclosure.
Drive frame assembly shall be constructed of heavy gauge steel.
Motors and drives shall be mounted on vibration isolators, out of the
airstream. Fresh air for motor cooling shall be drawn into the motor
compartment through a tube free of discharge contaminants. Motors
and drives shall be readily accessible for maintenance.



number and individual serial number for future identification. Rating,
type and size of exhaust fans shall be as indicated on Drawings.
D. Hooded Supply Propeller Roof Fans:
1. Fans shall be belt driven, axial type hooded propeller roof fans.
Propellers shall be constructed with cast aluminum blades and hubs.

Propellers shall be securely attached to fan shafts. All propellers shall
be statically and dynamically balanced.
Fan hood and base construction shall be galvanized steel. Hood

panels shall be arched with interlocking ribs. Fan bases shall be low
style except where tall bases are specified. (Where access doors are
required for inspection and service of damper and actuator, tall bases
should be specified). Hood support angles shall be heavy gauge
galvanized steel. Birdscreens of ½” galvanized mesh shall be
horizontally mounted in the discharge/intake perimeter of the hood.
Motors shall be permanently lubricated, heavy duty type, matched to

the fan load and furnished at the specified voltage, phase and
enclosure.
Drive frame and panel assemblies shall be galvanized steel. Drive

frames shall be formed channels and fan panels shall have a deep
formed inlet venturi.
Ground and polished steel fan shafts shall be mounted in permanently

lubricated, sealed ball bearing pillow blocks. Bearings shall be
selected for a minimum (L10) life in excess of 100,000 hours at
maximum cataloged operating speeds. drives shall be sized for a
minimum of 150 percent of drive horsepower. Pulleys shall be fully
machined cast iron, keyed and securely attached to propeller and
motor shafts. Motor sheaves shall be adjustable for system balancing.
The axial exhaust, supply and filtered supply fans shall bear the AMCA
Certified Ratings Seals for both sound and air performance. Fans shall
be of type and capacity as shown on the drawings.
E. In-Line Cabinet Fans:
1. Duct mounted supply, exhaust or return fans shall be of the centrifugal,

belt driven in-line type. The fan housing shall be of the rectangular
design constructed of heavy gauge galvanized steel and shall include
rectangular duct mounting collars. A hinged or removable panel shall
be provided in the fan cabinet of sufficient size to permit access for
service to all of the fan's internal components without dismantling the
cabinet. The fan wheel shall be of the galvanized steel, forward

curved, centrifugal type. Wheels shall be dynamically and statically
balanced.
2. Motors shall be of the heavy duty type with permanently sealed ball
bearings. The wheel shaft shall be ground and polished steel mounted
in permanently sealed pillow block bearings. Drives shall be sized for a
minimum of 150% of driven horsepower. Pulleys shall be of the
machined cast iron type, keyed and securely attached to the wheel
and motor shafts. The motor pulleys shall be adjustable for final
system balancing. All fans shall bear the AMCA Certified Ratings Seal
for air performance. Fans shall be or approved equal; type, size and
capacity as shown on the drawings.
F. Vane Axial Fans:
1. Vane axial fans shall be direct driven with the motor located
downstream from the fan rotor for cooling. Fan blades and rotor shall
be heat treated cast aluminum alloy A356-T6 with all blade bases and
sockets precision machined. Fan rotor and hub shall be positively
secured to the motor shaft with a steel taper lock bushing keyed to the
motor shaft. Fan rotor shall be statically and dynamically balanced to
within 0.3 mils vibration dis-placement peak to peak as measured on
the fan housing. Fan housing shall be fabricated from heavy gauge
steel plate with prepunched flanges at both ends. A minimum of eight
heavy gauge straightening vanes shall be welded to fan housing,
downstream from the rotor. A steel motor support shall be
continuously welded inside the fan housing. Provide quantities and
sizes as shown on the drawings. Accessories shall include belt
guards, companion flanges and hinged access doors.
G. Sidewall Mounted Centrifugal Exhaust Fans:
1. Spun aluminum exhaust fans shall be centrifugal direct/belt driven

type. The fan wheel shall be centrifugal backward inclined, constructed
of aluminum and shall include a wheel cone carefully matched to the
inlet cone for precise running tolerances. Wheels shall be statically
and dynamically balanced. The fan housing shall be constructed of
heavy gauge aluminum with a rigid internal support structure. A
leakproof fan housing shall be constructed with a one piece windband
with an integral rolled bead for added strength. Fan shall be provided
with a mounting plate, which is attached and sealed to the wall prior to
locating the entire unit.
2. Motors shall be heavy duty ball bearing type, carefully matched to the
fan load, and furnished at the specified voltage, phase and enclosure.
Drive frame assembly shall be constructed of heavy gauge steel.
Motors and drives shall be mounted on vibration isolators, out of the
airstream. Fresh air for motor cooling shall be drawn into the motor
compartment through a ten square inch tube free of discharge
contaminants. Motors and drives shall be readily accessible for
maintenance.


number and individual serial number for future identification. Rating,
type and size of exhaust fans shall be as indicated on Drawings.
D. Tubular Centrifugal Fans:
1. Supply, exhaust, or return air fans shall be of the tubular centrifugal

type with backward incline or airfoil wheels. The housing shall be
constructed of continuously welded gauge steel to assure air
leakage. The housing and bearing support shall be constructed of
structural steel members to prevent vibration and rigidly support the
shaft and bearings. The wheel shall be of the non-overloading
backward incline or airfoil centrifugal type. Wheels shall be statically
and dynamically balanced. The wheel cone and fan inlet cone shall
be carefully matched and shall have precise running tolerances for
maximum performance and operating efficiency. Welded steel
vanes shall straighten the flow of air from the fan discharge and
support bearings and drives. Turned, precision ground and polished
steel shafts shall be sized so the first critical speed is at least 25%
over the maximum operating speed for each pressure class.
2. Close tolerances shall be maintained where the shaft makes contact

with the bearing. Bearings shall be heavy duty, grease lubricated,
self aligning ball bearing or roller pillow block type. Extended
lubrication lines shall be provided with external grease fittings.
Bearings shall be selected for a minimum average of 200,000 hours
life at maximum operating speed for each pressure class. Fan
performance shall be based on tests conducted in accordance with
AMCA Standard 210 test code for air moving devices, and fans shall
be licensed to bear the AMCA Certified Ratings Seal. After assembly
each fan shall be given a final balance test at specified operating
RPM to insure smooth vibration free operation. Accessories shall
include inlet vanes, safety screen for inlet vanes, companion flanges
and vibration isolation. Type and capacity as shown on the drawings.

H. Wall Mounted Exhaust Fans:
1. Fans shall be propeller type. Fans shall be provided with back

draught shutter and plastic grille. Type and capacity as shown on
the drawings.
I. Centrifugal Backward Inclined Single Width Fans (BISW):
1. Fans shall be of the centrifugal type with backward inclined single

width. The housings shall be of continuously welded heavy gauge
steel construction with the scroll panel material formed and embedded
into the side panels. The housing and bearing support shall be
constructed of welded structural steel members to prevent vibration
and rigidly support the shaft and bearings. Fans shall have
manufacturer's standard powder coating over phosphatized surfaces.
The fan wheel shall be of the non-overloading backward inclined

centrifugal type. Wheels shall be statically and dynamically balanced
to balance garde G6.3 per ANSI S2.19. The wheel cone and fan inlet
cone shall be carefully matched and shall have precise running
tolerances for maximum performance and operating efficiency.
Turned, precision ground and polished steel shafts shall be sized so
the first critical speed is at least 25% over the maximum operating
speed for each pressure class. Close tolerances shall be maintained
where the shafts shall be sized so the first critical speed is at least
25% over the maximum operating speed for each pressure class.
Close tolerances shall be maintained where the shaft passes through
the bearing.
Bearings shall be heavy duty grease lubricated, self aligning or roller

pillow block type. Bearings shall be selected for a basic rating fatigue
life (L-10) per AFBMA Standards in excess of 80,000 hours at
maximum operating speed for each pressure class. Contractor shall
provide access doors in either inlet or outlet ductwork. Accessories
shall include disconnect motor cover, belt cover and vibration pads.
Type, size and capacities shall be as shown on the drawings.
J. Roof Mounted Centrifugal Upblast Exhaust Fan for Smoke Control

System
1. Spun aluminum exhaust fans shall be centrifugal belt driven type.

The fan wheel shall be centrifugal backward inclined, constructed of
steel and shall include a wheel cone carefully matched to the inlet
cone for precise running tolerances. Wheels shall be statically and
dynamically balanced. The fan housing shall be constructed of
heavy gauge aluminum with a rolled bead and a rigid internal
support structure. A leak-proof fan housing shall be constructed with
a one piece windband with an integral rolled bead for added
strength and shall be joined to the curb cap with a continuously
welded seam.

2. Motors shall be heavy duty ball bearing type, carefully matched to
the fan load, and furnished at the specified voltage, phase and
enclosure. Drive frame assembly shall be constructed of heavy
gauge steel. Motors and drives shall be mounted on safety flange
vibration isolators, out of the airstream. Fresh air for positive motor
cooling shall be drawn into the motor compartment through a ten
square inch tube free of discharge contaminants. Motors and drives
shall be readily accessible for maintenance.

shall be selected for a minimum (L10) life in excess of 100,000
hours at maximum cataloged operating speed. Dual drives shall be
sized for a minimum of 150% of driven horsepower. Pulleys shall be
of the cast type, keyed and securely attached to the wheel and
motor shafts.

NEMA-3R disconnect switch shall be factory installed and wired
from the fan motor to a junction box installed outside the motor
compartment. All fans shall bear the AMCA Certified Ratings Seal
for sound and air performance.
5. Each fan shall bear a permanently affixed manufacturer’s engraved

metal nameplate containing the model number and individual serial
number for future identification. Fans shall be listed by Underwriters
Laboratory for UL/cUL 705 for electrical components and UL Listed
for Emergency Smoke Control Systems (500 degrees F for 4 hours
and 1,000 degrees F for 15 minutes). Fans shall be of type, size and
capacity as shown on drawings.
K. In-line Mixed Flow Fan System
1. Supply exhaust, or return air fans shall be of the inline mixed flow
type.
2. The housing shall be constructed of welded heavy gauge steel to

assure no air leakage. Housing shall have inlet and outlet collars for
slip fit duct connections, the housing and bearing and/or motor
supports shall be constructed of structural steel members to prevent
vibration and rigidity support the shaft and bearings. Welded steel
vanes shall straighten the flow of air from the fan discharge.
3. Units up through size 27 shall incorporate a universal mounting

system that allows the fan to be mounted in either vertical or
horizontal configurations and field rotation of the motor position in
90 degree increments. Bearing life shall not be reduced below
specified level in different configurations. Unit size 30 and larger
shall allow for field rotation of motor positions, units shall
accommodate base mount or ceiling hung mounting without
structural modifications to the fan.

4. The wheel shall be of the mixed flow type. Wheels shall have a
wheel cone, spherical back plate and single thickness cambered
blades. Wheels shall be statistically and dynamically balanced to
balance grade G6.3 per ANSI S2.19. the wheel cone and fan inlet
cone shall be carefully matched and shall have precise running
tolerances for maximum performance and operating efficiency.
5. Each assembled fan shall be test run at the factory at specified fan
RPM. The maximum allowable fan vibration shall be 0.15 in/sec.
peak velocity, filter-in for belt drive units with signatures taken on
each bearing in three planes; horizontal, vertical and axial.
Maximum vibration of 0.08 un/sec. peak velocity, filter-in, for direct
drive units in a single plane on the fan housing. This report shall be
provided at no charge to the customer upon request.
6. Inlet and outlet sound power levels shall be provided for each of the
eight octave bands at the point of operation. Fans shall be licensed
to bear the AMCA Seal for sound and air performance.
7. Mixed flow fans shall of type and capacity as shown on drawing.
8. Belt driven fans were required shall have the following

requirements:
a. Turned, precision ground and polished steel shafts shall be

sized so the first critical speed is at least 25% over the
maximum operating speed
b. Close tolerance shall be maintained where the shaft makes

contact with the bearings.
c. Bearings shall be heavy duty, grease lubricated, self-aligning

ball or roller flange mounted bearings with extruded
lubrication lines.
d. Bearings shall be selected for a minimum life (L-10) of

80,000 hours at maximum operating speed and horsepower
per fan class.
L. Sand Trap Louvers:
1. Sand trap louvers shall separate sand from intake air. Louvers
shall be vertical fixed blade type with blades arranged to provide
tortuous air flow path and thus trap sand.
2. Louver shall have self emptying drain holes. Louvers shall be

constructed of aluminum to ASTM B209 and ANSI.1. Blades shall
be 1.6 mm thick with 2.0 mm thick casing. Maximum louver face
velocity shall be 1.2 M/s and maximum pressure drop 50 Pa.
3. Louvers shall be provided with washable filter and an insect

screen of aluminum 2 mm X 2 mm mesh mounted on a standard U
type frame with miter corners. Screens shall be secured to the

interior face of the louver with self-tapping stainless steel screws.
4. Size of louvers shall be as indicated on the drawings. Louvers of

heights 1125 mm to 2250 shall have central transom and sand
chute and for heights 2250 mm to 4500 mm louver shall have
additional central bracing support as recommended by the
manufacturer.
5. Louvers shall have efficiency of 80% with coarse test dust (20 to
200 microns) and 50% efficiency with fine test dust (1 to 70
microns).
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install fans where indicated, in accordance with manufacturer's

installation instructions and recognized industry practices, to ensure that
fans comply with the requirements specified and serve the intended
purposes.
B. Access: Provide access and service space around and over fans as
indicated, but in no case less than that recommended by manufacturer.
C. Support: Unless otherwise indicated, provide 100 mm high concrete pad

under floor-mounted centrifugal fans.
D. Isolation: Set centrifugal fans on vibration isolators, fasten in accordance

with manufacturer's installation instructions.
E. Electrical Wiring: Install electrical devices furnished by manufacturer but not

specified to be factory-mounted. Verify that electrical wiring installation
conform to the manufacturer's submittal and installation requirements of the
applicable Sections of Division 16. Ensure that rotation is in the direction
indicated and intended for proper performance.
F. Ductwork Connections: Refer to Section 15891 - HVAC DUCTWORK.

Provide flexible connections on inlet and outlet duct connections.
A. Upon completion of installation of fans and after motors has been energized
with normal power source, test the equipment to demonstrate compliance
with the specified requirements.
B. Where possible, field correct malfunctioning equipment, then retest to

demonstrate compliance.
C. Replace equipment which cannot be satisfactorily corrected at no extra cost

to the Owner.

A. Start-up, test and adjust fans in the presence of the manufacturer's

authorized representative and the Engineer.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 15891
HVAC DUCTWORK
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. The Work shall consist of furnishing and installation of all HVAC ductwork as
shown on the drawings and specified herein.
1.2 REFERENCES

SASO 1435 Safety requirements for the installation on air conditioning

and ventilating systems - Part 1: Definitions and technical
terms.
SASO 1436 Safety requirements for the installation on air conditioning

and ventilating systems - Part 2: Requirements of HVAC
systems

conditioning in buildings - Part 1: General basis of design

conditioning in buildings - Part 2: General requirements for
installation
B. SMACNA - Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association
SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards, Metal and Flexible,

latest Edition
SMACNA HVAC System Duct Design, latest Edition
SMACNA Fire, Smoke and Radiation Damper Installation Guide for

HVAC System, latest Edition
C. ASHRAE - American Society of Heating, Refrigeration and Air Conditioning

Engineers
ASHRAE Handbook, Systems and Equipment Volume;

Chapter of Duct Construction, 2012 Edition
ASHRAE Handbook, Systems, Equipment Volume;

Chapter of Air Diffusing Equipment, 2008 Edition
ASHRAE 70 Method of Testing for Rating Air Flow Performance of

Outlets and Inlets
15891-1 HVAC Ductwork

D. HVCA – Heating and Ventilation Contractors Association
HVCA DW 144 Specification for Sheet Metal Ductwork
E. ASTM – American Society for Testing and Materials
ASTM A 653 Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-

Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process.
ASTM A 924 General Requirements for Sheet Steel, Metallic-Coated by

Hot-Dip Process
F. NFPA - National Fire Protection Association
NFPA 90A Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and

Ventilating Systems
NFPA 90B Standard for the Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air
Conditioning Systems
G. UL - Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.
UL-555 Fire Dampers and Ceiling Dampers
H. ARI - Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute
ARI 650 Standard for Air Outlets and Inlets
1.3 SUBMITTAL

instructions for metal ductwork materials and accessories.
B. Shop Drawings: Submit scaled layout drawings of metal ductwork and fittings
including, but not limited to, duct sizes, locations, elevations, and slopes of
horizontal runs, wall and floor penetrations, and connections. Show interface and
spatial relationship between ductwork and proximate equipment. Show
modifications of indicated requirements, made to conform to local shop practice,
and how those modifications ensure that free area, materials, and rigidity are not
reduced.
C. As-Built Drawings: At project closeout, submit as-built drawings of installed

ductwork, duct accessories, and outlets and inlets.
D. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data and parts lists for metal ductwork
materials and products.
A. Ductwork shall comply with the requirements of NFPA 90A; Standard for the
Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilation System.
B. Comply with NFPA 96; Standard for the Installation of Equipments for the
Removal of Smoke and Grease-laden Vapors of Commercial Cooking
Equipment - Chapter 3; Duct System for kitchen hood duct systems.

C. SMACNA Standards: Comply with SMACNA "High and Low Pressure Duct
Construction Standards" for fabrication and installation of ductwork, as well as
"HVAC Duct Construction Standards, Metal and Flexible."
D. Fabricator and Installer: Firm(s) with a minimum of five (5) years of successful
fabrication/installation experience on projects similar to that required for the
project.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 DUCTWORK MATERIALS
A. General: HVAC duct design shall be in accordance with applicable requirements

of ASHRAE, SMACNA, SASO, NFPA or UL codes and Standards. Shop
fabricate ductwork of gages and reinforcement complying with SMACNA - HVAC
Duct Construction Standards and/or ASHRAE Handbook, Equipment Volume,
Chapter of Duct Construction, and as shown on drawings. Ducts shall be low
pressure ducts with 500 Pa pressure rating and seal Class B as per SMACNA
Standards, unless indicated otherwise on drawings. Ductwork shall be
constructed in sizes and configuration as shown on drawings.
B. Exposed Ductwork Materials: Where ductwork is indicated to be exposed to view

in occupied spaces, provide materials which are free from visual imperfections
including pitting, seam marks, roller marks, oil canning, stains and
discolorations, and other imperfections, including those which would impair
painting.
C. Sheet Metal: Unless indicated otherwise indicated, fabricate ductwork from

galvanized sheet steel complying with ASTM A 653 and A 924, lock-forming
quality, with G90 zinc coating; and ducts shall have mill-phosphatized finish for
surfaces exposed to view.
D. Single Wall Round Ducts: Single wall, spirally wounded, round ducts shall be
factory fabricated with fittings that are factory fitted with a sealing gasket. Spiral
ducts will seal the duct joints without the use of duct sealer and shall be installed
according to the manufacturer’s instructions.
1. All ducts shall be complete with factory installed fittings equipped with
double lipped, U-profile, EPDM rubber gaskets. Gaskets shall be
manufactured to gage and flexibility so as to insure that system will meet
all of the performance criteria set forth in the manufacturer’s literature.
Gaskets shall be classified by Underwriter’s Laboratories to conform to
ASTM E84 and NFPA 90A flame spread and smoke developed ratings of
25/50.
2. All fitting ends shall be calibrated to manufacturer’s published

dimensional tolerance standard. All elbows from 75 mm to 305 mm dia.
shall be either 2 piece die stamped and continuously stitch welded or
continuously seam welded. All elbows 355 mm dia. and larger shall be
continuously seam or stitch welded or standing seam.
3. The radius of all 90°, 60° and 45° elbows shall be 1.5 times the elbow
diameter, unless otherwise noted on the contract documents to be 1.0
times the elbow diameter. The radius of all 15°and 30° elbows shall be
1.0 times the elbow diameter.
4. All fittings that are of either spot welded or button punched construction

shall be internally sealed, while fittings that are continuously seam
welded shall be without internal sealant. When contract documents
require divided flow fittings, full body fittings will be favored in lieu of
collar saddles. The use of collar saddles shall be minimized except for
retrofit installations.
5. Coat galvanized areas of fittings damaged by welding with corrosion
resistant aluminum paint.
6. Duct system performance shall meet SMACNA’s Leakage Class 3
requirement.
7. Exposed Ducts: All exposed to view ducts shall be cladded with minimum
0.6 mm thick stainless steel sheet, after insulation, conforming to ASTM A
240, type 304.
E. Double Wall Round Ducts: Double wall, spirally wounded, round ducts shall be
factory fabricated with fittings that are factory fitted with a double lipped rubber
gasket. Spiral ducts will seal the duct joints without the use of duct sealer and
shall be installed according to the manufacturer’s instructions. Double wall duct
and fittings shall consist of a solid galvanized sheet steel inner liner, 25 mm thick,
3
24 kg/m density layer of glass fiber insulation and a solid galvanized sheet steel
outer pressure shell. For 50 mm thick insulation, the outer pressure shell
diameter shall be 50mm larger than the inner liner.
1. Glass-fiber blanket insulation shall comply with Section 15250 –

MECHANICAL INSULATION. Double wall to single wall transitions shall
be provided where double wall duct connects to single wall duct. When
contract documents require divided flow fittings, full body fittings shall be
used as frequent as possible and to minimize the double wall saddle
taps. All double wall duct and fittings shall be furnished with both an inner
liner and outer pressure shell coupling.
2. All ducts shall be complete with factory installed fittings equipped with
double lipped, U-profile, EPDM rubber gaskets. Gaskets shall be
manufactured to gage and flexibility so as to insure that system will meet
all of the performance criteria set forth in the manufacturer’s literature.
Gaskets shall be classified by Underwriter’s Laboratories to conform to
ASTM E84 and NFPA 90A flame spread and smoke developed ratings of
25/50.
3. All fitting shall be calibrated to manufacturer’s published dimensional

tolerance standard. All elbows from 75 mm to 305 mm dia. shall be either
2 piece die stamped and continuously stitch welded or continuously
seam welded. All elbows 355 mm dia. and larger shall be continuously
seam or stitch welded or standing seam.
4. The radius of all 90°, 60° and 45° elbows shall be 1.5 times the elbow
diameter, unless otherwise noted on the contract documents to be 1.0
times the elbow diameter. The radius of all 15°and 30° elbows shall be
1.0 times the elbow diameter.
5. All fittings that are of either spot welded or button punched construction
shall be internally sealed, while fittings that are continuously seam
welded shall be without internal sealant. When contract documents
require divided flow fittings, full body fittings will be favored in lieu of
collar saddles. The use of collar saddles shall be minimized except for

retrofit installations.
6. Coat galvanized areas of fittings damaged by welding with corrosion

resistant aluminum paint.
7. Duct system performance shall meet SMACNA’s Leakage Class 3

requirement.
F. Kitchen Hood Exhaust Ducts: Kitchen hood exhaust ducts and supports used for
smoke and vapor removal from cooking equipment, exposed to view, shall be
fabricated from minimum 18 gage thick stainless steel sheet conforming to ASTM
A 240, type 304, and the rest of the duct shall be fabricated of black sheet steel,
welded construction. Shop fabricate ductwork complying with SMACNA "HVAC
Duct Construction Standards", and NFPA 96 "Removal of Smoke and Grease-
Laden Vapors from Commercial Cooking Equipments".
2.2 MISCELLANEOUS DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES
A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard materials and products of types and

sizes indicated and, where not otherwise indicated, provide type and size
required to comply with ductwork system requirements and SMACNA Standards
including all the necessary fittings, fasteners, sealant, duct hardware i.e. test
holes, quadrant locks and duct access doors for proper connection to ductwork
and equipment. Ducts shall be low pressure type as per SMACNA Standards
with static pressure rating of minimum 2 inches, and with seal Class B.
B. Fittings: Provide radius type fittings fabricated of multiple sections with maximum
15o change of direction per section. Unless specifically detailed otherwise, use
o o o
45 laterals and 45 elbows for branch takeoff connections. Where 90 branches
are indicated, provide conical type tees.
C. Duct Sealant: Non-hardening, non-migrating mastic or liquid elastic sealant, type

applicable for fabrication/installation detail, as compounded and recommended
by manufacturer specifically for sealing joints and seams in ductwork.
D. Duct Cement: Non-hardening migrating mastic or liquid neoprene based cement,

type applicable for fabrication/installation detail, as compounded and
recommended by manufacturer specifically for cementing fitting components, or
longitudinal seams in ductwork.
E. Ductwork Support Materials: Except as otherwise indicated, provide hot-dipped

galvanized steel fasteners, anchors, rods, straps, trim and angles for support of
ductwork.
F. Flexible Ducts: Either spiral-wound spring steel with flameproof vinyl sheathing,
or corrugated aluminum; complying with UL 181, Class 1, complete with
minimum 38 mm thick continuous flexible fiberglass sheath insulation, 16 kg/m³
density, and vapor barrier jacket.
2.3 DAMPERS:
A. Low Pressure Manual Dampers: Provide dampers of single blade type or

multiblade type, constructed in accordance with SMACNA - Low Pressure Duct
Standards -with static pressure rating of minimum 2 inches.
B. Motorized Dampers: Provide dampers with parallel blades for 2-position control,

or opposed blades for modulating control. Construct blades of 16 gage steel, 13
mm diameter steel axles spaced on 229 mm centers. Construct frame of 50 x 13
x 3 mm steel channel for face areas 2.32 m² and under; 100 x 32 x 16 gage
channel for face areas over 2.32 m². Provide galvanized steel finish with
aluminum touch-up.
C. Fire Dampers: Fire Dampers: Provide fire dampers, of types and sizes as
indicated on Drawings where required. Construct casings of 20 gage galvanized
o
steel with bonded red acrylic enamel finish. Provide fusible link rated at 71-74 C
unless otherwise indicated. Provide damper with positive lock in closed position,
and with the following additional features:
1. Damper Blade Assembly: Single-blade type or multi-blade type as

required.
2. Blade Material: Steel, match casing.
D. Smoke Dampers: Smoke damper shall be designed for the smoke isolation of
sections of ducting in ventilation systems, basically consisting of a flanged
casing, shut off blades with overlapping interlocking joints. Blades are connected
by internal linkage for parallel action. External linkage parallel action also
available. Smoke dampers to be leakage tested as appropriate to the
requirements of UL555S.
Casing and blades shall be of a galvanized sheet steel to BS EN 10142 or

equivalent. Casing bearing made from sintered bronze. Blades shall have
standard face linkage for parallel blade operation. Size and type of damper shall
be as shown on drawings. Dampers shall be electrically operated and controlled
through BMS. All accessories required for electric operation shall be provided.
2.4 TURNING VANES:
A. Provide turning vanes constructed of 38 mm wide curved blades set at 20 mm

o.c., supported with bars perpendicular to blades set at 50 mm o.c., and set into
side strips suitable for mounting in ductwork.
2.5 DUCT HARDWARE:
A. Test Holes: Provide in ductwork at fan inlet and outlet, and elsewhere as
indicated, duct test holes, consisting of slot and cover, for instrument tests.
B. Quadrant Locks: Provide for each damper, quadrant lock device on one end of
shaft; and end bearing plate on other end for damper lengths over 300 mm.
Provide extended quadrant locks and end extended bearing plates for externally
insulated ductwork.
2.6 DUCT ACCESS DOORS:
A. General: Provide where indicated, duct access doors of sizes indicated.
B. Construction: Construct of same or greater gage as ductwork served, provide

insulated doors for insulated ductwork. Provide flush frames for un-insulated
ductwork, extended frames for externally insulated duct. Provide one side
hinged, otherwise with one handle-type latch for doors up to 300 mm high and
smaller, 2 handle-type latches for larger doors.

2.7 FLEXIBLE CONNECTIONS:
A. Provide flexible duct connections wherever ductwork connects to vibration

isolated equipment. Construct flexible connections of neoprene-coated
flameproof fabric crimped into duct flanges for attachment to duct and
equipment. Make airtight joint. Provide adequate joint flexibility to allow for
thermal, axial, transverse, and torsional movement, and also capable of
absorbing vibrations of connected equipment.
2.8 VARIABLE AIR VOLUME (VAV) BOXES By-Pass Type):
A. VAV boxes shall be completely factory-assembled. Units designed shall be of

sizes as shown on drawings and shall have factory catalog rating for L/S., static
pressure and noise criteria as required. Units shall have damper shaft with
optional location of linkage arrangement (left or right of unit) for single damper
control actuator to be mounted on exterior of unit. Static pressure loss through
the unit shall be consistent at all times regardless of air volume damper position.
B. Cabinet shall be constructed of not less than 22 gauge, zinc-coated steel.

Internal surfaces shall be acoustically and thermally insulated as required with
glass fiber, surface-treated to prevent erosion. Insulation material shall meet
NFPA and NBFU 90A.
C. Performance of unit shall be based on tests conducted in accordance with

ASHRAE Standard 36-72 and with ADC Standard 1062R4 with no ductwork
between unit discharge and sound room.
D. Control Actuator: Factory-mounted electric/electronic actuator with appropriate

linkages in accordance with box requirements. Control actuator shall be
furnished by the air volume control box manufacturer.
E. Room Temperature Controls: To be furnished by the air volume control box

manufacturer, as indicated on the drawings, in accordance with the air volume
control box requirements. Thermostat shall be a wall-mounted electric/electronic
type with appropriate mounting hardware supplied by the controls supplier.
F. Box identification: Each airflow control box shall be clearly marked with an
identification label and airflow indicator. Identification label shall include such
information as unit nominal L/S, maximum factory-set L/S, minimum factory-set
L/S, and coil type and coil hand when supplied.
2.9 SOUND ATTENUATORS:
A. Refer to Section 15240 - VIBRATION ISOLATION AND NOISE CONTROL.
2.10 DUCT INSULATION:
A. Refer to Section 15250 - MECHANICAL INSULATION.
2.11 DUCTWORK FABRICATION
A. Ductwork shall be fabricated in factory qualified for the fabrication of ducts and
shall be subject to approval of the Engineer. Rectangular ducts shall be
fabricated in 1200, 2400, 3000, or 3600 mm lengths, unless otherwise indicated
or required to complete runs. Pre-assemble work in shop to greatest extent
possible, so as to minimize field assembly of systems. Disassemble systems

only to extent necessary for shipping and handling. Match-mark sections for
reassembly and coordinated installation.
B. Shop fabricate ductwork of gages and reinforcement complying with SMACNA -

HVAC Duct Construction Standards -and/or ASHRAE Handbook, Equipment
Volume, Chapter of Duct Construction; for appropriate static pressure rating
classification.
C. Fabricate duct fittings to match adjoining ducts, and to comply with duct
requirements as applicable to fittings. Except as otherwise indicated, fabricate
elbows with centerline radius equal to associated duct width; and fabricate to
include turning vanes in elbows where shorter radius is necessary. Limit angular
tapers to 30o for contracting tapers and 20o for expanding tapers.
D. Fabricate ductwork with accessories installed during fabrication to the greatest

extent possible.
E. Fabricate ductwork with duct liner in each section of duct where indicated.
Laminate liner to internal surfaces of duct in accordance with instructions by
manufacturers of lining and adhesive, and fasten with mechanical fasteners.
2.12 DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS AND GRILLES
A. General: Diffusers, registers and grilles shall be factory fabricated of aluminum,

type and finish as shown on the drawings or as approved by the Engineer.
B. Submittal:
1. A schedule of all air inlets and outlets indicating location, types, specified
air quantity, neck or face velocity, sound power level values, and
maximum and minimum air quantity ranges.
2. Copies of manufacturer's technical specifications including detailed

installation instructions for ducts and hardware.
3. Certificates of compliance stating that the material used and construction

conform to all requirements of this specification.
4. The Contractor shall be responsible for diffusion, spread, drop and throw.
If, according to the certified data of manufacturer of the proposed units,
the sizes indicated on Drawings will not perform satisfactorily, units shall
be re-selected to perform quietly and effectively in accordance with
manufacturer's recommendation.
C. Diffusers shall distribute the specified quantity of air evenly over space intended,
without causing noticeable drafts, air movement in excess of 0.25 m/sec in
occupied zones, or dead spots anywhere in the conditioned area.
D. Ceiling diffusers shall be of the square, round, perforated and/or linear slot, bar
type as shown on the drawings. The type of ceiling construction where the
diffusers are to be installed shall determine the type of compatible diffuser rings
or frames to be provided. Diffusers shall be sized in accordance with the
recommendations of the manufacturer. Diffusers shall be equipped with baffles
or other devices required to provide air distribution pattern. Factory fabricated
turning vanes, furnished by the diffuser manufacturer, shall be provided at each

diffuser, branch duct, or take-off, except where flexible ductwork is used.
Opposed blade volume damper and separate pattern adjustment shall be
provided by the diffuser manufacturer and shall be installed so that it can be
removed through the diffuser neck for exhaust and shall be similar to diffusers
used for supply, except that elements used solely for air pattern control shall be
omitted.
Diffuser shells, frames, perforated face plates, and all air volume controls and air
turning devices shall have baked-on flat enamel or equivalent finish. Color of
finish for shells and other component parts shall be gray or off-white. Color of
exposed frames and face plates shall be as approved by the Engineer.
E. Registers shall be provided with factory fabricated volume dampers furnished by

the register manufacturer. Volume dampers shall be of the group-operated,
opposed blade type and shall be key and adjustable. Supply registers shall have
two sets (horizontal and vertical) of directional blades or vanes. Exhaust and
return registers shall be similar to supply registers, except that they shall have a
single set of non-directional face bars or vanes having the same appearance as
the supply registers. Registers shall be factory primed, ready for finish painting.
Volume dampers and splitter assemblies shall be factory finished in baked black
enamel or equivalent.
F. Grilles shall be manufactured and finished in same manner as registers, except

that volume dampers shall be omitted. Grilles, volume adjusters and air control
devices made of steel (if required) shall be zinc-phosphate treated prior to
priming and finishing.
G. Jet nozzle suitable for long throw distances with optimum acoustic properties. The
adjustment facility, manual or automatic via internal or externally mounted electric
actuation, allows variation in discharge angle to compensate for changing
temperature differences, adjustment angular range 30 degrees upward to 30
degrees downward.
Material for the discharge nozzle and face cover ring shall be aluminum, mounting
for the eyeball shall have 2 plastic rings color white, the connection element and
saddle connection shall be galvanized sheet steel. The surface shall be pre-
treated and powder coated in white or another color approved by the Engineer.
Types and sizes shall be as shown on drawings.
2.13 AIR FILTERS
A. All outside air and recirculated air shall be filtered, except as noted. Filters shall
be underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. listed filters. Air flow shall not exceed rated
capacity at specified efficiency. Performance shall be tested and certified per
ASHRAE Standard 52-76.
B. Definitions:
1. Efficiency: as measured by the Dust Spot Method on Atmospheric Air, per

ASHRAE Test Standard 52-76, unless otherwise noted.
2. Arrestance: per ASHRAE Test Standard 52-76.
3. Dust holding capacity: per ASHRAE Test Standard 52-76.

C. Filter types, provide as follows:
1. Flat Panel Filter, Replaceable Type (F1).
2. Bag Filter, Extended Surface Type (F2).
3. Cartridge Filter (F3).
4. Inertial Separation Filter (IF).
5. Washable Filters (WF)
D. Flat Panel Filters, Replaceable Type (F1): Pleated media shall be blend of
cotton and synthetic fibers, UL Class II. Casing shall be double wall, rigid
chipboard frame with expanded metal media support, cross braced on both
sides of filter. Thickness shall be as noted.
1. Filter frames shall be metal with holding latches. The filter shall have an
average atmospheric dust spot efficiency of not less than 25 to 30% when
tested in accordance with ASHRAE Test Standard 52-76. Initial resistance
at 2.7 m/s face velocity shall be maximum 50 kPa for 50 mm thick unit.
E. Activated-Carbon Panel Filters
1. Description: Factory-fabricated unit with activated-carbon media.
2. Media: Flat-panel, disposable multilayer filter with an inlet layer of

polyester fibers, a layer of activated-carbon granules bonded to fibers, and
a layer of polyurethane foam; housed in a cardboard frame.
3. Mounting Frames: Welded, galvanized, sheet-steel frame and galvanized-

steel fasteners with polyurethane gaskets; capable of bolting together into
built-up filter banks.
F. Bag Filters, Extended Surface, Non-Supported Type (F2): Provide replaceable

bag type, UL Class I or Class II as noted. Glass fiber media shall be supported
on leaving side with flexible mesh. . The filter shall have an average atmospheric
dust spot efficiency of not less than 60 to 65% when tested in accordance with
ASHRAE Test Standard 52-76.
1. Side access housings (for low and medium efficiency filters): Filter
mounting section shall be fully factory assembled and dimensionally
compatible with factory fabricated air handling units, or as shown on plans.
a. Provide hinged and recessed access doors on both sides of each

housing with hinged cast aluminum spring loaded latches on
opposite sides of each door and closed cell neoprene rubber
perimeter gasketing. Hinges shall be zinc plated.
b. Provide molded polyvinyl chloride flexible filter sealing gaskets with

extruded aluminum retainers. Sealing pressure shall be applied
against entering air face of filter header. Seal adjacent filters by
vertical gasket strips attached to filter header.
c. Housing shall be minimum 16 gauge galvanized steel construction

with 100 mm turned-in flanges for attachment to adjacent equipment.

Pre-drilled attachment holes shall be on not more than 300 mm
centers. Provide integral track, for 50 mm thick pre-filters.
d. Insulate internally the same as air handling unit casing.
G. Cartridge Filters (F3): Filter shall consist of water resistant media made from
ultra fine glass filters. Media shall be pleated and have crimped aluminum
separators to maintain uniform spacing. The pleated media pack shall be
inserted into galvanized steel cell sides with a 19mm galvanized sheet steel
header on the air entering side. The filters shall have crossed wire bracing on
air leaving side. . The filter shall have an average atmospheric dust spot
efficiency of not less than 80-85% when tested in accordance with ASHRAE
Test Standard 52-76. Filter shall be UL listed.
H. Inertial Separation Filter (IF): Filter shall be factory fabricated in major

sub-assemblies with inlet air volume 110 percent of primary air delivery and
secondary circuit air volume 10 percent of primary air volume. Primary air
pressure drop shall not exceed 250 Pa. Separator shall be designed for
particulate concentrations up to:
1. mg per liter and particulate separation shall be accomplished by double

reversal of air flow and positive extraction of secondary air. Efficiency shall
be minimum 89% on Arizona Road Dust Coarse. Construction shall be as
follows:
a. 11 gauge welded and painted mild steel housing.
b. "V" shaped pockets, dust chutes and secondary manifolds shall be

type 304 stainless steel.
c. Pocket shall have louvered, tapered sides and horizontal secondary

air slots apex of "V" section.
d. Secondary stage shall have slots manifolded and sized for proper
conveying velocity.
I. Washable Filters (WF)
1. High Capacity, low resistance filters.

2. Filter shall be cleanable with hot water and household detergent.
3. The filter media shall consist with one of the following:
a. Strips of galvanized woven screen set on edge to the air flow and
crimped to provide a series of pyramid shaped pockets
b. Multiple layers of aluminum sheets that are corrugated, slit and then
expanded into series of baffles.
4. Successive layers are offset to form an intricate maze of dirt catching
surfaces.
J. Self Cleaning Intake filter: Filter shall be small, compact and factory assembled
with an initial resistance of 300 Pa, average dust spot efficiency of 90 %. The
fibrous nature and density of media packs in conjunction of with the deep “V”
formation provides at least 20 dB acoustic attenuation eliminating intake silencer
requirements. Construction shall be as follows:
1. Housing is made of hot rolled steel with welded construction

2. Panel filter incorporates uniformly pleated synthetic/cellulose media,
encapsulated in a galvanized frame

3. Welded steel secondary air circuit
4. Zinc coated welded steel Finger assembly
5. Cleaning mechanism consists of an external reservoir tank, air regulators,
filters and pressure gauges.
K. Filter gauges shall be differential pressure type and dial type with range and
minor divisions as noted under Installation.
L. Filter gauges shall be differential pressure type and dial type with built-in facility
for transmitting a warning signal to the BMS when filter resistance has reached
twice original value or that recommended by air filter manufacturer.
M. Range and minor divisions shall be as noted under installation. Provide

indication lamps at following locations.
1. Before Filter.
2. After Filter.
3. Provide complete with static pressure taps and two way cocks to permit
calibration.
2.14 HIGH-EFFICIENCY PARTICULATE FILTRATION
A. HEPA Filter: The HEPA filter shall have minimum efficiency of 99.97% in
removing small particles of sizes larger than 0.3 micrometer from air by
Underwriters Laboratories UL 586 – method of Dioctylphthlate (DOP) Penetration
Test. This makes use of a high efficiency glass paper medium and great surface
area of medium per cross-sectional area of the filter. It shall reach this rated
efficiency when the velocity of the gas passing through the media is 1.5 to 2.5 m/s.
Unless otherwise specified in the Particular Specification, a normal HEPA filter of
a size 600 mm square with 300 mm thickness, shall have a rated flow of 0.47 m³/s,
at a maximum pressure drop of 250 Pa, and about 23 m² of filtering media. The
filter shall operate to 600 Pa final resistance
Filter shall be constructed from a continuous sheet of the filter medium folded over
a separator of aluminium of other approved material to form closely spaced pleats,
the whole being sealed into a casing with hard setting synthetic resin cement. This
shall enable slower medium velocity and increased efficiency. The media of space
filter paper produced wholly from glass microfibers, shall be inert, non-
hygroscopic, vermin proof and shall not support bacteria growth. The filter media
shall be treated with organic binder materials to provide binder, fungicidal and
waterproofing properties.
1. Provide side-access, factory-assembled HEPA filter housing.
2. Housing shall be 14 gauge galvanized steel reinforced with bracing, with

standing flanges for installation in duct work
3. Provide dry air filter gauge, with a 0-2” scale across filter. Gauge shall
have static pressure tips, vent valves, and tubing and shall be marked to
indicate need to change filter.
4. Filters and their frames shall be DOP test rated.
2.15 DUCT HEATERS

A. Duct heater, where shown on, shall be complete with all accessories. The heater
shall be UL listed for zero clearance and shall meet all applicable requirements
of latest National Electric Code. Heater capacity, voltage, phase and number of
steps shall be as indicated on drawings. Elements shall be constructed of 80%
nickel and 20% chromium and steps shall be arranged to prevent stratification
when operating at less than full capacity. Terminal box shall be provided with
solid cover and complete box shall be totally enclosed to minimize dust
infiltration. All safety devices shall be serviceable through terminal box. Duct
heater shall not energize unless the supply air fan is on. All temperature controls
shall be as shown the drawings.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION OF METAL DUCTWORK
A. General: Assemble and install ductwork in accordance with recognized industry

practices which will achieve air tight (5 percent leakage for systems rated 75 mm
and under; one percent for systems rated over 75 mm) and noiseless (no
objectionable noise) systems, capable of performing each indicated service.
Install each run with minimum number of joints. Align ductwork accurately at
connections, within 3 mm misalignment tolerance and with internal surfaces
smooth. Support ducts rigidly with suitable ties, braces, hangers and anchors of
type which will hold ducts true-to-shape and to prevent buckling. Support vertical
ducts at every floor.
B. Field Fabrication: Complete fabrication of work at project as necessary to match

shop-fabricated work and accommodate installation requirements.
C. Routing: Locate ductwork runs, except as otherwise indicated, vertically and

horizontally and avoid diagonal runs wherever possible. Locate runs as indicated
by diagrams, details and notations or, if not otherwise indicated, run ductwork in
shortest route which does not obstruct usable space or block access for
servicing building and its equipment.
Hold ducts close to walls, overhead construction, columns, and other structural
and permanent-enclosure elements of building. Limit clearance to 13 mm where
furring is shown for enclosure or concealment of ducts, but allow for insulation
thickness, if any. Where possible, locate insulated ductwork for 25 mm where
furring is shown for enclosure or concealment of ducts, but allow for insulation
thickness, if any. Where possible, locate insulated ductwork for 25 mm
clearance outside of insulation. Wherever possible in finished and occupied
spaces, conceal ductwork from view, by locating in mechanical shafts, hollow
wall construction or above suspended ceilings. Do not encase horizontal runs in
solid partitions, except as specifically shown. Coordinate layout with suspended
ceiling and lighting layouts and similar finished work.
D. Electrical Equipment Spaces: Do not route ductwork through transformer vaults

and their electrical equipment spaces and enclosures.
E. Penetrations: Where ducts pass through interior partitions and exterior walls,
conceal space between construction opening and duct or duct insulation with
sheet metal flanges of same gage as duct. Overlap opening on 4 sides by at
least 38 mm. Fasten duct and substrate.

F. Coordination: Coordinate duct installations with installation of accessories,
dampers, equipment, controls and other associated work of ductwork system.
G. Installation: Install metal ductwork in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct

Construction Standards.
3.2 INSTALLATION OF FLEXIBLE DUCTS:
A. Maximum Length: For any duct run using flexible ductwork, do not exceed 1200
mm extended length.
B. Installation: Install in accordance with Section III of SMACNA - HVAC Duct

Construction Standards, Metal and Flexible.
3.3 INSTALLATION OF DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES
A. Install duct accessories in accordance with manufacturer's installation

instructions, with applicable portions of details of construction as shown in
SMACNA Standards, and in accordance with recognized industry practices to
ensure that products serve intended function.
B. Install turning vanes in square or rectangular 90o elbows in supply and exhaust
air systems, and elsewhere as indicated.
C. Install access doors to open against system air pressure, with latches operable
from either side, except outside only where duct is too small for person to enter.
D. Coordinate with other work, including ductwork, as necessary to interface

installation of duct accessories properly with other work.
3.4 INSTALLATION OF DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS AND GRILLES
A. General: Install diffusers, registers and grilles in accordance with manufacturer's

written instructions and in accordance with recognized industry practices to
insure that products serve intended functions.
B. Coordinate with other work, including ductwork and duct accessories, as

necessary to interface installation of air outlets and inlets with other work.
C. Locate ceiling air diffusers, registers, and grilles, as indicated on Drawings.
A. Leakage Tests:
1. After each duct system which is constructed for duct classes 75 mm of

w.g. and below is completed, test for duct leakage in accordance with
SMACNA Air Duct Leakage Test Manual. Repair leaks and repeat tests
until total leakage is less than 5% of system design air flow.
2. Operate installed duct accessories to demonstrate compliance with

requirements. Test for air leakage while system is operating. Repair or
replace faulty accessories, as required to obtain proper operation and
leak-proof performance.

3.6 EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS
A. General: Connect metal ductwork to equipment as indicated, provide flexible

connection for each ductwork connection to equipment mounted on vibration
isolators, and/or equipment containing rotating machinery. Provide access doors
as indicated.
A. Clean ductwork internally, unit-by-unit as it is installed, of dust and debris. Clean

external surfaces of foreign substances which might cause corrosive
deterioration of metal or, where ductwork is to be painted, might interfere with
painting or cause paint deterioration.
B. Temporary Closure: At ends of ducts which are not connected to equipment or

air distribution devices at time of ductwork installation, provide temporary closure
of polyethylene film or other covering which will prevent entrance of dust and
debris until time connections are to be completed.
C. Adjusting: Adjust ductwork accessories for proper settings, install fusible links in
fire dampers and adjust for proper action.
3.8 SYSTEM TESTING AND BALANCING
A. Conform to the requirements of Section 15990 - TESTING, ADJUSTING AND

BALANCING.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 15960
INTEGRATED BUILDING MANAGEMENT SYSTEM (BMS)
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 GENERAL SCOPE OF WORK
A. This section covers the BMS for all building systems as indicated on drawings
and specified herein.
The BMS contractor is actually the system integrator of all building systems.
B. The system shall support natively the following protocols: BACnet, LON, XML,
SNMP, Modbus, HTML and OPC. Other open protocol like DALI, KNX shall be
supported via interfaces.
C. The BMS as provided shall incorporate, at minimum, the following integrated

features, functions and services:
1. Operator information, alarm management and control functions.

2. Enterprise-level information and control access.
3. Information management including monitoring, transmission, archiving,
retrieval, and reporting functions.
4. Diagnostic monitoring and reporting of BMS function.
5. Offsite monitoring and management access
D. The Contractor shall furnish and install a complete: Building management

system including all necessary hardware and all operating and applications
software necessary to perform the control sequences of operation, security
functions and lighting control functions as called for in this specification or as
shown on the drawings.
E. The BMS shall conduct all Functions as Noted on the Input/ Output Table
appended to this Volume as an “Appendix” and as Shown on Drawings.
F. The system shall include and incorporate the following building subsystems into
a single-seat, fully integrated automation system for the building:
1. HVAC Control and Monitoring as indicated on BMS input/output lists and

in this BMS specification.
2. Plumbing and fire protection systems. As indicated on BMS input/output

lists.
3. Fire Alarm Monitoring and Smoke Management as describe in Section

16721 “Fire Alarm System”
4. Security and Card Access as describe in Section 16783 “Security

System”
5. Photo Badging as describe in Section 16783 “Security System”
6. Digital Video Surveillance as describe in Section 16783 “Security

System”
15960-1 Integrated Building Management System

7. Lighting Control and other DALI, KNX/ EIB controls as describe in
Section 16146 “Lighting Control Devices”
The BMS contractor can bid and supply all the system or part of the systems.
Those shall be able to seamlessly integrate other Vendor system. All the
systems have been specified to be open system and (BACnet BTL Listed
system) (BTL means BACnet test laboratories). Contractor shall coordinate and
approve other vendor product to be integrated to the BMS.
Open systems like KNX, DALI, Modbus, M-bus shall have BTL certified gateway
or IP router. For system like fire alarm security, a BACnet gateway shall be
accepted without violation of the particular system code requirement.
G. Each of the above mentioned system shall be priced separately as guided by the
specification and Bill of Quantities
H. The integration of all the system is part of the scope of the BMS contractor.
I. All HVAC automation components of the system – workstations, application

controllers, unitary controllers, etc. shall communicate using the native BACnet
protocol, as defined by ASHRAE Standard 135-2001and ISO 16484-3, 2005. No
gateways shall be used for communication to HVAC controllers furnished under
this section. At a minimum, provide controls for the following:
1. Air handling units and fan coil units
2. Return air fans
3. Exhaust and supply fans
4. Parking ventilation fans
5. Kitchen ventilation fans
6. Heat exchangers and pumps
7. Smoke evacuation sequence of AHUs and return fans including smoke

control dampers and fire command override panel.
8. Variable volume and constant volume box control.
9. Cabinet unit heater controls
10. Monitoring points for packaged equipment such as emergency

generators, air compressors, electric meter, water meters, fans, air
handling units, chiller (s) and pumps.
11. Integrate all power equipment provided with electronic control and
metering units, these units have been specified to have BACnet or
MODBUS interface.
12. All functions as noted on the Input/ Output table appended to this volume
as an “Appendix” and as shown on drawings.
13. Power wiring to DDC devices, smoke control dampers and BMS panels.
Wiring shall be coordinated with the general building contractor under
BMS supervision.

1.2 BMS DESCRIPTION
A. The Building Management System (BMS) shall be a complete system designed

for use with the enterprise IT systems. This functionality shall extend into the
equipment rooms. Devices residing on the automation network located in
equipment rooms and similar shall be fully IT compatible devices that mount and
communicate directly on the IT infrastructure in the facility. Contractor shall be
responsible for coordination with the owner’s IT staff to ensure that the BMS will
perform in the owner’s environment without disruption to any of the other
activities taking place on that LAN.
B. All controller and component shall be native BACnet and shall have the BTL
marking and certification.
C. All points of user interface shall be on standard PCs that do not require the
purchase of any special software from the BMS manufacturer for use as a
building operations terminal. The primary point of interface on these PCs will be
a standard Web Browser.
D. Where necessary and as dictated elsewhere in these Specifications, Servers

shall be used for the purpose of providing a location for extensive archiving of
system configuration data, and historical data such as trend data and operator
transactions. All data stored will be through the use of a standard data base
platform: Microsoft SQL Server Express or Microsoft SQL Server.
1.3 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. Except as otherwise noted, the Building Management System shall consist of all
Ethernet Network Controllers, Standalone Digital Control Units, workstations,
software, sensors, transducers, relays, valves, dampers, damper operators,
control panels, card readers, video cameras, power supplies, door locks, and
other accessory equipment, along with a complete system of electrical
interlocking wiring to fill the intent of the specification and provide for a complete
and operable system. Except as otherwise specified, provide operators for
equipment such as dampers if the equipment manufacturer does not provide
these. Coordinate requirements with the various Contractors.
B. The BMS contractor shall review and study all Integrated System drawings and
the entire specification to familiarize himself with the equipment and system
operation and to verify the quantities and types of dampers, operators, readers,
cameras, alarms, etc. to be provided.
C. This section shall coordinate and supervise the installation of pressure taps, flow
meters, piping wells, valves, automatic dampers, air flow measuring devices and
all devices furnished by this section. Installation of automatic control dampers
and air flow measuring station shall be under Section 15891 and installation of
wells, flow meters and automatic valves shall be under Section 15100.
D. All interlocking, wiring and installation of control devices associated with the
equipment listed below shall be provided under this Contract. When the BMS
system is fully installed and operational, the BMS Contractor and representatives
of the Owner will review and check out the system. At that time, the BMS
contractor shall demonstrate the operation of the system and prove that it
complies with the intent of the drawings and specifications.

E. Provide services and manpower necessary for commissioning of system in
coordination with the HVAC Contractor, Electrical Contractor, Balancing
Contractor and Owner’s representative.
1.4 WORK BY OTHERS
A. The BMS Contractor shall cooperate with other contractors performing work on
this project necessary to achieve a complete and neat installation. To that end,
each contractor shall consult the drawings and specifications for all trades to
determine the nature and extent of others’ work.
B. The Mechanical Contractor shall install all control valves, sensor wells, flow
meters, flow measuring stations and other similar equipment provided by the
BMS contractor.
C. The BMS Contractor shall provide field supervision to the designated contractor
for the installation of the following:
1. Automatic control dampers.
2. Fire/smoke dampers.
3. Blank-off plates for dampers that are smaller than duct size.
4. Sheet metal baffle plates to eliminate stratification.
D. The Electrical Contractor shall provide:
1. All power wiring to motors, heat trace, junction boxes for power to BMS
and security panels.
2. Furnish duct smoke detectors and wire to the building fire alarm system,
HVAC Contractor to mount devices, BMS Contractor to hardwire to fan
shut down.
3. Auxiliary contact (pulse initiator) on the electric meter for central

monitoring of kWH and kW. Electrical Contractor shall provide the pulse
rate for remote readout to the BMS. BMS contractor to coordinate this
with the electrical contractor.
4. All power wiring to all smoke damper actuators for smoke control
sequence.
5. All power wiring to all lighting circuits.
E. BMS contractor shall supply and install his specialized system wiring and
conduit. The general building contractor shall provide builder works only.
F. BMS Responsibility matrix:
1. The following BMS responsibility matrix shall be used as a guide for site
coordination between trades

BMS RESPONSIBILITY MATRIX
LOW
ITEM VOLTAGE LINE
WORK FURNISH INSTALL REMARKS
NO. WIRING / POWER
TUBE
BMS low voltage &
1 BMS BMS BMS N/A
communication wiring.
2 VAV box nodes BMS 15 BMS 16
3 VAV boxes 15 15 N/A N/A
BMS conduits and
4 16 16 16 N/A
raceway
5 Automatic dampers 15 15 N/A N/A
Automatic damper
6 BMS BMS BMS 16
actuators
7 Manual valves 15 15 N/A N/A
8 Automatic valves BMS 15 BMS N/A
Pipe insertion devices
and taps including
9 BMS 15 BMS BMS
thermowells, flow &
pressure stations.
10 BMS Current Switches BMS BMS BMS N/A
11 BMS Control Relays BMS BMS BMS N/A
Power distribution
12 system monitoring 16 16 BMS 16
interfaces
Control air compressors
13 BMS BMS N/A 16
(where required)
Concrete and/or inertia
14 equipment pads and 15 15 N/A N/A
seismic bracing
BMS interface with
15 BMS BMS BMS BMS
Chiller controls
Chiller controls
16 15 15 BMS 16
interface with BMS
BMS interface with
17 BMS BMS BMS 16
space unit controls.
Space unit controls
18 15 15 BMS 16
interface with BMS
All BMS Nodes,
19 equipment, housings, BMS BMS BMS BMS
enclosures & panels
20 Smoke Detectors 16 16 16 16
21 Fire / Smoke Dampers 15 15 BMS 16
Fire / Smoke Damper
22 BMS BMS BMS 16
Actuators
23 Fire Dampers 15 15 N/A N/A
24 Chiller Flow Switches 15 15 BMS N/A
25 Water treatment system 15 15 15 16
26 VFD's 15 16 BMS 16
27 Refrigerant monitors 15 BMS BMS 16

LOW
ITEM VOLTAGE LINE
WORK FURNISH INSTALL REMARKS
NO. WIRING / POWER
TUBE
Computer Room A/C
28 Units field-mounted 15 15 BMS 16
controls
Computer Room A/C
29 BMS 15 BMS 16
Units control valves
Fire Alarm shutdown
30 16 16 16 16
relay interlock wiring
Fire Alarm smoke
31 control relay 16 16 BMS 16
interlocking wiring
Fireman's Smoke
32 16 16 16 16
Control Override Panel
33 Fan Coil Unit Controls BMS BMS BMS 16
34 Unit Heater Controls BMS BMS BMS 16
Packaged RTU space
35 15 BMS BMS 16
mounted controls
Packaged RTU factory-
36 15 15 BMS 16
mounted controls
Packaged RTU field-
37 BMS BMS BMS 16
mounted controls
38 KNX/EIB KNX/EIB KNX/EIB KNX/EIB KNX/EIB KNX/EIB
39 Starter, HOA switches 16 16 N/A 16
Control damper
40 BMS BMS BMS 16
actuators
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE AND QUALIFICATIONS OF BIDDER
A. All bidders must be integrated systems contractors in the business of installing

building automation systems for a minimum of 10 years.
B. All bidders must have a service and installation office in the city area.
C. All bidders must be authorized distributors or branch offices of the manufacturers

specified, and shall have an established working relationship with the Control
System Manufacturer of not less than three years.
D. The Installer shall have successfully completed Control System Manufacturer's

configuration, programming, and service classes on the integrated control
system. The Installer shall present for review the certification of completed
training, including the hours of instruction and course outlines upon request.
E. All products used in this installation shall be new, currently under manufacture,
and shall be applied in similar installations for a minimum of 2 years. This
installation shall not be used as a test site for any new products unless explicitly
approved by the Engineer in writing.
F. Spare parts shall be available for at least 5 years after completion of this
contract.
1.6 CODES AND STANDARDS

A. All work shall conform to the following Codes and Standards, as applicable:
1. Saudi Building Code (SBC)
2. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) Standards.
3. National Electric Code (NEC) and applicable local Electric Code.
4. Underwriters Laboratories (UL) listing and labels.
5. UL 864 UUKL Smoke Control
6. UL 268 Smoke Detectors.
7. UL 916 Energy Management
8. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.
9. NFPA 90A - Standard For The Installation Of Air Conditioning And

Ventilating Systems.
10. NFPA 92A and 92B Smoke Purge/Control Equipment.
11. Factory Mutual (FM).
12. American National Standards Institute (ANSI).
13. National Electric Manufacturer’s Association (NEMA).
14. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME).
15. American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning

Engineers (ASHRAE):
a. Standard 62.1-2007 Standard for Indoor Air Quality
b. Standard 90.1-2007 Energy Standard for Buildings
16. Air Movement and Control Association (AMCA).
17. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE).
18. US-Environmental Protection Agency Energy Star Equipment

Certification
19. American Standard Code for Information Interchange (ASCII)
20. Electronics Industries Association (EIA).
21. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA).
22. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM).
23. Federal Communications Commission (FCC) including Part 15, Radio

Frequency Devices.
24. Americans Disability Act (ADA)

25. ANSI/EIA 909.1-A-1999 (LonWorks)
26. ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 195-2004 (BACnet)
27. EN/ISO 16484 all parts, Building Automation and Control
28. Other equivalent approved codes and standards.
B. In the case of conflicts or discrepancies, the more stringent regulation shall

apply.
C. All work shall meet the approval of the Authorities Having Jurisdiction at the
project site
1.7 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
Performance Standards. The integrated system shall conform to the following:
A. Graphic Display. The system shall display a graphic with 20 dynamic points with
all current data within 10 seconds.
B. Graphic Refresh. The system shall update a graphic with 20 dynamic points with
all current data within 8 seconds.
C. Object Command. The maximum time between the command of a binary object
by the operator and the reaction by the device shall be less than 2 seconds.
Analog objects should start to adjust within 2 seconds.
D. Object Scan. All changes of state and change of analog values will be
transmitted over the high-speed network such that any data used or displayed at
a controller or workstation will have been current within the previous 60 seconds.
E. Alarm Response Time. The maximum time from when an object goes into alarm
to when it is annunciated at the workstation shall not exceed 10 seconds. When
the alarm is dialed out by modem, this value shall not exceed 20 seconds.
F. Access Event Response Time. The maximum time from when a card reader
sees a valid or invalid card read to when it is annunciated at the workstation
shall not exceed 10 seconds.
G. Program Execution Frequency. Custom and standard applications shall be

capable of running as often as once every 5 seconds. The Contractor shall be
responsible for selecting execution times consistent with the mechanical process
under control.
H. Performance. Programmable HVAC controllers shall be able to execute DDC

PID control loops at a selectable frequency of at least once per second. The
controller shall scan and update the process value and output generated by this
calculation at this same frequency.
I. Multiple Alarm Annunciation. All workstations on the network must receive

alarms within 5 seconds of each other.
J. Reporting Accuracy. The system shall report all values with an end-to-end
accuracy as listed or better than those listed in Table 1.
K. Stability of Control. Control loops shall maintain measured variable at set point
within the tolerances listed in Table 2
Table 1: Reporting Accuracy
Measured Variable Reported Accuracy
Space Temperature ±0.5ºC [±1ºF]
Ducted Air ±0.5ºC [±1ºF
Outside Air ±1.0ºC [±2ºF]
Dew Point ±1.5ºC [±3ºF]
Water Temperature ±0.5ºC [±1ºF]
Delta-T (water and/or air) ±0.15ºC[±0.25ºF]
Relative Humidity ±5% RH
Water Flow ±5% of full scale
Airflow (terminal) ±10% of full scall (see Note 1)
Airflow (measuring stations) ±5% of full scale
Airflow (pressurized spaces) ±3% of full scale
Air Pressure (ducts) ±25 Pa [±0.1 "W.G.]
Air Pressure (space) ±3 Pa [±0.01 "W.G.]
Water Pressure ±2% of full scale (see Note 2)
Electrical 5% of reading (see Note 3)
(A, V, W, Power factor)
Carbon Monoxide (CO) ±5% of reading
Carbon Dioxide (CO 2 ) ±50 ppm
Note 1: 10%-100% of scale
Note 2: For both absolute and differential pressure
Note 3: Not including utility-supplied meters
Table 2: Control Stability and Accuracy
Controlled Variable Control Accuracy Range of Medium
Air Pressure ±50 Pa [±0.2" w.g.} 0-1.5 kPa [0-6" w.g.]
±3 Pa [±0.01" w.g.] -25 to 25 Pa [-0.1 to 0.1" w.g.]
Airflow ±10% of full scale
Space Temperature ±1.0ºC [±2.0ºF]

Duct Temperature ±1.5ºC [±3.0ºF]
Humidity ±5% RH
Fluid Pressure ±10 kPa [±1.5 psi] 0-1 MPa [1-150 psi]
±250 Pa [±1.0" w.g.] 0-12.5 kPa [0-50"w.g.] differential
1.8 SUBMITTALS
A. Contractor shall provide shop drawings and other submittals on all hardware,
software, and installation to be provided. No work may begin on any segment
of this project until submittals have been reviewed and approved for conformity
with the design intent.
B. All shop drawings shall be prepared in AutoCAD release 12 or higher software.

In addition to the drawings, the Contractor shall furnish a CD containing the
identical information. Drawings shall be A0 size or as approved on site.
C. Shop drawings shall include a riser diagram depicting locations of all controllers
and workstations, with associated network wiring. Also it should include
individual schematics of each mechanical system and security system showing
all connected points with reference to their associated controller. Typical will be
allowed where appropriate.
D. Submittal data shall contain manufacturer's data on all hardware and software
products required by the specification. Valve, damper, air flow station and VAV
schedules shall indicate size, configuration, capacity and location of all
equipment. Contractor must provide manufacturer’s Protocol Implementation
Conformance Statement (PICS) for workstation software and every controller
model that are installed.
E. When manufacturer's cut sheets apply to a product series rather than a specific
product, the data specifically applicable to the project shall be highlighted or
clearly indicated by other means. Each submitted piece of literature and
drawings shall clearly reference the specification and/or drawing that the
submittal is to cover. General catalogs shall not be accepted as cut sheets to
fulfill submittal requirements.
F. Software submittals shall contain narrative descriptions of sequences of

operation, program listings, point lists, a complete description of the graphics,
reports, alarms and configuration to be furnished with the workstation software.
Information shall be bound or in a three ring binder with an index and tabs.
G. Submit five (5) copies of submittal data and shop drawings to the Engineer for
review prior to ordering or fabrication of the equipment. The Contractor prior to
submitting shall check all documents for accuracy.
H. The Engineer will make corrections, if required, and return to the Contractor.
The Contractor will then resubmit with the corrected or additional data. This
procedure shall be repeated until all corrections are made to the satisfaction of
the Engineer and the submittals are fully approved.
I. Submittals shall be provided within 8 weeks of contract award.
J. Within one month of contract award, provide a schedule of the work indicating
the following:

1. Intended sequence of work items.
2. Start dates of individual work items.
3. Duration of individual work items.
4. Planned delivery dates for major material and equipment and expected
lead times.
5. Milestones indicating possible restraints on work by other trades or

situations.
K. Provide monthly written status reports indicating work completed, revisions to

expected delivery dates, etc. An updated project schedule shall be included.
1.9 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS:
Upon completion of installation, submit three copies of record (as-built) documents. The
documents shall be submitted for approval prior to final completion and shall include:
A. Project Record Drawings. These shall be as-built versions of the submittal shop
drawings. One set of CD ROM media including CAD drawing files also shall be
provided.
B. Testing and Commissioning Reports and Checklists. Completed versions of all

reports and checklists, along with all trend logs, used to meet the requirements
of Part 3: “Control System Demonstration and Acceptance.”
C. Certification of the pressure test required in Part 3: “Control Air Tubing.”
D. Operation and Maintenance (O & M) Manual. This shall include as-built versions
of the submittal product data. In addition to the information required for
submittals, the O & M manual shall include:
1. Names, addresses, 24-hour telephone numbers of Contractors installing

equipment, the control systems and service representatives of each.
2. Operators Manual with procedures for operating the control systems,

including logging on/off, alarm handling, producing point reports, trending
data, overriding computer control, changing set points and other
variables.
One set of Programming Manuals with a description of the programming
language (including syntax), statement descriptions (including algorithms
and calculations used), point database creation and modification,
program creation and modification, and use of the editor.
3. Engineering, Installation, and Maintenance Manual(s) that explain how to

design and install new points, panels, and other hardware; preventive
maintenance and calibration procedures; how to debug hardware
problems; and how to repair or replace hardware.
4. A listing and documentation of all custom software created using the

programming language, including the set points, tuning parameters, and
object database. One set of magnetic/optical media containing files of
the software and database also shall be provided.

5. One set of magnetic/optical media containing files of all color graphic
screens created for the project.
6. A list of recommended spare parts with part numbers and suppliers.
7. Complete original issue documentation, installation, and maintenance

information for all third-party hardware provided, including computer
equipment and sensors.
8. Complete original issue diskettes for all software provided, including

operating systems, programming language, operator workstation
software, and graphics software.
9. Licenses, guarantee, and warranty documents for all equipment, software

and systems.
10. Recommended preventive maintenance procedures for all system

components, including a schedule of tasks (inspection, cleaning,
calibration, etc.), time between tasks and task descriptions.
1.10 TRAINING
The BMS Contractor shall provide both on-site and classroom training to the Owner’s
representative and maintenance personnel per the following description:
A. On-site training shall consist of a minimum of (40) hours of hands-on instruction

geared at the operation and maintenance of the systems. The curriculum shall
include
1. System Overview
2. System Software and Operation
a. System access
b. Software features overview
c. Changing setpoints and other attributes
d. Adding and editing personnel records
e. Alarm operation
f. Scheduling
g. Editing programmed variables
h. Displaying color graphics
i. Running reports
j. Workstation maintenance
k. Application programming
3. Operational sequences including start-up, shutdown, adjusting and

balancing.

4. Equipment maintenance.
B. Classroom training will include a minimum of (1) training slot for two weeks of
course material covering workstation operation and controller programming.
C. The Contractor shall provide a course outline for all training classes at least six
weeks prior to the first class. The Engineer may modify any or all of the training
courses outline to meet the needs of the Owner. Review and approval by the
Engineer shall be completed at least three weeks prior to the first class.
1.11 WARRANTY
A. The integrated system contractor shall warrant the system for 12 months after
system acceptance and beneficial use by the owner. During the warranty
period, the integrated system contractor shall be responsible for all necessary
revisions to the software as required to provide a complete and workable system
consistent with the letter and intent of the Sequence of Operation section of the
specification.
B. Extended warranty for labor and material for 5 years shall be offered as an
option.
C. The Contractor shall respond to the Owner's request for warranty service within
24 hours during normal business hours.
D. Updates to the manufacturer’s software shall be provided at no charge during

the warranty period.
E. The Contractor shall not be required to warrant reused devices, except for those
which have been rebuilt and/or repaired. The Contractor shall warrant all
installation labor and materials and demonstrate that all reused devices are in
operable condition at the time of Engineer’s acceptance.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. The Building Management System (BMS) shall encompass the HVAC control
system, electronic access control and security system, lighting control system,
the video surveillance and recording system. The BMS shall also interoperate
with the fire alarm system to annunciate alarms and perform smoke
management functions. The BMS shall be controlled through a single graphical,
web-based operator interface that allows for instant access to any sub-system
through a standard browser. Systems requiring two or more different PC
workstations are unacceptable.
B. HVAC Control
The BMS workstation and HVAC controllers shall be designed in strict

accordance with ASHRAE’s BACnet standard, 135-2001, to provide
interoperability between different building subsystems. The system shall use
BACnet MS/TP for field and will use BACnet TCIP network types for
management level network and will use BACnet protocols exclusively. The
contractor must provide PC-based programming workstations, operator
workstations and microcomputer controllers of modular design providing

distributed processing capability. Contractor must provide manufacturer’s
Protocol Implementation Conformance Statement (PICS) for workstation
software and every controller model that are installed.
C. Smoke Management
When a fire alarm or early warning smoke detection alarm is triggered, the
system shall perform all necessary fan shutdown and smoke management
procedures as appropriate for the site. Smoke control shall comply with UL 864
UUKL.
D. Access Control
See Section 16783 “Security System”
E. Card Holder Management and Enrollment
See Section 16783 “Security System”
F. Digital Video Management
See Section 16783 “Security System”.
G. Lighting Control
See Section 16146 “Lighting Control Devices”
Integration with the lighting control shall be full integration.
Rooms have DALI/KNX presence sensor in the room, then room temperature
shall be preset to standby mode (preset to 25o C) or as agreed with the site
P P
Engineer
H. Fire Alarm Interface
The system shall monitor all alarm points from the site’s fire alarm system and
early warning smoke detection system, and provide secondary fire annunciation
to the central workstations. When practical, the system shall monitor the fire
alarm values through a serial interface to the fire panel. When a serial interface
is used, the system shall provide for all conditions of each alarm point – alarm,
normal, trouble, fault and reset. Fire alarms shall take priority over other alarms
in the system, and at the central workstation, shall automatically display a
graphic panel of the site when triggered.
I. For this project the system shall consist of the following top-level components:
1. Administration and Programming Workstation(s).
The BMS Contractor shall furnish Administration and Programming

Workstation Computers and printer(s) as indicated on drawings and as
described in Part 2 of the specification. These workstations must be
running the standard workstation software developed and tested by the
manufacturer of the network controllers and the standalone controllers.
No third party front-end workstation software will be acceptable.
Workstations must conform to the B-OWS BACnet device profile. The
workstations must communicate to the Network Controllers through
Ethernet 10/100mbps. Workstations that communicate using RS232 or

RS 485/422 are unacceptable. One workstation shall also be designated
as the Photo Imaging workstation and be equipped with card printer,
camera and accessories as described later.
If this building is part of a bigger site with central BMS, FMS, then this
programming workstation is part of the higher level. See Section 15961
FMS
2. Web-Based Operator Workstations and user interface.
a. The BMS Contractor shall furnish licenses for 3 concurrent users

to the BMS system. Web-based users shall have access to all
system points and graphics, shall be able to receive and
acknowledge alarms, and shall be able to control setpoints and
other parameters. If required, a central web server shall be
provided to manage the web-based users. The web-based
interface must conform to the B-OWS BACnet device profile.
b. Where indicated on plans the BMS Contractor shall provide and

install a personal computer for command entry, information
management, network alarm management, and database
management functions. All real-time control functions, including
scheduling, history collection and alarming, shall be resident in
the BMS Network Automation Engines to facilitate greater fault
tolerance and reliability.
c. Dedicated User Interface Architecture – The architecture of the

computer shall be implemented to conform to industry standards,
so that it can accommodate applications provided by the BMS
Contractor and by other third party applications suppliers,
including but not limited to Microsoft Office Applications.
Specifically it must be implemented to conform to the following
interface standards.
1) Microsoft Internet Explorer for user interface functions

2) Microsoft Office Professional for creation, modification and
maintenance of reports, sequences other necessary
building management functions
3) Microsoft Outlook or other e-mail program for
supplemental alarm functionality and communication of
system events, and reports
4) Required network operating system for exchange of data
and network functions such as printing of reports, trends
and specific system summaries
5) System shall support distributed web based user interface
using WAN/VPN. System shall support portable operator
terminal (LAPTOP, Mobile, Smart Phone, proprietary
portable terminal)
d. Ready Access Portal User Interface
1) BMS Contractor shall provide and install all computer

hardware and software required for the purpose of
configuration and consolidation of information and
programs required for the delivery of a Task Focused,
Web Based Portal to the BMS. This Ready Access Portal

shall provide a natural, complementary extension to the
site management user interface previously described.
2) Ready Access Portal Architecture – The architecture of

the system shall be implemented to conform to industry
standards, so that it can accommodate the required
applications provided by the BMS Contractor as well as
communicate information too and from the system.
3) User Interface Application Components
a) The ready access portal shall provide an intuitive

user interface to key functions and tasks via web
browser.
b) Plug-ins or special software shall not be required
for access to alarm, summary, schedule and trend
data.
c) The information shall be accessible on both
personal computer and handheld device platforms
as follows:
• Personal computers – Internet Explorer

Version 7.0 or later recommended
• Handheld devices – Internet Explorer for
Window Mobile Version 5.0 or 6.0
recommended. UI is optimized for devices
with a 240 x 320 pixel screen size (QVGA).
Other devices may display the UI but full
functionality is not guaranteed.
3. Ethernet-based HVAC Network Router and/or Controller(s).
The BMS Contractor shall furnish Ethernet-based HVAC network

controllers as described in Part 2 of the specification. These controllers
will connect directly to the Operator Workstation over Ethernet, using the
BACnet/IP protocol at a minimum of 100mbps, and provide
communication to the Standalone Digital Control Units and/or other
Input/Output Modules. Network Controllers shall conform to BACnet
device profile B-AAC. Network controllers that utilize RS232 serial
communications or ARCNET to communicate with the workstations will
not be accepted.
HVAC Network Controllers shall be tested and certified by the BACnet

Testing Laboratory (BTL) as Advanced Application Controllers (B-AAC).
4. Standalone Digital Control Units (SDCUs).
Provide the necessary quantity and types of SDCUs to meet the

requirements of the project for mechanical equipment control including air
handlers, central plant control and terminal unit control. Each SDCU will
operate completely standalone, containing all of the I/O and programs to
control its associated equipment. Each SDCU shall conform to the
BACnet device profile B-AAC.
SDCUs shall be tested and certified by the BACnet Testing Laboratory

(BTL) as Advanced Application Controllers (B-AAC).

2.3 SYSTEM ARCHITECTURE
A. General
The Building Management System (BMS) shall consist of a two-tiered system,

an upper-level Ethernet TCP/IP network (Automation Network) and a twisted-pair
field bus based on BACnet MS/TP (Control Network). All field bus
communications must be routed through Ethernet-based Network Controllers or
Routers, and not directly through PC workstations or servers. The contractor
shall provide all communications media, connectors, repeaters, hubs and routers
necessary for a complete system.
B. The system shall include Administration and Programming Workstations

(APWs), Web-based Operator Workstations (WOWs), and one File Server to
support system configurations where more than three operator workstations are
required. The BMS shall provide control, alarm detection, scheduling, reporting
and information management for the entire facility, and Wide Area Network
(WAN) if applicable, using a single MS-SQL database.
C. Level 1 Network Description: Level 1, the main backbone of the system, shall be
an Ethernet 10/100bT or higher LAN/WAN, using BACnet/IP as the
communications protocol. Network Router/Controllers, DVRs, NVR, Card Access
Network Controllers, Operator Workstations, and the Central File Server shall
connect directly to this network without the need for Gateway devices. Up to
1,000,000 devices (workstations, controllers, video recorders, etc.) can be
connected to this backbone.
D. Level 2 Network Description: Level 2 of the system shall consist of one or more
BACnet MS/TP field buses managed by the Network Router/Controllers.
Minimum speed shall be 76.8kbps. The Level 2 field bus consists of an RS485,
token passing bus that supports up to 127 Standalone Digital Control Units
(SDCUs) for operation of HVAC equipment and others. The use of ARCNET,
LONworks, RS-232 serial communications, or BACnet Ethernet for this network
is prohibited.
E. Dial-Up (RAS) Connectivity: The BMS shall also be capable of managing remote
systems via standard dial-up phone lines as a standard component of the
software. Front-end “add-on” software modules to perform remote site
communication will not be allowed.
F. Communication services over the network shall result in operator interface and
value passing that is transparent to the network architecture as follows:
1. Connection of an operator interface device to any one controller on the

network will allow the operator to interface with all other controllers as if
that interface were directly connected to the other controllers. Data,
status information, reports, system software, custom programs, etc., for
all controllers shall be available for viewing and editing from any one
controller on the network.
2. All database values (e.g., objects, software variables, custom program

variables) of any one controller shall be readable by any other controller
on the network. This value passing shall be automatically performed by a
controller when a reference to a object name not located in that controller
is entered into the controller's database. An operator/ installer shall not
be required to set up any communication services to perform network
value passing.
G. The time clocks in all controllers shall be automatically synchronized daily via the
network. An operator change to the time clock in any controller shall be
automatically broadcast to all controllers on the network.
H. BMS LAN Segmentation: The BMS shall be capable of being segmented,

through software, into multiple local area networks (LANs) distributed over a
wide area network (WAN), sharing a single SQL file server. This enables
workstations to manage a single LAN (or building), and/or the entire system with
all devices being assured of being updated by and sharing the most current
database. In the case of a single workstation system, the workstation shall
contain the entire database – with no need for a separate file server.
I. Standard Network Support: All NRCs, Workstation(s) and File Server shall be
capable of residing directly on the owner’s Ethernet TCP/IP LAN/WAN with no
required gateways. Furthermore, the NRC’s, Workstation(s) and File Server shall
be capable of using standard, commercially available, off-the-shelf Ethernet
infrastructure components such as routers, switches and hubs. With this design
the owner may utilize the investment of an existing or new enterprise network or
structured cabling system. This also allows the option of the maintenance of the
LAN/WAN to be performed by the owner’s Information Systems Department as
all devices utilize standard TCP/IP components.
J. System Expansion: The BMS system shall be scalable and expandable at all
levels of the system using the same software interface, and the same Level 1
and Level 2 controllers. Systems that require replacement of either the
workstation software or field controllers in order to expand the system shall not
be acceptable. The BMS shall be capable of controlling 200,000 output points.
The system shall be capable of expanding to 200 workstations.
K. Additional web-based operator licenses shall added in the field through an

upgrade of the web server’s security key, with no re-programming required.
L. The system shall use the same application programming language for all levels:
Operator Workstation, Network Router/Controller, and Standalone Digital Control
Unit. Furthermore, this single programming language shall be used for all
applications.
M. Support for Open Systems Protocols: All HVAC hardware and software included
under this section shall conform to ASHRAE standard 135-2001, to promote
interoperability between building subsystems. Additionally, the BMS design must
include solutions for the integration of the following “open systems” protocols:
LonTalk, Modbus, and digital data communication to third party
microprocessors such as chiller controllers, fire panels and variable frequency
drives (VFDs).
N. The system shall also provide the ability to program custom ASCII
communication drivers, that will reside in a BACnet Gateway, for communication
to third party systems and devices. These drivers will provide real time
monitoring and control of the third party systems. Once programmed, these data
points shall be monitored and controlled in exactly the same manner as native
BMS data points.

2.4 OPERATOR WORKSTATION REQUIREMENTS
A. General
For the building provide one web-based user license as minimum, or as

indicated on drawings.
All workstation software both programming and software and web-based

operator software, shall conform to the BACnet B-OWS device profile, using
BACnet/ I{ to communicate to other BACnet devices.
B. The workstation configuration shall be as minimum:
1. 3 GHz Intel Core 2 processor with 4 GB of RAM
2. Microsoft Windows XP operating system or higher (Windows 7)
3. Serial port, parallel port, USB port
4. 10/100MBPS Ethernet NIC
5. 250 GB hard disk
6. CD-RW drive
7. High resolution (minimum 1280 x 1024), 17” flat panel TFT display
8. Optical mouse and full function keyboard
9. Audio sound card and speakers
10. License agreement for all applicable software.
C. Web-Based Operator PC Requirements
Any user on the network can access the system, using the following software:
1. Windows 2000/XP or above (Windows 7)
2. Internet Explorer 6.0 and above
3. Java-enabled
D. Modem
Provide one Windows XP-compatible 56 Kbaud modem for dial-in diagnostics.
E. Printer
Provide an alarm printer and a separate report/graphics printer. The alarm

printer shall be an Epson dot matrix or equivalent and the report printer shall be
a black-and-white HP LaserJet.
F. Web-based Operator Software

Day-to-day operation of the system shall be accessible through a standard web
browser interface, allowing technicians and operators to view any part of the
system from anywhere on the network. Access to the system must be available
from a dial-in connection over the Internet.
1. Graphic Displays
The browser-based interface must share the same graphical displays as

the Administration and Programming Workstations, presenting dynamic
data on site layouts, floor plans, and equipment graphics. The browser’s
graphics shall support commands to change set points, unlock doors,
enable/disable equipment and start/stop equipment. The graphic shall
also be able to display live video from any camera on the system.
Through the browser interface, operators must be able to navigate

through the entire system, and change the value or status of any point in
any controller. Changes are effective immediately to the controller, with a
copy stored in the system database.
2. Alarm Management
Through the browser interface, a live alarm viewer identical to the alarm
viewer on the Administration and Programming workstation shall be
presented, if the user’s password allows it. Users must be able to receive
alarms, silence alarms, and acknowledge alarms through a browser. If
desired, specific operator text must be able to be added to the alarm
record before acknowledgement.
3. Groups and Schedules
Through the browser interface, operators must be able to view pre-

defined groups of points, with their values updated automatically.
Through the browser interface, operators must be able to change

schedules – change start and stop times and add new times to a
schedule.
4. Personnel Management
Through the browser interface, operators must be able to add access

control personnel records, delete personnel records, add and remove
area privileges and view the stored image of the person.
5. Video Management
Through the browser interface, operators must be able to view live and
recorded video from any digital video recorder or network video recorder
on the network. The interface must offer an easy method to select the
camera to view, and for recorded video, must offer selections for start
and stop time when searching video clips.
6. Access Reports
Through the browser interface, operators must be able to create and view
reports of access events and access privileges. Reports must be
available based on start and stop time, door, area, and person. Invalid

attempts must be color-coded red in the report. Provide hot links to the
respective personnel records within the report.
7. History Reports
Through the web browser interface, operators must be able to call up

graphical reports of historical values over time such as temperature,
humidity and any other logged value in the system. The reporting function
must also provide graphical reports for analysis of non-analog information
such as the alarm log, event log and activity log – examples are a graph
of the top 10 alarmed points over a certain period of time, traffic counts
for each door over time, workstation activity displayed per workstation.
8. User Accounts and Audit Trail
The same user accounts shall be used for the browser interface and for
the operator workstations. Operators must not be forced to memorize
multiple passwords.
All commands and user activity through the browser interface shall be
recorded in the system’s activity log, which can be later searched and
retrieved by user, date, or both.
G. BACnet Network Router/Controllers (NRCs)
1. General
Network Controllers shall combine both network routing functions and

control functions into a single unit. NRC’s shall route communications
between the BACnet/IP network and the BACnet MS/TP field network.
They may also be responsible for monitoring and controlling their own
HVAC equipment such as an AHU or boiler. A sufficient number of NRCs
shall be supplied to fully meet the requirements of this specification and
the attached point list.
Each NRC shall be classified as a “native” BACnet device, supporting the

BACnet Advanced Application Controller (B-AAC) profile. Controllers that
support a lesser profile such as B-SA are not acceptable. NRCs shall be
tested and certified by the BACnet Testing Laboratory (BTL) as
Advanced Application Controllers (B-AAC).
2. Hardware Specifications
a. Memory:
Both the operating system of the controller, plus the application

program for the controller, shall be stored in non-volatile, flash
memory. Controllers shall contain enough memory for the current
application, plus required history logging, plus a minimum of 20%
additional free memory.
b. Communication Ports:
Each NRC shall provide communication to both the

Workstation(s) and the field buses. An on-board 10/100bT

Ethernet port shall be provided, as well as a RS-485 port for
communications to a maximum of 127 MS/TP devices. All TCP/IP
settings, including IP address, default gateway and subnet mask,
shall be stored in non-volatile memory.
c. Local Status Indicator Lamps:
Provide as a minimum LED indication of CPU status, Ethernet

LAN status and field bus status. For each output, provide LED
indication of the value of the output (On/Off). For each output
module provide an LED which gives a visual indication of whether
any outputs on the module are manually overridden.
d. Real Time Clock (RTC):
Each NRC shall include a battery-backed, real time clock,

accurate to 10 seconds per day. The RTC shall provide the
following: time of day, day, month, year, and day of week. The
system shall automatically correct for daylight savings time and
leap years and be Year 2000 compliant.
e. Power Supply:
The power supply for the NRCs shall be auto sensing, 10-28VDC
and 24VAC, 60/50 Hz power, with a tolerance of +/- 20%. Line
voltage below the operating range of the system shall be
considered outages. The controller shall contain over voltage
surge protection, and require no additional AC power signal
conditioning.
f. Automatic Restart after Power Failure:
Upon restoration of power after an outage, the NRC shall

automatically and without human intervention, update all
monitored functions, resume operation based on current,
synchronized time and status and implement special start-up
strategies as required.
g. Battery backup:
The NRC shall include an on-board lithium battery to back up the

controller’s RAM memory. The battery shall have a shelf life of
over 10 years, and provide accumulated backup of all RAM and
clock functions for at least 3 years. In the case of a power failure,
the NRC shall first try to restart from the RAM memory. If that
memory is corrupted or unusable, then the NRC shall restart itself
from its application program stored in its flash memory.
3. Software Specifications
a. General
The NRC shall contain flash memory to store both the resident
operating system AND the application software. There will be no
restrictions placed on the type of application programs in the
system. Each NRC shall be capable of parallel processing,
executing all control programs simultaneously. Any program may
affect the operation of any other program. Each program shall
have the full access of all I/O facilities of the processor. This
execution of control function shall not be interrupted due to
normal user communications including interrogation, program
entry, printout of the program for storage, etc.
b. User Programming Language:
The application software shall be user programmable. This

includes all strategies, sequences of operation, control algorithms,
parameters, and setpoints. The source program shall be English
language-based and programmable by the user. The language
shall be structured to allow for the easy configuration of control
programs, schedules, alarms, reports, telecommunications, local
displays, mathematical calculations, passwords, and histories.
The language shall be self-documenting. Users shall be able to
place comments anywhere in the body of a program. Program
listings shall be configurable by the user in logical groupings.
Controllers that use a “canned” program method will not be

accepted.
4. Control Software:
The NRC shall have the ability to perform the following pre-tested control
algorithms:
 Proportional, Integral plus Derivative Control (PID)
 Self Tuning PID
 Two Position Control
 Digital Filter
 Ratio Calculator
 Equipment Cycling Protection
a. Mathematical Functions:
Each controller shall be capable of performing basic mathematical

functions (+, -, *, /), squares, square roots, exponential,
logarithms, Boolean logic statements, or combinations of both.
The controllers shall be capable of performing complex logical
statements including operators such as >, <, =, and, or, exclusive
or, etc. These must be able to be used in the same equations
with the mathematical operators and nested up to five
parentheses deep.
b. Energy Management Applications:
NRCs shall have the ability to perform any or all of the following
energy management routines:
 Time of Day Scheduling
 Calendar Based Scheduling

 Holiday Scheduling
 Temporary Schedule Overrides
 Optimal Start
 Optimal Stop
 Night Setback Control
 Enthalpy Switchover (Economizer)
 Peak Demand Limiting
 Temperature Compensated Duty Cycling
 CFM Tracking
 Heating/Cooling Interlock
 Hot/Cold Deck Reset
 Free Cooling
 Hot Water Reset
 Chilled Water Reset
 Condenser Water Reset
 Chiller Sequencing
c. History Logging:
Each controller shall be capable of LOCALLY logging any input,

output, calculated value or other system variable over user
defined time intervals ranging from 1 second to 1440 minutes.
Any system can be logged in history. A minimum of 1000 values
shall be stored in each log. Each log can record either the
instantaneous, average, minimum or maximum value of the point.
Logged data shall be downloadable to the Operator Workstation
for long term archiving based upon user-defined time intervals, or
manual command.
d. Alarm Management:
For each system point, alarms can be created based on high/low

limits or conditional expressions. All alarms will be tested each
scan of the NRC and can result in the display of one or more
alarm messages or reports.
Up to 8 alarms can be configured for each point in the controller.
Alarms will be generated based on their priority. A minimum of

255 priority levels shall be provided.
If communication with the Operator Workstation is temporarily

interrupted, the alarm will be time-stamped and buffered in the
NRC. When communications return, the alarm will be transmitted
to the Operator Workstation if the point is still in the alarm
condition.
Alarms must be capable of being routed to any BACnet

workstation that conforms to the B-OWS device profile and uses
the BACnet/IP protocol.
e. Web Server Interface
The Network Controller/Router shall include a built-in web server,

such that all point values may be viewed and controlled from a
standard browser environment. Custom web pages, password-
protected, must be able to be stored within the network controller
for access by technicians for troubleshooting and maintenance.
Each web page may be configured as dynamic, with an automatic
refresh rate.
f. Local Keypad/Display:
For each NRC, provide a local display of at least 4 lines, providing

current display of all critical inputs and outputs that the NRC is
controlling. Provide a keypad such that an operator can log on,
scroll through point values, and change setpoints that are
changeable. The keypad/display must be capable of being
mounted either on the controller, or on a control panel door.
H. Standalone Digital Control Units (SDCUs)
1. General:
Standalone Digital Control Units shall provide control of HVAC, including

air handling units, rooftop units, variable air volume boxes, unit
ventilators, FCU and other mechanical equipment. Each controller shall
be fully programmable, contain its own control programs and will continue
to operate in the event of a failure or communication loss to its
associated NRC. Each SDCU provided must be a “native” BACnet
device, supporting the BACnet Advanced Application Controller (B-AAC)
profile. Controllers that support a lesser profile such as B-SA are not
acceptable. SDCUs shall be tested and certified by the BACnet Testing
Laboratory (BTL) as Advanced Application Controllers (B-AAC).
2. Memory:
Both the operating system of the controller, plus the application program
for the controller, shall be stored in non-volatile, flash memory.
Controllers shall contain enough memory for the current application, plus
required history logging, plus a minimum of 20% additional free memory.
3. Communication Ports:
SDCUs shall have a RS-485 communication port to the BACnet MS/TP

field bus, operating at a speed of at least 19.2kbps.
4. Input/Output:
Each SDCU shall have enough inputs and outputs to meet the
application’s required point count. Each SDCU shall support universal
inputs, whereas any input may be software-defined as:
 Digital Inputs for status/alarm contacts
 Counter Inputs for summing pulses from meters.

 Thermistor Inputs for measuring temperatures in space, ducts and
thermowells.
 Analog inputs for pressure, humidity, flow and position

measurements.
SDCU’s must support both digital and analog output types:
 Digital Outputs for on/off equipment control.
 Analog Outputs for valve and damper position control and

capacity control of primary equipment.
5. Expandability:
For larger controllers (16 base inputs and up), provide input and output
expansion through the use of plug-in modules. At least two I/O modules
must be capable of being added to the base SDCU.
6. Hardware Override Switches:
All digital outputs on air handling unit controllers shall include three
position manual override switches to allow selection of the ON, OFF, or
AUTO output state. These switches shall be built into the unit and shall
provide feedback to the controller so that the position of the override
switch can be obtained through software. In addition each analog output
on air handling unit controllers shall be equipped with an override
potentiometer to allow manual adjustment of the analog output signal
over its full range, when the 3 position manual override switch is placed
in the ON position.
7. Room Sensor Support:
The SDCU shall support a basic room thermistor in plain plastic cover; a
room sensor with override and setpoint adjust slider; and a sensor with a
one-line display and 6-button keypad. The display sensor shall be able to
display the current temperature, setpoint, outside air temperature, relative
humidity and setpoint, occupancy mode and CFM of the individual zone.
8. Networking:
Each SDCU will be able to exchange information on a peer to peer basis

with other Standalone Digital Control Units, according to the BACnet
MS/TP protocol. Each SDCU shall be capable of storing and referencing
global variables (on the LAN) with or without any workstations online.
Each SDCU shall be able to have its program viewed and/or
enabled/disabled through a workstation connected to an NRC.
9. Indicator Lamps:
SDCUs will have as a minimum, LED indication of CPU status, and field
bus status.
10. Real Time Clock (RTC):

All SDCUs shall have a real time clock in either hardware or software.
The accuracy shall be within 10 seconds per day. The RTC shall provide
the following information: time of day, day, month, year, and day of week.
Each SDCU shall receive a signal, every hour, over the network from the
NRC, which synchronizes all SDCU real time clocks.
11. Automatic Restart After Power Failure:
Upon restoration of power, the SDCU shall automatically and without

human intervention, update all monitored functions, resume operation
based on current, synchronized time and status, and implement special
start-up strategies as required.
12. Battery Back Up:
All SDCUs shall store all programming in non-volatile flash memory. All
SDCUs except terminal controllers shall include an on-board lithium
battery to back up the controller’s RAM memory. The battery shall have a
shelf life of over 10 years, and provide accumulated backup of all RAM
and clock functions for at least 3 years. In the case of a power failure, the
SDCU shall first try to restart from the RAM memory. If that memory is
corrupted or unusable, then the SDCU shall restart itself from its
application program stored in its flash memory.
13. Software - General.
The SDCU shall contain flash memory to store both the resident
operating system AND the application software. There will be no
restrictions placed on the type of application programs in the system.
Each SDCU shall be capable of parallel processing, executing all control
programs simultaneously. Any program may affect the operation of any
other program. Each program shall have the full access of all I/O
facilities of the processor. This execution of control function shall not be
interrupted due to normal user communications including interrogation,
program entry, printout of the program for storage, etc.
14. User Programming Language:
The application software shall be user programmable, using the same

language as that defined for Network Router/Controllers. Controllers that
use a “canned” program method will not be accepted.
Control Software, Mathematical Functions and Energy Management

Applications must be identical to that which is provided with the Network
Router/Controller.
15. History Logging:
Each controller shall be capable of LOCALLY logging any input, output,

calculated value or other system variable over user defined time intervals
ranging from 1 second to 1440 minutes. Any system can be logged in
history. A minimum of 1000 values shall be stored in each log. Each log
can record either the instantaneous, average, minimum or maximum

value of the point. Logged data shall be downloadable to the Operator
Workstation for long term archiving based upon user-defined time
intervals or manual command.
16. Alarm Management:
For each system point, alarms can be created based on high/low limits or
conditional expressions. All alarms will be tested each scan of the SDCU
and can result in the display of one or more alarm messages or reports.
Up to 8 alarms can be configured for each point in the controller.
Alarms will be generated based on their priority. A minimum of 255

priority levels shall be provided.
If communication with the Operator Workstation is temporarily

interrupted, the alarm will be time-stamped and buffered in the controller.
When communications return, the alarm will be transmitted to the
Operator Workstation if the point is still in the alarm condition.
Alarms must be capable of being routed to any BACnet workstation that

conforms to the B-OWS device profile and uses the BACnet/IP protocol.
17. Air Handler Controllers
AHU Controllers shall conform to the BACnet Advanced Application

Controller (B-AAC) device profile.
AHU Controllers shall be capable of meeting the requirements of the

sequence of operation found in the Execution portion of this specification
and for future expansion.
AHU Controllers shall support all the necessary point inputs and outputs
as required by the sequence and operate in a standalone fashion.
AHU Controllers shall be fully user programmable to allow for

modification of the application software.
A manual override switch shall be provided for all digital and analog
outputs on the AHU Controller. The position of the switch shall be
monitored in software and available for operator displays and alarm
notification.
a. Local Keypad/Display:
For each air handler SDCU, provide a local display of at least 4

lines, providing current display of all critical inputs and outputs
that the SDCU is controlling. Provide a keypad such that an
operator can log on, scroll through point values, and change
setpoints that are changeable. The keypad/display must be
capable of being mounted either on the controller, or on a control
panel door.
18. VAV Terminal Unit Controllers
VAV Controllers shall conform to the BACnet Advanced Application

Controller (B-AAC) device profile. VAV shall be BTL certified

VAV Terminal Unit Controllers shall support, but not be limited to the
control of the following configurations of VAV boxes to address current
requirements as described in the Execution portion of this specification,
and for future expansion:
a. Single Duct Cooling Only
b. Single Duct Cooling with Reheat (Electric or Hot Water)
c. Fan Powered (Parallel or Series)
d. Dual Duct (Constant or Variable Volume)
e. Supply/Exhaust
VAV Controllers for single duct applications will come equipped with a
built-in actuator for modulation of the air damper. The actuator shall have
a minimum torque rating of 35 in.-lb., and contain an override mechanism
for manual positioning of the damper during startup and service.
VAV Controllers shall contain an integral velocity sensor accurate to +/-

5% of the full range of the box’s CFM rating.
Each controller shall perform the sequence of operation described in Part

3 of this specification, and have the capability for local time of day
scheduling, occupancy mode control, after hours operation, lighting
control, alarming, and trending.
VAV Controllers shall be able to communicate with any other Standalone

Digital Control Unit on the same MS/TP field bus.
BMS contractor shall coordinate with VAV boxes manufacturer at an

early stage to guarantee proper operation.
19. Unitary Controllers
Unitary Controllers shall conform to the BACnet Advanced Application

Controller (B-AAC) device profile.
Unitary Controllers shall support, but not be limited to, the control of the
following systems as described in the Execution portion of this
specification, and for future expansion:
a. Unit Ventilators
b. Heat Pumps (Air to Air, Water to Water)
c. Packaged Rooftops
d. Fan Coils (2 or 4 Pipe)
The I/O of each Unitary Controller shall contain the sufficient quantity and
types as required to meet the sequence of operation found in the
Execution portion of this specification. In addition, each controller shall
have the capability for local time of day scheduling, occupancy mode
control, after hour operation, lighting control, alarming, and trending.
Unitary Controllers shall be able to communicate with any other
Standalone Digital Control Unit on the same MS/TP field bus.
20. Networked Thermostat
a. The networked thermostat shall be capable of controlling two- or

four-pipe fan coils, cabinet unit heaters or other similar
equipment.
b. The TEC shall communicate over the Field Controller Bus using
BACnet Standard MS/TP Bus Protocol ASHRAE SSPC-135,
Clause 9.
c. The TEC shall be BACnet Testing Labs (BTL) certified and carry
the BTL Label.
1) The TEC shall be tested and certified as a BACnet

Application Specific Controller (B-ASC).
2) A BACnet Protocol Implementation Conformance
Statement shall be provided for the TEC.
3) The Conformance Statement shall be submitted 10 days
prior to bidding.
d. The Networked Thermostat shall support remote read/write and

parameter adjustment from the web based User Interfaceable
through a Network Automation Engine.
e. The Networked Thermostat shall include an intuitive User
Interface providing plain text messages.
1) Two line, 8 character backlit display

2) LED indicators for Fan, Heat, and Cool status
3) Five (5) User Interface Keys
a) Mode
b) Fan
c) Override
d) Degrees C/F
e) Up/Down
4) The display shall continuously scroll through the following

parameters:
a) Room Temperature
b) System Mode
c) Schedule Status – Occupied/Unoccupied/Override
d) Applicable Alarms
f. The Networked Thermostat shall provide the flexibility to support

any one of the following inputs:
1) Integral Indoor Air Temperature Sensor

2) Duct Mount Air Temperature Sensor
3) Remote Indoor Air Temperature Sensor with Occupancy
Override and LED Indicator
4) Two configurable binary inputs
g. The Networked Thermostat shall provide the flexibility to support

any one of the following outputs:
1) Three Speed Fan Control

2) Two On/Off
3) Two Floating
4) Two Proportional (0 to 10V)
h. The Networked Thermostat shall provide a minimum of six (6)

levels of keypad lockout.
i. The Networked Thermostat shall provide the flexibility to adjust
the following parameters:
1) Adjustable Temporary Occupancy from 0 to 24 hours

2) Adjustable heating/cooling deadband from 2º F to 5º F
3) Adjustable heating/cooling cycles per hour from 4 to 8
j. The Networked Thermostat shall employ nonvolatile electrically

erasable programmable read-only memory (EEPROM) for all
adjustable parameters.
I. BACnet Gateway to Third-Party Devices
1. General:
Where required, provide a BACnet Gateway to interface to non-BACnet

open systems that use the Modbus protocol, KNX/ EIB protocol, DALI
protocol, M-BUS protocol or other proprietary protocol. The Gateway
shall communicate directly over Ethernet TCP/IP, and shall use the
BACnet/IP protocol to communicate with a BACnet Workstation (B-
OWS). Systems that use a PC to act as a gateway are not acceptable.
2. Communication Ports:
In addition to its on-board Ethernet port, the Gateway shall have at least
two serial communications ports for interfaces to third-party systems.
3. Memory:
The Gateway shall have enough RAM memory to store all point
configuration data, plus required history logging and alarm buffering.
Minimum RAM shall be 8MB. The operating system of the gateway must
be stored in flash non-volatile memory.
4. User Programming Language:
The Gateway shall employ the same user programmable application

software that NRCs and SDCUs use.
Control Software, Mathematical Functions, and Energy Management

Applications must be identical to that which is provided with the Network
Router/Controller. Gateways that do not have an application
programming language will not be accepted.
5. History Logging:
Each Gateway shall be capable of LOCALLY logging any input, output,

calculated value or other system variable over user defined time intervals
ranging from 1 second to 1440 minutes. Any system can be logged in
history. A minimum of 1000 values shall be stored in each log. Each log
can record either the instantaneous, average, minimum or maximum
value of the point. Logged data shall be downloadable to the Operator

Workstation for long term archiving based upon user-defined time
intervals, or manual command.
J. Network Sensors (NS)
1. The Network Sensors (NS) shall have the ability to monitor the following
variables as required by the systems sequence of operations:
a. Zone Temperature
b. Zone Humidity
c. Zone Setpoint
d. Discharge Air Temperature
2. The NS shall transmit the information back to the controller on the

Sensor-Actuator Bus (SA Bus) using BACnet Standard protocol SSPC-
135, Clause 9.
3. The NS shall be BACnet Testing Labs (BTL) certified and carry the BTL
Label.
a. The NS shall be tested and certified as a BACnet Smart Sensors

(B-SS).
b. A BACnet Protocol Implementation Conformance Statement shall
be provided for the NS.
c. The Conformance Statement shall be submitted 10 days prior to
bidding.
4. The Network Zone Sensors shall include the following items:
a. A backlit Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) to indicate the

Temperature, Humidity and Setpoint
b. An LED to indicate the status of the Override feature
c. A button to toggle the temperature display between Fahrenheit
and Celsius
d. A button to initiate a timed override command
e. Available in either surface mount or wall mount
f. Available with either screw terminals or phone jack
5. The Network Discharge Air Sensors shall include the following:
a. 4 inch or 8 inch duct insertion probe

b. 10 foot pigtail lead
c. Dip Switches for programmable address selection
d. Ability to provide an averaging temperature from multiple
locations
e. Ability to provide a selectable temperature from multiple locations
K. DDC Sensors and Point Hardware
1. Temperature Sensors
a. All temperature devices shall use precision thermistors accurate

to +/- 1 degree F over a range of –30 to 230 degrees F. Space
temperature sensors shall be accurate to +/- .5 degrees F over a
range of 40 to 100 degrees F.

b. Standard space sensors shall be available in an off white
enclosure for mounting on a standard electrical box.
c. Where manual overrides are required, the sensor housing shall

feature both an optional sliding mechanism for adjusting the
space temperature setpoint, as well as a push button for selecting
after hours operation.
d. Where a local display is specified, the sensor shall incorporate

either an LED or LCD display for viewing the space temperature,
setpoint and other operator selectable parameters. Using built in
buttons, operators shall be able to adjust setpoints directly from
the sensor.
e. Duct temperature sensors shall incorporate a thermistor bead

embedded at the tip of a stainless steel tube. Probe style duct
sensors are useable in air handling applications where the coil or
duct area is less than 14 square feet.
f. Averaging sensors shall be employed in ducts which are larger

than 14 square feet. The averaging sensor tube must contain at
least one thermistor for every 3 feet, with a minimum tube length
of 12 feet.
g. Immersion sensors shall be employed for measurement of

temperature in all chilled and hot water applications as well as
refrigerant applications. Thermal wells shall be brass or stainless
steel for non-corrosive fluids below 250 degrees F and 300 series
stainless steel for all other applications.
h. A pneumatic signal shall not be allowed for sensing temperature.
2. Humidity Sensors
a. Humidity devices shall be accurate to +/- 5% at full scale for

space and +/- 3% for duct and outside air applications. Suppliers
shall be able to demonstrate that accuracy is NIST traceable.
b. Provide a hand held field calibration tool that both reads the
output of the sensor and contains a reference sensor for ongoing
calibration.
3. Pressure Sensors
a. Air pressure measurements in the range of 0 to 10” water column

will be accurate to +/- 1% using a solid-state sensing element.
Acceptable manufacturers include Modus Instruments and
Mamac.
b. Differential pressure measurements of liquids or gases shall be

accurate to =/- 0.5% of range. The housing shall be Nema 4
rated.
4. Current and KW Sensors
a. Current status switches shall be used to monitor fans, pumps,

motors and electrical loads. Current switches shall be available in

solid and split core models, and offer either a digital or an analog
signal to the automation system.
5. Flow Sensors
a. Provide an insertion vortex flowmeter for measurement of liquid,

gas or steam flows in pipe sizes above 3 inches.
b. Install the flow meter on an isolation valve to permit removal

without process shutdown.
L. Control Valves
1. Provide automatic control valves suitable for the specified controlled

media (steam, water or glycol). Provide valves which mate and match
the material of the connected piping. Equip control valves with the
actuators of required input power type and control signal type to
accurately position the flow control element and provide sufficient force to
achieve required leakage specification.
2. Control valves shall meet the heating and cooling loads specified and
close off against the differential pressure conditions within the
application. Valves should be sized to operate accurately and with
stability from 10 to 100% of the maximum design flow.
3. Trim material shall be stainless steel for steam and high differential
pressure applications.
4. Electric actuation should be provided on all terminal unit reheat

applications.
M. Dampers
1. Automatic dampers, furnished and installed by the HVAC Contractor shall

be single or multiple blade as required and specified in Section 15891
“HVAC Ductwork”. Dampers are to be installed under the supervision of
the BMS Contractor. All blank-off plates and conversions necessary to
install smaller than duct size dampers are the responsibility of the Sheet
Metal Contractor.
2. For high performance applications, control dampers will meet or exceed

the UL Class I leakage rating.
3. Provide opposed blade dampers for modulating applications and parallel

blade for two position control.
N. Damper Actuators
Damper actuators shall be electronic, and shall be direct coupled over the shaft,
without the need for connecting linkage. The actuator shall have electronic
overload circuitry to prevent damage. For power-failure/safety applications, an
internal mechanical, spring return mechanism shall be built into the actuator

housing. Non-spring return actuators shall have an external manual gear
release to allow positioning of the damper when the actuator is not powered.
BACnet damper actuators are recommended.
O. Airflow Measuring Stations
1. Provide a thermal anemometer using instrument grade self heated

thermistor sensors with thermistor temperature sensors.
2. The flow station shall operate over a range of 0 to 5,000 feet/min with an
accuracy of +/- 2% over 500 feet/min and +/- 10 ft/min for reading less
than 500 feet/min.
3. The output signal shall be linear with field selectable ranges including 0-5
VDC, 0-10VDC and 4-20 mA.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1. CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITIES
A. General
Installation of the Building Management System shall be performed by the

Contractor or a subcontractor. However, all installation shall be under the
personal supervision of the Contractor. The Contractor shall certify all work as
proper and complete. Under no circumstances shall the design, scheduling,
coordination, programming, training, and warranty requirements for the project
be delegated to a subcontractor.
B. Demolition
Remove controls which do not remain as part of the Building Automation and
Controls System, all associated abandoned wiring and conduit, and all
associated pneumatic tubing. The Owner will inform the Contractor of any
equipment which is to be removed that will remain the property of the Owner. All
other equipment which is removed will be disposed of by the Contractor.
C. Access to Site
Unless notified otherwise, entrance to building is restricted. No one will be

permitted to enter the building unless their names have been cleared with the
Owner or the Owner’s Representative.
D. Code Compliance
All wiring shall be installed in accordance with all applicable electrical codes and
will comply with equipment manufacturer's recommendations.
E. Cleanup
At the completion of the work, all equipment pertinent to this contract shall be
checked and thoroughly cleaned, and all other areas shall be cleaned around
equipment provided under this contract.
3.2. WIRING, CONDUIT, AND CABLE

A. All wire will be copper and meet the minimum wire size and insulation class
listed below:
Wire Class Wire Size Isolation Class

Power 12 Gauge 600 Volt
Class One 14 Gauge Std. 600 Volt
Class Two 18 Gauge Std. 300 Volt
Class Three 18 Gauge Std. 300 volt
Communications Per Mfr. Per Mfr.
B. Power and Class One wiring may be run in the same conduit. Class Two and
Three wiring and communications wiring may be run in the same conduit.
C. Where different wiring classes terminate within the same enclosure, maintain
clearances and install barriers per the National Electric Code.
D. Where wiring is required to be installed in conduit, EMT shall be used. Conduit

shall be minimum 1/2 inch galvanized EMT. Set screw fittings are acceptable for
dry interior locations. Watertight compression fittings shall be used for exterior
locations and interior locations subject to moisture. Provide conduit sealoff fitting
where exterior conduits enter the building or between areas of high
temperature/moisture differential.
E. Flexible metallic conduit (max. 3 feet) shall be used for connections to motors,
actuators, controllers, and sensors mounted on vibration producing equipment.
Liquid-tight flexible conduit shall be use in exterior locations and interior
locations subject to moisture.
F. Junction boxes shall be provided at all cable splices, equipment termination, and
transitions from EMT to flexible conduit. Interior dry location J-boxes shall be
galvanized pressed steel, nominal four-inch square with blank cover. Exterior
and damp location JH-boxes shall be cast alloy FS boxes with threaded hubs
and gasketed covers.
G. Where the space above the ceiling is a supply or return air plenum, the wiring
shall be plenum rated. Teflon wiring can be run without conduit above
suspended ceilings. EXCEPTION: Any wire run in suspended ceilings that is
used to control outside air dampers or to connect the system to the fire
management system shall be in conduit.
H. Fiber optic cable shall include the following sizes; 50/125, 62.5/125 or 100/140.
I. Only glass fiber is acceptable, no plastic.
J. Fiber optic cable shall only be installed and terminated by an experienced

contractor. The BMS contractor shall submit to the Engineer the name of the
intended contractor of the fiber optic cable with his submittal documents.
3.3. HARDWARE INSTALLATION
A. Installation Practices for Wiring
1. All controllers are to be mounted vertically and per the manufacturer’s

installation documentation.
2. The 120VAC power wiring to each Ethernet or Remote Site controller

shall be a dedicated run, with a separate breaker. Each run will include a
separate hot, neutral and ground wire. The ground wire will terminate at
the breaker panel ground. This circuit will not feed any other circuit or
device.
3. A true earth ground must be available in the building. Do not use a

corroded or galvanized pipe, or structural steel.
4. Wires are to be attached to the building proper at regular intervals such

that wiring does not droop. Wires are not to be affixed to or supported by
pipes, conduit, etc.
5. Conduit in finished areas, will be concealed in ceiling cavity spaces,

plenums, furred spaces and wall construction. Exception; metallic
surface raceway may be used in finished areas on masonry walls. All
surface raceway in finished areas must be color matched to the existing
finish within the limitations of standard manufactured colors.
6. Conduit, in non-finished areas where possible, will be concealed in

ceiling cavity spaces, plenums, furred spaces, and wall construction.
Exposed conduit will run parallel to or at right angles to the building
structure.
7. Wires are to be kept a minimum of three (3) inches from hot water,
steam, or condensate Vpiping.
8. Where sensor wires leave the conduit system, they are to be protected
by a plastic insert.
9. Wire will not be allowed to run across telephone equipment areas.
B. Installation Practices for Field Devices
1. Well-mounted sensors will include thermal conducting compound within

the well to insure good heat transfer to the sensor.
2. Actuators will be firmly mounted to give positive movement and linkage

will be adjusted to give smooth continuous movement throughout 100
percent of the stroke.
3. Relay outputs will include transient suppression across all coils.

Suppression devices shall limit transients to 150% of the rated coil
voltage.
4. Water line mounted sensors shall be removable without shutting down

the system in which they are installed.
5. For duct static pressure sensors, the high pressure port shall be
connected to a metal static pressure probe inserted into the duct pointing
upstream. The low pressure port shall be left open to the plenum area at
the point that the high pressure port is tapped into the ductwork.
6. For building static pressure sensors, the high pressure port shall be
inserted into the space via a metal tube. Pipe the low pressure port to
the outside of the building.
C. Enclosures

1. For all I/O requiring field interface devices, these devices where practical
will be mounted in a field interface panel (FIP). The Contractor shall
provide an enclosure which protects the device(s) from dust, moisture,
conceals integral wiring and moving parts.
2. FIPs shall contain power supplies for sensors, interface relays and
contactors, and safety circuits.
3. The FIP enclosure shall be of steel construction with baked enamel

finish, NEMA 1 rated with a hinged door and keyed lock. The enclosure
will be sized for twenty percent spare mounting space. All locks will be
keyed identically.
4. All wiring to and from the FIP will be to screw type terminals. Analog or
communications wiring may use the FIP as a raceway without
terminating. The use of wire nuts within the FIP is prohibited.
5. All outside mounted enclosures shall meet the NEMA-4 rating.
6. The wiring within all enclosures shall be run in plastic track. Wiring within
controllers shall be wrapped and secured.
D. Identification
1. Identify all control wires with labeling tape or sleeves using either words,
letters, or numbers that can be exactly cross-referenced with as-built
drawings.
2. All field enclosures, other than controllers, shall be identified with a

bakelite nameplate. The lettering shall be in white against a black or blue
background.
3. Junction box covers will be marked to indicate that they are a part of the
BMS system.
4. All I/O field devices (except space sensors) that are not mounted within
FIP's shall be identified with name plates.
5. All I/O field devices inside FIP's shall be labeled.
E. Existing Controls and Security Devices.
Existing controls and devices which are to be reused must each be tested and
calibrated for proper operation. Existing controls which are to be reused and are
found to be defective requiring replacement, will be noted to the Owner. The
Owner will be responsible for all material and labor costs associated with their
repair.
F. Control System Switch-over
1. Demolition of the existing control system will occur after the new
temperature control system is in place including new sensors and new
field interface devices.
2. Switch-over from the existing control system to the new system will be
fully coordinated with the Owner. A representative of the Owner will be
on site during switch-over.

3. The Contractor shall minimize control system downtime during switch-
over. Sufficient installation mechanics will be on site so that the entire
switch-over can be accomplished in a reasonable time frame.
G. Location
1. The location of sensors, card readers and cameras is per mechanical,

electrical and architectural drawings.
2. Space humidity or temperature sensors will be mounted away from

machinery generating heat, direct light and diffuser air streams.
3. Card readers will be mounted on the wall adjacent to the door being
controlled.
4. Outdoor air sensors will be mounted on the north building face directly in
the outside air. Install these sensors such that the effects of heat
radiated from the building or sunlight is minimized.
5. Field enclosures shall be located immediately adjacent to the controller

panel(s) to which it is being interfaced.
3.4. SOFTWARE INSTALLATION
A. General
The Contractor shall provide all labor necessary to install, initialize, start-up and
debug all system software as described in this section. This includes any
operating system software or other third party software necessary for successful
operation of the system.
B. Database Configuration
The Contractor will provide all labor to configure those portions of the database
that are required by the points list and sequence of operation.
C. Color Graphic Displays
Unless otherwise directed by the owner, the Contractor will provide color graphic
displays as depicted in the project drawings for each system and floor plan. For
each system or floor plan, the display shall contain the associated points
identified in the point list and allow for setpoint changes as required by the
owner.
D. Reports
The Contractor will configure a minimum of 6 HVAC reports for the owner as
listed below:
1. Central Plant Status Report
2. Air Handler Status Report
3. VAV Status Report
4. Energy Consumption Report
5. Space Temperature Report

6. Specialty Equipment Status Report
The Contractor will also configure a minimum of 10 Security reports for the
owner as listed below:
1. Access Events, by time, by department, by door
2. Alarm Events, by date and by priority
3. Personnel, by name, by department, by card number, by expiration status
4. Door Status
5. Area / Door / personnel cross reference reports
E. Documentation
As built software documentation will include the following:
1. Descriptive point lists
2. Application program listing
3. Application programs with comments.
4. Printouts of all reports.
5. Alarm list.
6. Printouts of all graphics
3.5. COMMISSIONING AND SYSTEM STARTUP
A. Point to Point Checkout
Each I/O device (both field mounted as well as those located in FIPs) shall be
inspected and verified for proper installation and functionality. A checkout sheet
itemizing each device shall be filled out, dated and approved by the Project
Manager for submission to the owner or owner’s representative.
B. Controller and Workstation Checkout
A field checkout of all controllers and front end equipment (computers, printers,
modems, etc.) shall be conducted to verify proper operation of both hardware
and software. A checkout sheet itemizing each device and a description of the
associated tests shall be prepared and submitted to the owner or owner’s
representative by the completion of the project.
C. System Acceptance Testing
1. All application software will be verified and compared against the

sequences of operation. Control loops will be exercised by inducing a
setpoint shift of at least 10% and observing whether the system

successfully returns the process variable to setpoint. Record all test
results and attach to the Test Results Sheet.
2. Test each alarm in the system and validate that the system generates the
appropriate alarm message, that the message appears at all prescribed
destinations (workstations or printers), and that any other related actions
occur as defined (i.e. graphic panels are invoked, reports are generated,
etc.). Submit a Test Results Sheet to the owner.
3. Perform an operational test of each unique graphic display and report to

verify that the item exists, that the appearance and content are correct,
and that any special features work as intended. Submit the Test Results
Sheet to the owner.
4. The BMS contractor shall commission and set in operating condition all
major equipment and systems, such as the chilled water, hot water and
all air handling systems, in the presence of the equipment manufacturer’s
representatives, as applicable, and the Owner and Architect’s
representatives.
5. Perform an operational test of each third party interface that has been
included as part of the automation system. Verify that all points are
properly polled, that alarms have been configured, and that any
associated graphics and reports have been completed. If the interface
involves a file transfer over Ethernet, test any logic that controls the
transmission of the file, and verify the content of the specified
information.
D. Successful completion of the system test shall constitute the beginning of the
warranty period. A written report will be submitted to the owner indicating that
the installed system functions in accordance with the plans and specifications.
E. The BMS Contractor shall provide all manpower and engineering services
required to assist the HVAC Contractor and Balancing Contractor in testing,
adjusting, and balancing all systems in the building. The BMS Contractor shall
have a trained technician available on request during the balancing of the
systems. The BMS Contractor shall coordinate all requirements to provide a
complete air balance with the Balancing Contractor and shall include all labor
and materials in his contract.
3.6. TRAINING
A. Provide a minimum of (40) hours of on-site training for (3) system operators.
The training will be hands-on type at the owner’s office. The training class will
use the actual Operator’s Manual that will be submitted for this project. In
addition provide (2) weeks of classroom training for one individual at the
Manufacturer’s sponsored training courses.
3.7. SEQUENCES OF OPERATION
A. The BMS contractor shall develop the sequence of operation based on the
approved drawings and demonstrate it for every type of equipment used on site.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 15970
HVAC CONTROL SYSTEM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. This Section covers direct digital control (DDC) automatic temperature control
systems and equipment.
B. DDC control shall be open system supporting open protocol like BACnet™.
C. General provisions and mechanical systems are specified in other Sections of

Division 15.
D. The intent of this specification is to provide a peer-to-peer networked, stand-alone,

distributed control system for building mechanical and electrical systems. The
direct digital control system shall include an operator workstation, microprocessor
based control units panels, instrumentation, end control devices, wiring, piping, and
related systems.
E. The system shall consist of an open architecture that utilizes EIA standard 709.1,
TM
the BACnet protocol, as the common communication protocol between all
controlled and controlling devices.
TM
F. The products used in constructing the DDC system shall be BACnet . In those
instances where devices are not BACnet™, compliance with BACnet™ standards
must be demonstrated. For application specific devices, the DDC system
contractor shall provide the application source code, device resource files, and
external interface definitions. For programmable devices the DDC system
contractor shall provide a licensed copy of the software tool used to create the
application and all files created by the software tool during the creation and
commissioning of the application.
G. System controls provided with equipment provided under other sections, shall be
BACnetTM -based to allow them to communicate with the DDC system.
A. All components shall be commercial-institutional control quality, manufactured by

those with a minimum of 5 years experience.
B. All work described in this section shall be installed, wired, tested and calibrated by
factory certified technicians qualified for this work and in the regular employment of
the temperature control system manufacturer. Supervision, calibration and
checkout of the system shall be by the employees of the local factory owned
temperature control contracting field office. Supplier shall have an in place support
facility within 30 Kilometers of the project site with technical staff, spare parts
inventory and all necessary test and diagnostic equipment. Local office as well as
the factory shall be ISO 9000 certified.
15970-1 HVAC Control System

C. Units of the same type of equipment shall be products of a single manufacturer.
Each major component of equipment shall have the manufacturer’s name and
address, and the model and serial number, in a conspicuous place. All materials
and equipment shall be currently in production.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Algorithm: A logical procedure for solving a recurrent mathematical problem.
B. Analog: A continuously varying signal value (temperature current, velocity, etc.).
C. Application Specific Device: A device that is furnished with a pre-established built

in application that is configurable but not re-programmable.
D. Binary: A two-state system where an "ON" condition is represented by a high

signal level and an "OFF" condition is represented by a low signal level.
E. Control Wiring: This includes conduit, wire, and wiring devices to install complete
HVAC control systems, including motor control circuits, interlocks, sensors, PE and
EP switches, and like devices. This also includes all wiring from node to node, and
nodes to all sensors and points defined in the I/O summary shown on drawings or
specified herein, and required to execute the sequence of operation. Does not
include line voltage power wiring.
F. Diagnostic Program: Machine-executable instructions used to detect and isolate

system and component malfunctions.
G. Distributed Control: A system whereby all control processing is decentralized and

independent of a central computer.
H. Gateway: A device that contains an input/output (I/O) software driver to translate

input data from one format to output data in a second format.
I. Human-Machine Interface (HMI): Human-machine interfacing allows the operator

to manage, command, monitor, and program the system.
TM
J. HVAC DDC Control Systems: The complete BACnet control system,
comprising the user interface and routers, gateways, repeaters, nodes, the operator
portable operator terminals, network communications wiring and raceways, and
required field hardware, etc.
K. Integration: Establishing communication between two devices through the use of a

gateway.
L. Interoperable: Establishing communication between two devices through the use of

a common protocol and without the use of any gateways.
M. BACnetTM: The overall communications technology for control systems. The

technology employs routers, gateways, bridges, and multimedia transceivers to
permit topology and media- independent control solutions.
N. BACnetTM Interoperability Association: Standards committee consisting of

numerous independent product developers and systems integrators dedicated to
TM
determining and maintaining the interoperability guidelines for the BACnet
industry.

O. BACnetTM - device has been certified for compliance with BACnet standards by
the BACnet association.
P. BACnetTM Application Specific Nodes (LASN) - a networked device or node that

contains a complete, configurable application that is specific to a particular task.
Q. BACnetTM Programmable Nodes (LPN) - a programmable control product that

incorporates solid state components based upon the Neuron® chip to perform
control loops or functions. The application in the controller is custom software
produced by the integrator specifically for the project.
R. BACnetTM Single Point Nodes (LSPN): devices such as temperature and humidity
sensors, that have an on-board Neuron microprocessor and network interface
TM
allowing them to communicate on the BACnet network.
S. Network: A system of distributed control units that are linked together on a

communication bus. A network allows sharing of point information between all
control units. Additionally, a network provides central monitoring and control of the
entire system from any distributed control unit location.
T. Node: A BACnet device with a neuron chip and BACnet transceiver.
U. Operating System (OS): Software which controls the execution of computer

programs and which provides scheduling, debugging, input/output controls,
accounting, compilation, storage assignment, data management, and related
services.
V. Portable Operations Terminal (POT): Permits remote operator interface to facilitate

network management, node commissioning, diagnostics, and general operator
TM
interface with the installed BACnet control system.
W. Programmable Device: A device that does not have a pre-established built in

application. An application creation software tool is required for an application to be
created and downloaded to the device.
X. Router: A device which routes messages destined for a node on another segment
sub-net or domain of the control network. The device controls message traffic
based on node address and priority. Routers shall also serve as communication
links between powerline, twisted pair, fiber, coax, and RF media.
Y. XIF: “External Interface File” contains the contents of the manufacturer’s product
documentation.
1.4 CODES AND STANDARDS
A. All work, materials, and equipment shall comply with the rules and regulations of all
codes and ordinances of the local and state, and federal authorities. Such codes,
when more restrictive, shall take precedence over these plans and specifications.
As a minimum, the installation shall comply with current editions in effect 90 days
prior to receipt of bids of the following codes. All products of the DDC system shall
be provided with the following agency approvals. With the submittal documents,
verification that the approvals exist for all submitted products, shall be provided.
Systems or products not currently offering the following approvals are not
acceptable.

1. National Electric Code, UL-916 Energy Management Systems or ETL,
BACnetTM.
2. All products shall be labeled with the appropriate approval markings. System
installation shall comply with NFPA, NEMA, Local and National codes.
3. The DDC System manufacturer shall provide documentation supporting

compliance with ISO-9000 certification mark from applicable registrar
4. Unitary controllers, intelligent sensors, and intelligent actuators shall conform

TM
to the appropriate BACnet functional profile configurations based on
intended use and shall be so labeled.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data and Shop' Drawings: Meet requirements of Shop Drawings, Product
Data, and Samples. In addition, Contractor shall provide shop drawings or other
submittals on all hardware, software, and installation to be provided. No work may
begin on any segment of this project until Engineer has reviewed submittals for
conformity with the design intent.
B. Diagrams: Contractor shall provide separate diagrams for each system, including
pneumatic piping, motor starting and interlock wiring, ladder diagrams, push
buttons, control wiring, interior electrical circuits of control instruments with terminal
designations, control motors, colors of wires, locations of instruments and remote
elements, and normal position of valves, dampers and relays. A detailed description
of the operation of the control system including control device designations shall
accompany the drawings. Each diagram shall delineate between existing piping,
wiring or equipment, and new piping, wiring, and equipment.
C. DDC system data: Contractor shall provide manufacturer's data sheets on DDC
panels, sensors, control interface devices, terminal control units, protection devices
and software; complete field wiring diagram with terminals labeled as they will be
marked on the equipment, including sensors, control and power wiring for each
sensor, control and DDC panel; flow charts of DDC control programs provided to
perform control sequences specified herein; and floor plans locating DDC panels
and terminal control units coordinated with work of other trades.
D. Shop drawings shall be AutoCAD- or Visio-generated for the entire DDC system,
including conduit, pipe, tubing routing, and details of control panels and device
connections, and location of field devices. Provide a computer file copy and
reproducible originals of each drawing.
TM
E. Provide a schematic diagram of the Local Area Network and a BACnet
architecture diagram indicating nodes, and database server(s) including all devices
and controllers installed by other trade contractors. This should be accompanied by
information regarding configuration of Routers and Repeaters. Schematic shall
also include ANY interface requirements with other systems including but not
limited to: security systems, lighting controls, fire alarm, elevator status, and power
monitoring systems. Diagrams detailing the variables mapped between
protocols shall be submitted for all gateways. Each schematic shall have all
control points labeled. The schematic shall graphically show all control elements.
Engineer shall approve the point name format before programming is done.

F. Project Record Documents: Upon completion of installation, submit three (3)
copies of record (as-built) documents. The documents shall be submitted for
approval prior to final acceptance and shall include:
1. Project Record Drawings: These shall be as built versions of the submittal

shop drawings. One set of CAD, .DWG, .VSD or .DXF drawing files also
shall be provided on CD Rom.
2. Testing and Commissioning Reports and Checklists: Provide completed

versions of all reports and checklists used to complete the requirements of
Section 15 Control System Demonstration and Acceptance”.
3. Operation and Maintenance (O & M) Manual: This shall include as-built

versions of the submittal product data. In addition to the information required
for submittals, the O & M manual shall include:
a. Names, addresses, and 24-hour telephone numbers of Contractors

installing equipment, and the control systems and service representatives
of each.
b. Operators Manual with procedures for operating the control systems,

including logging on/off, alarm handling, producing point reports, trending
dated overriding computer control, and changing setpoints and other
variables.
c. A list of recommended spare parts, catalog numbers and suppliers shall

be provided.
d. Complete original issue documentation, installation and maintenance

information for all third-party hardware provided, including computer
equipment and sensors.
e. Licenses, guarantee and warranty documents for all equipment and

systems.
G. Training documentation: Lesson plans and training manuals for the training phases
shall be delivered for approval; these shall include type of training to be provided,
with a list of reference material.
1.6 SPECIFICATION COMPLIANCE REVIEW
A. The temperature control system/DDC System contractor shall supply, at the

engineer’s request, a paragraph by paragraph specification compliance report. The
report shall indicate for each numbered paragraph, how the contractor meets the
criteria of the paragraph. The following format must be utilized in completing the
compliance report:
B. Comply - without exception.
C. Qualify - meet the functional intent. For each paragraph, the contractor shall identify
all differences in specific functions stated in the given paragraph and provide a
description of what is excluded or how the qualifying system will meet the function
specified.
D. Does not comply - cannot meet specified function.

1.7 WARRANTIES
A. All components and parts furnished and installed in the DDC system shall be
guaranteed against defects in materials and workmanship for the period of one
year from acceptance date. Labor to repair, reprogram, or replace these
components shall be furnished by the contractor at no charge during the warranty
period. All corrective software modifications made during warranty periods shall be
updated on all user documentation and on user and manufacturer archived
software disks. The Contractor shall respond to the owner's request for warranty
service within 24 hours during normal business hours.
B. At the end of the final startup, testing and commissioning phase, contractor shall
demonstrate that all equipment and systems are operating to the satisfaction of the
Owner's Authorized Representative and Engineer.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 OPEN, INTEROPERABLE, INTEGRATED ARCHITECTURES
A. The intent of this specification is to provide a peer-to-peer networked, distributed

TM
control system using ANSI/EIA Standard 709.1-A-1999, BACnet technology
communication protocols, in one open, interoperable system. The direct digital
TM
control (DDC) system shall consist of BACnet -based microprocessor-based
controllers, plus instrumentation, control valves, dampers, operators, control
TM TM
devices, BACnet routers, BACnet communication interfaces, and other
apparatus required to operate systems and perform functions specified.
2.2 NETWORKS
A. The system architecture shall support the following levels.
1. 78kbyte FTT 10 channels for operating nodes
2. Modem to FTT10 for remote sites.
2.3 PROGRAMMABLE NODES
A. General Requirements
1. LPN shall be equipped with a 3120 Neuron® with co-processor or 3150

Neuron® microprocessor controller, (flash or EEPROM) memory for general
data processing, power supply, network transceivers.
2. Operating system software, custom operating sequence software and

application programs shall be stored in programmable, non-volatile memory.
3. An LPN shall operate totally stand-alone and independent of a central

computer for all specified control applications. Software shall include a
complete operating system (OS), communications handler, point processing,
standard control algorithms, and specific control sequences.
4. LPN packaging shall be such that complete installation and check-out of field
wiring can be performed prior to the installation of electronic boards. The
complete LPN including power supplies, etc., shall be factory-mounted, wired

and housed in a NEMA 1 enclosure or as required by the location and local
code requirements.
TM
5. The LPN BACnet network interface shall be a Type 1 transceiver. A
communication connection shall be provided for attaching POT to node for
downloading and troubleshooting applications.
6. Programmable controllers shall be able to handle Expansion modules based

on the group number. Expansion modules are to reside strictly on the same
network Level of the controller. Controllers having a special port for adding
Expansion modules are not acceptable.
7. Equip LPNs with the following diagnostic indicators and service buttons:
 Network service pin.

 Power On indicator light.
 Network communication indicator light.
B. Input/Output Requirements
1. Binary input types supported by the LPN: The BI function shall accept on-off,
open-close, or other change of state (two state data) indications.
2. Analog inputs shall include, 0-10 Vdc, 0-20 mA, 4-20 mA, and 1800 ohm
(25ºC or 10,000 ohm (25ºC) thermistors. Resolution of the Analog to Digital
converter shall be a minimum of 10 bits.
3. The LPN shall accommodate both binary and true analog outputs, 0-10Vdc.
The resolution of the digital to analog converter shall be a minimum of 8 bits.
4. Binary outputs shall be capable of handling maintained as well as pulsed

outputs for momentary or magnetic latching circuits.
5. Programmable nodes shall be grouped into 3 groups based on the controller

capacity as follows:
 Group 1. shall have a capacity of 12 points and can not handle any I/O
Expansion modules.
 Group 2. Shall reach up to maximum of 40 points and can handle 2 I/O
Expansion modules depending on the required additional points. .
 Group 3. Shall handle up to 100 points by adding up to 10 I/O expansion
modules. This type of controllers shall have the largest memory with no
inputs/
6. Enclosure shall be NEMA 1.
7. The LPN shall include all hardware and software required for communications
with other nodes, PCs, and the OW over the BACnet LANs.
2.4 BACnetTM APPLICATION SPECIFIC NODES (LASN)

A. General characteristics of LASN
1. Neuron® microprocessor
2. BACnet certified or compliant

3. Non-programmable, configurable application
4. Shall provide software configuration tool, as specified under system software
5. VAV, fan coils, etc.

TM
B. Intelligent BACnet Room Wall Module (Thermostat)
1. Room Wall module is to be equipped with an LCD display (with backlight) that
displays the different functions of the module.
2. The room wall module shall be optimized for public facilities such as office
buildings, hotels, hospitals, schools and shopping malls. It shall have a
pleasant appearance and well-designed interface that makes it suitable for
any contemporary building.
3. Room Wall module is to have an extra analog input that can be connected to
a CO2-, relative humidity- or occupancy sensor.
4. The room wall module shall use BACnet communication to display and
control the room temperature and fan speed. Optionally, one lamp group
and/or one sunblind group can be controlled.
2.5 VARIABLE AIR VOLUME (VAV) AIR DISTRIBUTION TERMINAL CONTROL UNIT
(TCU) NODE
A. Control of VAV air distribution terminal units shall be accomplished by an individual

TCU nodes provided for each air distribution terminal and shall interface to the DDC
system. The TCU shall be equipped with a 3120 or 3150 Neuron® microprocessor
controller, programmable non-volatile (Flash or EEPROM) memory, power supply,
I/O, terminal blocks, and network transceivers.
B. The TCUs shall be LASN.
C. Air distribution terminal unit TCUs shall be provided with transformers as necessary
for 220 Vac operation.
D. Each air distribution terminal unit TCU shall contain resident programs which are
field configurable for a specific application. Resident programs shall be contained
in nonvolatile memory using EEPROM and FlashRam.
E. Air Distribution Terminal Unit Controls - Pressure Independent - shall consist of a

transducer for connection to the velocity-sensing device provided by the terminal
unit supplier in the primary air entering the terminal unit, a space temperature
sensor, output for damper actuator, reheat valve, and an adjustable
microprocessor-based TCU. TCU shall operate the damper for cooling and reheat
valve for heating and provide control outputs for duct heating coil if applicable. This
TCU capability shall allow the sequencing of the damper and the heating coil to
maintain conditions in the space. The control algorithm for the damper shall be
fuzzy logic based.
F. TCU Configuration and commissioning – provide TCU configuration and

commissioning via POT connected to the network, or service device connected to
the TCU through the zone sensor.

TM
G. The TCU shall be BACnet -certified for functional profile of a VAV controller.
H. BACnetTM Network interface, the TCU, shall use a Type 1 transceiver.

I. Provide a room wall module with an LCD display to be connected to the VAV
controller as described herein. It is to the supplier to select a room module that
communicates directly with a dedicated port on the VAV controller or connected on
the BACnet.
2.6 TCU FOR FAN COIL
A. Control of Fan Coil units shall be accomplished by an individual TCU nodes

provided for each air distribution terminal and shall interface to the DDC system.
The TCU shall be equipped with a 3120 or 3150 Neuron® microprocessor
controller, programmable non-volatile (Flash or EEPROM) memory, power supply,
I/O, terminal blocks, and network transceivers.
B. The TCU controller shall be intended for fan-coil applicationsin offices and other
large buildings. The fan-coil controller shall keep a constant temperature in a given
zone by controlling the temperature and air flow of circulating air through a fan-coil
unit. Both one and two-valve fan-coil units shall be controlled. The TCU unit shall
also control multiple fan speeds and override the automatic speedcontrol with the
use of a physical input or a NETWORK VARIABLE VIA BACnet.
C. Provide a room wall module with an LCD display to be connected to the VAV
controller as described herein. It is to the supplier to select a room module that
communicates directly with a dedicated port on the FCU controller or connected on
the BACnet and communicates with the FCU Controller through network
variables.
D. The FCU controller shall have a number of built-in functions which can handle the
normal control situation. There shall be four operating modes to choose from
(occupied, standby, bypass, and unoccupied) and five modes to force the controller
(only heating allowed, only cooling allowed, only fan allowed, auto, and off).
Measuring the zone temperature shall be accomplished by means of a permanent
wall module connected to the network. Set point calculation shall be made
according to special methods. Depending on the settings of the controller, one, two
or three speed fans can be controlled. When configured for one-valve operation, a
water temperature sensor can be connected directly to the controller or via network
variable.
E. The controller shall work either as a stand-alone unit, without being connected to a
network during operation, or be a part of a larger system with several other units.
2.7 PORTABLE OPERATORS TERMINAL (POT)
A. General Requirements: Furnish One POTs for the project. The POTs shall permit
the project operating staff to perform network management, node configuration,
node programming, and node diagnostic.

2.8 BACnet ROUTERS, REPEATERS AND TRANSCEIVERS
A. General:
1. Equip each router and bridge with a network transceiver on each network port
(inbound and outbound) as dictated by the network type (Type 1 - FTT, Type 2
- TP, Type 3 - PL, Type 4 - LP, Type 5 - RF).
2. The network router shall be designed to route messages from a segment, sub-
net, or domain in full duplex communication mode.
TM
3. Routers shall utilize BACnet protocol transport, network, session layers to
transparently route messages bound for a node address in another sub-net or
domain.
4. Routers and repeaters shall be fully programmable and permit a systems

integrator to define message traffic, destination, and other network
TM
management functions utilizing BACnet software tool.
5. The routers and repeaters shall be capable of DIN rail or panel mounting and
be equipped with status LED lights for Network traffic and power.
6. Provide a minimum of two Neuron 3120 or 3150 processors for use as the
network router communication controller.
B. Transceivers
1. Type 1 network transceiver, free topology, twisted pair: Provide a transformer

isolated, twisted pair transceiver capable of mounting directly on a printed
circuit board. The transceiver shall meet the following specifications:
TM
 Meets BACnet Interoperability Association Standards.
 Differential Manchester encoded signaling for polarity insensitive network
wiring.
 Transformer isolated for common mode rejection.
 78kbs network bit rate up to distances of 2000 meters.
 Free topology supports star, home run, multidrop and loop wiring
topologies.
 Complies with FCC and VDE requirements.
 UL recognized component.
2. Type 2 Network Transceiver, Twisted Pair: Provide a transformer isolated

twisted pair transceiver capable of mounting directly on a printed circuit
board. The transceiver shall meet the following specifications:
TM
 Meets BACnet interoperability standards.
wiring.
 Transformer isolation for common mode rejection.
 1.25Mbs network bit rate up to distances of 1000 meters.
 FCC and VDE Level B requirements compliance.

3. Type 3 Network Transceiver, Power Line:
 Provide a direct sequence, spread spectrum power line transceiver which

is equipped with signal processing and error correction capabilities to
provide robust and error free communications.
 The transceiver shall be able to operate using the controller power supply
and coupling circuit.
4. Type 4 Network Transceiver, Link Power: Provide a twisted pair transceiver

that utilizes the twisted pair communication media to provide power for the
BACnetTM Controller(s). The transceiver shall meet the following
specifications:
 Free single-in-line package (SIP) construction.

 Send both network data and power on a twisted wire pair.
TM
 Meets BACnet Interoperability Standard.
wiring.
 78kps network bit rate up to distances of 320 meters.
 Supports star, home run, multidrop, and loop wiring.
 Compliance with FCC and VDE requirements.
5. Type 5 Network Transceiver, Radio Frequency: Provide a direct sequence,

spread spectrum RF transceiver that meets the following specifications:
 100 meter open field range.

 Wireless communications extends network between buildings and to
vehicles and portable devices.
 FCC type certifiable, 48 MHZ.
 Carrier detect output to drive a status indicator LED.
2.9 AUXILIARY CONTROL DEVICES
A. Motorized control dampers, unless otherwise specified elsewhere, shall be as

follows:
1. Control dampers shall be parallel or opposed blade type as below or as

scheduled on drawings.
a. Outdoor and/or return air mixing dampers shall be parallel blade,

arranged to direct airstreams toward each other.
b. Other modulating dampers shall be opposed blade type.
c. Two-position shutoff dampers may be parallel or opposed blade type with

blade and side seals.
2. Damper frames shall be 13 gauge galvanized steel channel or 1/8 extruded

aluminum with reinforced corner bracing.
3. Damper blades shall not exceed 8” in width or 48" in length. Blades are to be
suitable for medium velocity performance 2,000 fpm. Blades shall be not less
than 16 gauge.

4. Damper shaft bearings shall be as recommended by manufacturer for
application, Oilite or better.
5. All blade edges and top and bottom of the frame shall be provided with
replaceable butyl rubber or neoprene seals. Side seals shall be spring-loaded
stainless steel. The blade seals shall provide for a maximum leakage rate of
10 cfm per sq. ft. at 4" w.c. differential pressure. Provide airfoil blades
suitable for a wide-open face velocity of 1,500 fpm.
6. Individual damper sections shall not be larger than 48" x 60n. Provide a
minimum of one damper actuator per section.
7. Modulating dampers shall provide a linear flow characteristic where possible.
8. Dampers shall have exposed linkages. Dampers over 48" in applications

where sectioning is not applicable shall be supplied with a jackshaft to provide
sufficient force throughout the intended operating range.
B. Electric damper/valve actuators
1. The actuator shall have electronic overload or digital rotation sensing circuitry
to prevent damage to the actuator throughout the rotation of the actuator.
2. Where shown, for power-failure/safety applications, an internal mechanical

spring-return mechanism shall be built into the actuator housing.
3. All rotary spring-return actuators shall be capable of clockwise or

counter-clockwise spring-return operation. Linear actuators shall spring return
to the retracted position.
4. Valve actuators shall have a self testing safety device which is an advanced
type of spring return feature that uses a battery and a processor controlled
“guard” which monitors the supply voltage to the actuators. When there is no
voltage supply, the Self Testing Safety device shall force the actuator to the
“valve closed” position.
5. Proportional actuators shall accept a 0 to 10 VDC or 0 to 20 mA control signal

and provide a 2 to 10 VDC or 4 to 20 mA operating range.
6. All 24 VAC/VDC actuators shall operate on Class 2 wiring and shall not
require more than 10 VA for AC or more than 8 W for DC applications.
Actuators operating on 120 VAC or 230 VAC shall not require more than 11
VA.
7. All non-spring-return actuators shall have an external manual gear release to

allow manual positioning of the damper when the actuator is not powered.
Spring-return actuators with more than 7 N.m [60 in-lb.] torque capacity shall
have a manual crank for this purpose.
8. All modulating actuators shall have an external, built-in switch to allow the
reversing of direction of rotation.
9. Actuators shall be provided with a raceway fitting and a minimum 1m

electrical cable and shall be pre-wired to eliminate the necessity of opening
the actuator housing to make electrical connections.

10. Actuators shall be UL Standard 873 Listed as meeting correct safety
requirements and recognized industry standards.
11. Actuators shall be designed for a minimum of 60,000 full-stroke cycles at the
actuator's rated torque.
C. Control Valves
1. Control valves shall be two-way or three-way type for two-position or

modulating service as shown.
2. Close-off (differential) Pressure Rating: Valve actuator and trim shall be

furnished to provide the following minimum close-off pressure ratings:
a. Water Valves:
1) Two-way: 150% of total system (pump) head.
2) Three-way: 300% of pressure differential between ports A and B at

design flow or 100% of total system (pump) head.
b. Steam Valves: 150% of operating (inlet) pressure.
3. Water Valves:
a. Body and trim style and materials shall be per manufacturer's

recommendations for design conditions-and service shown, with equal
percentage modified ports for modulating service.
b. Sizing Criteria:
1) Two-position service: Line size, unless otherwise shown.
2) Two-way modulating service: Pressure drop shall be equal to twice

the pressure drop through heat exchanger (load), 50% of the
pressure difference between supply and return mains, or 5 psi,
whichever is greater.
3) Three-way modulating service: Pressure drop equal to twice the

pressure drop through the coil exchanger (load), 35 kPa [5 psi]
maximum.
4) Valves ½” through 2” shall be bronze body or cast brass ANSI Class

250, spring-loaded, Teflon packing, quick opening for two-position
service. Two-way valves to have replaceable composition disc, or
stainless steel ball.
5) Two ½” valves and larger shall be cast iron ANSI Class 125 with
guided plug and Teflon packing, unless otherwise shown.
c. Water valves shall fail normally open or closed as scheduled on plans, or

as follows:
1) Water zone valves – normally opened preferred.
2) Heating coils in air handlers – normally open.

3) Chilled water control valves – normally closed.
4) Other applications – as scheduled or as required by sequences of

operation.
D. Binary Temperature Devices
1. Low-voltage space thermostat shall be 24 V. bimetal-operated, snap action

type, with either adjustable or fixed anticipation heater, concealed set point
adjustment, 13°C to 30°C [55°F to 85°F] set point range, 1°C [2 ° F]
maximum differential, and vented ABS plastic cover.
2. Line-voltage space thermostat shall be bimetal-actuated, open contact or

bimetal-actuated, enclosed, snap-switch type, or equivalent solid-state type,
with heat anticipator, UL listed for electrical rating, concealed set –point.
3. Low-limit thermostats: Low-limit thermostats shall be vapor pressure type with

an element 6 m [20 ft] minimum length. Element shall respond to the lowest
temperature sensed by any 30 cm {1 ft} section. The low-limit thermostat shall
be manual (automatic) reset only.
E. Temperature sensors.
1. Temperature measurement shall be by transmitters with embedded 1.8KOhm

or 10K Ohm thermistor based sensors.
2. Duct sensors shall be rigid or averaging as shown. Averaging sensors shall

be a minimum of 1.5 m [5 feet] in length.
3. Immersion sensors shall be provided with a separable stainless steel, or

copper well. Pressure rating of well is to be consistent with the system
pressure in which it is to be installed.
4. Space sensors shall be equipped with set point adjustment, override switch,
display, and/or communication port as shown.
5. Provide matched temperature sensors for differential temperature

measurement.
F. Flow switches.
1. Flow-proving switches shall be either paddle or differential pressure type, as

shown.
2. Paddle type switches (water service only) shall be UL Listed, SPDT

snap-acting with pilot duty rating (125 VA minimum). Adjustable sensitivity
with NEMA 1 enclosure unless otherwise specified.
3. Differential pressure type switches (air or water service) shall be UL Listed,

SPDT snap-acting, pilot duty rated (125 VA minimum), NEMA 1 enclosure,
with scale range and differential suitable for intended application, or as
specified.
G. Relays.
1. Control relays shall be UL Listed plug-in type. Contact rating, configuration,

and coil voltage suitable for application.

2. Time delay relays shall be UL Listed solid-state plug-in type with adjustable
time delay. Delay shall be adjustable ±200% (minimum) from set point shown
on plans. Contact rating, configuration, and coil voltage suitable for
application. Provide NEMA 1 enclosure when not installed in local control
panels
H. Override timers.
1. Override timers shall be spring-wound line voltage UL Listed, contact rating

and configuration as required by application. Provide 0-to-6 hour calibrated
dial unless otherwise specified; suitable for flush mounting on control panel
face, located on local control panels or where shown.
I. Current transmitters.
1. AC current transmitters shall be self-powered combination split-core current

transformer type with built-in rectifier and high-gain servo amplifier with 4 to
20 mA two-wire output. Unit ranges shall be 10 A, 20 A, 50 A, 100 A, 150 A,
and 200 A full scale, internal zero and span adjustment and ±1% full-scale
accuracy at 500 ohm maximum burden.
2. Transmitter shall meet or exceed ANSI/ISA S50.1 requirements and shall be

UL/CSA Recognized.
3. Unit shall be split-core type for clamp-on installation on existing wiring.
J. Current Transformers.
1. AC current transformers shall be UL/CSA Recognized and completely

encased (except for terminals) in approved plastic material.
2. Transformers shall be available in various current ratios and shall be selected

for ±1% accuracy at 5A full scale output.
3. Transformers shall be fixed-core or split-core type for installation on new or

existing wiring, respectively.
K. Voltage transmitters.
1. AC voltage transmitters shall be self-powered single loop (two-wire) type, 0 to

10 Vdc output with zero and span adjustment.
2. Ranges shall include 200 to 130 VAC, 200 to 250 VAC, 250 to 330 VAC, and
400 to 600 VAC full-scale, adjustable, with ±1% full-scale accuracy with 500
ohm maximum burden.
3. Transmitters shall be UL/CSA Recognized at 600 VAC rating and meet or

exceed ANSI/ISA S50.1 requirements.
L. Voltage transformers
1. AC voltage transformers shall be UL/CSA Recognized, 600 VAC rated.

2. Transformers shall be suitable for ambient temperatures of 4 to 55°C [40 to
130°F1 and shall provide ±0.5% accuracy at 24 VAC and a 5 VA load.
3. Windings (except for terminals) shall be completely enclosed with metal or

plastic material.
M. Power monitors.
1. Power monitors shall be three-phase type furnished with three-phase

disconnect/shorting switch assembly, UL Listed voltage transformers and UL
Listed split-core current transformers.
2. Shall provide a selectable rate pulse output for kWh reading and a 4 to 20 mA
output for kW reading. Shall operate with 5 A current inputs with a maximum
error of ±2% at 1.0 power factor or ±2.5% at 0.5 power factor.
N. Current switches.
1. Current-operated switches shall be self-powered, solid-state with adjustable

trip current. The switches shall be selected to match the current of the
application and output requirements of the DDC system.
O. Pressure transducers.
1. Transducer shall have linear output signal. Zero and span shall be field
adjustable.
2. Transducer sensing elements shall withstand continuous operating conditions

of positive or negative pressure 50% greater than calibrated span without
damage.
3. Water pressure transducer shall have stainless steel diaphragm construction,

proof pressure of 150 psi minimum. Transducer shall be complete with 0 to
10 Vdc output, required mounting brackets, and block and bleed valves.
4. Water differential pressure transducer shall have stainless steel diaphragm

construction, proof pressure of 150 psi minimum. Over-range limit (differential
pressure) and maximum static pressure shall be 300 psi. Transducer shall be
complete with 0 to 10 Vdc output, required mounting brackets, and five-valve
manifold.
P. Differential pressure type switches (air or water service) shall be UL listed, SPDT
snap-acting, pilot duty rated (125 VA minimum), NEMA 4 enclosure, with scale
range and differential suitable for intended application, or as shown.
Q. Pressure-electric (PE Switches)
1. Shall be metal or neoprene diaphragm actuated, operating pressure rated

0-175 kPa [0-25 psig], with calibrated scale set point range of 14-125 kPa
[2-18 psig] minimum, UL listed.
2. Provide ones or two-stage switch action SPOT, DPST, or DPDT, as required
by application. Electrically rated for pilot duty service (125 VA minimum),
and/or for motor control.
3. Shall be open type (panel-mounted) or enclosed type for remote installation.

Enclosed type shall be NEMA 1 unless otherwise specified.

4. Shall have a permanent indicating gauge on each pneumatic signal line to PE
switches.
R. Electro-pneumatic (E/P) transducers.
1. Electronic/pneumatic transducer shall provide a proportional 20 to 100 kPa [3

to 15 psig] output signal from either a 4 to 20 mA or 0 to 10 VDC analog
control input.
2. E/P transducer shall be equipped with the following features:

a. Span and zero adjustments
b. Manual output adjustments.

c. Pressure gauge assembly.
d. Feedback loop control.
e. Air consumption of 0.05 L/s [0.1 scfm] at mid-range.
S. Local Control Panels
1. All indoor control cabinets shall be fully enclosed NEMA 1 construction with
[hinged door], key-lock latch, removable sub-panels. A single key shall be
common to all field panels and sub-panels.
2. Interconnections between internal and face-mounted devices pre-wired with

color-coded stranded conductors neatly installed in plastic troughs and/or
tie-wrapped. Terminals for field connections shall be UL Listed for 600 volt
service, individually identified per control/interlock drawings, with adequate
clearance for field wiring. Control terminations for field connection shall be
individually identified per control drawings.
3. Provide ON/OFF power switch with over-current protection for control power
sources to each local panel.
4. All control panels must be built in accordance with UL508A standards and be
labeled with separate UL label numbers.
2.10 ELECTRICAL CONTROL POWER AND LOW VOLTAGE WIRING
A. Provide interlock wiring between supply and exhaust fans, electrical wiring for
relays (including power feed) for temperature and pressure indication. Provide
interlock wiring between refrigeration machines, pumps and condensing equipment
as required for the specified sequence of operation and the refrigeration system
integral controller(s). Do not provide interlock wiring if a dedicated binary output has
been specified for the equipment or the sequence of operation requires
independent start/stop.
B. Provide power wiring, conduit and connections for low temperature thermostats,
high temperature thermostats, alarms, flow switches, actuating devices for
temperature, humidity, pressure and flow indication and point resets.
C. Install all wiring raceway systems complying with the requirements of the National
Electrical Code or other applicable Codes and standards of the project, Division 16

documents. All installations shall be installed in EMT, unless indicated
otherwise.
D. Network Communication Requirements
1. Wired network communication shall be via channels consisting of twisted pair

TM
installed in a 3/4” EMT. Wire type and size shall meet BACnet transceiver
requirements.
2. Care shall be taken to route the cable as far from interference generating
devices as possible.
3. When shielded wire is used, all shields shall be grounded (earth ground) at
one point only, to eliminate ground loops.
4. There shall be no power or signal wiring running in conduit with

communications wiring.
E. Input/Output Control Wiring
1. Sensor wiring shall be two-wire, three-wire, or four-wire twisted, shielded,

minimum 22 gauge.
2. Other analog inputs shall be a minimum of number 22 gauge, twisted,

shielded.
3. Binary control function wiring shall be a minimum of number 18 gauge.
4. Analog output control functions shall be a minimum of number 22 gauge,

twisted, shielded.
5. Binary input wiring shall be a minimum of number 22 gauge.
6. Thermistors shall be equipped with the manufacturers calibrated lead wiring.
7. 230V control wiring shall be #14 THHN in minimum of 3/4” conduit. Provide 4
or 20% fill extra wire in each conduit.
F. Splices: Splices in shielded cables shall consist of terminations and the use of
shielded cable couplers which maintain the integrity of the shielding. Terminations
shall be in accessible locations. Cables shall be harnessed with cable ties as
specified herein.
G. Conduit and Fittings
1. Conduit for Control Wiring, Control Cable and Transmission Cable: Electrical
metallic tubing (EMT) with compression fittings, cold rolled steel, zinc coated
or zinc-coated rigid steel with threaded connections.
2. Outlet Boxes (Dry Location): Sheradized or galvanized drawn steel suited to

each application, in general, four inches square or octagon with suitable
raised cover.
3. Outlet Boxes (Exposed to Weather): Threaded hub cast aluminum or iron

boxes with gasket device plate.

4. Pull and Junction Boxes: Size according to number, size, and position of
entering raceway as required by National Electrical Codes. Enclosure type
shall be suited to location.
5. See Division 16 specifications for conduit and fittings.
2.11 HVAC CONTROL HARDWARE IDENTIFICATION
A. Automatic Control Valve Tags
1. For valves, etc., use metal tags with a 2-inch minimum diameter, fabricated of
brass, stainless steel or aluminum. Attach tags with chain of same materials.
For lubrication instructions, use linen or heavy duty shipping tag.
2. Tag valves with identifying number and system.
3. Prepare lists of all tagged valves showing location, floor level, tag number,
use. Prepare separate lists for each system. Include copies in each
maintenance manual.
B. Wire Tags
1. All multi-conductor cables in all pull boxes and terminal strip cabinets shall be
tagged.
2. Provide wire Tags as per Division 16.
C. Conduit Tags: Provide tagging or labeling of conduit so that it is always readily

observable which conduit was installed or used in implementation of this Work.
D. Miscellaneous Equipment Identification
1. Screwed-on, engraved black lamicoid sheet with white lettering on all control
panels and remote processing panels. Lettering sizes subject to approval.
Inscription, subject to review and acceptance, indicating equipment, system
numbers, functions and switches. For panel interior wiring, input/output
modules, local control panel device identification.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that systems are ready to receive work.
B. Beginning of installation means installer accepts existing conditions.
C. The project plans shall be thoroughly examined for control device and equipment
locations, and any discrepancies, conflicts, or omissions shall be reported to the
Architect/Engineer for resolution before rough-in work is started.
D. The Contractor shall inspect the site to verify that equipment is installable as
shown, and any discrepancies, conflicts, or omissions shall be reported to the
Architect/Engineer for resolution before rough-in work is started.

E. The Contractor shall examine the drawings and specifications for other parts of the
work, and if head room or space conditions appear inadequate or if any
discrepancies occur between the plans and his work and the plans for the work of
others, he shall report such discrepancies to the Architect/Engineer and shall obtain
written instructions for any changes necessary to accommodate his work with the
work of others.
3.2 COORDINATION
A. Test and Balance
1. The contractor shall furnish all tools necessary to interface to the control
system for test and balance purposes.
2. The contractor shall provide training in the use of these tools. This training will
be planned for a minimum of 4 hours.
3. In addition, the contractor shall provide a qualified technician to assist in the

test and balance process, until the first 20 terminal units are balanced.
4. The tools used during the test and balance process will be returned at the
completion of the testing and balancing.
B. Life Safety
1. Duct smoke detectors required for air handler shutdown are supplied under
Division 16. The contractor shall interlock smoke detectors to air handlers for
shutdown as described in Sequences of Operations.
2. Smoke dampers and actuators required for duct smoke isolation are provided
under Division 15. The contractor shall interlock these dampers to the air
handlers as described in Sequences of Operations.
3. Fire/Smoke dampers and actuators required for fire rated walls are provided
under Division 15.
C. Coordination with controls specified in other sections or divisions. Other sections

and/or divisions of this specification include controls and control devices that are to
be part of or interfaced to the controls system specified in this section. These
controls shall be integrated into the system and coordinated by the contractor as
follows:
1. All communication media and equipment shall be provided as specified in

Part 2: “Communication" of this specification.
2. Each supplier of each control product is responsible for the configuration,

programming, startup and testing of that product to meet the sequences of
operation described in this section.
3.3 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
A. Install all control components in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and

recommendations and provide necessary interconnections, services, and
adjustments required for a complete and operable system.

B. Mount control panels adjacent to associated equipment on vibration-free walls or
free-standing angle iron supports. Once cabinet may accommodate more than one
system in same equipment room. Provide engraved plastic nameplates for
instruments and controls inside cabinet and engraved lamicoid nameplates on
cabinet face.
C. Install “hand/off/auto” selector switches to override automatic interlock controls

when switch is in “hand” position.
D. Install equipment, piping, wiring/conduit parallel to building lines (i.e., horizontal,

vertical, and parallel to walls) wherever possible.
E. Provide sufficient slack and flexible connections to allow for vibration of piping and
equipment.
F. Install all equipment in readily accessible location as defined by Chapter 1, Article

100, Part A of the NEC.
G. Verify integrity of all wiring to ensure continuity and freedom from shorts and
grounds.
H. All equipment, installation, and wiring shall comply with acceptable industry
specifications and standards for performance, reliability, and compatibility and be
executed in strict adherence to local codes and standard practices.
I. The DDC system shall be completely installed and ready for operation, as specified
and shown,
J. Dielectric isolation shall be provided where dissimilar metals are used for
connection and support.
K. Penetrations through and mounting holes in the building exteriors shall be made
watertight. Holes in concrete, brick, steel and wood walls shall be drilled or core
drilled with proper equipment; conduits installed through openings shall be sealed
with materials which are compatible with existing materials. Openings in fire/smoke
partitions shall be sealed with materials which meet the requirements of NFPA 70,
FIRESTOPPING.
L. The DDC system installation shall provide clearance for control-system

maintenance by maintaining access space between coils, access space to mixed-
air plenums, and other access space required to calibrate, remove, repair, or
replace control-system devices. The control-system installation shall not interfere
with the clearance requirements for mechanical and electrical system maintenance.
3.4 PROGRAMMING
A. Point Naming: System point names shall be modular in design, allowing easy
operator interface without the use of a written point index.
B. Software Programming: Provide programming for the system as per specifications

and adhere to the strategy algorithms provided. All other system programming
necessary for the operation of the system but not specified in this document shall
also be provided by the HVAC Control System Contractor. Embed into the control
program sufficient comment statements to clearly describe each section of the
program. The comment statements reflect the language used in the sequence of
operations.

3.5 WIRING
A. All control and interlock wiring shall comply with national and local electrical codes
and Division 16 of this specification. Where the requirements of this section differ
with those in Division 16, the requirements of this section shall take precedence.
B. All NEC Class 1 (line voltage) wiring shall be UL Listed in approved raceway per
NEC and Division 16 requirements.
C. All low voltage wiring shall meet NEC Class 2 requirements. (Low voltage power
circuits shall be sub-fused when required to meet Class 2 current limit.)
D. Where NEC Class 2 (current limited) wires are in concealed and accessible
locations including ceiling return air plenums, approved cables not in raceway may
be used, provided that cables are UL Listed for the intended application.
E. All wiring in mechanical, electrical or service rooms - or where subject to

mechanical damage - shall be installed in raceway at levels below 10ft.
F. Do not install Class 2 wiring in raceway containing Class 1 wiring. Boxes and
panels containing high voltage wiring and equipment may not be used for low
voltage wiring except for the purpose of interfacing the two (e.g. relays and
transformers).
G. Do not install wiring in raceway containing tubing.
H. Where Class 2 wiring is run exposed, wiring is to be run parallel along a surface or
perpendicular to it, and neatly tied at 10ft intervals.
I. Where plenum cables are used without raceway, they shall be supported from or
anchored to structural members. Cables shall not be supported by or anchored to
ductwork, electrical raceways, piping or ceiling suspension systems.
J. All wire-to-device connections shall be made at a terminal block or terminal strip in

a control panel or at a junction box.
K. All wiring within enclosures shall be neatly bundled and anchored to permit access
and prevent restriction to devices and terminals.
L. Maximum allowable voltage for control wiring shall be 120v. If only higher voltages
are available, the contractor shall provide step-down transformers.
M. All wiring shall be installed as continuous lengths, with no splices permitted

between termination points.
N. Install plenum wiring in sleeves where it passes through walls and floors. Maintain
fire rating at all penetrations.
O. Size of raceway and size and type of wire shall be the responsibility of the
contractor, in keeping with the manufacturer's recommendation and NEC
requirements, except as noted elsewhere.
P. Include one pull string in each raceway 1” or larger.
Q. Use coded conductors throughout.

R. Control and status relays are to be located in designated enclosures only. These
enclosures include packaged equipment control panel enclosures unless they also
contain Class 1 starters.
S. Conceal all raceways, except within mechanical, electrical or service rooms. Install
raceway to maintain a minimum clearance of 6” from high temperature equipment
(e.g. steam pipes or flues).
T. Secure raceways with raceway clamps fastened to the structure and spaced
according to code requirements. Raceways and pull boxes may not be hung on
flexible duct strap or tie rods. Raceways may not be run on or attached to ductwork.
U. Adhere to Division 16 requirements where raceway crosses building expansion

joints.
V. Install insulated bushings on all raceway ends and openings to enclosures. Seal top
end of all vertical raceways.
W. The contractor shall terminate all control and interlock wiring, and shall maintain
updated wiring diagrams with terminations identified at the job site.
X. Flexible metal raceways and liquid-tight, flexible metal raceways shall not exceed 3
ft in length and shall be supported at each end. Flexible metal raceway less than
3/4" electrical trade size shall not be used. In areas exposed to moisture - including
chiller and boiler rooms - liquid-tight, flexible metal raceways shall be used.
Y. Raceway must be rigidly installed, adequately supported, properly reamed at both

ends and left clean and free of obstructions. Raceway sections shall be joined with
couplings (per code). Terminations must be made with fittings at boxes, and ends
not terminating in boxes shall have bushings installed.
3.6 COMMUNICATION WIRING
A. The contractor shall adhere to the items listed for other low voltage wiring as listed
in this section.
B. All cabling shall be installed in a neat and workmanlike manner. Follow

manufacturers installation recommendations for all communication cabling.
C. Do not install communication wiring in raceway and enclosures containing Class 1

power wiring.
D. Maximum pulling, tension and bend radius for cable installation as specified by the
cable manufacturer shall not be exceeded during the installation.
E. Contractor shall verify the integrity of the entire network following the cable
installation. Use appropriate test measures for each particular cable.
F. When a cable enters or exits a building, a lightning arrestor must be installed

between the lines and ground. The lightning arrestor shall be installed according to
the manufacturers instructions.
G. All runs of communication wiring shall be unspliced length when that length is
commercially available.
H. All communication wiring shall be labeled to indicate origination and destination

data.

I. Grounding of coaxial cable shall be in accordance with NEC regulations Article on
Communication Circuits, Cable and Protector Grounding.
3.7 SENSORS
A. Install sensors in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.
B. Mount sensors rigidly and adequately for the environment within which the sensor
operates.
C. All wires attached to sensors shall be air sealed in their raceways or in the wall to
stop air transmitted from other areas affecting sensor readings.
D. Sensors used in mixing plenums and where specified in the sequence of operations
shall be of the averaging type. Averaging sensors shall be installed in a serpentine
manner vertically across duct. Each bend shall be supported with a capillary clip.
E. Low limit sensors used in coil discharge shall be installed in a serpentine manner
horizontally across duct. Each bend shall be supported with a capillary clip. Provide
1ft of sensing element for each square ft of coil area.
F. All pipe mounted temperature sensors shall be installed in wells. Install all liquid
temperature sensors with heat-conducting fluid in thermal wells.
G. Install outdoor air temperature sensors on north wall, complete with sun shield at
designated location.
H. Differential air static pressure
1. Supply duct static pressure: Pipe the high pressure tap to the duct using a
pilot tube. Pipe the low pressure port to a tee in the high pressure tap tubing
of the corresponding building static pressure sensor (if applicable) or to the
location of the duct high pressure tap and leave open to the plenum.
2. Return duct static pressure: Pipe the high pressure tap to the duct using a
pilot tube. Pipe the low pressure port to a tee in the low pressure tap tubing of
the corresponding building static pressure sensor.
3. Building static pressure: Pipe the low pressure port of the pressure sensor to
the static pressure port located on the outside of the building at roof level to
serve as a common outdoor reference. Pipe the high pressure port to a
location behind a thermostat cover.
4. The piping to pressure ports on all pressure transducers shall contain a

capped test port located adjacent to the transducer.
5. All pressure transducers other than those controlling VAV boxes shall be
located in field device panels, not on the equipment monitored or on
ductwork. Mount transducers in a location accessible for service without the
use of ladders or special equipment.
6. All air and water differential pressure sensors shall have gauge tees mounted
adjacent to all taps. Water gauges shall also have shutoff valves installed
before the tee.

3.8 ACTUATORS
A. Mount and link control damper actuators per manufacturer's instructions.
1. Check operation of damper/actuator combination to confirm that actuator

modulates damper smoothly throughout stroke to both open and closed
positions.
2. Provide all mounting hardware and linkages for actuator installation.
B. Electric/Electronic
1. Dampers: Actuators shall be direct-mounted on damper shaft or jackshaft

unless shown as a linkage installation. Actuators shall be mounted following
manufacturer's recommendations.
2. Valves, Actuators shall be connected to valves with adapters approved by the

actuator manufacturer. Actuators and adapters shall be mounted following
the actuator manufacturer's recommendations.
3.9 CONTROLLERS
A. Provide a minimum of one separate controller for each AHU or other HVAC system.
Multiple DDC controllers may control one system provided that all points associated
with individual control loops are assigned to the same DDC controller. Points used
for control loop reset such as outside air or space temperature are exempt from this
requirement.
B. Building Controllers and Custom Application Controllers shall be selected to provide

a minimum of 10% spare I/O point capacity for each point type found at each
location. If input points are not universal, 10% of each type is required. If outputs
are not universal, 10% of each type is required. A minimum of one spare is required
for each type of point used.
1. Future use of spare capacity shall require providing the field device, field
wiring, point database definition, and custom software. No additional
controller boards or point modules shall be required to implement use of
these spare points.
3.10 CONTROL DAMPERS
A. Install dampers in accordance with manufacturer's instructions to operate and to

obtain leakage rates specified herein. Adjust the damper linkage such that the
damper closes before the actuator is fully closed to assure tight shutoff of the
damper
B. Blank-off and seal around dampers and between dampers and sleeves or frames to
eliminate air bypass.
C. For outdoor air damper assemblies, stage the opening of each section to prevent
stratification and poor mixing of outside and return air.
D. Maximum damper area per motor: 15 square feet.
3.11 CONTROL VALVES

A. Install in an accessible location, with room for actuator removal and service. Adjust
the actuator to provide tight shutoff. Provide valve stem travel indicator and adjust
to indicate proper travel. Where butterfly valves are used, permanently mark the
end of the valve shaft to indicate valve position. Provide high pressure air if
necessary for valve actuator.
3.12 IDENTIFICATION OF HARDWARE AND WIRING
A. All wiring and cabling, including that within factory-fabricated panels, shall be
labeled at each end within 2" of termination with a cable identifier and other
descriptive information.
B. Permanently label or code each point of field terminal strips to show the instrument
or item served.
C. Identify control panels with minimum 1 cm letters on laminated plastic nameplates.
D. Identify all other control components with permanent labels. Identifiers shall match
record documents. All plug-in components shall be labeled such that removal of
the component does not remove the label.
E. Identify room sensors relating to terminal box or valves with nameplates.
3.13 PROTECTION
A. The Contractor shall protect all work and material from damage by his/her work or
workers, and shall be liable for all damage thus caused.
B. The Contractor shall be responsible for his/her work and equipment until finally
inspected, tested, and accepted. The Contractor shall protect his/her work against
theft or damage, and shall carefully store material and equipment received on-site
that is not immediately installed. The Contractor shall close all open ends of work
with temporary covers or plugs during storage and construction to prevent entry of
foreign objects.
A. All work, materials and equipment shall comply with the rules and regulations of
applicable local, state, and federal codes and ordinances as identified in Part 1 of
this Section.
B. Contractor shall continually monitor the field installation for code compliance and
quality of workmanship. All visible piping and/or wiring runs shall be installed
parallel to building lines and properly supported.
C. Contractor shall arrange for field inspections by local and/or state authorities having
jurisdiction over the work.
3.15 CONTROL SYSTEM CHECKOUT AND TESTING
A. Startup Testing: All testing listed in this article shall be performed by the Contractor
and shall make up part of the necessary verification of an operating control system.
This testing shall be completed before the Owners Representative is notified of the
system demonstration.

1. The Contractor shall furnish all labor and test apparatus required to calibrate
and prepare for service of all instruments, controls, and accessory equipment
furnished under this specification.
2. Verify that all control wiring is properly connected and free of all shorts and
ground faults. Verify that terminations are tight.
3. Enable the control systems and verify calibration of all input devices
individually. Perform calibration procedures per manufacturers'
recommendations.
4. Verify that all binary output devices (relays, solenoid valves, two-position
actuators and control valves, magnetic starters, etc.) operate properly and
that the normal positions are correct.
5. Verify that all analog output devices (I/Ps, actuators, etc.) are functional, that
start and span are correct, and that direction and normal positions are
correct. The Contractor shall check all control valves and automatic dampers
to ensure proper action and closure. The Contractor shall make any
necessary adjustments to valve stem and damper blade travel.
6. Verify that the system operation adheres to the Sequences of Operation.

Simulate and observe all modes of operation by overriding and varying inputs
and schedules. Tune all DDC loops and optimum Start/Stop routines.
7. Alarms and Interlocks:
a. Check each alarm separately by including an appropriate signal at a

value that will trip the alarm.
b. Interlocks shall be tripped using field contacts to check the logic, as well
as to ensure that the fail-safe condition for all actuators is in the proper
direction.
c. Interlock actions shall be tested by simulating alarm conditions to check

the initiating value of the variable and interlock action.
3.16 CONTROL SYSTEM DEMONSTRATION AND ACCEPTANCE
A. Demonstration
1. Prior to acceptance, the control system shall undergo a series of performance

tests to verify operation and compliance with this specification. These tests
shall occur after the Contractor has completed the installation, started up the
system, and performed its own tests.
2. A test procedure plan shall be submitted a minimum of two weeks prior to

acceptance test for review and comment by the engineer.
3.17 TRAINING
A. Provide minimum of 40 hours of on-site training to the Owner’s staff.
B. The training shall be in three sessions as follows:
1. Initial Training: One-day session (8 hours) after system is started up and at

least one week before first acceptance test. Manual shall have been

submitted at least two weeks prior to training so that the owners’ personnel
can start to familiarize themselves with the system before classroom
instruction begins.
2. First Follow-up Training: Two days (16 hours total) approximately two weeks
after initial training, and before Formal Acceptance. These sessions will deal
with more advanced topics and answer questions.
3. Warranty Follow-up: Two days (16 hours total) in no less than 4-hour
increments, to be scheduled at the request of the owner during the one-year
warranty period. These sessions shall cover topics as requested by the
owner such as: how to add additional points, create and gather data for
trends, graphic screen generation, or modification of control routines.
END OF SECTION

SECTION 15990
TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1. DESCRIPTION:
A. This Section specifies the requirements and procedures of mechanical systems

testing, adjusting and balancing. Requirements include measurement and
establishment of the fluid quantities of the mechanical systems as required to
meet design specifications, recording and reporting the results.
Test, adjust and balance the following mechanical systems:
1. Hydronic system.
2. Supply air system.
3. Return air system.
4. Exhaust air system.
5. Verify temperature control system operation.
Test systems for proper sound and vibration levels.
1.2. REFERENCES:
A. NEBB - National Environmental Balancing Bureau
NEBB Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting and Balancing of

Environmental Systems.
B. ASHRAE - American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning

Engineers, Inc.
ASHRAE ASHRAE Handbook, 2012 Systems Volume, Chapter 37, Testing,

Adjusting and Balancing.
C. AABC - Associated Air Balancing Council
AABC National Standards for Total System Balance, 4th Edition, 2002.
1.3. SUBMITTALS:
A. Engineers and Technicians Data: Submit proof that the Test and Balance
Engineer assigned to supervise the procedures and the technicians proposed to
perform the procedures meet the qualifications specified below.
B. Procedures and Agenda: Submit a synopsis of the testing, adjusting, and

balancing procedures and agenda proposed to be used for this project.
15990-1 Testing & Balancing System

C. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance and operating data that include how to
test, adjust, and balance the building systems.
D. Sample Forms: Submit sample forms, if other than those standard forms
prepared by the NEBB are proposed.
E. Certified Reports: Submit testing, adjusting and balancing reports bearing the
seal and signature of the Test and Balance Engineer. The reports shall be
certified proof that the systems have been tested, adjusted and balanced in
accordance with the referenced Standards; are an accurate representation of how
the systems have been installed; are a true representation of how the systems are
operating at the completion of the testing, adjusting, and balancing procedures;
and are an accurate record of all final quantities measured, to establish normal
operating values of the systems. Follow the procedures and format specified
below:
1. Draft Reports: Upon completion of testing, adjusting, and balancing

procedures, prepare draft reports on the approved forms. Draft reports
may be hand written, but must be completed, factual, accurate, and
legible. Organize and format draft reports in the same manner specified for
the final reports. Submit 2 complete sets of draft reports. Only 1 complete
set of draft reports will be returned.
2. Final Report: Upon verification and approval of draft reports, prepare final
reports, type written, and organized and formatted as specified below.
Submit 2 complete sets of final reports.
3. Report Format: Report forms shall be those standard forms prepared by

the referenced standard for each respective item and system to be tested,
adjusted, and balanced. Bind report forms complete with schematic
systems diagrams and other data in reinforced, vinyl, three-ring binders.
Provide binding edge labels with the project identification and a title
descriptive of the contents.
Divide the contents of the binder into the below listed divisions, separated
by divider tabs:
- General Information and Summary.

- Hydronic System.
- Air Systems.
- Temperature Control Systems.
- Special Systems.
- Sound and Vibration Systems.
F. Report Contents: Provide the following minimum information, forms and data:
1. General Information and Summary: Inside cover sheet to identify testing

and adjusting Engineer and Project. Include addresses, and contact
names and telephone numbers. Also include a certification sheet
containing the seal and name address, telephone number, and signature
of the Certified Test and Balance Engineer. Include in this division a listing
of the instrumentations used for the procedures along with the proof of
calibration.

2. The remainder of the report shall contain the appropriate forms containing
as a minimum, the information indicated on the standard report forms
prepared by the NEBB, for each respective item and system. Prepare a
schematic diagram for each item of equipment and system to accompany
each respective report form.
G. Calibration Reports: Submit proof that all required instrumentation has been
calibrated to tolerances specified in the referenced Standards, within a period of
six months prior to starting the project.
1.4. QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A. Test and Balance Agency's Qualifications: Testing and balancing shall be carried
out by an independent testing and balancing agency approved by the Engineer
and having at least 5 years of successful testing, adjusting, and balancing
experience on projects with testing and balancing requirements similar to those
required for this project.
B. Pre-Balancing Conference: Prior to beginning of the testing, adjusting, and

balancing procedures, schedule and conduct a conference with the Engineer and
representatives of independent testing and balancing agency and the installers of
the mechanical systems. The objective of the conference is final coordination and
verification of system operation and readiness for testing, adjusting, and
balancing.
1.5. PROJECT CONDITIONS:
A. Systems Operation: Systems shall be fully operational prior to beginning

procedures.
1.6. SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING:
A. Test, adjust and balance the air systems before refrigerant systems.
B. Test, adjust and balance air conditioning systems during summer season and
heating systems during winter season, including at least a period of operation at
o
outside conditions within 5 F wet bulb temperature of maximum summer design
o
condition and within 10 F dry bulb temperature of minimum winter design condition
also take final temperature readings during seasonal operation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
Not applicable.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
Before operating the system and performing the preliminary procedures obtain drawings,
specifications and details of Building Management System and Controls and become
thoroughly acquainted with them.

3.1 PRELIMINARY PROCEDURES FOR HYDRONIC SYSTEM BALANCING:
Before operating the system perform the following steps:
A. Open valves to full open position and close coil bypass valves.
B. Remove and clean all strainers.
C. Examine hydronic system and determine if water has been treated and cleaned.
D. Check pump rotation.
E. Clean and set automatic fill valves for the required system pressure.
F. Check the expansion tanks to determine that they are not air-bound and that
system is completely full of water.
G. Check air vents at high points of systems and determine if all are installed and
operating freely in case of automatic type or bleed air completely in case of
manual type.
H. Set temperature controls so that all coils shall be calling for full flow.
I. Check operation of automatic bypass valves.
J. Check and set operating temperatures of the chillers to the design requirements.
K. Lubricate all motors and bearings.
3.2 PRELIMINARY PROCEDURES FOR AIR SYSTEM BALANCING:
Before operating the system perform the following steps:
A. Walk the system from the system air handling equipment to terminal units to
determine variations of installation from design.
B. Check filters for cleanliness.
C. Check dampers (both volume and fire) for correct and locked position, and
temperature control for completeness of installation before starting fans.
D. Prepare report test sheets for both fans and outlets. Obtain manufacturer's outlet
factors and recommended procedures for testing. Prepare a summation of
required outlet volumes to permit a cross-check with required fan volumes.
E. Determine best locations in main and branch ductwork for most accurate duct
traverses.
F. Place outlet dampers in the full open position.
G. Prepare schematic diagrams of system "as-built" ductwork and piping layouts to

facilitate reporting.
H. Lubricate all motors and bearings.
I. Check fan belt tension.

J. Check fan rotation.
3.3 MEASUREMENTS:
A. Provide all required instrumentation to obtain proper measurements, calibrated to

the tolerances specified in the referenced Standards. Instruments shall be properly
maintained and protected against damage.
B. Provide instruments meeting the specifications of the referenced Standards.
C. Use only those instruments which have the maximum field measuring accuracy
and are best suited to the function being measured.
D. Apply instrument as recommended by the manufacturer.
E. Use instruments with minimum scale and maximum subdivisions and with scale
ranges proper for the value being measured.
F. When averaging values, take a sufficient quantity of readings which will result in a
repeatability error of less than 5 percent. When measuring a single point, repeat
readings until 2 consecutive identical values are obtained.
G. Take all reading with the eye at the level of the indicated value to prevent parallax.
H. Use pulsation dampeners where necessary to eliminate error involved in

estimating average of rapidly fluctuation readings.
I. Take measurements in the system where best suited to the task.
3.4 PERFORMING TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING:
A. Perform testing and balancing procedures on each system identified, in

accordance with the detailed procedures outlined in the referenced Standards.
B. Cut insulation, ductwork and piping for installation of test probes to the minimum
extent necessary to allow adequate performance of procedures.
C. Patch insulation, ductwork and housings, using materials identical to those

removed.
D. Seal ducts and piping and test for and repair leaks.
E. Seal insulation to re-establish integrity of the vapor barrier.
F. Mark equipment settings, including damper control positions, valve indicators, fan
speed control levers, and similar controls and devices, to show final settings. Mark
with paint or other suitable, permanent identification materials.
G. Retest, adjust and balance systems subsequent to significant system

modifications, and resubmit test results.

3.5 TESTING FOR SOUND AND VIBRATION:
A. Test and adjust mechanical systems for sound and vibration in accordance with
the detailed instructions of the referenced Standards.
3.6 RECORD AND REPORT DATA:
A. Record all data obtained during testing, adjusting, and balancing in accordance
with, and on the forms recommended by the referenced Standards, and as
approved on the sample report forms.
B. Prepare report of recommendations for correcting unsatisfactory mechanical

performances when system cannot be successfully balanced.
3.7 DEMONSTRATION:
A. Training:
1. Train Owner's maintenance personnel on the troubleshooting procedures

and testing, adjusting, and balancing procedures. Review with Owner's
personnel, the information contained in the Operating and Maintenance
Data specified in Division 1 and Section 15050.
2. Schedule training through the Engineer with at least 7 days prior notice.
END OF SECTION

Csi 2018 Mechanical Division 15

Încărcat de

Informații document

Drepturi de autor

Formate disponibile

Partajați acest document

Partajați sau inserați document

Opțiuni de partajare

Vi se pare util acest document?

Este necorespunzător acest conținut?

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

Csi 2018 Mechanical Division 15

Încărcat de

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

SECTION 15050

BASIC PIPING MATERIALS AND METHODS

A. SASO - Saudi Arabian Standards Organization:

SASO 14 Pipes for Potable Water of Unplasticized Plastic

SASO 15 Method of Testing of Pipes for Potable Water of

SASO 39 Mechanical testing of welded joints

SASO 1397 Unplasticized polyvinyl chloride (UPVC) pipe fittings

SASO 1400 Methods of test for unplasticized polyvinyl chloride

SASO 1011 Black and hot-dipped galvanized steel pipes suitable

SASO 1012 Test methods of welded plain-end steel tubes and

B. ASTM - American Society for Testing and Materials

ASTM A 53 Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black, and Hot-Dipped,

ASTM A 181 Carbon Steel Forgings for General Purpose Piping.

ASTM B 32 Specification for Solder Metal.

ASTM D 1784 Rigid Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Compounds and

15050-1 Basic Piping Materials

ASTM D 2000 Rubber Products in Automotive Applications.

ASTM D 2564 Solvent Cement for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic

ASTM D 2665 Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Drain, Waste and

ASTM D 2846 Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Hot-

ASTM F 438 Socket-Type Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC)

ASTM F 439 Socket-Type Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC)

ASTM F 441 Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Pipe

ASTM F 493 Solvent Cements for Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride)

C. ASME - American Society of Mechanical Engineers

ASME A40.8 National Plumbing Code.

SECTION IX Welded and Brazing and Pressure Vessel qualifications

A. Shop Drawings: Submit for fabricated specialties, indicating details of fabrication,

B. Product Data and Samples: Submit manufacturer's technical product data,

1.4 TRANSPORTATION, HANDLING AND STORAGE:

Refer to individual Section of the Specifications.

15050-2 Basic Piping Materials

Refer to individual Section of the Specifications.

1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE:

For further requirements, refer to individual Section of the Specifications.

2.1 PIPES AND FITTINGS:

A. Refer to the individual piping system Sections of DIVISION 15 for specifications on

2.2 JOINING MATERIALS:

C. Soldering Materials: Refer to individual piping system specifications for solder

A. Refer to Section 15100 - VALVES.

2.4 PIPING SPECIALTIES:

A. General: Provide factory-fabricated piping specialties recommended by

15050-3 Basic Piping Materials

2. Unions in copper piping shall be cast bronze, female pattern, brass to

3. Plastic Pipe Sleeves: Schedule 80 PVC plastic pipe.

H. Mechanical Sleeve Seals: Modular mechanical type, consisting of interlocking

15050-4 Basic Piping Materials

3.1 GENERAL PIPING AND INSTALLATIONS:

A. General: Installation instructions contained in this Section pertain to all systems,

3. Install piping at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal or bent

8. Water piping shall be securely anchored to insure proper direction of

9. Anchor piping to ensure proper direction of expansion and contraction. Install

15050-5 Basic Piping Materials

12. Piping shall be cut accurately to measurements established at the site,

15. Provide necessary temporary connections, valves, oversize flushing

15050-6 Basic Piping Materials

E. Valves and Specialties:

8. Connect dissimilar piping materials using dielectric unions or insulating

F. Hangers and Supports:

1. Refer to Section 15140 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS.

15050-7 Basic Piping Materials

15050-8 Basic Piping Materials

A. ANSI - American National Standards Institute

ANSI B2.1 Pipe Threads.